Matrix Cosine System Manual En

COSINESystem Manual

Version 5June 2008

Magyarországon a Matrix Telecom Ltd. képviselete,Matrix termékek importőre, kizárólagos forgalmazója:

1095 Budapest, Mester u. 34.Telefon: *218-5542, 215-9771, 215-7550, 216-7017, 216-7018

Fax: 218-5542 Mobil: 30 940-1970, 20 949-2688E-mail: [email protected] Web: www.delton.hu

www.matrixtelecom.hu

Mailto:[email protected]




www.MatrixTeleSol.com

www.MatrixTeleSol.com

Documentation InformationThis is a general documentation and it covers many models with different specifications. A particular product may not support all the features and facilities described in the documentation.

Matrix Telecom reserves the right to revise information in this publication for any reason without prior notice. Information in this documentation may change from time to time. Matrix Telecom makes no warranties with respect to this documentation and disclaims any implied warranties. While every precaution has been taken in preparation of this manual, Matrix Telecom assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein.

Matrix Telecom reserves the right without prior notice to make changes in design or components of the equipment as engineering and manufacturing may warrant.

Neither Matrix Telecom nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third parties for damages, losses, costs or expenses incurred by purchaser or third parties as a result of: accident, misuse or abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs or alterations to this product or failure to strictly comply with Matrix Telecom’s operating and maintenance instructions.

All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of Matrix Telecom.

June 11, 2008

Contents

Section 1: Introduction........................................................................................................................................... 9

Packing List............................................................................................................................................................. 11Warranty Statement ................................................................................................................................................ 12Introducing the System ........................................................................................................................................... 13Configuring the System........................................................................................................................................... 18Protecting the System............................................................................................................................................. 26Installing the System............................................................................................................................................... 29Getting Started........................................................................................................................................................ 34

Section 2: Features and Facilities ....................................................................................................................... 37

Abbreviated Dialing................................................................................................................................................. 39Access Codes ......................................................................................................................................................... 42Alarms..................................................................................................................................................................... 48Allowed List and Denied List ................................................................................................................................... 52Alternate Number Dialing ........................................................................................................................................ 56Answer Signaling on SLT Port ................................................................................................................................ 58Answer Supervision on Trunk Port.......................................................................................................................... 59Auto Call Back (ACB).............................................................................................................................................. 61Auto Redial.............................................................................................................................................................. 63AutoAttendant ......................................................................................................................................................... 67Automated Control Applications.............................................................................................................................. 68Background Music (BGM)....................................................................................................................................... 72Barge-In .................................................................................................................................................................. 73Battery Back-Up...................................................................................................................................................... 74Behind the PBX Applications .................................................................................................................................. 75Boss Ring................................................................................................................................................................ 77Call Disconnect Tone (CDT) ................................................................................................................................... 78Call Duration Control............................................................................................................................................... 83Call Follow Me......................................................................................................................................................... 87Call Forward............................................................................................................................................................ 88Call Park.................................................................................................................................................................. 92Call Pick Up............................................................................................................................................................. 93Call Progress Tones................................................................................................................................................ 95Call Splitting ............................................................................................................................................................ 99Call Taping............................................................................................................................................................ 101Call Transfer.......................................................................................................................................................... 103Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)............................................................................................... 106Calling Line Identification Based Routing.............................................................................................................. 109Cancel Station Features........................................................................................................................................ 111Class of Service (COS) ......................................................................................................................................... 112Communication Port.............................................................................................................................................. 119Conference-3 Party ............................................................................................................................................... 120Conference-Multi Party ......................................................................................................................................... 122Conflict Dialing ...................................................................................................................................................... 129Continued Dialing.................................................................................................................................................. 130Conversation Recording........................................................................................................................................ 131Daylight Saving Time ............................................................................................................................................ 132Default Settings..................................................................................................................................................... 134Department Call .................................................................................................................................................... 136Dial by Name Using DID ....................................................................................................................................... 138Dial by Name Using Abbreviated Dialing .............................................................................................................. 141Digital Input Port (DIP) .......................................................................................................................................... 142Digital Key Phone-Operation................................................................................................................................. 144Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming .......................................................................................................... 156Digital Output Port (DOP)...................................................................................................................................... 160Direct Inward Dialing (DID) ................................................................................................................................... 161Direct Inward System Access (DISA).................................................................................................................... 166

Disconnect Signaling on SLT Port.........................................................................................................................175Disconnect Supervision on Trunk Port ..................................................................................................................177Distinctive Rings ....................................................................................................................................................179Do Not Disturb (DND)............................................................................................................................................181Dynamic Lock ........................................................................................................................................................184Emergency Detection and Reporting.....................................................................................................................185Emergency Dialing ................................................................................................................................................186External Call Forward (ECF) .................................................................................................................................187External Music .......................................................................................................................................................188Fax Homing ...........................................................................................................................................................189Flash Timer............................................................................................................................................................193Flexible Numbers...................................................................................................................................................195Forced Answer ......................................................................................................................................................197Hold .......................................................................................................................................................................198Hotdesk .................................................................................................................................................................199Hotline ...................................................................................................................................................................201Interrupt Request...................................................................................................................................................203ISDN-An Introduction.............................................................................................................................................204ISDN-BRI...............................................................................................................................................................208Last Caller Recall ..................................................................................................................................................214Last Five Calls Trace.............................................................................................................................................215Last Number Redial...............................................................................................................................................216Least Cost Routing-An Introduction.......................................................................................................................217Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection .............................................................................................................218Least Cost Routing-Destination and Time Based..................................................................................................220Least Cost Routing-Number Based.......................................................................................................................223Least Cost Routing-Time Based............................................................................................................................226Live Call Screening................................................................................................................................................229Live Call Supervision .............................................................................................................................................230Message Paging....................................................................................................................................................231Message Wait........................................................................................................................................................233Music on Hold........................................................................................................................................................234Mute.......................................................................................................................................................................235Name Programming ..............................................................................................................................................236Operator ................................................................................................................................................................237Override.................................................................................................................................................................239Paging ...................................................................................................................................................................240Power Down Mode ................................................................................................................................................243Printer Port ............................................................................................................................................................244Priority ...................................................................................................................................................................245Privacy...................................................................................................................................................................247Programming the System ......................................................................................................................................250Programming Using Jeeves ..................................................................................................................................252Programming using Phone Wizard........................................................................................................................254Raid .......................................................................................................................................................................260Real Time Clock ....................................................................................................................................................261Region Code..........................................................................................................................................................262Remote Programming ...........................................................................................................................................263Room Monitor ........................................................................................................................................................265Scheduled Dialing..................................................................................................................................................266Security Dialer .......................................................................................................................................................268Selective Trunk Access .........................................................................................................................................273SLT Parameters ....................................................................................................................................................274Software Port and Hardware ID.............................................................................................................................276Station Group ........................................................................................................................................................279Station Message Detail Recording ........................................................................................................................284Station Message Detail Recording-Incoming ........................................................................................................285Station Message Detail Recording-Outgoing ........................................................................................................290System Administrator (SA) Mode ..........................................................................................................................296System Engineer (SE) Mode .................................................................................................................................297

System Parameters............................................................................................................................................... 298Time Tables .......................................................................................................................................................... 300Toll Control............................................................................................................................................................ 305Trunk Access Groups............................................................................................................................................ 311Trunk Landing Group ............................................................................................................................................ 317Trunk Parameters ................................................................................................................................................. 320Trunk Reservation................................................................................................................................................. 324User Absent/Present ............................................................................................................................................. 325User Password...................................................................................................................................................... 326Voice Mail System (VMS) Gateway ...................................................................................................................... 327Voice Message Applications ................................................................................................................................. 328Walk-In Class of Service ....................................................................................................................................... 333

Section 3: Appendices........................................................................................................................................ 335

Appendix A: Technical Specifications ................................................................................................................... 337Appendix B: Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................ 340Appendix D: Features at a Glance........................................................................................................................ 343Appendix E: System Commands .......................................................................................................................... 347Appendix F: Regulatory Information...................................................................................................................... 360

Glossary............................................................................................................................................................... 362

Index..................................................................................................................................................................... 363

Matrix

WelcomeWelcome to the world of telecom solutions from Matrix and thanks for purchasing a Matrix product.We want you to get the maximum performance from our product. If you run into technical difficulties, we are here to help. But please consult this system manual first.

If you still can’t find the answer, gather all the information or questions that apply to your problem and, with the product close to you, call your dealer. Matrix dealers are trained and ready to give you the support you need to get the most from your Matrix product. In fact, most problems reported are minor and can be easily solved over the phone.

In addition, technical consultation is available from Matrix engineers every business day. We are always ready to give advice on application requirements or specific information on installation and operation of our products.

This a common system manual for the users of Cosine-64P and Cosine-32P. The range of variables mentioned, solved examples and the reports attached in the system manual are with reference to Cosine-64P. The table below lists the ranges of Cosine-64P and Cosine-32P variants:

Also note that, this also is a common system manual for all the customers worldwide. Few feature access codes are region dependent and hence the use of system is subject to the settings (region selection) made in the system.

The feature access codes used in this system manual are referenced to the default region code: Asia. The user is requested to change the region code explicitly first and then use the feature access codes depending on the region where the system is installed. For e.g. if the region code is selected as North America/South America, then the operator is accessed by dialing ‘0’. But a user who has selected region code as Asia dials ‘9’ to reach the operator. The equivalent feature access codes and default settings for different regions are listed in topics ‘Default Settings’ and ‘Region Code’.

The system manual is divided in following sections: Section 1: IntroductionSection 2: Features and FacilitiesSection 3: Appendices

We suggest the first time users to read this system manual in the following sequence.• Section 1• Section 2 (in the hierarchy given below)

• Default Settings 134• Region Code 262• Flexible Numbers 195• Call Progress Tones 95• Distinctive Rings 179• Selective Trunk Access 273• Call Pick Up 93• Call Transfer 103• Last Number Redial 216• Abbreviated Dialing 39• Call Splitting 99• Hold 198• Programming the System 250• Answer Signaling on SLT Port 58• Answer Supervision on Trunk Port 59• Call Disconnect Tone (CDT) 78• Dial by Name Using Abbreviated Dialing 141• Disconnect Signaling on SLT Port 175 • Disconnect Supervision on Trunk Port 177

Parameters Cosine-64P Cosine-32PSLT Port 01 to 32 01 to 12DKP Port 1 to 8 1 to 3Trunks 01 to 08 01 to 04BRI 09 to 12 05 to 06Trunk Landing Group 1 to 8 1 to 8Trunk Access Group 1 to 8 1 to 8

Cosine V5 System Manual 7

Matrix

Please NoteThe words “Extension”, “Station”, “Ports” are used interchangeably in the manual. The word “User” is used to refer to person using system or station (SLT, DKP) in the manual. The word “Cosine” and the “System” are used interchangeably in the manual.

8 Cosine V5 System Manual

Section 1: Introduction

Matrix


Packing ListThe ideal sales package of the product contains the following items:

In case of short supply, please contact the source from where you have purchased the system.• The additional modules/cards purchased for expanding the configuration are packed separately.

=X=X=

Cosine-64PItem QuantityCosine-64 1Power Cord Black MC-4 1MDF Cable 3System Manual 1User’s Guide 1Quick Start 16Fuse (F1) 3.15 Amp., Slow Blow 1Fuse (F2) 3.5 Amp., Fast Blow 1Battery Link with Lugs 1Battery Cable 1Screw Grip 2Screw M 8x30 2Warranty Card Set 1Support Card 1Telephone Message Pad 1Telephone Personality Guide 1Matrix Logo Small 8Wall Mounting Template 1Cosine CD (Jeeves Software, System Manual, User’s Guide, Quick Start, EON45/EonSoft User’s Guide, EON42/EON47 User’s Guide and Voice Messages)

1

Cosine-32PItem QuantityCosine-32 1Power Cord Black MC-4 1System Manaul 1User’s Guide 1Quick Start 16Fuse (F1 5x20) 2 Amp., Slow Blow 1Fuse (F2 5x20) 2 Amp., Fast Blow 1Battery Link with Lugs 1Battery Cable 1Screw Grip 2Screw M 7x30 2Warranty Card Set 1Support Card 1Telephone Message Pad 1Telephone Personality Guide 1Wall Mounting Template 1Matrix Logo Small 8Cosine CD (Jeeves Software, System Manual, User’s Guide, Quick Start, EON45/EonSoft User’s Guide, EON42/EON47 User’s Guide and Voice Messages)

1

Matrix


Warranty StatementMatrix warrants to its consumer purchaser any of its products to be free of defects in material, workmanship and performance for a period of 15 months from date of manufacturing or 12 months from the date of installation which everis earlier.

During this warranty period, Matrix will at its option, repair or replace the product at no additional charge if the product is found to have manufacturing defect. Any replacement product or part/s may be furnished on an exchange basis, which shall be new or like-new, provided that it has functionality at least equal to that of the product, being replaced. All replacement parts and products will be the property of Matrix. Parts repaired or replaced will be under warranty throughout the remainder of the original warranty period only.

This limited warranty does not apply to:1. Products that have been subjected to abuse, accident, natural disaster, misuse, modification, tampering, faulty

installation, lack of reasonable care, repair or service in any way that is not contemplated in the documentation for the product or if the model or serial number has been altered, tampered with, defaced or removed.

2. Products which have been damaged by lightning storms, water or power surges or which have been neglected, altered, used for a purpose other than the one for which they were manufactured, repaired by customer or any party without Matrix’s written authorization or used in any manner inconsistent with Matrix’s instructions.

3. Products received improperly packed or physically damaged. 4. Products damaged due to operation of product outside the products’ specifications or use without designated

protections.

Warranty valid only if:• Primary protection on all the ports provided.• Mains supply is within limit and protected.• Environment conditions are maintained as per the product specifications.

Warranty Card:• When the product is installed, please return the warranty card with:

• Date, signature and stamp of the customer• Date, signature and stamp of the channel partner

• Matrix assumes that the customer agrees with the warranty terms even when the warranty card is not signed and returned as suggested.

The Purchaser shall have to bear shipping charges for sending product to Matrix for testing/rectification. The product shall be shipped to the Purchaser at no-charge if the material is found to be under warranty. The Purchaser shall have to either insure the product or assume liability for loss or damage during transit.

Matrix reserves the right to waive off or make any changes in its warranty policy without giving any notice.If Matrix is unable to repair or replace, as applicable, a defective product which is covered by Matrix warranty, Matrix shall, within a reasonable time after being notified of the defect, refund the purchase price of the product provided the consumer/purchaser returns the product to Matrix.

In no event will Matrix be liable for any damages including lost profits, lost business, lost savings, downtime or delay, labor, repair or material cost, injury to person, property or other incidental or consequential damages arising out of use of or inability to use such product, even if Matrix has been advised of the possibility of such damages or losses or for any claim by any other party.

Except for the obligations specifically set forth in this Warranty Policy Statement, in no event shall Matrix be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract or any other legal theory and where advised of the possibility of such damages.

Neither Matrix nor any of its distributors, dealers or sub-dealers makes any other warranty of any kind, whether expressed or implied, with respect to Matrix products. Matrix and its distributors, dealers or sub-dealers specifically disclaim the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

This warranty is not transferable and applies only to the original consumer purchaser of the Product. Warranty shall be void if the warranty card is not completed and registered with Matrix within 30 days of installation.

All legal course of action subjected to Vadodara (Gujarat, India) Jurisdiction only.

Matrix

Introducing the System• The Matrix Cosine is a PBX (switching equipment) built on ISDN switching platform and CPLD based design. The

Cosine offers efficient call management and reduction of communication cost. It is designed to cater to the needs of mid-sized organizations. The Cosine houses a digital switch and has a dedicated DTMF circuit for each port. This makes Cosine a 100% non-blocking switch. Cosine is designed to work efficiently in worldwide markets.

• The Matrix offers two variants of Cosine viz. Cosine-64P and Cosine-32P.

Cosine-64PThe Cosine-64P is a 64 port PBX with ISDN connectivity and additional interfaces like Communication port, Printer port, DOP, Paging port and an External Music port, Digital Input Port. The Cosine-64P is built around 96 port digital CMOS switch with user ports capacity that can be extended upto 52 ports. The Cosine is shown in the figure given below:


Matrix

Cosine-32PThe Cosine-32P is a 32 port PBX with ISDN connectivity and additional interfaces like Communication Port, Digital Output Port, Paging Port and an External Music Port, Digital Input Port and offers 20 user ports. The Cosine-32P finds application in small business enterprises that need PBX with ISDN connectivity. The Cosine is shown in the figure given below:

Cosine-64P and Cosine-32P support both simple and advanced features.

Simple Features offered by both Cosine-64P and Cosine-32P.• Alarms • Auto Call Back • Barge-In • Internal Dialing • Hold/Toggle• Call Follow-me• Call Forward• Call Park• Call Pick Up• Call Transfer• Class of Service• Distinctive Ringing• Do Not Disturb• Hotline• Interrupt Request• Last Number Redial• Music on Hold• Programmable Feature Access• Pulse and DTMF Dialing


Matrix

Advanced Features offered by both Cosine-64P and Cosine-32P.• Alternate Number Dialing• Abbreviated dialing• Auto Redial• Conference• Call Duration Control• DISA• Dial By Name• Least Cost Routing• Message Paging• Message Wait• Priority• Hot Desk• Live Call Screening• Live Call Supervision• Conversation Recording• VMS Gateway• Voice Message Applications• Walk-In Class of Service

Cosine finds its application in Offices, Factories, Banks, Bungalows, Schools, Shipyard, Airport, Stadium, Hospitals, Big Departmental Stores, etc.Specifications Cosine-64P Cosine-32PTotal User Ports 52 21Maximum Standard Phones (SLT) 32 12Maximum Digital Key Phones (DKP) 8 3Maximum Analog Trunks (TWT) 8 4Maximum BRI Trunks 2 (4 channels) 1 (2 channels)AutoAttendant Modules 16x16 secs. 16x16 secs.Communication Port 1 1Printer Port 1 NoneExternal Music Port (AIP) 1 1Paging Port (AOP) 1 1Digital Input Port (DIP) 1 1Digital Output Port (DOP) 1 1


Matrix

A variety of external equipment can be interfaced with Cosine. Following diagram shows primary interfaces:

A variety of external equipment can be interfaced with Cosine. Following diagram shows secondary interfaces:

Cordless

SLTFax

Con tactor(DOP)

SecurityDialer (D IP)

SLT

PAS (AO P)

Music Source (AIP)

DK P Port

Trunk Port

EonSoft

SLT (17-32)

1 2 3

7

5 6

8 9

*

X

0 #

4

.

Digital Trunk (BRI 09 to 12)

Computer

Printer

BATTERY

Switch

COM10101

PRINTER


Matrix

Relevant Topics:1. Installing the System 292. Configuring the System 18

=X=X=


Matrix

Configuring the SystemThe Cosine is versatile digital switch. A variety of external equipment can be interfaced with the Cosine. The Cosine offers enormous flexibility in terms of number of ports and type of ports.

Cosine-64PThe Cosine-64P comes with a default configuration of (4x2x16) which means 4 Trunks, 2 DKPs and 16 SLT ports. The customer has a flexibility to decide on the number of ports when an expanded configuration is required.

In default configuration the Cosine-64P consists of:• Cosine-64P CPU Card - 1• Cosine-64P PS Card - 1• Cosine-64P Trunk Modules - 4• Cosine-64P DKP Modules - 2• Cosine-64P SLT Modules - 8Cosine-64P BRI card and Auto Attendant card are optional and have to be ordered separately, if required. For more details on sales package of Cosine-64P please refer to ‘Packing List’.

The customer can decide the configuration based on his requirements and order the type and number of ports as per the following table:

* BRI module and Auto Attendant module are optional. The Auto Attendant ports can be increased only in one step from 0 to 16. The modules are of plug-in type and can be plugged-in the designated sockets on the Cosine-64P CPU card.

Port Type Minimum Ports Maximum PortsAnalog Trunks (Two Line Trunks) 4 8SLT 16 32DKP 2 8BRI None* 2 (4 channels)AutoAttendant None* 16


Matrix

The figure shows the cabinet of the Cosine-64P.

A brief description of each card/port is given below:

Cosine-64P PS Card This card gives power to the entire system. It is located in the cabinet besides the CPU card. It works on universal power supply voltage from 90-265VAC, 47-63Hz.This card has a provision for battery backup. A battery of 24V/7-10AH can be connected to it. With these batteries, back up time of 5-6 hours can be ensured, provided the batteries are fully charged. However, the battery back up time depends upon the number of ports in use during power failure condition. More the usage, less the battery back up time.

Cosine-64P CPU Card This card controls and co-ordinates all the activities of the entire system. It performs all higher-level functions. It controls all the ports. All the configuration and programming information is stored on this card. This card also supports following interfaces:• Communication Port (RS-232)• Printer Port• External Music Port• Paging Port• Digital Input Port• Digital Output Port The functions and significance of each of these interfaces are explained in respective topics of this system manual.

Power Cord

ON-OFF Switch

Battery Switch

Battery Connector

COM Port

Printer Port

SLT Ports

SLT Ports DOP, DIP

DKP Ports Trunk PortsExternal Music (AIP)PAS (AOP)


Matrix

Cosine-64P BRI Module The Cosine-64P BRI module supports two BRI ports to which BRI lines can be terminated which in all provide four speech paths.

Hardware Configuration of BRI PortIn Cosine-64, each BRI Port operates in TE mode. (NT Mode not supported) Also proper termination on the connection, made between the Cosine-64 and the ISDN terminals is required. Following section gives information about the same.

• Port Configuration (TE type):• BRI Port can be configured in TE mode as per the table given below:

Above Jumpers are on the main board.

• Power to the terminal:• Ensure that Jumpers J1 and J2 are ‘open’ as No power is to be fed to the Port in TE mode:

• Termination on the Port:• The termination of 100 Ohms can be provided on the BRI Port using following table:

(Refer Note-A)

Jumpers J3 and J4 are on BRI Module of each port.

Note-A:Termination of 100 Ohms should be inserted in following cases:• When the BRI port is configured in TE mode and connected in Point-to-point configuration as shown in fig.1.

Figure 1:

• When the BRI port is configured in TE mode and connected as last terminal on the ‘S0’ bus (Multi-point configuration) as shown in fig.2.

Figure 2:

ModeJumper Position for Port 1 Jumper Position for Port 2J7 J8 J9 J10 J3 J4 J5 J6

TE Mode AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB

Description J1 J2No Power to be fed to the terminal equipment Open Open

Description J3 J4To insert 100 Ohm Termination A-B A-BTo remove 100 Ohm Termination B-C B-C

Cosine64

NTBRILineISDN

Network

TE

NTBRILineISDN

Network

Cosine64Other ISDN

Equipment

Other ISDN

Equipment

TETETE


Matrix

• Termination need not be inserted in case 2 and 3 above, if the ‘S0’ bus itself supports Terminating resistors.• Termination need not be inserted if Cosine-64 (configured in TE mode) is connected as any ‘Terminal’ other than the

last ‘Terminal’ on the ‘S0’ bus (Multi-point configuration).

Cosine-64P SLT Module Each Cosine-64P SLT Module supports two SLT ports to which conventional telephone instruments can be connected. It uses the SLIC technology for excellent loop resistance and speech performance. This module performs SLT functions like Subscriber’s status monitoring, Ring Generation, Speech Interface, etc.

Cosine-64P Trunk Module Each Cosine-64P Trunk Module supports one trunk port to which analog trunk line can be terminated. It performs trunk functions like Hook Operation, Pulse Dialing, Ring Sense, Polarity Reversal Sense, Speech Interface, etc.

Cosine-64P DKP Module Each Cosine-64P DKP Module supports one DKP port to which proprietary digital key phone (EON45/EON42) can be connected. (Please refer ‘Digital Key Phone-Operation’ for more details).

Cosine-64P Auto Attendant Module The Cosine-64P Auto Attendant Module supports 16 ports. Since the Cosine 64P can house only one Auto Attendant Module the Auto Attendant ports can be increased only in one step from 0 to 16.

MDF CablesThe Cosine-64P comes with three numbers of 36-way/20 pair MDF cable. Any cable can be connected to any of the MDF connectors on the Cosine-64P. The color codes of the wires and the respective signals are given in the table below:

Trunk 1 (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)

Trunk 2 (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)

Trunk 3 (Pin 03-21, Green-White)Trunk 4 (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)

Trunk 5 (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)

Trunk 6 (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)Trunk 7 (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)Trunk 8 (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)

DKP 1 (Pin 09-27, Brown-Red)

PAS (Pin 18-36, Green-Yellow)

EM (Pin 17-35, Orange-Yellow)

DKP 8 (Pin 16-34, Blue-Yellow)DKP 7 (Pin 15-33, Grey-Black)

DKP 6 (Pin 14-32, Brown-Black)

DKP 5 (Pin 13-31, Green-Black)DKP 4 (Pin 12-30, Orange-Black)

DKP 3 (Pin 11-29, Blue-Black)

DKP 2 (Pin 10-28, Grey-Red)

MDF Connector 1


Matrix

Please note that MDF connectors are named as MDF1, MDF2 and MDF3 from bottom to top in wall hanging condition.

The LEDs The Cosine-64P has four LEDs at its front. LED ON is green in colour whereas remaining LEDs are red. For more details on behavior of the LEDs (during Reset Cycle, Faulty Conditions and Normal Conditions) please refer the topic ‘Getting Started’.

Cosine-32PThe packing of Cosine-32P consists of:Cosine-32P CPU Module - 1Cosine-32P Trunk Module - 4Cosine-32P DKP Module - 3Cosine-32P SLT Module - 6

MDF Connector 2

SLT01 (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)

SLT02 (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)

SLT03 (Pin 03-21, Green-White)SLT04 (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)

SLT05 (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)

SLT06 (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)SLT07 (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)SLT08 (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)

SLT09 (Pin 09-27, Brown-Red)

DOP (Pin 18-36, Green-Yellow)

DIP (Pin 17-35, Orange-Yellow)

SLT16 (Pin 16-34, Blue-Yellow)SLT15 (Pin 15-33, Grey-Black)

SLT14 (Pin 14-32, Brown-Black)

SLT13 (Pin 13-31, Green-Black)SLT12 (Pin 12-30, Orange-Black)

SLT11 (Pin 11-29, Blue-Black)

SLT10 (Pin 10-28, Grey-Red)

MDF Connector 3

SLT17 (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)

SLT18 (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)

SLT19 (Pin 03-21, Green-White)

SLT20 (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)

SLT21 (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)

SLT22 (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)SLT23 (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)SLT24 (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)

SLT25 (Pin 09-27, Brown-Red)

(Pin 18-36, Green-Yellow)

(Pin 17-35, Orange-Yellow)

SLT32 (Pin 16-34, Blue-Yellow)

SLT31 (Pin 15-33, Grey-Black)

SLT30 (Pin 14-32, Brown-Black)

SLT29 (Pin 13-31, Green-Black)SLT28 (Pin 12-30, Orange-Black)

SLT27 (Pin 11-29, Blue-Black)

SLT26 (Pin 10-28, Grey-Red)


Matrix

Cosine-32P BRI module and Auto Attendant module are optional and can be ordered separately. For more details on ideal sales package of Cosine please refer to ‘Packing List’.

The customer can decide the configuration based on his requirements and order accordingly. There is no flexibility at the customer’s end for port expanding and configuring.

A brief description of each card/port is given below:Cosine-32P CPU moduleThis card controls and co-ordinates all the activities of the entire system. It performs all higher-level functions. It controls all the ports. All the configuration and programming information is stored on this card. It houses the control circuit and an onboard power supply (It works on universal power supply voltage from 90-265VAC, 47-63Hz).

This card has a provision for battery backup. A battery of 24V/7-10Ah can be connected to it. With these batteries, back up time of 5-6 hours can be ensured, provided the batteries are fully charged. However, the battery back up time depends upon the number of ports in use during power failure condition. More the usage, less the battery back up time.

This card also supports following interfaces:• Communication Port (RS232C)• External Music Port• Paging Port• Digital Input Port• Digital Output Port The functions and significance of each of these interfaces are explained in respective topics of this system manual.

Cosine-32P TDS ModuleThe Cosine-32P TDS module is placed on the CPU module has slots to house the Cosine-32P SLT, Cosine-32P Trunk and Cosine-32P DKP module.

Cosine-32P SLT Module Each Cosine-32P SLT Module supports two SLT ports to which standard telephone instruments (2 wire) can be connected. It uses the SLIC technology for excellent loop resistance and speech performance. This module performs SLT functions like Subscriber’s status monitoring, Ring Generation, Speech Interface, etc.

Cosine-32P Trunk Module Each Cosine-32P Trunk Module supports one trunk port to which analog trunk line can be terminated. It performs trunk functions like Hook Operation, Pulse Dialing, Ring Sense, Polarity Reversal Sense, Speech Interface, etc.

Cosine-32P DKP Module Each Cosine-32P DKP Module supports one DKP port to which proprietary digital key phone (EON45) can be connected. (For more details Refer Digital Key Phone-Operation for more details).

Cosine-32P BRI Module The Cosine-32P BRI Card supports one BRI port to which BRI lines can be terminated which in all provide two speech paths. Only one BRI module can be housed in Cosine-32P.

Hardware Configuration of BRI PortIn Cosine32, the BRI Port operates in TE mode. (NT Mode not supported) Also proper termination on the connection, made between the Cosine-32 and the ISDN terminals is required. Following section gives information about the same.

• Port Configuration (TE type):• BRI Port can be configured in TE mode as per the table given below:

• Power to the terminal:• Ensure that Jumpers J2 and J3 are ‘open’ as No power is to be fed to the Port in TE mode.

• Termination on the Port:Refer Note-A

ModeJumper Position for BRI PortJ4 J5 J6 J7

TE Mode AB AB AB AB

Description J2 J3No power tobe fed to the terminal equipment Open Open


Matrix

• There is no Jumper setting for impedance of termination. The termination can be provided on ‘S0’ Bus or it can be provided externally.

Note-A:Termination of 100 Ohms should be inserted in following cases:• When the BRI port is configured in TE mode and connected in Point-to-point configuration as shown in fig.1.

Figure 1:

• When the BRI port is configured in TE mode and connected as last terminal on the ‘S0’ bus (Multi-point configuration) as shown in fig. 2.

Figure 2:

• Termination need not be inserted in case 2 and 3 above, if the ‘S0’ bus itself supports Terminating resistors.• Termination need not be inserted if Cosine-32 (configured in TE mode) is connected as any ‘Terminal’ other than the

last ‘Terminal’ on the ‘S0’ bus (Multi-point configuration).

Cosine-32P AutoAttendant Module The Cosine-32P AutoAttendant Module supports 16 ports. Since the Cosine-32P can house only one AutoAttendant Module the AutoAttendant ports can be increased only in one step from 0 to 16.

Push Up connectors (Push Terminals)The Cosine-32P comes with Push-up connectors to connect the external cables to the Cosine. Labels provided on the enclosure guide the user for making correct connection.

The LEDs The Cosine-32P has four LEDs at its front. LED ON is green whereas remaining LEDs are red. For more details on behavior of the LEDs (during the Reset Cycle, faulty conditions and normal conditions) please refer the topic ‘Getting Started’.

Cosine32

NTBRILineISDN

Network

TE

NTBRILineISDN

Network

Cosine32Other ISDN

Equipment

Other ISDN

Equipment

TETETE


Matrix

Photograph of Cosine-32P

=X=X=

Power Cord

ON-OFF Switch

Battery Switch

Battery Connector

COM Port


Matrix

Protecting the SystemThe Cosine does not work in isolation with the environment. • Power is fed to the system for functioning of the system. • Being a PBX, trunk lines and stations are also connected to the system. • System also has other interfaces like external music, PAS, Printer interface, Computer interface. Always there are

chances that heavy voltages can enter the system through these interfaces.

If the system is protected from these interfaces, 100% satisfactory and trouble free performance of the system is guaranteed. Also the system should be protected from static charges that could find their way through the system components.

Protecting the Cosine from heavy voltages from the mains:The Cosine is designed to work with input voltages ranging between 90V to 265V. The Power Supply card of the Cosine is designed on switch mode design and hence supports such a wider range of operating voltage. However to protect the system from abrupt changes in the input voltage, use of CVT is recommended. CVT of 500VA is recommended for full load.

The importance of EarthTelecom earth is a dedicated earth for the PBX/Phone system/any other Telecom equipment. Providing a separate earth to the telecom equipment eliminates the possibility any back-voltage on the earth. Just as it is important to protect the Cosine, it is also important to protect the personnel while installing the system or otherwise.

A perfect electrical earth is vital for safety of the personnel and the system. Following explanation shows how a perfect electrical earth can save a human life.

In the above diagram, Vc= Vs*Z2 Z1+Z2Where,Z1 is the stray impedance between the electrical parts of the Gadget and the ChassisZ2 is the stray impedance between the Chassis and the Earth.If Z2 = 0 then VC = 0

This formula implies that if the impedance between the Chassis and the Earth is reduced to 0 then Voltage on the Chassis i.e. VC would be Zero and hence any person touching the enclosure will not get an electric shock. Hence Z2 should be made Zero. Providing a perfect earth to the electrical equipment can do this.

Protecting the Cosine from heavy voltages on the trunk lines and the overhead stations:The Cosine can get damaged if heavy voltages enter the system from trunk lines or from overhead stations.These heavy voltages could be due to:• Heavy voltage line falling on the CO line or on the overhead stations cable.• Thunderbolts.• Short-circuit of trunk lines or overhead station cables with electric cables.

It is necessary to protect the Cosine from these voltages. The protection can be in the form of some protection devices like GDTs, MOVs, Fuses, etc. Since the MDF cables are terminated on the system MDF, it is recommended that PPMs be installed on the system MDF. PPMs generally contain GDTs and fuses. GDT is an over voltage device. It has three terminals. It is connected in parallel to the CO line or the overhead station cable. The third terminal is connected to a telecom earth. Whenever the voltage between any of the two terminals exceeds the specified voltage (generally 150V), the gas in the device starts conducting.

Electrical Parts of the Gadget

Enclosure of the Gadget

A.C. InputP

N

Vs Vc

Z1Z2

Earth


Matrix

This shorts either terminal with the earth terminal. Heavy voltage passes to the earth instead of entering the system thereby protecting the system.

PPMs also have fuses. Fuse is an over current device. Whenever the current builds up beyond a specified limit (generally 100mA), the fuse opens thereby protecting the circuit ahead. PPMs work satisfactorily only if they are properly earthed. It is recommended that PPMs should be connected to a separate telecom earth. Telecom earth is a dedicated earth only for the PBX. The advantage of having a dedicated earth is that there is no risk of back voltage. In heavy industries there are chances that the earth is not perfect and instead of providing protection to the system, it damages the system.

Protecting the Cosine from static charges:While installing the system or servicing the system, care must be taken to provide a path to the static charges. The engineer installing the system should wear an antistatic belt, which is properly earthed.

Every person carries a static charge on his body depending upon his body composition and the environment around him. Most of the times this charge finds its way to the earth when the person touches any object, which is grounded, or if he is bare footed. Generally, during installation or troubleshooting, the person takes extra care and wears footwear to get protection from the electric shock. Doing so, the static charge on the body does not find its way to the ground. This keeps on accumulating the charge on his body. Now when the person touches any of the electronic cards, the static charge finds its way through the electronic components thereby damaging the cards. Care should be taken to avoid this.

If there is a back voltage on the earth, instead of protecting the cards/system, it may harm the personnel wearing the belt.

Protecting the Cosine from heavy voltage on the communication cable:The Cosine provides two communication ports to which a computer can be connected. It is recommended to run the cable connecting both the devices through the conduit carrying telephone cables or through a separate conduit. By fluke if an electrical wire carrying heavy voltage shorts with this cable, heavy voltages can damage the communication port. Protecting the Cosine from heavy voltage on the External music port:The external music port of the Cosine should be protected from:• Heavy voltages on the cable connecting the Cosine and the external music source due to shorting with any electrical

wire.• An audio signal, which is not as per the specifications, is fed to this port. Please refer ‘External Music’ for

specifications.

Protecting the Cosine from heavy voltage on the PAS port:The PAS port of the Cosine should be protected from:• Heavy voltages on the cable connecting the Cosine and the amplifier/speaker due to shorting with any electrical wire.• Faulty Amplifier. Protecting the Cosine from heavy voltage on the printer cable: (not applicable to Cosine-32P) The Cosine provides a printer port to which a printer can be connected. The printer port of the Cosine should be protected from:• Heavy voltages on the cable connecting the Cosine and the printer due to shorting with any electrical wire. To avoid

this please check the supply to the printer. Please ensure that the printer is properly earthed. Also check the printer cable for any short or open.

Protecting the System from Lightning:Protecting the system from high current surges is achieved by installing primary protection device. A lightning protector is a primary protection device which is used to prevent a dangerous surge from entering the building and damaging the system. For equipment installed in a more exposed environment, it is necessary to protect the system with primary protectors such as PPMs. With the development of electronic equipment, problems due to lightning surges have increased. A dangerous surge can occur if a telephone line comes in contact with a power line. A lightning protector should be installed on an outside (CO) line to prevent a dangerous surge from entering the building and damaging the system. The best place for the insertion of the primary protection is the cable entry point of the building, shelter or equipment housing.

This is not always possible but every attempt should be made to place the primary protection as close as possible to the entry point of the cables into the building, shelter or equipment housing. Hence, the system should be installed with lightning protectors. In addition, grounding (connection to earth ground) is very important to protect the system.


Matrix

Surge Protective Device (SPD): It is a device that is intended to mitigate surge over voltages and over currents of limited durations. It may consist of a single component or have a more complex design, where several functions are integrated. It contains at least one non-linear component. Primary protection is applied using an SPD to protect an interface of the equipment, at the location where it diverts most of the stressful energy from propagation into the equipment. The SPD must be accessible, removable and connected to equipotential bonding. The cost of using Gas Discharge Tube (GDT)/Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV)/Fuses for equipment protection will be far more economical than the equipment downtime and potential damage that could result from being improperly protected. Surge protection device creates a short circuit and shunting the surge voltage to ground, when a preset voltage threshold is exceeded.

Inherent Protection:Inherent protection is that protection which is provided at an equipment interface either by virtue of its intrinsic characteristics, by specific design or by suitable protection components. Inherent protector is not a subsidiary but an essential device because it usually operates earlier than the primary protector and protects the components.

=X=X=

SystemProtective Earth

Terminal

CO LineLightningProtectors

CO Line

Telecom Earth


Matrix

Installing the SystemSafety Installation InstructionsWhen installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire,electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:• Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.• Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.• Never touch non-insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at network

interface.• Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

Installation PrecautionsAvoid installing in the following places:• In direct sunlight and hot, cold or humid places.• Sulfuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs, etc. may damage the equipment or contacts.• Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.• Dusty places or places where water or oil may come into contact with the system.• Near high-frequency generating devices such as sewing machines or electric welders, microwave ovens, air

conditioners.• Do not obstruct area around the system (for reasons of maintenance and inspection be especially careful to allow

space for cooling above and at the sides of the system).

Important Safety InstructionsWhen using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:• Read and understand all instructions.• Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

Use a dry cloth for cleaning.• Do not use this product near water, for example, near a Bathtub, Wash Bowl, Kitchen Sink or Laundry Tub in a wet

basement or near a Swimming Pool.• Do not open the system in power-ON condition.• Do not plug/unplug any card in power-ON condition. This may damage the system. Warranty does not cover such

damages.• Never place this product on heated place or any other equipment.• Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand or table. The product may fall, causing serious damage to the

product.• Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to protect it from overheating,

these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on the bed, sofa, rug or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.

• This product should be operated with proper supply voltage. If you are not sure about supply voltage, contact authorized dealer. It is advisable to give proper, stabilized power.

• Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be misused by people walking on it.

• Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.• Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or

short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this product, but take it to a qualified serviceman when some

service or repair work is required. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the appliance is subsequently used.

• Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:• When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.• If liquid has been spilled into the product.• If the product has been exposed to rain or water.• If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls, which

are covered by the operating instructions because improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.

• If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.• If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.

• Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be remote risk of electric shock from lightning.


Matrix

• Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.• Make sure that you install primary protection device at entry point for all CO trunks and all overhead stations. If not

installed, heavy voltage on CO trunks/overhead stations can damage the product. Please note that warranty does not cover such damages.

• This product is equipped with a plug having a third (GND) pin, which fits only into a grounding-type outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, ask an electrician to replace the obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug.

Site Selection• The Cosine should always be installed at a place equidistant from all the extension lines. This reduces the cabling

cost and also makes cabling network less complicated.• It should preferably be installed at 3.5 feet height (approx.) in airy, dust free and moisture free place. An installation at

this height makes preventive or curative maintenance task easy.• It is advisable that the system should be installed away from any source of electromagnetic noise such as any radio

equipment, heavy transformers, faulty electric chokes of tube-lights, any device having a faulty coil etc. This will reduce any problem arising due to electromagnetic effect.

Cabling• Select a good quality telephone cable (with 0.5mm/0.019 Inch conductor diameter) for internal cabling as well as for

over-head cabling.• Ensure separate cable conduits for both electrical and telephone cables.• Use separate MDF for system wiring and field wiring. Please refer diagram given below:

• Take care that cables are not left open on the ground where they may get damaged due to entanglement in the foot or due to pressure from other heavy objects.

• Avoid long length cables and at the same time keep number of joints to a minimum i.e. strike a balance between the two. This will help you to find out a cable fault easily.

• Primary Protection Modules (PPM) with GDT and fuses are must on all the ports.

Power Supply• The Cosine operates on 90-265VAC, 47-63Hz supply through power supply card (with or without battery backup).

Arrange for a separate power point and switch, close to the system.• Power Supply for the Cosine must be separate from other heavy electrical loads like Air-conditioners, Heaters,

Welding machines, Electrical motors, heavy transformers, tube lights having faulty chokes, electric bell and other such noise generating equipments.

• Please ensure that the system is properly earthed. For more details, please refer “Protecting the System”.

Installation (Cosine 64P)• Unpack the box. Get satisfied with the contents and the condition of all the parts. In case of short supply or damaged

parts, please contact the source from where you purchased the system immediately.• Hang the system at the selected site. Please refer to the Mechanical Dimensions given at the end of this topic. These

would help you while making the holes on the wall for hanging the system.• Check the voltage at the power point from where the supply is to be given to the system. It should be as per the

specifications.• Connect one MDF cable to the system. Connect 2 conventional telephone instruments to the other end of the MDF

cable directly.• Connect the power cord to the system. Ensure proper contacts. Switch ‘ON’ the system. The system will take about

40-50 seconds to start. Observe the reset cycle on the front panel of the system.• Check for dial tone on the telephone instruments connected to the system.• Switch ‘OFF’ the system. Remove the power cord from the system.

Cosine SystemMDF

Field MDFwith

PrimaryProtection

MDF Cable

JumperWire

FieldWiring

System Engineer Zone Wireman/Electrician Zone

ETH ETH


Matrix

• Remove the telephone instruments connected to the system for testing purpose.• Connect the other end of the MDF cables to the system MDF. MDF cables follow the standard color code scheme.

This helps the engineer to identify the station ports.• Ensure proper telecom earth on field MDF for best protection.• Tag each wire pair with respective SLT/DKP/BRI/Analog Trunk number. Different color tags for Trunk/SLT/DKP can be

used for better identification.• Connect the system MDF to the field MDF with the help of jumper wires.• Now again power the system for final switch ON. Ensure proper contacts.• To use other interfaces like Computer, External Music, Printer and Public Address System (PAS), DIP, DOP, please

refer respective topics in this manual.

Installation (Cosine 32P)• Unpack the box. Get satisfied with the contents and the condition of all the parts. In case of short supply or damaged

parts, please contact the source from where you purchased the system immediately.• Please refer to the Mechanical Dimensions given at the end of this topic. To know the pitch of mounting holes.• Check the mains voltage at the power plug from where the supply is to be given to the system. It should be as per the

specifications. Earth the system properly.• Connect 2 conventional telephone instruments directly at the system MDF.• Connect the power cord to the power plug. Ensure proper contacts. Switch ‘ON’ the system. Observe the reset cycle

on the front panel of the system.• Check for dial tone on the telephone instruments connected to the system.• Switch ‘OFF’ the system. Remove the power cord of the system from the power plug.• Remove the telephone instruments connected to the system for testing purpose.• Now connect all the trunk and station cables to the system.• Now again power the system for final switch ON. Ensure proper contacts.• To use other interfaces like Computer, External Music, Security Dialer and Public Address System (PAS), please refer

respective topics in this manual.

How to make a perfect earth?• Dig a pit of area 2 feet x 2 feet x 6 feet (lxbxd). Please refer to the figure on the next page.• Get a copper plate of size 1.5 feet x 1.5 feet x 0.25 feet.• Connect a copper strip of size 1-inch wide, 3 mm thick and 6 feet length at the center of the copper plate by welding

or nuts and bolts.• Insert a G.I pipe into the copper strip till it reaches the copper plate.• Place this set up into the pit and ensure that at least 4 inch of the G.I pipe is above the ground level.• Fill the pit 1-inch layer of charcoal and salt in 3:1 ratio at the bottom and then with the soil.• Connect a bare 14 SWG copper wire (double) on the top of the copper strip and run it to the exchange room and

connect it on the bus bar.• Bus bar is a copper strip 4-inch long with 6 nos. of screws and nuts mounted on it. It has to be fixed on the wall in the

exchange room.• The earth wire of the PPMs should be connected to this bus bar.• It is recommended to water the earth at regular intervals.

Exchange Room

BUS BAR

G.1 PIPE 4 InchPit of area 2x2x6Copper strip 1 inch wide x 3 mm thick x 6 mm long

Soil1 layer of salt and charcoal 1:3 ratioCopper plate 1.5x1.5 x 1/4 thick


Matrix

Switching On the CosineSwitch ON the system. The system will take about 40 to 50 seconds to start. The reset cycle can be seen on the LEDs.

StationsProprietary Digital Key Phones (DKP) called ‘EON45’ as well as standard telephones instruments like Rotary phone, Pulse-tone switchable push-button phone, Feature phone or a Cord-less phone can be connected to the Cosine. Hence, it is not necessary to buy all new phones. Existing old working telephones can also be used.

Analog Trunk LinesAnalog trunk lines can be connected to the system. Please connect protection device to these trunk lines. Also be sure to earth the Protection device.

Digital Trunk LinesBRI lines can be connected to the system. Please refer ‘ISDN-BRI’ for connection details.

Mechanical dimension of Cosine-64P:

75.00mm(2.95Inch) 310.00mm (12.21 Inch)

75.0

0mm

(2.9

5Inc

h)50

5.00

mm

(19.

88 In

ch)


Matrix

Mechanical dimension of Cosine-32P:

Relevant Topics:1. Introducing the System 132. Configuring the System 183. Getting Started 34

=X=X=

75.00mm(2.95Inch)

75.0

0mm

(2.9

5Inc

h)

250.00mm(9.84Inch)

330.

00m

m (1

2.99

Inch

)


Matrix

Getting Started

What’s this?After the Cosine is successfully installed, the system is now ready to be switched ON. To check the correctness of installation, configurations and connection it is always advised to test the basic features like Making a Call (Internal and External), Receiving a Call; before proceeding with the complex programming as per requirement.

Switching ON the SystemSwitch ON the system. The system takes about 10 to 15 seconds to reset. Observe the Reset Cycle on the front panel of the system.

The Cosine has four LEDs on its front panel. LED ‘ON’ is Green whereas, the remaining LEDs are Red.

On power ON all the LEDS glow at once and remain ON for 500 msec. All the LEDs turn OFF except ON. The system now performs the Hardware test. The sequence of the tests and the LED response is as given in the table below:

The reset cycle is completed. After this the system is ready for use. The behavior of the LED’s during normal conditions is given as below:

If at any stage the memory is found full LEDs TST, TZ and BUF blinks 200ms ON and 200ms OFF.

Testing the Installation• In the Power ON mode the system is ready for use, with the default region code (Asian) and predefined values for

variables like extension’s flexible numbers, timers and other programmable parameters to suit region code.• If the system is being used elsewhere the user is required to perform the following steps:

• Dial 1#91-1234 (1234 is the default SE password) (To enter the programming mode).• Dial 5501-Region Code-#* (To change the Region Code. Please refer Region Code for more details.• Dial 5501-4321-#* (Reverse SE Password) (to default the system according to region code).• Dial 00-#* (To Exit Programming).

• It is required to check the functioning of the system by testing all the extension lines and the trunk.• Test all extension lines for dial tone, ring back tone, speech and ring one by one.• Test functioning of the trunk by dialing outside number from one of the extension lines and checking the trunk tones

and speech. Ring on the trunk can be tested by asking your friend to dial your number.

How to make External Call?From SLT/DKP Handset• Lift the handset.

LED Label MeaningON PowerTST TestTZ Time ZoneBUF SMDR Buffer

Step1 Test Response1 ROM Test (Flash) TST blinks 200ms ON/200ms OFF, if ROM is faulty.2 RAM Test TZ blinks 200ms ON/200ms OFF, if RAM is faulty.3 RTC Test BUF blinks 200ms ON/200ms OFF, if the RTC is found faulty.4 IDX Test TZ and BUF blink 200ms ON/200ms OFF, if the IDX is found faulty.5 HDLC Test TST and TZ blink 200ms ON/200ms OFF, if HDLC is faulty.6 BRI Module Test All the LED’s glow and remain ON for 500ms, if the BRI module is present.

LED Label MeaningON Glows steady-ON when the Cosine is powered.TST Blinks 1 sec. ON and 1 sec. OFFTZ Glows steady-ON during working hours, blinks 1 sec. ON and 1 sec. OFF during Break hours and remains

OFF during Non-working hours.BUF Blinks 1 sec. ON and 1 sec. OFF when the SMDR buffer (either incoming or outgoing) gets 80% full. Glows

steady ON when the SMDR buffer (either Incoming or Outgoing) gets full.


Matrix

• Dial trunk access code (‘0/5/61 to 65’ for Asian/Australasian/European/African users, ‘9/5/81 to 85’ for North American/South American users).

• Dial the external telephone number.

From DKP: Handsfree Operation• Press the key ‘SPK’ on the DKP.• Dial trunk access code (‘0/5/61 to 65’ for Asian/Australasian/European/African users, ‘9/5/81 to 85’ for North

American/South American users).• Dial the external telephone number.

Important Points:• The stations having access to trunk will only be able to make External Calls.• The station with higher Toll Control will be able to make External Calls.

How to make an Internal Call?From SLT/DKP:• Lift the handset.• Dial the desired station’s access code (The default flexible numbers for SLT’s are 201, 202....232 and DKP’s are 301,

302......308 for Cosine-64P and the default flexible numbers for SLT’s are 24, 25....32 and DKP’s are 21, 22 and 23 for Cosine-32P).

• The called station rings.• Speech is established when the called party lifts the handset.

From DKP: Hands free Operation• Press the key ‘SPK’ on the DKP• Dial the desired station’s access code (The default flexible numbers for SLT’s are 201, 202....232 and DKP’s are 301,

302......308 for Cosine-64P and the default flexible numbers for SLT’s are 24, 25....32 and DKP’s are 21, 22 and 23 for Cosine-32P).

• The called station rings.• Speech is established when the called party lifts the handset or presses the ‘SPK’ key.

Important Points:• Hands free Operation is also possible if a speakerphone is used.• The stations having Class of Service level with internal call allowed will only be able to make Internal Calls.• Ask your friend (Internal user and External associate) to call your extension to check receiving of the call and to

distinguish the internal and the external calls.

Answering CallsWhen a call is placed to your extension, if the caller is an internal caller then your extension rings as Trin.......Trin. This is called single ring. If the caller is an external caller the extension on which the call lands rings Trin.....Trin..................Trin......Trin.

After internal/external calls are successfully made through the Cosine it is required to program the Cosine as per requirements. It is advisable to program the system in the hierarchy mentioned below. One may skip undesirable feature programming.

Programming the SystemPlease refer to the topic ‘Default Settings’ and ‘Region Code’. Most of the time the default values suit our requirements and there is no need for extensive programming.• To program the system, first enter the SE (Programming) Mode. • Dial 1#91-1234 (default SE Password).

A model hierarchy for programming is listed below. The user has a flexibility to follow his own hierarchy as per his requirement.

Steps for programming• Real Time Clock (RTC)• Time Tables• Software Port-Hardware Port relations (On first Power ON the system will define this relation at its own) 321• Flexible Numbers• SLT Basic Parameters• Class of Service


Matrix

• Trunk Access Groups• Toll Control• Call Pick Up Group• DKP-Basic Parameters• Trunk Parameters• LCR• Trunk Landing Groups• Operator• SMDR• Voice Message ApplicationsPlease dial ‘00-#*’ to exit the programming mode after you have finished programming.

Relevant Topics:1. Programming the System 2502. Default Settings 1343. Distinctive Rings 1794. Call Progress Tones 955. Region Code 262

=X=X=


Section 2: Features and Facilities

Matrix

Abbreviated Dialing

What's this? • Frequently called numbers can be stored in the system memory. These numbers can be dialed using specific codes.

This saves time while dialing such frequently used numbers. It is also known as Memory Dialing. • An abbreviated number is accessed through its directory index.• The Cosine offers two types of Abbreviated Dialing:

• Personal Abbreviated Dialing.• Global Abbreviated Dialing.

Personal Abbreviated Dialing • Each user can store up to 10 numbers of his choice in his personal memory. • User can change these numbers anytime from his station without consulting the System Administrator or the System

Engineer. • The location codes for Personal Abbreviated Dialing are 01-10. • Access to Personal Abbreviated Dialing is programmable. Please refer Class of Service (COS) for more details. • The system checks Trunk Access Group and Toll Control Allowed List and Denied List before dialing the Personal

Abbreviated number. Hence for Personal Abbreviated Dialing; Trunk Access Group, Toll Control Allowed List and Toll Control Denied List and Class of Service should be programmed properly.

• A printout of SLT parameters or DKP parameters shows the telephone numbers programmed in the personal directory by the station user.

How to program Personal Abbreviated Dialing?

In the above command:Location Code is from 01 to 10.Trunk Access Code is 0, 5 or 61 to 65 (for Asian/Australasian/European/African users). (9, 5 or 81 to 85 for North American/South American users) Number is the telephone number, which is to be abbreviated.

How to use Personal Abbreviated Dialing?

Example:To program telephone number 316-823-2353 at Location 01 with trunk access code '63' (for Asian/Australasian/European/African users) (83 for North American/South American users), dial 108-01-63-3168232353-#*/108-01-83-3168232353-#*

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 108-Location Code-Trunk Access Code-Number-#* Confirmation tone3 Replace the handset.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 8-Location Code (Asian/Australasian/European/African User’s)

Dial 6-Location Code (North/South American User’s)Confirmation tone

Station

E1

En Toll ControlTrunk Access Group

Directory Index TAC Number

01

10

5

62

02612446266

02228956212

::

::

::

Toll ControlTrunk Access Group

Directory Index TAC Number

01

10

0

61

952666269156

02612266266

::

::

::


Matrix

Once this location is programmed with the number, dial 801 (Asian/Australasian/European/African users, 601 North American/South American users) to call 316-823-2353.

Global Abbreviated Dialing • Frequently called numbers can be stored in the system. These numbers can be dialed using specific codes. This is

called Abbreviated dialing. It is also known as Global Memory Dialing. • This helps save time while dialing such frequently used numbers. • An abbreviated number is dialed through its directory index. • Besides personal memory, 89 numbers can be stored in a common memory space called global memory. These

numbers are dialed out using Access codes 811-899 (for Asian/Australasian/European/African users) (611-699 for North American/South American users). This is called Global Abbreviated Memory.

• The numbers stored in the global memory of the system are dialed out. • Global directory can be programmed either by the System Administrator or the System Engineer. • The global directory is common for all the users. • Global Directory is divided into two parts i.e. Global Directory Part 1 and Global Directory Part 2. • A user can dial these numbers irrespective of his Toll Control and Trunk Access Group. However these numbers can

be dialed only if the user is allowed this feature from Class of Service. • Emergency telephone numbers can be stored in global directory part 1 and its access can be given to all the users so

that any user can access this facility. • Long distance numbers can be stored in global directory part 2 and its access can be given to selected users. • In case of long distance numbers, complete numbers with preceding codes should be entered.

How to program?Step 1: Make a list of telephone numbers to be stored in global directory.Step 2: Program the telephone numbers at various locations using command 2301.Step 3: Assign Trunk Access Groups to various numbers using command 2302.Step 4: Program name to a location of global directory using command 2305.

CommandsStep 1Take a paper and a pen and make a list of telephone numbers.

Step 2Use following command to program telephone number for a particular location: 2301-Index-Number-#* Where,Index is from 11 to 99 (Index 11 to 55 is Global Directory part1 and Index 56 to 99 is Global Directory part2).Number is the telephone number (Maximum 16 digits).

Use the following command to clear an index in global memory:2301-Index-#*This commands can be executed from SA mode also.

Step 3Use following command to assign a TAG to a number in global directory: 2302-Index-Trunk Access Group-#* Where,


Matrix

Index is from 11 to 99. Trunk Access Group is from 1 to 8.By default, TAG 1 is assigned to all the numbers.

Step 4Use following command to program a Name to a particular Location of Global directory:2305-Index-Name-#*Where,Index is from 11 to 99.Name is a string of alphanumeric characters (Maximum 8 characters).By default, Name is blank.

Use following command to clear a Name from a location of the Global directory:2305-Index-#*This command can be executed from SA mode also.

How to use Global Abbreviated Dialing?

Important Points:• Pause can be entered while storing the telephone number if required. A code '#3' can be used as Pause digit.

Suppose, a string of digits 265 Pause 2556575 is to be stored then it should be programmed as 265#325556575 at a location index in the global memory.

• By default, Global Memory is allowed to all users. Personal Memory is not allowed.

Relevant Topics:1. Class of Service (COS) 112 2. Trunk Parameters 320 3. Alternate Number Dialing 56 4. Trunk Access Groups 311 5. Default Settings 1346. Region Code 262

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 8-Location Code (6-Location Code for American defaults) Number dialed out.


Matrix

Access Codes

What's this?Access code is a string of digits dialed by a station to:• Call another Station• Grab a trunk line• Call a Department Group• Turn on/off an Analog Output Port (PAS), DOP etc.• Use a feature

Access codes can be classified broadly into three categories: • Station codes-Codes used to access stations viz. SLTs like 201, 202, etc., DKPs like 301, 302, etc. (Flexible Number). • Logical group codes-Codes assigned to call logical groups like Department Groups-3901, 3902, etc. and access trunk

groups-61,62 (for Asian/Australasian/European/African users) (82,82 for North American/South American users), etc. • Feature codes like '2' for Auto Call Back, '5' for Raid, etc.

Cosine allows changing these codes to codes of your choice. For example: By default to call operator, one has to dial '9' (Asian/Australasian/European/African users). It is possible to change this code to '8'. Also, to dial on a trunk in group 1, one has to dial '61'. It is possible to change this code to '5'.

How it works? • A typical call passes through different phases or stages as shown below:

• Since no function is possible when the telephone is idle, it is obvious that no access code can be dialed from idle phase.

• Different access codes execute different function during different phases of a call. For example, call forward feature code makes sense from the dial tone, whereas, Auto Call Back (on busy) feature is meaningful from busy tone. Dialing Auto Call Back feature code '2' during speech would make no sense.

• Please note that each access code in a single call-phase must be unique. For example, it is not possible to have same access code for features like Call Forward and Redial since both these feature codes are used at dial tone. Please note that if you try to assign a number string that is already used to access a station/Logical group to a feature accessed from dial phase then the system would not accept the command and shall give error tone. In such an event, one has to take the printout of access codes, delete the conflicting access code and then assign the desired access code.

• However same access codes can be used for features used during different phases, For example, one can have same access code say '8' for Memory dial and Barge-in since both these feature codes are used during different phases of a call viz. Dial phase and Blocked phase.

• An access code can be of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits. • In one phase, different access codes can be of different length. But all of them must be unique. For Example, in

blocked phase we can have following codes:

• Please note that station user can dial only emergency numbers once he reaches the Denied phase.

Feature CodeAuto Call Back 2Interrupt Request 21Barge-In 3Raid 33Trunk Reservation 5

Idle Dialing

Routing

Blocked

Placed Matured Denied

Idle DialDial Tone

Routing BlockedBusy Tone

PlacedRing

MaturedSpeech

DeniedError Tone


Matrix

Station Codes SLT Station Numbers SLT station numbers are the codes (number string) dialed from dial phase to call another SLT station. Each SLT station number must be unique and should not match with any of the features available from the dial phase. For more details, please refer topic Flexible Numbers.

DKP Station Numbers DKP station numbers are the codes (number string) dialed from the dial phase by a station to call a DKP station. Each DKP station number must be unique and should not match with any of the features available from the dial phase. For more details, please refer topic Flexible Numbers.

Trunk Access-Selective This is a code dialed by a station user to grab a particular trunk line. For more details, please refer topic Selective Trunk Access.

Logical Group codes Department Numbers Cosine offers a facility of forming groups of stations called Departments and assign a common access code (number string) called Department Number to this group. For more details, please refer topic Department Call.

Trunk Access-Group These are the codes (no. string) dialed by a station user to grab a trunk line. Each of these codes relates to a group of trunks, which can be set differently for each station. For more details, please refer topic Trunk Access Groups.

Features codes Feature codes are the Access codes (number string) dialed to use features. The feature codes are divided depending upon the phase during which these codes are dialed viz. Dial phase feature code, Routing phase feature code, etc.

Dial Phase Features Feature Name Feature Number Access Code (default) Call Pick Up-General 01 4 Call Pick Up-Selective 02 12 Cancel ACB 03 102 Redial 04 7 Auto Redial 05 17 Personal Abbreviated Programming 06 108 Abbreviated Dialing 07 8 Operator 08 9 Call Forward/Follow Me 09 13 Dynamic Lock 10 14 Hotline 11 15 Alarm 12 16 DND 13 18 Call Park 14 117 Retrieve Park Call 15 118 Room Monitor 16 101 Last Caller Recall 17 112 Walk in Class of Service 18 111 Enter Programming Mode 19 1#91 * Enter Admin Mode 20 1#92 * Change User Password 21 114 Page Zone 22 1031 DISA Login Code 23 119 Cancel all features 24 100


Matrix

Please Note: • Please note that Trunk Access Codes viz. 0, 5, 61, 62, 63, 64 and 65 (Asian/Australasian/European/African users) (9,

5, 81 to 85 for North American/South American users), flexible numbers (Station Codes) department number (3901 to 3905) and AOP are also dialed from dial phase. Hence, if the SE tries to assign these codes in dial phase he shall get error tone. He needs to change these codes first and then assign the codes to other feature. Please refer respective topics in the system manual.

• Please note that code marked '*' cannot be changed.

Use following command to program the Feature code for a dial phase feature: 4316-Feature Number-Feature Code-#* Where,Feature Number is a 2-digits number from 01 to 40.Feature Code is a string of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits.

Use following command to clear the Feature code of a dial phase feature:4316-Feature Number-#*

Use following command to default the feature codes of all dial phase features: 4317-#*

Use following command to clear the feature codes of all dial phase features: 4318-#*

Example 1:Let us interchange Call Pick Up-Selective and Redial codes 4316-02-7-#* (On giving this command, system gives error tone because '7' is already used for redial. Hence before giving this command, assign a dummy code for Call Pick Up-Selective. For example, assign code 2500 using command 4316-02-2500-#*)

Now give following commands:4316-04-12-#* 4316-02-7-#*

Example 2:Let us interchange Hot Line and Alarm codes:4316-13-2501-#* (dummy code)4316-12-16-#*4316-13-15-#*

Direct Trunk Access Code 25 69 Continued Dialing on Trunk 26 * User Not Available 27 104 Back Ground Music 28 1099 Last Five calls record 29 113 Message paging 30 1032 Multi Party Conference 31 19 LCS ON 32 1033 LCS OFF 33 1034 VMS Conversation Recording 34 1095 Dial by Name 35 # Call Supervision 36 1035 Set/Clear Hot Desk 37 1091 Hot Desk Cancel 38 1090 Time Zone 39 115 Enter Phone Wizard Mode 40 1#98 *

Feature Name Feature Number Access Code (default)


Matrix

Routing phase features

Please note that since only one feature is available from the routing phase, we can use any digit of our choice as access code for this feature.

Use following command to program the feature code for a routing phase feature: 4319-Feature Number-Feature Code-#* Where,Feature number is 1.Feature Code is a string of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits.

Use following command to clear the feature code of a routing phase feature: 4319-Feature Number-#*

Use following command to default the feature codes of all routing phase features: 4320-#*

Use following command to clear the feature codes of all routing phase features: 4321-#*

Example:Let us change override feature code to 2. 4319-1-2-#*

Blocked phase feature codes (Busy) Following features are valid from the blocked phase.

Use following command to program the feature code for a blocked phase feature: 4322-Feature Number-Feature Code-#* Where,Feature number is 1 to 5.Feature Code is a string of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits.

Use following command to clear the feature code of a blocked phase feature:4322-Feature Number-#*

Use following command to default the feature code of all blocked phase features: 4323-#*

Use following command to clear the feature code of all blocked phase features: 4324-#*

Example:Let us change Barge-In feature code to 9. 4322-3-9-#*

Placed phase features (Ring Back) Following features are valid from the placed phase:

Feature Number Access Code (Default)1 4

Feature Name Feature Number Access Code (default) Auto Call Back 1 2 Interrupt Request 2 3 Barge-In 3 4 Raid 4 5 Trunk Reservation 5 6

Feature Name Feature Number Access Code (default) Auto Call Back (No reply) 1 2 Forced Answer 2 5


Matrix

Use following command to program the feature code for a placed phase feature: 4325-Feature Number-Feature Code-#* Where,Feature number is 1 to 2.Feature Code is a string of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits.

Use following command to clear the feature code of a placed phase feature: 4325-Feature Number-#*

Use following command to default the feature code of all placed phase features: 4326-#*

Use following command to clear the feature code of all placed phase features: 4327-#*

Example:Let us change Auto Call Back feature code to 10.4325-1-10-#*

Please note that the access code for Auto Call back-On Busy and Auto Call Back-On No Reply is same.

Matured Phase feature(3-way)

Notes:• Please note that 'Flash' is required as the prefix for any of the above features 33. Also note that trunk release code is

not programmable (however, it would accept any other code and give confirmation tone but will not work). • Matured phase 3-way signifies the case in which two persons are talking keeping third person on hold.

Use following command to program the feature code for a matured phase feature: 4328-Feature Number-Feature Code-#* Where, Feature number is 1 to 3. Feature Code is a string of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits.

Use following command to clear the feature code of a matured phase feature: 4328-Feature Number-#*

Use following command to default the feature codes of all matured phase features: 4329-#*

Use following command to clear the feature codes of all matured phase features: 4330-#*

Example:Let us change Conference-3 Party feature code to 5. 4328-2-5-#*

Important Points:• The explanation made above assumes default feature codes.• Overlapping among feature codes and station numbers is allowed from the same phase.• Please ensure to clear all the feature codes and emergency numbers before issuing the default command for a phase

from which emergency dialing is allowed.• While defaulting the feature codes for a phase from which emergency dialing is allowed, please clear the feature

codes of the phase and emergency numbers. Let us assume an emergency number is programmed as 102. When you default the feature codes of dial phase, the feature Auto Call Back becomes 102 Emergency Dialing is also allowed from dial phase so this is erroneous. Instead if emergency numbers are cleared prior to default this situation will not arise.

Feature Name Feature Number Access Code (default) Call Toggle 1 1 Conference-3 Party 2 0 Trunk to Trunk Transfer 3 #


Matrix

• Consider another case where the feature codes of Cancel ACB is programmed as 4 and Call Pick Up is programmed as 102. In such situation clearing the feature codes becomes important before defaulting them else defaulting directly will lead to overlapping of identical codes.

Relevant Topics:1. Flexible Numbers 195 2. Trunk Access Groups 311 3. Department Call 136 4. Paging 240 5. Emergency Dialing 186 6. Emergency Detection and Reporting 185

=X=X=


Matrix

Alarms The Cosine offers five different types of alarms satisfying most of the needs. They are: • Duration Alarm • Time Alarm • Date and Time Alarm • Daily Alarm • Remote Alarm

Duration Alarm

What's this?• You can ask the Cosine to remind you after some specific time. • On expiry of the set time, your station starts ringing. • When you lift the handset, you get music or voice message. • A maximum of 8 duration alarms can be set at a time. • These 8 duration alarms can be set by a single station (multiple) or 8 different stations (single) or a combination i.e.

one station can set 4 duration alarms (multiple) and other 4 stations can set single alarms (in total 8). • When 8 duration alarms are set in total, no other station can set any other alarm. • Time is in minutes from 01 to 99. • If the station is engaged at the time of alarm then the station gets ring when it becomes free. • Please note that duration alarm may not be 100% accurate every time.

How to use it? Single Alarm

Multiple Alarms

Example:Dial 161-09 to set a reminder after 9 minutes.

Time Alarm

What's this? • You can ask the Cosine to remind you at some specific time. • At the set time, your station starts ringing. • When you lift the handset, you get music or voice message. • A maximum of 8 time alarms can be set at a time. • These 8 time alarms can be set by a single station (multiple) or 8 different stations (single) or a combination i.e. one

station can set 4 time alarms (multiple) and other 4 stations can set single alarms (in total 8). • When 8 time alarms are set in total, no other station can set any other alarm. • Time is in 24-hour format i.e. 4:30PM is 1630 hrs.

How to use it?

Single Alarm

Multiple Alarms

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 161-Minutes. Confirmation tone3 Replace the handset.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 161-Minutes. Confirmation tone3 Dial 161-Minutes. Confirmation tone4 Replace the handset.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 162-Hours-Minutes. Confirmation tone3 Replace the handset.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 162-Hours-Minutes. Confirmation tone


Matrix

Example:Dial 162-1630 to set a reminder at 4:30PM.

Daily Alarm

What's this? • You can ask the Cosine to remind you daily at some specific time. • At the set time, your station starts ringing. • When you lift the handset, you get music or voice message. • A maximum of 8 daily alarms can be set at a time. • These 8 daily alarms can be set by a single station (multiple) or 8 different stations (single) or a combination i.e. one

station can set 4 daily alarms (multiple) and other 4 stations can set single alarms (in total 8). • When 8 daily alarms are set in total, no other station can set any other alarm. • Time is in 24-hour format i.e. 6:30PM is 1830 hrs.

How to use it?

Single Alarm

Multiple Alarms

Example:Dial 163-1230 to set a daily reminder for lunch at 12:30PM.

Date and Time Alarm

What's this? • You can ask the Cosine to remind you on a specific date at a specific time. • At the set date and time, your station starts ringing. • When you lift the handset, you get music or voice message. • A maximum of 8 date and time alarms can be set at a time. • These 8 date and time alarms can be set by a single station (multiple) or 8 different stations (single) or a combination

i.e. one station can set 4 date and time alarms (multiple) and other 4 stations can set single alarms (in total 8). • When 8 duration alarms are set in total, no other station can set any other alarm. • Time is in 24-hour format i.e. 6:30PM is 1830 hrs. Date is from 01 to 31, Month is from 01 to 12 and year is from 0000

to 9999.

How to use it?

Single Alarm

Multiple Alarms

3 Dial 162-Hours-Minutes. Confirmation tone4 Replace the handset.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 163-Hours-Minutes. Confirmation tone3 Replace the handset.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 163-Hours-Minutes. Confirmation tone3 Dial 163-Hours-Minutes. Confirmation tone4 Replace the handset.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 164-Date-Month-Year-Hours-Minutes. Confirmation tone3 Replace the handset.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 164-Date-Month-Year-Hours-Minutes. Confirmation tone3 Dial 164-Date-Month-Year-Hours-Minutes. Confirmation tone4 Replace the handset.


Matrix

Example:Dial 164-01-04-2006-11-00 to set a date and time reminder on 1st April at 11:00 am.

Remote Alarm

What's this? • You can set alarm for some other station from your station. • At the set time, the station starts ringing. • When you lift the handset, you get music or voice message. • Receptionists can use this feature to wake up their guests in hotels. • The return alarm ring will go to the operator and not on the station from where the alarm is set. • To cancel remote alarm for any station, dial 165-Station-0. Station refers to the station on which remote alarm was

earlier set. • This feature can be used only if allowed from Class of Service.

How to use it?

Example: To set a daily wake up alarm at 5.30 am on station 203 from station 206, dial 165-203-3-0530 from station 206.

Cancel Alarms

What's this? You can ask the Cosine to cancel all the pending alarms. Dialing 160 from the station will cancel all the alarms set on that station. Suppose time alarm, duration alarm and daily alarm all are set on station 23. Now, if you dial 160 from the station, all the alarms will be cancelled.

How to use it?

Example:To cancel the alarms set on station 206, dial 160 from station 206. To cancel remote alarm set on station 206 from station 203, dial 165-206-0 from station 203.

How to program? Please refer ‘Class of Service (COS)’ for details on how to enable Remote Alarm access to a user.

Timers of Relevance: Alarm Ring Timer1: Time for which the station gets alarm ring. Command: 2801-Seconds-#*Default: 045 seconds Valid Range: 001 to 255 seconds

Alarm Ring Timer2: Time for which the operator station rings if alarm ring on the original station was not answered. Command: 2802-Seconds-#*Default: 045 seconds (for Asia); 060 seconds (for Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America) Valid Range: 001 to 255 seconds

Important Points:• A station gets alarm ring for 045 seconds. This is called Alarm Ring Timer1 and is programmable. • If a station user does not answer the alarm ring, the Cosine gives ring to the operator station. The operator station

rings for 045 seconds. This is called Alarm Ring Timer2 and is programmable.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 165-Station-1-Minutes (Duration)

Dial 165-Station-2-Hours-Minutes (Time)Dial 165-Station-3-Hours-Minutes (Daily)Dial 165-Station-4-Date-Month-Year-Hours-Minutes (Date and Time)Dial 165-Station-0 (Cancel Remote Alarm)

Confirmation tone

3 Replace the handset.

1 Lift the handset on which the alarm is set. Dial tone2 Dial 160. Confirmation tone3 Replace the handset.


Matrix

• A voice message can be played to the station user in place of music. Voice message should be enabled for this feature. Please refer Voice Message Applications for details.

• If the station is engaged at the time of alarm then the station gets ring when it becomes free.• A Maximum of 8 stations can set alarms at a time (one each).• You can set all types of alarms simultaneously on the same station.• When 8 different stations alarms have been set, if another station attempts setting an alarm, it receives an error tone.• On using this feature from DKP, the Cosine offers a menu list to the user to choose from. On dialing 16, the DKP

displays ‘Duration Alarm'. The user should use 'Up'/'Down' keys to navigate and select the required alarm type. For use details, please refer 'EON45_EonSoft User's Guide'.

Relevant Topics: 1. Class of Service (COS) 112 2. Voice Message Applications 328

=X=X=


Matrix

Allowed List and Denied List

What's this? Allowed list and Denied list are groups of number strings. Cosine uses these lists to support four different features viz. Toll Control, Dynamic Lock, Call Duration Control and SMDR filters.

Association of Allowed List and Denied List with Toll Control: When the number is dialed from a station, the Cosine compares the dialed number string with the number strings in allowed list and denied list.

Association of Allowed list and Denied list with Dynamic Lock: If the user locks the station and thereafter dials a number from his station, the Cosine compares the dialed number string with the number strings in allowed list and denied list for the locked status.

Association of Allowed list and Denied list with Call Duration Control: If Call Duration Control feature is set on a station, the Cosine compares the dialed number string with the number strings in allowed list and denied list for Call Duration Control (CDC) condition. The Cosine disconnects the call if the number string dialed by the station matches with the denied list for CDC condition.

Association of allowed list and denied list with SMDR:The system will check the numbers in allowed number list and denied number list for the SMDR call storage and printing filters. This is applicable for both SMDR-Incoming and SMDR-Outgoing.

How it works? • Maximum 15 Allowed lists could be formed. • Maximum 15 Denied lists could be formed. • Maximum 16 entries (i.e. number strings) can be programmed in one allowed or one denied list. • Each entry (i.e. one number string) can have maximum of 16 digits.• Number string can be a complete telephone number, area code or few initial digits of a telephone number. • An allowed and a denied list should be assigned to each station depending upon the feature and the requirement. A completed allowed list/denied list would look as below:Allowed List/Denied List Number String1 Number String2 ...... Number String16

01 Max. 16 digits Max. 16 digits .... Max. 16 digits02 Max. 16 digits Max. 16 digits .... Max. 16 digits03 Max. 16 digits Max. 16 digits .... Max. 16 digits: : : : :

15 Max. 16 digits Max. 16 digits .... Max. 16 digits

Allowed Listand

Denied List

DynamicLock

Call DurationControl

Toll Control


Matrix

Default Allowed lists for Asian users.

Default Denied Lists for Asian users.

Default Allowed Lists for user of Europe/North America/South America/Africa/Australia looks as below:

Default Denied Lists (European/North American/South American/African/Australasian users) look as below:

How to program?Step 1: Take a pen and a paper and decide which number strings are to be programmed in allowed list and in the denied

list. Step 2: Program the number strings in the allowed list using command 6301. Step 3: Program the number strings in the denied list using command 6302.

Loc./List 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 1601 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B02 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B03 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B04 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B05 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B06 0 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B: B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B

15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B B B * # F

Loc./List 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 1601 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B B B * # F02 0 95 98 96 94 3 5 B B B B B B * # F03 0 95 98 94 B B B B B B B B B * # F04 0 95 B B B B B B B B B B B * # F05 0 B B B B B B B B B B B B * # F06 00 B B B B B B B B B B B B * # F: B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B

15 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B

Loc./List 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 1601 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B02 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B03 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B04 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B05 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B06 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B: B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B


Loc./List 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 1601 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B02 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B03 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B04 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B05 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B06 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B: B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B



Matrix

Step 1Take a pen and a paper. Decide which of the above-mentioned three features are to be used. Make the allowed and denied lists accordingly.

Step 2Use following command to program numbers in the allowed list: 6301-Allowed List-Location Index-Number-#* Where, Allowed list is from 01 to 15. Location Index is from 01 to 16. Number is a complete telephone number, truncated telephone number or an area code of maximum 16 digits. If the number is less than 16 digits terminate it with #*.

Step 3Use following command to program numbers in the denied list: 6302-Denied List-Location Index-Number-#* Where, Denied list is from 01 to 15.Location Index is from 01 to 16.Number is a complete telephone number, truncated telephone number or an area code of maximum 16 digits. If the number is less than 16 digits terminate it with #*.

Example 1:Program Allowed List and Denied List for following constraints: • Allow all calls except long distance calls (Starting with 00). • Only local calls should be allowed in dynamic lock condition. • All calls starting with '95' and '0' should get disconnected after 180 seconds.

Solution:First examine the default lists. • This condition can be fulfilled using default denied list 06.• This condition can also be fulfilled using default denied list 02.• This condition can also be fulfilled using default denied list 04.Since all the constraints can be satisfied with default lists then there is no need to program these lists.

Example 2:Program Allowed List and Denied List for following constraints: • Allow all calls except long distance calls. • Only local calls should be allowed in dynamic lock condition. • Disconnect all calls starting with '0' after 180 seconds except calls starting with '022'.

Solution:First examine the default lists:• This condition can be fulfilled using default denied list 06.• This condition can also be fulfilled using default denied list 02.• In this case default denied list 05 could be used (since it contains 0). However an allowed list should be programmed

to program 022 in allowed list.

Use following command to program 022 in allowed list 07: 6301-07-01-022-#

Use the following command to program a number in all Allowed Lists at a particular location Index: 6301-**-Location Index-Number-#* Where,Location Index is from 01 to 16.Number is a telephone number string, maximum of 16 digits.

Use the following command to program a number in all Denied Lists at a particular location Index:6302-**-Location Index-Number-#* Where,Location Index is from 01 to 16.Number is a telephone number string, maximum of 16 digits.


Matrix

Clear commandsUse the following command to clear an index in a Allowed List: 6301-Allowed List-Location Index-#* Where, Allowed List is from 01 to 15. Location Index is from 01 to 16.

Use the following command to clear an index in a Denied Lists: 6302-Denied List-Location Index-#* Where, Denied List is from 01 to 15. Location Index is from 01 to 16.

Use the following command to clear a particular index from all allowed lists: 6301-**-Location Index-#*

Use the following command to clear a particular index from all denied lists: 6302-**-Location Index-#*

Default allowed lists and denied lists are attached herewith for ready reference.

The Allowed and Denied Lists can be programmed from SA mode also.

Relevant Topics:1. Toll Control 3052. Dynamic Lock 184 3. Call Duration Control 83

=X=X=


Matrix

Alternate Number Dialing

What's this?• The Cosine tries alternate numbers if the dialed number is busy.• Many times when we make a call, to an organization we find that the called number is busy. Hence we try alternate

numbers of that organization. We keep trying all the alternate numbers of the organization till the call gets through and we talk to the desired person. This is very frustrating and time-consuming.

• Alternate Number Dialing rescues us from this sheer wastage of time. We need not keep dialing the alternate numbers. Even we need not remember alternate numbers instead we simply need to Redial the number or set Auto-redial for the number. Doing so, the system tries alternate numbers. If Auto-Redial is requested, the system gives you the ring when the number goes through.

How to use it? The Station user simply has to Redial or Auto-Redial the last number. The system automatically tries alternate numbers.

How it works?• Global Directory is used to accomplish this feature. • An Alternate group number should be assigned to a number in the Global Directory. • An Alternate group number can be from 00 to 99. • Suppose two numbers programmed at index 11 and 12 in the global directory are to be used as Alternate numbers

then both the numbers should be programmed as one group. • When a station user dials an external number, the system checks for it in the global directory. If the number is busy

and if the user tries Redial then the system automatically opts for Alternate Number dialing. It tries next number available in the Alternate group. If this number is also busy, it tries next number in the group. All the numbers are tried in this way. This continues as long as the user tries redial.

• If the user tries Auto-Redial, the system tries for all the numbers in the group one by one. If any of the number is through, it gives the ring to the caller. If all the numbers are busy in the group then the system sets Auto-Redial for the last number dialed and waits for RBT from the called end. It informs the caller when the call is through by giving a ring.

For example, ABC Ltd. has four telephone numbers all are to be used as Alternate Numbers then these four numbers should be programmed in the global directory from index 11 to 14. All these numbers should be assigned one Alternate group say 01. Doing so, all these numbers act as an Alternate Number for each other. Whenever a user dials any of these numbers and tries Redial or Auto-Redial, Alternate Number dialing logic gets activated i.e. when a user dials the first number and if it is busy and if the user tries redial then the system automatically dials the second number. This is repeated every time a redial is tried.

If no alternate number is available for a main number in the global directory then the system redials the last dialed number while trying redial feature or Auto Redial feature.

How to program?Step 1: List down the Numbers to be programmed in an alternate group.Step 2: Assign an unique Alternate Number group to all the numbers using command 2303.

Step 1List down the numbers to be programmed in an alternate group on a piece of paper.

Step 2Use following command to assign alternate group number: 2303-Index-Alternate Group Number-#* Where,Index is from 11 to 99.Alternate Group Number is from 00 to 99.This command can be executed in SA mode also.

Use following command to assign alternate group number to all global memory indexes: 2303-**-Alternate Group Number-#*

The Global Directory after assigning alternate group number looks as shown below:Index Main Number TAG Alternate Number Group

11 022281110001 1 01


Matrix

Example:Program the system for following for alternate number dialing: • ABC Ltd. has five telephone numbers viz. 313-823-4056, 313-823-4057, 313-823-4058, 313-823-4059 and 313-823-

4060• XYZ Ltd. has three telephone numbers viz. 819-113-3334, 819-113-3335 and 819-113-3336

Step 1Make a table as shown below: Program the global memory as above, please refer '“Abbreviated Dialing”' for more details.

Step 2Use following command to program Alternate Group number: 2303-11-01-#* 2303-12-01-#* 2303-13-01-#* 2303-14-01-#* 2303-15-01-#* 2303-16-05-#* 2303-17-05-#* 2303-18-05-#*

Important Points:• Alternate Numbers are used during Redial and Auto Redial. Hence all the timers related to these features should be

programmed properly.• If Auto-Redial is set for a number having Alternate numbers, the system tries all the Alternate numbers first and then

sets the Auto-Redial for the last number dialed. • One number can have one or more than one Alternate numbers. Maximum 90 alternate numbers can be assigned to

a number.• Alternate number works even when abbreviated dialing is used. Suppose user dials 811 (611 for North American/

South American users) and if the dialed out number is busy then on trying redial system tries alternate number related to 811 (611 for North American/South American users).

• Alternate number dialing is allowed to all the stations.• Assigning 00 as a Alternate Number Group means the number does not have a alternate number.• By default, 00 is the Alternate Number Group assigned to number in the global memory.

Relevant Topics:1. Abbreviated Dialing 392. Last Number Redial 216 3. Auto Redial 63

=X=X=

12 011234567890 3 0113 022281110002 1 01: : : :

99 033298765432 4 01

Index Main Number TAG Alternate Number Group11 3138234056 1 0112 3138234057 1 0113 3138234058 1 0114 3138234059 1 0115 3138234060 1 0116 8191133334 1 0517 8191133335 1 0518 9191133336 1 05

Index Main Number TAG Alternate Number Group


Matrix


Answer Signaling on SLT Port

What’s this?• As general application, telecom equipment like PCO machine is connected to the SLT port of the system. Now

whenever the called party (remote party) answers i.e. goes off-hook; it is required to inform the SLT port so that the PCO machine can consider the call as matured and start billing. In absence of this signal, the call is never considered as matured and hence no billing will be generated.

• To avoid such problems the system supports ‘Answer Signaling’. • During an OG call from SLT port, whenever called party answers, it provides an ‘answer signal’ which can be

generated on the SLT port to support the billing equipment or PCO machine or PBX if connected to the SLT port for considering the call to be matured.

• It is generated in the form of:• None• Polarity (Battery) Reversal

How it works?• Answer Signaling is applicable only for OG call made by SLT. • When a call is made from SLT port to BRI, the system will wait for the Answer Signal (Connect Message) on BRI.• When call is made from SLT port to Trunk Port, the system will wait for Answer Signal if set or Forced Maturity Timer

expiry. This timer is a Timer on expiry of which, the call will be considered as ‘mature’ irrespective of whether the call is actually matured or not.

• If Connect message is received on BRI or Answer supervision signal is detected on Trunk Port or Forced.• Maturity Timer expires for Trunk Port, the system will check the Answer Supervision signal programmed for the SLT

port from where call has been made.• The options for the Answer Supervision signal are as explained below:

• None: If this option is set, the system will not generate any answer signaling on the SLT port.• Polarity Reversal: The Polarity of the SLT port will get reversed. For example, if the battery polarity of the SLT

port is +ve for TIP and -ve for RING in speech condition then after call maturity, TIP will become -ve and Ring +ve.

How to program?Use following command to program the signal to be generated as Answer Supervision on SLT port:1307-SLT-Answer Supervision Signal-#*Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT from 01 to 32.

By default, Polarity (Battery) Reversal for each port.

Use following command to program the signal to be generated as Answer Supervision on all SLT ports:1307-**-Answer Supervision Signal-#*

Important Points:• There is also another option for the answer signal, called “12KHz/16KHz Pulse”. This is not supported as the system

does not support call metering circuit.• Answer Supervision signal on SLT port will be generated only in 2-way speech.

Related Topic:1. Disconnect Signaling on SLT Port 175

=X=X=

Answer Supervision Signal Meaning0 None1 Polarity (Battery) Reversal

Matrix

Answer Supervision on Trunk Port

What’s this?• As a general application the telecom equipment like PCO machine will be connected to the SLT port of the system.

Now whenever the called party (remote party) goes OFF-Hook, the caller should know about this, so that the PCO machine can consider the call as matured and start billing. In absence of this signal, the call will never be considered as matured and this will result in no billing.

• To solve such problems, the system supports ‘Answer Supervision on Trunk Port’. This helps in considering calls to be matured and accurate billing.

• It can be programmed from following options:• None• Polarity Reversal

How it works?• This signal is programmed for each Trunk Port when it is a destination port of the system. It is applicable only for OG

calls made through Trunk port.• Detection of Answer supervision signal is started when number is out dialed on the Trunk port in Store and Forward

case or Inter-digit timer expires or End of Dialing digit is dialed.• It is in form of None or Battery Reversal as explained below:

• None: It is used when no signaling is available from the CO. If this option is selected, the call will be considered as matured on expiry of ‘Forced Maturity Timer’ which is programmable. This timer is a system timer on expiry of which, the call will be considered as ‘mature’ irrespective of whether the call is actually matured or not. After this, system will start detecting ‘Disconnect Supervision on Trunk Port’ programmed for that port.

• Polarity Reversal: It is used as maturity signal when answer supervision is signaled in the form of Polarity Reversal. For example, if the battery polarity of the line is –ve for TIP and +ve for RING then after answering the call, by the called party, CO network will reverse the battery polarity i.e. TIP becomes +ve and Ring –ve.

How to program?Use following command to program the signal to be detected as Answer Supervision on Trunk:1626-Trunk-Answer Supervision Signal-#* Where,Trunk is from 01 to 08.

By default, Polarity (Battery) Reversal for each Trunk.

Use following command to program the signal to be detected as Answer Supervision on all Trunks:1626-**-Answer Supervision Signal-#*

Use following command to program the Forced Maturity Timer for Trunk:1609-Trunk-Forced Maturity Timer-#*Where,Trunk is from 01 to 08.Forced Maturity Timer is from 001 to 255 seconds.By default, 15 seconds for each port.

Important Points:• It is advisable to set the same Answer Supervision signal as provided by the PSTN network for the Trunk port. This is

explained with following example: • Suppose PSTN network supports Polarity Reversal signal as Answer and Disconnect supervision.• But the Answer supervision signal in the system is set as “None” and Disconnect supervision for the same port is

set as “Polarity Reversal”. • Thus, when call is made through this Trunk Port, call will get matured after Forced maturity timer (as Answer

supervision signal is set as ‘None’).• Now the system will start detecting Disconnect supervision signal programmed for that port.• Now when called party answers the call, PSTN generates answer supervision signal “Polarity Reversal” on the

port. • As disconnect supervision signal is set as Polarity reversal, system would detect this answer supervision signal as

disconnect supervision signal and disconnect the call.

Answer Supervision Signal Meaning0 None1 Polarity (Battery) Reversal


Matrix

• To avoid this SE should program Answer supervision signal as ‘Polarity Reversal’ which is same as supported by PSTN network.

• Thus, SE should take care while programming Answer Supervision signal.

Important Point:• Answer supervision on Trunk is also applicable for Hot Outward dialing also.

Related Topics:1. Disconnect Supervision on Trunk Port 1772. Trunk Parameters 3203. Hotline 201

=X=X=


Matrix

Auto Call Back (ACB)

Auto Call Back-On BusyWhat's this?• You need not keep dialing busy station repeatedly.• You can request Auto Call Back by dialing '2' when you get busy tone.• When the requested station becomes free it rings. Simultaneously your station also starts ringing.• Whosoever answers first gets ring-back tone. The other end keeps ringing.• Once the ring is answered, ring-back tone stops and speech is established. • You can request Auto Call Back on busy SLT or DKP. • You can also request Auto Call Back on busy trunk. As soon as the trunk becomes free you get ring. When you lift the

handset you get the trunk dial tone and you can start dialing desired number. • 16 stations can request for Auto Call Back-On Busy.

How to use it?

If you don't answer the Auto Call Back ring, it stops after 30 seconds and Auto Call Back request gets cleared. This is called Auto Call Back Ring Timer and is programmable.

Auto Call Back-on No Reply What's this? • You need not keep trying "no-reply" station repeatedly. • You can ask the Cosine to inform you whenever the requested person returns to his desk and lifts his handset. • You will get ring as if he has dialed your station and that station will get ring back tone. Once you answer the ring,

speech is established. • Any number of stations can request for Auto Call Back-On No Reply.

How to use it?

Cancel Auto Call Back-On Busy/On No Reply

Example:Station 203 is busy. To enable ACB, dial 2. If you have wrongly dialed 203 and disable ACB, dial 102 to cancel it.

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Auto Call Back to a user.

Timer of Relevance:Auto Call Back Ring Timer: Time after which the Auto Call Back Ring on the station stops. Command: 3001-Seconds-#*Default: 030 secondsValid Range: 001 to 255 seconds.

Important Points:• Only one ACB-On No Reply request is entertained at a time. • ACB-On Busy and ACB-On No Reply (explained above) can be set by the same user. • A station can set multiple ACB request. The last ACB request supersedes all previous ACB requests.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial Number. Busy tone 3 Dial 2. Confirmation tone 4 Replace handset.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial Number. Ring Back Tone 3 Dial 2. Confirmation tone

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 102. Confirmation tone 3 Replace handset.


Matrix

Relevant Topic:1. Class of Service (COS) 112

=X=X=


Matrix

Auto Redial

What's this?• The Cosine helps you to get through a busy external number by dialing the number repeatedly. • Many times when we make a call, we find that the called person is busy. Hence we have to try the same number

again and again to contact him. This is very frustrating and time-consuming. Auto Redial rescues us from this sheer wastage of time. You need not keep trying busy number repeatedly. You can ask the Cosine to keep trying the number. The Cosine gives you ring when the call goes through.

• The Cosine also allows multiple Auto Redial. Eight different numbers can be set for Auto Redial simultaneously.

How to use it? Single Auto Redial

Example:Dialed number 0265-2630555 is busy. To use Auto Redial feature, disconnect and dial 171.

Multiple Auto Redial

Example:• Dialed number 28010101 is busy. To set auto redial disconnect and dial 171. • Dialed number 02228101011 is busy. To set second auto redial, disconnect and dial 171. • Dialed number 01126384589 is busy. To set third auto redial, disconnect and dial 171.

To cancel Auto Redial

Example:Dialed number 0265-2630555 was busy. Auto Redial was requested. To cancel Auto Redial request, the station user should dial 170.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial Trunk Access Code. Trunk dial tone 3 Dial Number. Busy tone 4 Disconnect.5 Lift the handset. Dial tone 6 Dial 171. Confirmation tone 7 Replace the handset.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial Trunk Access Code. Trunk dial tone 3 Dial Number. Busy tone 4 Disconnect.5 Lift the handset. Dial tone 6 Dial 171. Confirmation tone 7 Replace the handset. Auto Redial set for first number.8 Repeat step 1 to 7. Auto Redial set for second number.9 Repeat step 1 to 7. Auto Redial set for third number.

10 Repeat step 1 to 7. Auto Redial set for fourth number.11 Repeat step 1 to 7. Auto Redial set for fifth number.12 Repeat step 1 to 7. Auto Redial set for sixth number.13 Repeat step 1 to 7. Auto Redial set for seventh number.14 Repeat step 1 to 7. Auto Redial set for eighth number.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 170. Confirmation tone3 Replace the handset.


Matrix

How it works?

Station user dials a number

Is the dialed number busy/not

responding?

Station user disconnects. Again lifts the handset and dials 171.

Auto Redial allowed to the station user and Auto

Redial counter < 3?

System gives confirmation tone and increments the Auto Redial number counter.

Station user goes ON-Hook and waits for Auto Redial call.

A

Call is through when the called party responds.

End

User gets error tone

End

No

Yes

Yes

No


Matrix

How to program? Auto Redial is a programmable feature. Please refer 'Class of Service (COS)' for details on how to allow Auto Redial to a user.

Timers of Relevance:Low Priority Auto Redial Use following command to program time duration between two trials:2204-Seconds-#* Where,Seconds is from 001 to 255.By default, time is 030 seconds.

Use following command to program the number of trials: 2205-Count-#*

A

The system dials the number and senses for RBT for 60 secs.

Is the dialed number busy?

B

The system increments Auto Redial retry count. Releases the trunk and waits for Auto Redial Retry Time.

Multiple Auto Redial?

Auto Redial number count =

0

System considers all the Auto Redial requests to be served and suspends Auto Redial activity

End

System informs the user by giving him a ring for 45 secs.

Station considers the ring. Caller and called party in speech.

System considers the request to be served and increments the Auto Redial number counter

End

The system dials second number requested for auto Redial

Current AR retry count=Max. AR retry

count?

AR retry time expired?

B

System waits for Auto Redial retry time

B

System suspends Auto Redial activity

End

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No


Matrix

Where,Count could be set from 001 to 255.By default, Count is 005.High Priority Auto Redial

Use following command to program time duration between two trials: 2206-Seconds-#* Where,Seconds is from 001 to 255.By default, Time is 010 seconds.

Use following command to program the number of trials: 2207-Count-#* Where,Count is from 001 to 255.By default, Count is 010.

Auto Redial Dial Tone Wait Timer: Time for which Cosine waits to sense the dial tone from the CO.Command: 2201-Seconds-#*Default: 003 seconds.Valid Range: 001 to 255 seconds.

Auto Redial RBT Wait Timer: Time for which Cosine waits to sense RBT from the CO after dialing the requested number.Command: 2202-Seconds-#*Default: 060 seconds.Valid Range: 001 to 255 seconds.

Auto Redial Ring Timer: Time for which the station that has requested Auto Redial rings in case of Auto Redial call.Command: 2203-Seconds-#*Default: 045 seconds.Valid Range: 001 to 255 seconds.

Important Points:• Two types of auto redial are possible-Low priority and High priority. • Generally the system should be programmed in such a manner that in low priority type the number of trials made by

the system (count) is less and the time gap between two trials (timer) is more. • Whereas, in high priority type the number of trials (count) is more and the time gap between two trials (timer) is less.• Eight numbers can be requested for Auto Redial at a time from one station.• More than one station can attempt auto redial/multiple auto redial simultaneously. The system can handle a maximum

number of 8 Auto Redials.• The system uses the same trunk access group used while dialing the number the first time. If the number was dialed

using group 1, the system takes one of the free trunks from group 1 for auto redial.• The system suspends auto redial if there is any activity (ringing/speech/dialing) on the station that requested auto

redial. It resumes as soon as the station becomes free.• Frequency and timings are critical for Auto Redial to work.• In case of multiple Auto Redial, selective cancellation of Auto Redial for a particular number among the numbers set

cannot be done.• If multiple Auto Redial is set, all the Auto Redial requests made from a station are cancelled on using cancel Auto

Redial code.

CAUTION!Auto-Redial does not work in following cases: • If the trunk lines do not support standard tones.• If trunk condition is poor and various tones cannot be detected properly.• If the called party lifts within 3 seconds after the ring starts on his phone.

Relevant Topics: 1. Class of Service (COS) 112 2. Alternate Number Dialing 56 3. Voice Message Applications 328

=X=X=


Matrix


AutoAttendant

What’s this?AutoAttendant is a feature by which the system handles the incoming calls just like an operator. It guides the caller via various prompts giving options to choose and process the call. Lot of flexibility is offered in the transferred call similar to real life scenario where an operator is present. Cosine houses one AutoAttendant module with 16 ports. That is Cosine supports 16 voice messages of 16 seconds each. These messages guide the caller during the call and enable the successful processing of the call.

The AutoAttendant Facility is primarily of great help during:• DID Call• DISA Call• Fax Call• Dial by Name Using DID

For More details about the individual features, please refer the individual chapters.

Important Points:• The AutoAttendant module is an optional module.• Since the system houses only one AutoAttendant module the system can be directly expanded from 0 to 16.

AutoAttendant ports and not stepwise as per requirement.

Relevant Topics:1. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 1612. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 1663. Dial by Name Using DID 1384. Fax Homing 1895. Voice Message Applications 328

=X=X=

Matrix

Automated Control Applications

What's this? The Cosine offers a Digital Output Port (DOP) for various control applications. There are 10 different modes in which the DOP can be operated. These 10 different modes and its application are given in the table below:

The user can issue switch OFF command manually, even if the DOP is programmed for any other mode.

How to program?Step 1: Program mode of operation using command 6401.Step 2: Program Duration ON timer using command 6402.Step 3: Program Duration OFF timer using command 6403.

Mode Switch ONMechanism

Switch OFFMechanism

Meaning Typical Applications

00 -- -- No Action DOP is deactivated.01 Manual Manual The DOP shall be switched ON and

OFF immediately on issuing the command (6407-0/1-#*).

The gadget connected to the DOP can be operated at any time as per the requirement. Typical application would be operating Office lights.

02 Manual Automatic The DOP shall be switched ON immediately on issuing 6407-1-#* and switched OFF after a programmed duration (OFF duration timer).

Door Lock. Door Lock is opened manually and is expected to be locked automatically after some time.

03 Automatic Manual The DOP shall be switched ON after programmed time (ON Duration Timer) from issuing the command (6407-1-#*) and switched OFF immediately on issuing (6407-0-#*).

A command can be issued to shut the door Lock from within the room itself before leaving the room. Doing, so the door would be locked when the person goes out the room.

04 Automatic Automatic The DOP shall be switched ON after programmed time (ON Duration Timer) from issuing the command (6407-1-#*) and switched OFF after programmed time (OFF Duration Timer).

Terrace lights can be operated.

05 Manual Scheduled The DOP shall be switched ON immediately on issuing the command (6407-1-#*) and switched OFF as per programmed scheduled.

Glow Sign boards. There are switched OFF irrespective of when they are switched ON.

06 Scheduled Manual The DOP shall be switched ON as per the schedule and switched OFF immediately on issuing the command (6407-0-#*).

Porch Light. These can be switched ON at the set time and can be switched OFF when required.

07 Scheduled Scheduled The DOP shall be switched ON and OFF as per the programmed scheduled.

School Bell. A school bell can be operated 24 times in a day.

08 Instigation Instigation The DOP shall be switched ON on receiving a signal from the DIP and switched OFF again on receiving a signal from DIP.

A Water Pump. A control circuit attached to the DOP can be switched ON/OFF depending on the sensors. The water pump can be turned ON when the tank goes empty and can be turned OFF when the tank gets full.

09 Instigation Manual The DOP shall be switched ON on receiving a signal from the DIP and switched OFF by issuing the command (6407-0-#*).

A hooter is connected to the DOP can be switched ON receiving a signal from the DIP to which a sensor like fire-alarm, smoke sensor, etc. is connected and can be switched OFF when required.

10 Instigation Automatic The DOP shall be switched ON on receiving a signal from the DIP and switched OFF after programmed time (OFF Duration Timer) from issuing the command (6407-0-#*).

An Emergency Siren in a factory. The instigation is from DIP to which a panic switch can be connected.


Matrix

Step 4: Program schedule ON timer using command 6405.Step 5: Program schedule OFF timer using command 6406.Step 6: Enable/Disable the entry in the timetable using command 6404.Step 7: Manual operation of DOP using command 6407.Step 8: Load default parameters using command 6408.

Step 1Use following command to choose the mode of operation for the DOP: 6401-Mode-#* Where,Mode is as per table given on previous page.By default, the mode is 01. This command is executed from SA mode.

Step 2Use following command to program ON Duration Timer: 6402-ON Duration Timer-#* Where,ON Duration Timer is in seconds from 001 to 255.By default, ON Duration Timer is 060 seconds.This command can be executed from SA mode also.

Step 3Use following command to program OFF Duration Timer: 6403-OFF Duration Timer-#* Where,OFF Duration Timer is in seconds from 001 to 255.By default, OFF Duration Timer is 060 seconds.This command can be executed from SA mode also.

Step 4Use following command to program the scheduled ON time: 6405-Index-Scheduled ON Time-#* Where,Index is from 01 to 24.Scheduled ON Time is in HH-MM-SS, 24-hour format.This command can be executed from SA mode also.

Step 5Use following command to program the schedule OFF time: 6406-Index-Scheduled OFF Time-#* Where,Index is from 01 to 24.Scheduled OFF Time is in HH-MM-SS, 24-hour format (This command can be executed from SA mode also).

Step 6Use the following command to enable/disable an entry in the timetable: 6404-Index-Flag-#* Where,Index is from 01 to 24.

By default, the flag is disabled for all entries.

A scheduled table looks like below: When the mode of operation of a relay is programmed as scheduled the system monitors the scheduled table. Only when the flag is enabled the system responds to the entry.

Flag Meaning 0 Disable 1 Enable

Index Scheduled ON Time Scheduled OFF Time Flag 01 09:30:00 09:30:45 1 02 10:15:00 10:15:45 0


Matrix

Please note that scheduled OFF time should be greater than scheduled ON time. Also the system makes each entry in ascending order of time i.e. morning time should be programmed before evening time activities.

Step 7Use following command to operate DOP manually: 6407-Flag-#* Where,

This can be executed in the SA mode also.

Step 8Use following command to default the Control application parameters of the DOP: 6408-#*

On issuing above commands, the time table would look as shown below:

Relay mode is now manual ON-manual OFF, duration timer are set to 060. This command can be executed from the SA mode.

Example:Program Cosine for following constraints: A school wants to ring the school bell at following times:

6401-07 (Program the mode as scheduled ON and scheduled OFF)6405-01-070000-#*6405-02-072000-#*6405-03-080000-#*6405-04-083000-#*6405-05-090000-#*6405-06-093000-#*

: : : : : : : :

24 00:00:00 00:00:00 0

Code Meaning 0 DOP OFF 1 DOP ON

Index Switch ON Time Switch OFF Time Flag 01 00:00:00 00:00:00 0 02 00:00:00 00:00:00 0 03 00:00:00 00:00:00 0 : : : : : : : :

23 00:00:00 00:00:00 0 24 00:00:00 00:00:00 0

ON Time OFF Time 07:00:00 07:00:45 07:20:00 07:20:30 08:00:00 08:00:30 08:30:00 08:30:30 09:00:00 09:00:30 09:30:00 09:30:45 10:15:00 10:15:45 10:45:00 10:45:30 11:15:00 11:15:30 11:45:00 11:45:30 12:15:00 12:15:45

Index Scheduled ON Time Scheduled OFF Time Flag


Matrix

6405-07-101500-#*6405-08-104500-#*6405-09-111500-#*6405-10-114500-#*6405-11-121500-#*

6406-01-070045-#*6406-02-072030-#*6406-03-080030-#*6406-04-083030-#*6406-05-090030-#*6406-06-093045-#*6406-07-101545-#*6406-08-104530-#*6406-09-111530-#*6406-10-114530-#*6406-11-121545-#*

6404-01-1-#*6404-02-1-#*6404-03-1-#*6404-04-1-#*6404-05-1-#*6404-06-1-#*6404-07-1-#*6404-08-1-#*6404-09-1-#*6404-10-1-#*6404-11-1-#*

These commands are required to enable the entries in the scheduled table for the Cosine to respond to them.

Important Point:• DOP can be operated remotely (manual mode) using DISA.

Relevant Topics:1. Real Time Clock 2612. Digital Input Port (DIP) 1423. Digital Output Port (DOP) 160

=X=X=


Matrix


Background Music (BGM)

What's this?The stations having DKP can listen to sweet background music. The background music could be from internal music source or external music source or from voice module.

How to use it? To start Back Ground Music

To deactivate Back Ground Music

How to program? Use following command to program BGM: 5302-Music Type-#* Where,

This command can be executed from the SA mode also.

Important Points:• The volume of back ground music can be controlled using the Volume key of the DKP. • When an incoming call comes on the station, the background music automatically stops and the DKP rings. • While making an outgoing call, when the user presses speaker key or goes OFF-Hook, the background stops and the

user gets system dial tone.• When any activity is done on the DKP like pressing a key for using a feature, etc. the Back Ground Music stops. When

the station user goes ON-Hook, the Back Ground Music starts again. • The music type can be programmed by the status.

Relevant Topics: 1. Music on Hold 234 2. External Music 188 3. Voice Message Applications 328

=X=X=

1 Dial 1099. Confirmation tone2 Press ‘SPK’ key. Background Music.

1 Dial 1099. Confirmation tone

Music Type Meaning1 Internal Music/External Music2 Voice Module

Matrix


Barge-In

What's this? • When your call is urgent and you cannot wait for the called person to become free, you can land in his conversation

after intimating him.• While landing, you get ring back tone and the called person gets beeps for 10 seconds. This timer is called Barge-In

timer. This timer is programmable. • During the beeps, the called person can dial 'Flash' to answer your call. • If the called party does not respond during these 10 seconds, caller forcefully gets connected with the called person.

The third party is put on hold, gets music, and hence cannot listen to your conversation. • Disconnect once your talk is over. This will automatically restore the original talk of the called person with the held-up

party.

How to use it?

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Barge-In to a user.

Timer of Relevance: Barge-In Timer: Time after which the caller gets connected to the called party.Command: 3003-Seconds-#*Default: 010 secondsValid Range: 001 to 255 seconds

Important Points:• Barge-In can be used only if it is allowed in the user's Class of Service (COS). • Barge-In works even when the destination is talking on the trunk line.• Barge-In works if the called person is in 2-way, normal speech.• Barge-In is ineffective if the called person is having call privacy from Barge-In.• Barge-In can also be used after putting one party in hold. An important trunk call can be transferred to a busy station

after putting the calling party in hold and barging-in on the busy destination to inform him about his call.• This is most advantageous feature for the operator while transferring calls.

Relevant Topics:1. Class of Service (COS) 112 2. Privacy 247

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial Number. Busy tone3 Dial 4. RBT. The called person gets beeps.4 The system connects you to the destination after 10 seconds. Start talking.5 Replace the handset on completion of talk.

Matrix


Battery Back-Up

What's this? The Cosine provides battery backup. A battery of 24V/7-10 AH or two batteries of 12V/7-10AH can be connected. With these batteries, a back up time of 5-6 hours can be ensured, provided the batteries are fully charged. However, the battery back up time depends upon the load of the system during the power failure condition.

How to connect?The Battery cable is provided by Matrix. The polarity is marked on the battery cable and also at the battery connector provided on the system. If a 24V/7-10 AH battery is used, then connect one end of the battery cable to the battery and the other end of the battery cable to the battery connector on the system.

If two 12V/7-10 AH batteries are used then first connect these two batteries using the Battery link provided by Matrix. Please refer the figure given below. Connect one end of the battery cable to the battery and the other end of the cable to the battery connector on the system.

Technical Specifications:

Important Points:• The system cannot be directly operated on the battery. During Power ON the system should reset on AC mains

supply. However, if there is a power failure thereafter and the battery is connected, the system will now operate with battery backup.

• When the system is connected to the battery please ensure the batteries are fully charged.• Explosion might occur if the battery is incorrectly replaced.• Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type.• Dispose the used batteries.

=X=X=

Charging Current Amp.Under Voltage Cut OFF 20 Volts

Cosine

Matrix Battery Cable

Battery Connector

24V Battery

Matrix

Behind the PBX Applications

What's this?Many times, small and medium range PBX systems are connected behind some bigger PBX systems. Such applications are used mainly to expand the existing capacity of the big PBX already in use. Stations (SLT) coming from the big PBX are used as trunks of the small PBX. There could also be some CO trunks coming directly on the smaller PBX. Such configurations are known as 'Behind the PBX' application.

In such situations, it is not easy to implement toll control restrictions.

Consider a simple eventStation 21 of PBX B in the figure above is not given long distance dialing facility. It has access to all the trunks. Now when he wants to use T4, T5 or T6, which are directly coming from CO, he dials '0'(9 for North American/South American users). He gets CO dial tone and dials the number. But when he does similar procedure on T1, T2 or T3, he gets error tone. Because, in this case when station 21grabs T1 by dialing a code, he gets dial tone of the PBX A. Now when he again dials '0' (9 for North American/South American users) to grab CO dial tone, PBX understands it to be a long distance call and since station 21 isn't allowed long distance calls, the system rejects dialing on trunk and gives error tone to station A.

Hence now if station 21 of PBX B is to be allowed external dialing through T1, T2 and T3, he should be given long distance dialing access. If this is done then station 21 may make long distance calls on T4, T5 and T6.

The Cosine solves this problem by providing programmable Pre-PSTN count for each trunk. This count is the number of digits to be ignored before toll control check is begun. The PBX Expansion count is same as the number of PBX connected between the main the PBX and the last subscriber.In the figure shown, the PBX Expansion count of T1, T2 and T3 should be kept 1 and for T4, T5 and T6, it shouldbe kept '0'.

CAUTION!For all normal applications, keep this PBX Expansion count to 0 for all the trunks. Otherwise, outside dialing may be hampered. LCR and SMDR will also be affected.

The Cosine supports PBX Expansion count for each trunk.

How to program? Use following command to program PBX Expansion Count (PEC) for a trunk: 5001-Trunk-PEC Count-#*

Trunk Port PBX Expansion Count 01 0 02 0 03 0 : : : : : :

12 0

PSTN

PBX A

PBX B

T1T2T3T4

Tn

S1

S2

S3

Sn

T2T3

T1S7

21

22

23

21

22

23

28

S1

S2

S3

Sn


Matrix

Where, Trunk = Trunk software port number from 01 to 12. PEC Count from 0 to 9.By default, PEC count for all trunks is 0.

Use following command to program PBX Expansion Count (PEC) for all trunks: 5001-**-PEC Count-#*

Example:Program PBX Expansion Count = 1 for trunk port 11. 5001-11-1-#*

=X=X=


Matrix


Boss Ring

What's this?This feature helps the user to identify the caller. Cosine offers 10 different types of rings. Whenever a person having higher priority calls a station with lower priority, the system gives different ring at the called station. This helps the user to identify the caller.

Relevant Topic:1. Distinctive Rings 179

=X=X=

Matrix

Call Disconnect Tone (CDT)

What's this?• During following call events, the Trunk port of Cosine system, does not get release and remains off-hook only.• Disconnection by the called party, during a call from SLT to Trunk.• Disconnection by the calling party, during a call from Trunk to BRI/Trunk port. To solve such problems and release the

Trunk port, the Cosine system supports a feature 'Detection of Call Disconnect Tone (CDT)'.• The CDT which is sent by the PSTN network, when the calling party disconnects the Incoming call on Trunk port; is

sensed and used by the Cosine system to release the Trunk port.• The CDT which is sent by the PSTN network, when the called party disconnects the Outgoing call from Trunk port; is

also sensed by the Cosine system and used to release the port.

How it works? • CDT detection is applicable only for the Trunk port for both Incoming and Outgoing calls.• It can be enable/disable for each Trunk port.• This feature is described two call types:

• Disconnect tone detection for "Outgoing Calls + All Incoming calls states other than DID No Dial State”.• Disconnect tone detection in “DID No Dial State”.• Enabling CDT detection for “Outgoing calls + All Incoming calls states other than DID No Dial State” enables

disconnect tone detection during OG Call, Non DID incoming calls and DID incoming calls after routing to the station user.

• Enabling CDT detection in "DID No Dial State” enables disconnect tone detection during DID incoming call in which caller doesn't dial any digit. When DID incoming call gets answered by any station, the system will detect the disconnection tone as per the flag set for "Outgoing calls + All Incoming calls states other than DID No Dial State".

• A parameter called "DID Disconnect Tone Detection Timer" is programmed for a Trunk, to use CDT for the call types mentioned above.

• This Timer is of significance only if the CDT detection is enabled at "DID No Dial State" and caller doesn't dial any digit during DID Greeting message/Dial beep timer.

• The Timer will start after No Dial message (if assigned) or on expiry of the 'DID Dial Beep Timer'.• If the CDT detection is enabled in "DID No Dial State" and caller doesn't dial any digit during DID Dial tone timer, the

system will start the "DID Disconnect Tone Detection Timer". During this time the call will be processed as mentioned below:• If CDT is found in this, Trunk port will get released.• If CDT is not found during this timer, the call will be processed normally (routed to programmed destination). But

the system will look for the CDT detection if flag is enable for "All Call states other than DID No Dial State”.

Detection of CDT • The Call Disconnect Tone consists of ON-OFF cadence (time) and a frequency. The ON-OFF time is programmable

for each Trunk port to accommodate variation in the Call Disconnect Tone signal's variation between Service Providers.

• Call Disconnect tone frequency is not programmable. The Cosine System can detect any frequency from 275Hz to 665Hz.

• For Out going call from the Trunk port, detection of CDT is started immediately without waiting for expiry of Inter-digit wait timer or call maturity.

• For detailed call processing of CDT for Incoming call refer the flow chart at the end of chapter.• The tone detection; used for disconnection of the call is explained by following example:

• As shown, the user of Extension (X) dials to Party (Y) from the SLT port of System. • System routes the call from the Trunk port and the called Party (Y) answers the call.

PSTNTrunk1Trunk2

Trunkn

Cosine

Calling Party (X)

SLT1SLT2

SLTnCalled Party (Y)


Matrix

• After conversation the Called Party (Y) goes ON-Hook. • After certain time PSTN N/w (Called Party's PSTN N/w) will send 'Disconnect Tone' to the Trunk Port. • The Cosine System will match the Call Disconnection Tone's cadence and frequency with the programmed ON time

and OFF Time. • If it is matched as per allowed tolerance etc and if the frequency is also in the detectable range, the tone will be

considered CDT. When CDT is detected, the Trunk Port is made On-hook. Finally the call will be disconnected.

How to program? Use following command to program Disconnection Tone's ON Time for Trunk: 1631-Trunk-ON Time-#* Where,Trunk is from 01 to 08.ON Time is from 0001 to 9999 ms.By default, 750ms for each port.

Use following command to program Disconnection Tone's ON Time for all Trunks: 1631-**-ON Time-#*

Use following command to program Disconnection Tone's OFF Time for Trunk: 1632-Trunk-OFF Time-#* Where,Trunk is from 01 to 08.OFF Time is from 0001 to 9999 milliseconds.By default, 750ms for each port.

Use following command to program Disconnection Tone's OFF Time for all Trunks: 1632-**-OFF Time-#*

Use following command to Enable/Disable Disconnect tone detection for "DID No Digit Dial State" for Trunk: 1629-Trunk-Flag-#* Where,Trunk is from 01 to 08.

By default, Disable for each port.

Use following command to Enable/Disable Disconnect tone detection for "DID No Digit Dial State" for all Trunks: 1629-**-Flag-#*

Use following command to Enable/Disable Disconnect tone detection for Outgoing Call + All Incoming Call states other than "DID No Digit Dial State" for Trunk: 1630-Trunk-Flag-#* Where,Trunk is from 01 to 08.

By default, Disable for each port.

Use following command to Enable/Disable Disconnect tone detection for Outgoing call + All Incoming call states other than "DID No Digit Dial State" for all Trunks: 1630-**-Flag-#*

Use following command to program DID Disconnect Tone Detection Timer for Trunk: 1633-Trunk-Timer-#* Where,Trunk is from 01 to 08.Timer is from 1 to 9 seconds.By default, 3 seconds for each Trunk.

Flag Meaning 0 Disable (Do not detect Disconnect tone) 1 Enable (Detect Disconnect tone)

Flag Meaning 0 Disable (Do not detect Disconnect tone) 1 Enable (Detect Disconnect tone)


Matrix

Use following command to program DID Disconnect Tone Detection Timer for all Trunks: 1633-**-Timer-#*

Important Points:• Interaction of parameter CDT with other parameters is explained below:

• DISA: CDT detection is insignificant if DISA is enabled on the Trunk. • DISA+DID: If DID and DISA both are enabled on any Trunk, and call gets routed using DISA feature, CDT

Detection will not be started even if it is enabled. • If DID and DISA both are enabled on any Trunk, and call gets routed using DID feature, CDT Detection will be

applicable as programmed. • Disconnect Tone's ON Time and OFF Time (Cadence) can be known from PSTN Exchange from which Trunk line

is subscribed. • If the Disconnect tone (CDT) flag is enabled for both Trunk during Trunk-Trunk transfer, call will get disconnect

after Trunk-Trunk Inactivity timer. Thus, program Trunk-Trunk Inactivity timer value to the maximum if Disconnect tone detection is required.

Relevant Topics:1. Answer Supervision on Trunk Port 59 2. Disconnect Supervision on Trunk Port 177 3. Trunk Parameters 3204. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 161 5. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 166 6. Call Transfer 103


Matrix

Flow charts for Call Disconnect Tone logic for Incoming Call:

Start

Ring on Trunk

Is DID activated on

trunk?

System answers the call by making trunk OFF-Hook

Start DTMF detection

Is voice message greeting programmed

for this trunk and current time zone?

System plays the greeting message

System gives beeps to the caller prompting him to dial the desired station/Dial message and beeps

B

System routes the call on the programmed destination station

Station user answers the call

CDT detection for OG calls + All IC call states other than DID

No Dial state?Don’t detect CDT

End

Start CDT Detection

Valid CDT detected?

Release trunk

End

Station user ON-Hook?

Release trunk

End

System plays the music

Yes

No

No

Yes

Disable

Enable

Yes

No

No

Yes

C

A


Matrix

=X=X=

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

Yes

Enable

Disable

Yes

No

Yes

No

Enable

Disable

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

B

Has the caller dial any digit/s?

Is digit/s dialed valid station No.?

Is the station free?

System transfers the call to the dialed station

Stop DTMF detection

Start DID Ring Timer

Give RBT to caller

CDT detection for all call states other then DID No Dial

state?

Connect caller with the station

F

Stop CDT detection if started

Start DTMF Detection Mode

Play DID No Reply Message (if assigned) of give dialing beeps

B

Play the DID error message or give error tone

A

Play DID busy message or give busy tone

Has the DID beeps timer

expired?

Stop DTMF detection

CDT detection for DID No Dial

state?

Start CDT detection for DID call disconnect tone detection timer

Play DID no dial message if assigned

DID CDT detection timer expired?

Continue CDT detection

Valid CDT detection?

Release trunk

End

Play DID No dial message if assigned

Station user answers?

CDT detection for OG+All IC call

states other then DID No Dial state?

Start CDT Detection

Valid CDT detected?

Release trunk

End

DID inactivity timer expired?

Release Trunk

Stop ringing station

End

D

Stop DID inactivity timer

C

C

Route call to programmed destination. Give RBT to caller.

Start DID Inactivity Timer

D

F


Matrix

Call Duration Control

What's this?Call Duration Control (CDC) helps the customer to restrict the duration of the calls whether, incoming or outgoing external calls. This feature disconnects incoming or outgoing external calls after a set time. People tend to talk about sports, movies, politics and such other subjects over telephone. Now, these topics are generally not related to business. Moreover, such topics tend to take more time than the business talk for which the call was originally made. If duration of each call can be restricted, people will talk to the point and not drift to other unproductive talk. There are many advantages: • Reduction in telephone bills. • Trunks will be easily available for other outgoing calls. More business calls can be made during working hours leading

to more business. • Your trunks remain free for incoming calls. More customers can call. • People spend more time on the actual job on hand rather than on telephone. This means increased productivity.

How it works? • Cosine uses Allowed Lists and Denied Lists to support this feature. • When a call is made, the Cosine compares each digit of the dialed number string with the number strings in Allowed

List and Denied List. • If the dialed number string matches with any of the number strings available in allowed list, the Cosine treats CDC to

be OFF and does not disconnect the call. • If the dialed number string matches with any of the number strings available in denied list, the Cosine treats CDC to

be ON and disconnects the call after CDC timer (Provided CDC Disconnection flag is enabled).• If the dialed number matches with a number string that is available in both allowed and denied list then allowed list is

given priority and Cosine treats CDC to be OFF. • The Cosine gives warning beep to the user on expiry of the CDC timer. The call continues for another 20 seconds

after the beep and gets disconnected if the disconnection flag is enabled. This timer is fixed. • If the disconnection flag is disabled then the system does not disconnect the call but reloads the CDC timer again. • The system gives warning beeps every time the CDC timer is matured. This helps the user to know the duration for

which he has been talking.

How to use it?• Call Duration Control can be set for each station. • Call Duration Control for Incoming calls can be enabled/disabled.• Call Duration Control for External Outgoing calls can be enabled/disabled.• Enabling CDC for different types of calls, defining the CDC timer, assigning allowed and denied lists, etc. forms a

table called CDC table.

Each CDC Table looks like:

• Maximum five CDC tables can be programmed.• One such table can be assigned to the SLT or the DKP user.• All CDC tables are programmed with values that satisfies most of the requirements. Hence, for most common

requirements these tables can be directly assigned to the stations.

Parameter ValueIncoming Call Control Yes/NoOutgoing Call Control Yes/NoAllowed List List Number from 01 to 15Denied List List Number from 01 to 15CDC Timer 000-999 SecondsCDC Disconnection Flag Yes/No

Warning Beep

CDC Warn Timer 20 Seconds

Total time after which call will be disconnected


Matrix

• However for special types of requirements, customized Allowed List and Denied List should be programmed and should be assigned to a CDC table. Then after this CDC table should be assigned to a station. Please refer Allowed List and Denied List for more details.

• For example, to disconnect all calls starting with '0' except those starting with '022', program an allowed list with string '022' and denied list with string '0' and assign these lists to the CDC table.

By default, the five CDC tables look like here:

How to program?Step 1: Take a pen and a paper pad. Decide the types of Call Duration Controls to be programmed for each station. Step 2: Many a times the requirement is met by default CDC tables and they can be assigned to the station. Step 3: If the requirement cannot be met by default CDC tables then program all the parameters of a CDC table like

Enable CDC for Outgoing call/Incoming call, disconnection flag, CDC timer, etc. This programs one complete CDC table. Program remaining seven CDC tables likewise, if required.

Step 4: Assign this CDC table to SLT using command 6211 and to DKP using command 6212. By default, all stations are assigned CDC table 1.

CommandsStep 1Take a pen and a paper pad. Decide the type of calls viz. Outgoing or Incoming for which CDC is to be enabled.

Step 2Please refer Step 4.

Step 3Use following command to enable CDC for Outgoing Call: 6202-CDC Table-Code-#* Where,CDC Table is from 1 to 5.

Use following command to enable CDC for Incoming Call: 6203-CDC Table-Code-#* Where,CDC Table is from 1 to 5.

Use following command to assign Allowed List to a table: 6205-CDC Table-Allowed List-#* Where,CDC Table is from 1 to 5.Allowed List is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign Denied List to a table: 6206-CDC Table-Denied List-#* Where,

Parameters CDC Table1 CDC Table2 CDC Table3 CDC Table4 CDC Table5 CDC for OG calls OFF ON ON ON ON CDC for IC calls OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Allowed list 01 01 01 01 01 Denied list 05 04 03 02 01 CDC timer 160 160 160 160 160 CDC disconnection flag OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Code Meaning 0 CDC for Outgoing Call is to be disabled 1 CDC for Outgoing Call is to be enabled

Code Meaning 0 CDC for Incoming Call is to be disabled 1 CDC for Incoming Call is to be enabled


Matrix

CDC Table is from 1 to 5. Denied List is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign CDC timer: 6207-CDC Table-CDC Timer-#* Where, CDC Table is from 1 to 5. CDC Timer is from 000 to 999 seconds.By default, the timer value is 160 seconds, after that the caller gets a beep for 20 seconds before disconnection, if the disconnection flag is assigned.

Use following command to assign disconnection flag: 6208-CDC Table-Disconnection Flag-#* Where,CDC Table is from 1 to 5.

Step 4Use following command to assign a CDC table to a SLT user: 6211-SLT-CDC Table-#*Where, SLT is from 01 to 32.CDC Table is from 1 to 5.By default, CDC table is assigned 1.

Use following command to assign a CDC table to all SLT users: 6211-**-CDC Table-#*

Use following command to assign a CDC table to a DKP user: 6212-DKP-CDC Table-#* Where,DKP is from 1 to 8.CDC Table is from 1 to 5.By default, CDC table is assigned 1.

Use following command to assign a CDC table to all DKP users: 6212-*-CDC Table-#*

Example 1:Program SLT 201 (software port number 01) for following constraints: • Disconnect all calls starting with '0' and '95' after 180 seconds.

Solution: • The default CDC table 2 can meet the requirement of the station after a little customisation. The denied list assigned

to table suits the stations requirement. • Since default CDC timer is 160 seconds and 20 seconds are added to CDC timer for actual disconnection, there is no

need to program the CDC timer. • But the disconnection flag has to be set 6208-2-1-#*. Now this table is to be assigned to station 6211-01-2-#*.

Example 2:• Program SLT 202 (software port number 02) for following constraints: Disconnect all calls starting with '0' after 200

seconds except calls starting with '022'.

Solution: • As observed this type of requirement cannot be met by default CDC table. Also it is not advisable to disturb CDC table

because these might be assigned to other stations. Hence customize CDC table 5 and assign it to station 202. • Program '022' in allowed list 04. (This step is necessary because default allowed lists does not contain such an option

whereby 022 is available in allowed list and 0 is available in denied list 05 so that can be assigned to table).6301-02-01-022-#*

Disconnection Flag Meaning 0 Call is not disconnected 1 Call is disconnected


Matrix

• Assign this allowed list and denied list to CDC table 5.6205-5-02-#*6206-5-05-#*

• Assign CDC timer of 180 seconds (not 200 seconds because 20 seconds are added to CDC timer for actual disconnection).6207-5-180-#*

• Enable CDC disconnection flag in CDC table 5.6208-5-1-#*

• Assign CDC table 5 to SLT 202.6211-02-5-#*

Important Points:• It is possible to disconnect specific outgoing calls. For example it is possible to disconnect all calls to 022-8765432

after 180 seconds. • Commands 6202, 6203, 6205, 6206, 6207 and 6208 can be executed from SA mode also.

Relevant Topic: 1. Allowed List and Denied List 52

=X=X=


Matrix


Call Follow Me

What's this? • Make your calls follow you wherever you go. • After going to your co-worker's desk if you desire to receive all your calls on his station, use this feature.

How to use it?

Example:Your station number is 201. Your user password is 1212. Right now you are at station 203. You want to divert all your calls to station 203. Dial 135-201-1212 from station 203.

Cancel Call Follow Me

How to program?Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Call Follow Me to a user.

Important Points:• The stations dial tone changes to feature tone if its calls are forwarded. • Multiple users can use 'Call Follow Me' from the same station. • Call Follow Me can be overwritten. User A sets Call Follow-Me from station B. Now, he goes to station C and he

wishes to receive his call at station C. He can use Call Follow Me once again from station C. • Call Follow Me cannot be chained. If user A sets Call Follow Me from station B. And now B uses Call Follow Me from

station C, Call Follow Me of station A is automatically cancelled. • Call Follow Me is a programmable feature. Refer Class of Service (COS) for details.

Relevant Topics:1. Call Forward 88 2. Class of Service (COS) 112

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 135-Station-User Password. Confirmation tone

1 Lift the handset of your station. Feature tone2 Dial 130. Confirmation tone

Matrix

Call Forward

What's this?In an organisation people move from one place to another place during typical workday. They do not sit at fixed places. A manager might go on the production floor or remain in conference room for few hours. In such situation, he cannot afford to miss his calls. He would like to fulfill this requirement. Cosine offers a facility called 'Call Forward'. Many times the user shuttles between two places frequently. In such case it is cumbersome to forward the call, cancel it and repeat this activity frequently. Cosine offers flexibility to allow the user to attend the call at either place also. Access to Call forward is programmable. Calls can be forwarded to an external number or VMS also.

How it works? The following flow chart explains the logic:

The calls of a station can be forwarded to another station, to an external number or the VMS group. The calls of a station can be forwarded when the station is busy, when the station does not reply and when the station is busy or does not reply. Cosine allows the user to forward his calls, yet program that both the stations ring. The user can answer the call from either station. If the calls are to be forwarded to the VMS group, then the SE has to first make a department group and then assign it as VMS group. Please refer 'Department Call' for more details on how to form department group. Please refer 'VMS Gateway' for more details on how to assign a department call as VMS group. Assign a flexible code to the VMS group. This flexible code should be communicated to all the users so that they can use it when required.

How to use it?Call Forward-All calls to another Station. One can forward all the calls to his station to another station where he might be temporarily shifted.

Example:If Station 203 wants to forward his calls to Station 204, he should dial 131-204.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 131-Station. Confirmation tone 3 Replace the handset.

Start

Station A calls Station B

Has station B forwarded his

calls?

System blocks the call. Station A gets busy tone.

Is the destination

free?

System places the call on new station. New destination gets ring. Station A gets ring back tone

End

End

System checks for other features

EndSystem routes the call to new destination

Yes

No

No

Yes


Matrix

Call Forward-All calls to external numberOne can forward all the calls to his station to any outside number.

Example:If Station 203 wants to forward his calls to his residence using trunk access code 61, dial 131-61-2630555-#*.

Call Forward-If BusyOne can forward all the calls to his station to another station if he is busy with some other station when the call arrives.

Example:If station 203 wants to forward all his calls to station 204 when he is busy, he should dial 132-204.

Call Forward-If Busy-All calls to external numberOne can forward all the calls to his station to any outside number.

Example:If Station 203 wants to forward his calls to his residence using trunk access code 61 when he is busy, he should dial 132-61-2630555-#*.

Call Forward-If No ReplyOne can forward all the calls to his station to another station if he does not answer the call within 30 secs. This timer is called Call Forward-RBT Timer. This timer is programmable.

Example: Station 203 wants that if he does not answer the calls within 30 seconds the calls should go to Station 204 (his colleague), he should dial 133-204.

Call Forward-If No Reply-All calls to external number One can forward all the calls to his station to any outside number if he does not answer the call within 30 sec. This timer is called Call Forward-RBT Timer. This timer is programmable.

Example:If Station 203 wants to forward his calls to his residence using trunk access code 61 if he does not answer the call within 30 seconds, he should dial 133-61-2630555-#*.

Call Forward-If Busy or No Reply One can forward all the calls to another station if he is busy or does not answer the call within 30 seconds. This timer is called Call Forward-RBT Timer. This timer is programmable.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 131-Trunk Access Code-Destination Number-#*. Confirmation tone 3 Replace the handset.







Matrix

Call Forward-If Busy or No Reply-All calls to external number One can forward all the calls to his station to any outside number if he is busy or does not answer the call.

Example: If Station 203 wants to forward his calls to his residence using trunk access code 61 when he is busy or does not reply, he should dial 134-61-2630555-#*.

ECF-for internal or external or for both

This is applicable only when the user forwarded his call to an external number.

Cancel Call Forward

Call forward can be cancelled from source as well as destination.

Call Forward-Dual Ring This feature enables the user to attend the call on either station viz. user's station or the forwarded station.

On enabling this command: • If the user uses Call Forward-All Calls then both the stations would ring simultaneously and the user can answer the

call from either station. • If the user uses Call Forward-If Busy then all the calls will be forwarded to the forwarded station when the user is busy

with other call. • If the user uses Call Forward-If No Reply then the station on which the call is forwarded will ring for Call Forward-RBT

Timer and then after both the stations will ring.

Example:If Station 203 wants to forward his calls to Station 204, he should dial 131-204. If the user also dials 1361 then both the stations 203 and 204 will ring simultaneously and the user can answer the call from either station.

Disable Call Forward-Dual Ring

On using this command Call Forward feature would work normally as explained above. Please note that Call Forward-Dual Ring would work only for internal Call Forward.

How to program?Call forward is a programmable feature and it can be allowed or denied from a station. Please refer 'Class of Service (COS)' for more details.


1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 137-Code. Confirmation tone 3 Replace the handset.

Code Meaning 0 ECF on for both external/internal calls 1 ECF on for external incoming calls 2 ECF on for internal incoming calls

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 130. Confirmation tone 3 Replace the handset.




Matrix

Timer of Relevance:Call Forward-RBT Timer: Time after which the call gets forwarded.Command: 2601-Seconds-#*Default: 030 seconds.Valid Range: 001 to 255 seconds.

Important Points: • If Station A forwards his calls to station B, then Station C cannot forward his calls to Station A.• If Station A forwards his calls to Station B, Station B can now forward his calls to Station C. But Station. A call forward

is cancelled. All the calls for Station A will now land on Station A only.• If station A (204) belonging to a department (for e.g. 3901) forwards his calls to station B. Now if somebody calls

station A directly (by dialing 204), the calls are forwarded to station B. But if a user calls the department group, station A rings in sequence with the various stations in the department group. In this case the calls are not forwarded to station B.

• Call Forwarded works for both internal and external incoming calls, landing on the station.


=X=X=


Matrix


Call Park

What's this?• You can park the current call and make another fresh call. • The parked person gets music. • While a call is parked, you are totally freed from the call. • You may use other system features like Call Pick Up, Call Follow Me, etc.• After completing the current call, retrieve the parked call. • System hunts your station for 3 times (programmable) after every 45 seconds (programmable). If you are free the call

lands on your station else the call is terminated by the system.

How to use it? To Park a call

To retrieve the Parked Call

How to program?Please refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Call Park to a user.

Timers of Relevance:Call Park Timer: Time after which the call comes back to the station that has parked the call.Command: 4201-Seconds-#*Default: 045 seconds.Range: 001 to 255 seconds.

Call Park Count: Number of times the system checks your station to find whether you are free.Command: 4202-Count-#*Default: 003.Range: 001 to 255.

Important Points:• If you don't retrieve the call within 45 seconds, the call comes back to you automatically. Your station starts ringing.

This timer is called Call Park Timer and is programmable. • If you are busy for longer period of time then the parked call comes back to you once you get free. • Multiple calls can be parked simultaneously. • The LED of the parked Station C; if the DSS key is programmed for the station; keeps on flickering on the DKP of the

user who has parked the call thereby giving visual indication of call park status. • A station can park as many calls as wanted at a time.

Relevant Topic: 1. Class of Service (COS) 112

=X=X=

1 Speech with trunk (or Station)2 Dial Flash. Feature tone3 Dial 117. Call Parked.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 118. Speech.

Matrix

Call Pick Up Cosine offers two types of call pick up facility viz. Call Pick Up-Group and Call Pick Up-Selective.

Call Pick Up-Group

What's this?You can answer calls of your colleague or co-worker without physically going to his station. You can use this feature to answer even trunk calls ringing on other stations.

How to use it?

How to program?Step 1: Decide the number of Call Pick Up groups to be formed.Step 2: Assign a call pick up group to individual SLT as per the requirement using the command 2501.Step 3: Assign a call pick up group to individual DKP as per the requirement using the command 2502.Step 4: Assign a COS group allowing Call Pick up to the user.

CommandsStep 1Take a pen and a piece of paper and list the stations to be grouped in one call pick up group. Make such groups as per the need.

Step 2Use following command to program Call Pick Up Group for SLT user: 2501-SLT-Call Pickup Group-#* Where, SLT is the Software port number of the SLT user from 01-32.Call Pickup Group is from 0 to 8.

Step 3Use following command to program Call Pick Up Group for DKP users: 2502-DKP-Call Pickup Group-#* Where, DKP is the software number of the DKP User from 1 to 8.Call Pickup Group is from 0 to 8.

Step 4Please ensure that COS group with enabled call pick up group has been assigned to the station. Please note that it is possible to have few SLTs and Few DKPs in one Call Pickup group.

Call Pick Up-Selective

What's this? • Answer call of a particular ringing station. • Useful when more than one stations are ringing and you want to answer one of them selectively.

How to use it?

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Call Pickup-Selective to a user.

By default, the Call Pick-Up group is 1. Assigning 0 as call pick up group to a station means the station does not belong to any call pick up group.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 4. Speech.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 12-Station. Speech.


Matrix

Range Commands:

Important Points:• To pick up selective calls, the ringing station need not be in the same call pick up group. • To pick up a call, the ringing stations should be in the same Pick Up Group. • In case of more stations ringing, the station with the least port number will be picked up first.


=X=X=

Assign the same call pick up group to all SLTs 2501-**-Call Pick Up Group-#*Assign the same call pick up group to all DKPs 2502-*-Call Pick Up Group-#*


Matrix

Call Progress Tones

What's this?• The Cosine gives various tones in different situations. This is how the Cosine responds to dialing of codes and

commands. The call progress tones generation (frequency and timings) should be programmable. The Call Progress Tone duration of the various continents are different.

• On selecting the region code and defaulting the system the default CPT for the region is loaded. Now consider a region XYZ, which requires the North American defaults (Region Code North America). The users of region XYZ can select the region code as North America, default the system and then use the command to program cadence time and frequency for a Call Progress Tone.

Use the following command to program cadence time for a type of Call Progress Tone: 5201-Tone Type-Cadence No-On/Off Timer-#* Where,

Cadence No is from 1-6. Odd value of cadence No is for ON Time Duration and even value of cadence is for OFF Time Duration ON/OFF Timer is in ms from 0000-9999ms.

Use the following command to program frequency for a type of Call Progress Tone:5202-Tone Type-Frequency-#* Where,

Please refer 'Default Settings' for more details on the default CPT of different regions.

Dial Tone When you lift the handset you get dial tone. Dial tone stays for 7 seconds. This Dial Tone Timer is programmable. After that error tone starts. • Sound: Toooooooooooo

Use following command to program the Dial Tone Timer: 5211-Seconds-#* Range = 001 to 255 seconds. Default = 007 seconds.

Tone Type Meaning 01 Dial Tone 02 Feature/Programming Tone 03 Ring Back Tone 04 Busy Tone 05 Error Tone 06 Interrupt Request Tone 07 Barge-In Tone 08 External Call Waiting Tone(ECWT) 09 Confirmation Tone 10 Night Mode Tone

Frequency Meaning 1 350 + 440 2 440 3 440 + 480 4 440 + 620 5 480 + 620 6 400 7 400 + 450 8 425 9 1400


Matrix

Ring Back Tone When you dial internal number and if that number is free, you will get the ring back tone. The ring back tone continues for 45 seconds. This Ring Back Tone Timer is programmable. • Sound: Turroo... Turrroo

Use following command to program the Ring Back Tone Timer: 5212-Seconds-#* Range = 001 to 255 seconds. Default = 045 seconds.

Busy Tone (Engage Tone) High pitch beeps with equal on and off periods. When you dial any station that is busy, you get busy tone. Busy tone continues for 7 seconds. This timer is programmable. • Sound: Tooooooo.........Toooooooo

Use following command to program the Busy Tone timer: 5213-Seconds-#* Range = 001 to 255 seconds.Default = 007 seconds.

Error Tone The Error Tone is made of fast beeps. When you perform some wrong operation or try using a feature without access, you get error tone. • Sound: Too…Too…Too…Too

Internal Call Waiting Tone Short beep followed by longer off duration repeated every second. This is also known as intrusion tone. Busy user gets this tone over his speech when some other station attempts interrupt request/barge-in. • Sound: Beep.…………Beep

The user gets this tone till the Interrupt request timer or the barge in timer.

External Call Waiting Tone This tone is of two ticks followed by a longer off time of approximately 3 seconds. Busy programmed destination station gets this tone when there is a fresh service provider call. • Sound: Beep...Beep………....Beep...Beep This tone continues for transfer-On busy timer.

Feature Tone Short beep followed by a longer off duration repeated every second. The feature tone is given to the user when he has activated a feature like Call Forward, Do Not Disturb etc. Feature tone continues for 10 seconds. • Sound: Beep… Beep

Use following command to program the Feature Tone Timer: 5216-Seconds-#* Range = 001 to 255 seconds. Default = 007 seconds.

Hold Tone Short beep followed by a longer off duration repeated every second. The hold tone is given when you put a person on hold. Hold tone continues for 7 seconds. This timer is same as Dial Tone Timer.

Feature Confirmation Tone This tone is continuous, fast beeps. The Cosine confirms successful usage of features with this tone. The confirmation tone remains for 7 seconds. This is called Feature Confirmation Tone Timer and is programmable. • Sound: Beep... Beep... Beep

Use following command to program the Feature Confirmation Tone Timer: 5215-Seconds-#* Range = 001 to 255 seconds. Default = 007 seconds.


Matrix

Programming Tone Short beeps followed by a longer off duration repeated every second. It is exactly same as the feature tone. The Cosine prompts you to enter fresh commands during programming with this tone. Programming tone remains for 10 seconds. This timer is programmable. • Sound: Beep.............Beep

Programming Confirmation Tone This is exactly same as the feature confirmation tone. This tone is continuous, fast beeps. During programming, this tone indicates that valid command is received by the system and it has taken necessary action. This tone remains for 3 seconds. This is called Programming Confirmation Tone Timer and is programmable. • Sound: Beep... Beep... Beep

Use following command to program the Programming Confirmation Tone Timer: 5219-Seconds-#* Range = 001 to 255 seconds. Default = 003 seconds.

Programming Error Tone This tone is exactly same as the Error Tone. This tone is given when some wrong programming command is dialed. This tone remains for 3 seconds. This Programming Error Tone timer is programmable. • Sound: Too…Too…Too…Too

Use following command to program the Programming Error Tone Timer: 5218-Seconds-#* Range = 001 to 255 seconds.Default = 003 seconds.

Barge-In Tone When a third party performs Barge-In on a busy station, the busy user gets this tone for the programmed time after which the caller can get into conversation. For more details please refer the topic 'Barge-In'.

Interrupt Request Tone When a third party performs Interrupt request on a busy station, the busy user gets this tone for the programmed time after which the caller can get into conversation. For more details please refer the topic 'Interrupt Request'.

Night Mode ToneWhen the system is in night mode, the user hears this tone when he picks his handset. This tone provides time zone indication at the place of dial tone.

Default value for Call Progress Tone for different continents are as follows:

Time Zone Situation Asia/Europe/ Africa/Australia/ North America/South America

Working Hour No Call Forward Dial Tone Working Hour Call Forward Feature/Programming Tone Break Hour No Call Forward Night Mode Tone Break Hour Call Forward Night Mode Tone Non Working Hour No Call Forward Night Mode Tone Non Working Hour Call Forward Night Mode Tone

Call Progress Tone Type

Continent/s Freq. Cad#1 On (MS)

Cad#2 Off (MS)

Cad#3 On (MS)

Cad#4 Off (MS)

Cad#5 On (MS)

Cad#6 Off (MS)

Dial Tone Asia 350+440 9999 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Europe/Africa/Australia 400 9999 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 North America/South America 350+440 9999 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

Feature/Programming Tone

Asia 350+440 0100 0900 0000 0000 0000 0000 Europe/Africa/Australia 400 1500 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 North America/South America 350+440 0100 0900 0000 0000 0000 0000


Matrix

Relevant Topics:1. Default Settings 134 2. Boss Ring 77

=X=X=

RBT Asia 350+440 0400 0200 0400 2000 0000 0000 Europe/Africa/Australia 400 0600 0200 0200 2000 0000 0000 North America/South America 440+480 1000 3000 0000 0000 0000 0000

Busy Tone Asia 440 0750 0750 0000 0000 0000 0000 Europe/Africa/Australia 400 0500 0500 0000 0000 0000 0000 North America/South America 480+620 0500 0500 0000 0000 0000 0000

Error Tone Asia 440 0250 0250 0000 0000 0000 0000 Europe/Africa/Australia 400 0250 0250 0000 0000 0000 0000 North America/South America 440 0250 0250 0000 0000 0000 0000

Interrupt Request Tone

Asia 440 0100 2900 0000 0000 0000 0000 Europe/Africa/Australia 400 0200 4800 0000 0000 0000 0000 North America/South America 440 0100 2900 0000 0000 0000 0000

Barge-In Tone Asia 440 0500 0500 1000 5000 0000 0000 Europe/Africa/Australia 400 0500 0500 1000 5000 0000 0000 North America/South America 440 0500 0500 1000 5000 0000 0000

CCWT Asia 350+440 0100 0100 0100 2700 0000 0000 Europe/Africa/Australia 400 0200 4800 0000 0000 0000 0000 North America/South America 440+480 0100 0100 0100 2700 0000 0000

Confirmation Tone


Night Mode Tone


Call Progress Tone Type

Continent/s Freq. Cad#1 On (MS)

Cad#2 Off (MS)

Cad#3 On (MS)

Cad#4 Off (MS)

Cad#5 On (MS)

Cad#6 Off (MS)


Matrix

Call Splitting

What's this? • This feature enables you to talk to two persons alternately. • Call Splitting is also known as Hold-Consult or Hold-Toggle.

How to use it?Call Splitting can be used in any of the following three combinations: • Two stations • One station and one trunk • Two trunks

Call Splitting between two stations from SLT

Call Splitting between a station and a trunk from SLT

Call Splitting between two trunks from SLT

Call Splitting between two stations from DKP

Call Splitting between a station and a trunk from DKP

1 Speech with station. 2 Dial Flash. Feature tone

3 Dial another Station. Ring Back Tone. Speech with the station when the call is answered.

4 Dial Flash-1. Speech with held party.

1 Speech with trunk.2 Dial Flash. Feature tone 3 Dial another Station. Ring Back Tone 4 Speech with the station when the call is answered.5 Dial Flash-1. Speech with held party.

1 Speech with trunk.2 Dial Flash. Feature tone. Trunk Goes on Hold.3 Dial 8 (6 for North American/South American users). Feature tone4 Dial Trunk Access Code. Trunk dial tone

5 Dial Telephone Number. Ring Back Tone. Speech with called party when the call is answered.

6 Dial Flash-1. Speech with held party.

1 Speech with station.2 Dial Flash. Feature tone. Trunk goes on hold.3 Dial another Station. Ring Back Tone. First station goes on hold.4 Speech with second station when call is answered.5 Dial Flash-1. Speech with held station (first station).6 Dial Flash-1. Speech with station (second station).

1 Speech with station.2 Dial Flash. Feature tone3 Dial another Station. Ring Back Tone. Trunk goes on hold.4 Speech with second station when call is answered.5 Dial Flash-1. Speech with held trunk.6 Dial Flash-1. Speech with station.


Matrix

Call Splitting between two trunks from DKP

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow call splitting to a user.

Important Points: • Only one of the two persons will be in conversation with you at a time. The third person is on hold. He gets music and

cannot hear your conversation. • When in speech with a station and getting external call waiting tone, you can dial Flash to answer the trunk call. The

station is put on hold and gets music. Now, you can split between the two persons. • Interrupting station can also be answered very much in the same way as described above. Your current call is put on

hold and speech with the interrupting station is established. Once again, you can split between the two persons.• From SLT, 3-Party conference can be invoked to include both the parties by dialing Flash-0.• From DKP, 3-party conference can be invoked to include both the parties by pressing Conference Key or Flash-0. • You can also transfer the active person (one who is in conversation with you) to the third person.• You can also park the current person.• Access to Call Splitting is programmable.

Relevant Topics:1. Conference-3 Party 120 2. Call Transfer 103 3. Call Park 92 4. Class of Service (COS) 112

=X=X=

1 Speech with trunk.2 Dial Flash. Feature tone. Trunk goes on hold.3 Dial 8 (6 for North American/South American users) Feature tone4 Dial Trunk Access Code. Dial tone of trunk.5 Dial Telephone Number. Ring Back Tone6 Speech with called party when the call is answered.7 Dial Flash-1. Speech with held trunk (second station).8 Dial Flash-1. Speech with second trunk.


Matrix

Call Taping

What is this? • Calls made/received by a station to/from another station can be taped.• The call is taped in the designated mailbox in the Voice Mail System connected to the PBX.

How it works? • Whenever any station makes an outgoing call, the system checks for Call Taping parameters. If the station's flag for

call taping of external calls is enabled and dialed external number matches with any of the numbers programmed in the allowed list assigned to the station, the conversation is recorded in the VMS. Similarly whenever an external call is received, the system checks for Call Taping parameters. If the station's flag for call taping of incoming external calls is enabled and the calling number matches with the numbers programmed in the allowed list assigned to the station, the conversation is recorded in the VMS.

• Whenever a station calls an another station or receives a call from a station (internal), the system checks for Call Taping parameters. If the station's flag for call taping of internal calls is enabled the conversation is recorded in the VMS.

• To initiate Call Taping, the Cosine sends a string of digit BA7 to the Voice Mail System indicating the start of Conversation. The VMS goes off-hook and records the conversation in the designated mailbox.

• On completion of Conversation, the Cosine sends a string of digits BA1 to the VMS indicating end of call. The VMS goes on-hook on receipt of this string.

How to program? Use following command to program a port in whose mailbox the Call is to be taped: 7001-Station Type-Station-#* Where,

Call Taping: Incoming/outgoing external calls from a station. Use following command to enable/disable call taping of external calls for a SLT station: 7010-SLT-Flag-#* Where,SLT is from 01 to 32.

By default, flag is 0.

Use the following command to assign an allowed list (this list contains the numbers for which the calls has to taped) to a SLT: 7011-SLT-Allowed List-#* Where, SLT is from 01 to 32.Allowed List is from 00 to 15.By default, Allowed List is 00. Assigning 00 as allowed list is de-assigning the previously allocated allowed list.

Use the following command to enable/disable call taping of external call for a DKP station:7020-DKP-Flag-#* Where,DKP is from 1 to 8.


Station Type Meaning Station0 Null 001 SLT 01 to 322 DKP 1 to 8

Flag Meaning0 No Taping1 Tape



Matrix

Use the following command to assign an allowed list (this list contains the numbers for which the call has to be taped) to a DKP: 7021-DKP-Allowed List-#* Where, DKP is from 1 to 8.Allowed List is from 00 to 15.By default, Allowed List is 00. Assigning 00 as allowed list is de-assigning the previously allocated allowed list.

Call Taping: Incoming/outgoing internal calls from a station. Use the following command to enable/disable call taping of internal calls (incoming/outgoing) from a SLT station: 7031-SLT-Flag-#* Where,SLT is from 01 to 32.


Use the following command to enable/disable call taping of internal calls (incoming/outgoing) from a DKP station: 7032-DKP-Flag-#* Where,DKP is from 1 to 8.


Note: • You can program the system to indicate you (receive beeps) when your call is being taped.

Use the following command to Enable/Disable the beeps at the time of Call Taping: 4002-Flag-#* Where,

By default, the beeps are disabled.

If the beeps are enabled, every time call taping is initiated, you hear the beeps.

Range Commands:

Important Point: • If Call Taping and Conversation Recording both are enabled for a station, then priority is given to Conversation

Recording.

Relevant Topics:1. Conversation Recording 131 2. Voice Message Applications 328

=X=X=




7010-**-Flag-#* To enable/disable call taping of external calls on all SLT’s.7020-*-Flag-#* To enable/disable call taping of external calls on all DKP’s.7031-**-Flag-#* To enable/disable call taping of internal calls of all SLT’s.7032-*-Flag-#* To enable/disable call taping of internal calls of all DKP’s.


Matrix

Call TransferCosine offers four types of call transfer: • Call transfer-Screened • Call transfer-While Ringing • Call transfer-on Busy Call transfer-Trunk-to-Trunk

Call Transfer-Screened

What's this?• Transfer a call to a station and wait for him to answer. • This is normal call transfer and the most widely used. • Operators can use this method to transfer incoming calls. • While waiting for the station to answer, you can abandon the transfer by dialing Flash. The ring on the station is

stopped and you get connected to the person on hold.

How to use it?

Call Transfer-While Ringing

What's this? • Transfer a call without waiting for the destination to answer. • An operator can use this feature when there are other calls pending and she/he cannot wait for the station to respond

to intimate the call. This is also known as "Wait For Ring Transfer". • If the called station does not respond to the ring within 30 seconds, the call comes back to the station that transferred

the call. This is known as Transfer-While Ringing Timer and is programmable. Use following command to program this timer: 4101-Seconds-#* Default: 030 seconds.Valid Range: 001 to 255 seconds.

How to use it?

Call Transfer-On Busy

What's this? • Transfer a call on a station already in speech with some other person. • Operators can transfer calls without even checking for the status of the destination station. • This is also known as "Blind Transfer". • The busy destination station gets intrusion tone. • He can speak to the calling person by dialing 'Flash'.• An internal call can be transferred on busy station only if the station is not programmed for privacy from Interrupt

Request and Barge-In. • An external call can be transferred on busy station only if the station is not programmed for privacy from Trunk Call

Intrusion. • If the called station does not respond to the intrusion tone within 30 seconds, the call comes back to you. This is

known as Transfer-On Busy Timer and is programmable. Use following command to program this timer: 4102-Seconds-#*Default = 030 seconds.Valid Range = 001 to 255 seconds.

1 Speech with trunk.2 Dial Flash. Feature tone 3 Dial Station. Ring Back Tone4 Wait for the station to answer. Speech with ring answered.5 Replace the handset. Call is transferred.

1 Speech with called party.2 Dial Flash. Feature tone 3 Dial Station. Ring Back Tone4 Replace the handset.


Matrix

How to use it?

Call Transfer-Trunk-to-Trunk

What's this? • An external call can be transferred on another trunk line. • The operator need not remain in speech. Two external persons can speak through the Cosine.• In case a colleague has not come to the office, his incoming calls can be transferred on his residence's phone line or

on his mobile.• In case a remote colleague is not having long distance or international dialing facility from his present location. He can

dial his office and request the operator to connect him to the desired number.• A warning tone is given after Trunk-to-Trunk inactivity timer. To extend the call, either of the persons has to dial a digit

in tone (DTMF). Dialing of '##' terminates the call and both the trunks are released.

How to use it?

How to use Call Transfer from DKP?

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow call transfer to a user.

Timer of Relevance:Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity Timer: The system disconnects the call after this time.Command: 4103-Seconds-#*Default: 180 Seconds.Valid Range: 001 to 999 Seconds.

Important Points:• Internal station calls can also be transferred to some other station. • If the station that transferred the call is free at the time of call return, caller gets ring. • If the station that transferred the call is busy at the time of call return and if it was an internal call transfer then the

caller gets busy tone. • If the station that transferred the call is busy at the time of call return and if it was a trunk call transfer then the system

waits for the station to become free. The caller gets ring back tone. • During Call Transfer if the CLIP-Hold type is programmed as '0'; then the internal party's number (party that is

transferring the call) is displayed at the station. • During Call Transfer if the CLIP-Hold type is programmed as '1'; then the external party's number (calling party) is

displayed at the station. • If Disconnect tone flag is enabled for both trunks during trunk-trunk transfer, call will get disconnected after Trunk-

Trunk Inactivity timer. Hence, program Trunk-Trunk Inactivity timer value to the maximum if Disconnect tone detection is required.

Speech with trunk. Dial Flash. Feature tone Dial Station. Busy tone Disconnect. Call will be transferred on the busy station and it will get intrusion tone.

1 3-way mode as described in call splitting.2 Dial Flash. Feature tone3 Dial #. Station disconnects. Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 remain in speech.

1 Speech with called party.2 Press ‘Flash’ to ‘Hold’ key. Feature tone3 Dial Station. Ring Back Tone/Busy Tone4 Wait for the station to answer, consult and/or press ‘trf/fl’ key.5 Put the handset or press the spk key.


Matrix

Relevant Topics:1. Class of Service (COS) 112 2. Privacy 247 3. Conference-3 Party 120 4. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 166 5. Call Disconnect Tone (CDT) 78

=X=X=


Matrix

Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP) What's this?• The Cosine offers following facilities:

• Calling Party Identification (called CLI).• Calling Party's Number presentation (called CLIP). • Calling Party's Name presentation.• CLI Based Routing.

• The Cosine supports CLI for both the protocols viz. DTMF type and FSK type, i.e. whether the Service Provider sends the calling party's information in DTMF or FSK format, the Cosine is capable of identifying the caller.

• The Cosine also supports CLIP for both the protocols viz. DTMF type and FSK type, i.e. either type of telephone instrument viz. FSK type telephone instrument or DTMF type telephone instrument can be connected to the SLT port of the Cosine.

• The Cosine supports CLIP on both, the SLT port and DKP port. • The Cosine can be programmed to display the name of the calling party instead of his telephone number on the DKP

port. (Please note that this facility is not supported on the SLT port).• The Cosine also provides a facility to intelligently route incoming calls to particular destinations based on the CLI

information. • In case of Call Transfer, the Cosine provides a flexibility to display either the station number that is transferring the call

or the calling party's number. This is called CLIP-Hold Party.

How it works? • If CLI is enabled on the trunk, the Cosine senses the CLI information sent by the Service Provider during the ringing

phase. It sends this information to the landing station/Operator along with the ringing signal. Also, it stores this call in the Incoming SMDR buffer.

• When the call is transferred from one station to the other, the Calling party's telephone number is also sent along with the call.

• Also on the arrival of the call, if the name of the caller is programmed against his telephone number then the system displays the name of the caller instead of the telephone number.

How to program? Calling Line Identification is enabled by default. All the incoming numbers will be stored in the incoming SMDR buffer and will be displayed on the Operator station/landing destination.Step 1: Enable CLI on the trunk using command 6101.Step 2: Program CLI signaling type on the station using command 6105.Step 3: Enable/disable digit padding on SLT using command 6106.Step 4: Program CLIP-Hold type for a SLT using command 6107.Step 5: Program CLIP-Hold type for a DKP using command 6108.

Step 1Use following command to enable/disable CLI storage and CLI Display on a trunk: 6101-Trunk-CLI Type-#* Where,Trunk is the software port number is from 01 to 08.

By default, CLI type is assigned 1 for Asian 2 for European/African/Australasian users and 3 for North American and South American users.

Step 2Use following command to program the CLIP type for a SLT: 6105-SLT-CLIP Type-#* Where,SLT is from 01 to 32.

CLI Type Meaning 0 None 1 DTMF based CLIP 2 FSK V.23 based CLIP 3 FSK Bellcore based CLIP

CLI Type Meaning 0 None


Matrix

By default, CLI type is assigned 1 for Asian users, 3 for North American and South American users and 2 for European, African, Australasian users.

Step 3Use the following command to program digit padding on SLT: 6106-SLT-Count-#* Where,SLT is from 01 to 32.Count is 0 to 9.By default, digit padding count is 0.

This feature is useful for certain instruments which require a minimum number of digits in the calling party's number to display it. If the, count is programmed as zero, the calling party number is displayed without any modification (as received). When the count is programmed as 1 to 9, the length of the calling party number displayed is manipulated to match count value. i.e if the count value is programmed as 5 and station no. 301 is calling then two zeros are padded to maintain the length of the calling party number as 5 (The calling party number is displayed as 30100). But if the count is programmed as 2 and station no 301 is calling then, the calling party number is not truncated to match to the programmed length. Example:Program the digit padding for SLT 203 software port number as 6. 6106-01-6-#* Now if John (201) is calling the SLT (203) the number is displayed as 201000.

Step 4Use the following command to program the CLIP-Hold type for a SLT: 6107-SLT-Type-#* Where,SLT is from 01 to 32.

By default CLIP-Hold Type for SLT is programmed as '0'.

This is useful when an internal party transfers call to another station. • If the CLIP-Hold type is programmed as '0' then the internal party's number (party that is transferring the call) is

displayed at the station. • If the CLIP-Hold type is programmed as '1' the external party's number (calling party) is displayed at the station.

Step 5Use the following command to program the CLIP-Hold type for DKP: 6108-DKP-Type-#* Where, DKP is from 1 to 8.

By default, CLIP-Hold Type for DKP is programmed as '0'.

This is useful when an internal party transfers call to another station. • If the CLIP-Hold type is programmed as '0' then the number of the party that is transferring the call is displayed. • If the CLIP-Hold type is programmed as '1' the actually calling party's number is displayed.

1 DTMF based CLIP 2 FSK V.23 based CLIP 3 FSK Bellcore based CLIP

Type Meaning 0 The number of the party that is transferring the call is displayed 1 The actually calling party's number is displayed

Type Meaning 0 The number of the party that is transferring the call is displayed 1 The actually calling party's number is displayed

CLI Type Meaning


Matrix

Wild Card:

Relevant Topic:1. Calling Line Identification Based Routing 109

=X=X=

To enable/disable CLI storage & CLI display on all trunks 6101-**-Code-#*To program the CLIP type for all the stations 6105-**-CLIP Type-#*To program digit padding on all the SLTs 6106-**-Count-#*To program CLIP-Hold type for all the SLTs 6107-**-Type-#*To program CLIP-Hold type for all the DKPs 6108-*-Type-#*


Matrix

Calling Line Identification Based RoutingWhat's this? • The Cosine also provides a facility to intelligently route incoming calls to particular destinations based on the CLI

information. However if it is required to land the calls from a particular telephone number on a particular station or stations then the system needs to be programmed. The name of the caller can be programmed, if desired along with the number.

How it works?• If CLI is enabled on the trunk, the Cosine senses the CLI information sent by the Service Provider during the ringing

phase. It sends this information to the landing station/Operator along with the ringing signal. Also, it stores this call in the Incoming SMDR buffer.

• When the call is transferred from one station to the other, the Calling party's telephone number is also sent along with the call.

• On arrival of the call, the Cosine identifies the calling party's number and compares it with the numbers programmed in the CLI table. If the telephone number of the incoming call matches with the number present in the CLI table, it routes the call according to the CLI table or routes the call as per normal trunk landing group programming. This is known as CLI based Routing.

• Also on the arrival of the call, if the name of the caller is programmed against his telephone number then the system displays the name of the caller instead of the telephone number.

How to program?Step 1: Program the telephone numbers to be routed directly to the stations using command 6102.Step 2: Program CLI based routing destination type for an index using command 6103.Step 3: Program the name of the calling party corresponding to his telephone number using command 6104.

Step 1Use following command to program the incoming telephone number in a CLI table: 6102-Index-Telephone Number-#* Where,Index is from 01 to 50.Telephone Number is the calling party's telephone number (Maximum 16 digits).

Use the following command to program same telephone number in the CLI table:6102-**-Telephone Number-#*

Step 2Use following command to program CLI based routing destination type for an index in the CLI table: 6103-Index-Station Type-Station#* Where,Index is from 01 to 50.

By default, Destination Type is Station Group-01.

Use the following command to assign same station type and station for all incoming telephone numbers in the CLI table: 6103-**-Station Type-Station-#*

Step 3Use following command to program name of calling party (this corresponds to the calling party's telephone number): 6104-Index-Name-#* Where,Index is from 01 to 50.Name can be maximum of 8 characters.

On doing the above programming, a CLI table shown below is constructed by the system internally.

Station Type Meaning Station1 SLT 01-322 DKP 1-83 Station Groups 01-16

Index Station Type Station Caller's Telephone Number Caller's Name 01 1 01 022-8585858 Raju


Matrix

Example:Calls from John (813-323-4053) should land on DKP 301 whereas calls from Clarence (813-323-4054) should land on DKP 302.

Solution:Since two incoming numbers have to be landed on specific stations, these two stations should be programmed along with their names and landing groups.

Use following commands: 6102-01-8133234053-#* 6103-01-2-1#* 6104-01-John-#* 6102-02-8133234054-#* 6103-02-2-2#* 6104-02-Clarence-#*

Wild Cards Clear Commands

Relevant Topic:1. Calling Line Identification Based Routing 109

=X=X=

02 2 2 011-7878787 Kalpana : : : : :

50 1 01 033-5656565 Tanvi

To clear a telephone number from a index in the CLI table 6102-Index-#* To clear all the telephone numbers from the CLI table 6102-**-#* To clear a name from a index in the CLI telephone number 6104-Index-#* To clear a name for all the incoming telephone numbers 6104-**-#*

Index Station Type Station Caller's Telephone Number Caller's Name


Matrix


Cancel Station Features

What's this?• Features like Alarms, Auto Call Back, Call Follow-Me, Auto Redial, DND, Call Forward, Hot Line, Hot Outward Dialing

and Trunk Reservation can be cancelled from the station.• The Cosine supports separate cancellation code for each feature. But it is desirable to have a master command to

cancel all the features with a single command.

How to use it?

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow this feature to a user.


=X=X=

1 Lift the hand set. Dial tone2 Dial 100. Confirmation tone3 Replace handset.

Matrix

Class of Service (COS)

What's this?• All users in an organization are not equal. Some users are important and their time is more valuable. Further, their

nature of job also differs. Keeping this diversity in mind, it is imperative that the features they need from a system differ from person to person.

• The feature requirements can also vary from time to time. For example, the features required during working hours and during break/non-working hours need not be the same.

• It is the system's responsibility to allow or deny a feature access to a user depending on his needs. The system should support flexible allocation of features to different users. This accessibility of different features for a user is known as his Class of Service (COS).

How it works?The Cosine supports very flexible COS programming. Each user can be assigned different COS depending on his and the organization's needs. All the features supported by the system are presented in the form of a list.

Each feature in the list is identified with a 2-digits number. Following table lists all the features with feature number to be used during programming:Feature Number Feature Name

01 Internal Call 02 Call Hold 03 Call Toggle (Call Split) 04 Call Transfer 05 Call Pick up 06 Auto Call Back-Busy 07 Auto Call Back-No Reply 08 Operator Dialing 09 Redial 10 Auto Redial Low Priority 11 Auto Redial High Priority 12 Personal Memory Dialing 13 Global Dialing Directory 1 14 Global Dialing Directory 2 15 Call Forward 16 Do Not Disturb (DND)17 Dynamic Lock 18 Remote Alarm Access 19 Department Call 20 Conference 21 Interrupt Request 22 Barge-In 23 Raid 24 Paging 25 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 26 Override 27 Call Park 28 Conversation Recording 29 Privacy-Interrupt Request and Barge-In 30 Privacy-Raid 31 Privacy-Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls 32 Allow Trunk Landing (Intrusion) Beeps 33 Trunk Reservation


Matrix

Relevant features from this list can be selected and put in a group. One can make few feature access groups depending upon the requirement. First group may contain none of the features. Second group may contain very common features like Call Forward, Call Transfer and Internal Dialing etc. Third group may contain more advanced features and so on. Fifth group may contain all the features. Once programmed, COS groups may look like:

Default COS groups for users of Asia are as follow:

34 Room Monitor 35 Direct Trunk Access 36 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer 37 Flashing on Trunk 38 PAS 39 Message Paging 40 Live Call Screening 41 Live Call Supervision 42 Hot Desk 43 Forced Answer 44 Change Timezone 45 Hotline

Group 01 02 03 04 05 … 43 44 45 01 N N N N N … N N N 02 N N Y Y N … N Y N 03 Y N N Y Y … Y Y Y 04 N N N Y Y … N N N 05 Y Y Y N Y … N Y N : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :

15 Y Y Y N Y … Y Y N

Index Group/Feature No 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 01 Internal Call N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 02 Call Hold N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 03 Call Split N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 04 Call Transfer N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 05 Call Pick Up N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 06 ACB-Busy N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 07 ACB-No Reply N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 08 Operator Dialing N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 09 Redial N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 10 Auto Redial Low Priority N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 11 Auto Redial High Priority N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 12 Personal Memory Dialing N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 13 Global Directory Part 1 N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 14 Global Directory Part 2 N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 15 Call Forward N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 16 Do Not Disturb N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 17 Dynamic Lock N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 18 Remote Alarm Access N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 19 Department Call N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 20 Conference N N N N N N Y Y Y Y N N N N N 21 Interrupt Request N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N

Feature Number Feature Name


Matrix

Default COS groups for users of Europe, Africa, Australia, North America and South America are as follows:

22 Barge-In N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 23 Raid N N N N N N Y Y Y Y N N N N N 24 Paging N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 25 DISA N N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N 26 Override N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 27 Call Park N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 28 Conversation Recording N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 29 Privacy-IR and BI N N Y N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 30 Privacy-Raid N N Y N N N N N N Y N N N N N 31 Privacy-DID N N Y N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 32 Allow Trunk Beeps N N Y N N N Y Y Y Y N N N N N 33 Trunk Reservation N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 34 Room Monitor N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 35 Direct Trunk Access N N Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 36 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer N N N N N Y Y N N N N N N N N 37 Flashing on Trunk N N Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 38 PAS N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 39 Message Paging N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 40 Live Call Screening N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 41 Live Call Supervision N N N N N N Y Y Y Y N N N N N 42 Hot Desk N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 43 Forced Answer N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 44 Change Time Zone N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 45 Hotline N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N

Index Group/Feature No 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 01 Internal Call N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 02 Call Hold N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 03 Call Split N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 04 Call Transfer N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 05 Call Pick Up N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 06 ACB-Busy N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 07 ACB-No Reply N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 08 Operator Dialing N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 09 Redial N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 10 Auto Redial Low Priority N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 11 Auto Redial High Priority N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 12 Personal Memory Dialing N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 13 Global Directory Part 1 N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 14 Global Directory Part 2 N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 15 Call Forward N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 16 Do Not Disturb N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 17 Dynamic Lock N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 18 Remote Alarm Access N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 19 Department Call N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 20 Conference N N N N N N Y Y Y Y N N N N N 21 Interrupt Request N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 22 Barge-In N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N

Index Group/Feature No 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15


Matrix

Now, these groups can be allocated to the users depending upon the hierarchy of the user in the organization. A user can be assigned three different COS groups for three time zones. Once these groups are assigned to users, the user COS table looks like:

Following points are relevant: • Maximum 15 nos. feature access groups can be formed (01-15). • Each feature can be enabled or disabled in each group. • 03rd group is the default COS group.

How to program?Step 1: Decide the number of COS groups to be formed.Step 2: Prepare list of the features required in each COS group and program it using command 1701.Step 3: Assign COS group to each SLT using command 1711, 1712 and 1713.Step 4: Assign COS group to each DKP using command 1721, 1722 and 1723.

23 Raid N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 24 Paging N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 25 DISA N N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N 26 Override N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 27 Call Park N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 28 Conversation Recording N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 29 Privacy-IR and BI N N Y N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 30 Privacy-Raid Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 31 Privacy-DID N N Y N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 32 Allow Trunk Beeps N N Y N N N Y Y Y Y N N N N N 33 Trunk reservation N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 34 Room Monitor N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 35 Direct Trunk Access N N Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 36 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer N N N N N Y Y N N N N N N N N 37 Flashing on Trunk N N Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 38 PAS N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 39 Message Paging N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 40 Live Call Screening N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 41 Live call Supervision N N N N N N Y Y Y Y N N N N N 42 Hot Desk N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 43 Forced Answer N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 44 Change Time Zone N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N 45 Hotline N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N

Station number COS group for WH COS group for BH COS group for NWH01 01 02 08 02 08 10 14 03 11 12 13 04 20 20 05 05 00 09 11 : : : :

Index Group/Feature No 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15


Matrix

The following flowchart elaborates this procedure.

Step 1Take a pen and a paper pad and decide the number of groups to be formed and what all features are to be assigned to each group.

Step 2Use following command to enable or disable a feature in a COS group: 1701-COS Group-Feature Number-Code-#* Where, COS Group = group number from 01 to 15 Feature Number = Feature number from 01 to 45

(Please note that default COS groups meet most of the requirements and hence this command is seldom used.)

Use the following command to enable/disable all features in a COS group: 1702-COS Group-**-Code-#* Where,

Code Meaning0 Feature disabled1 Feature enabled

Start

Read the list of the features offered by the system

Prepare a list of all stations

Write features needed for all time zones for each individual station against his name in the list of stations

You will notice that features needed by many stations are identical. Hence feature variety gets reduced

Each variety is called a COS group. Assign a group number to it.

This way prepare all COS groups

Assign COS groups to all the stations

Generate configuration reports and verify the programming

Test the programming by checking features from every station

End


Matrix

COS Group is from 01 to 15.

Step 3Use following command to assign a COS group to a SLT user during working hours: 1711-SLT-COS Group-#* Where, SLT = Software port of SLT User from 01 to 32. COS Group is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign a COS group to a SLT user during break hours: 1712-SLT-COS Group-#* Where, SLT = Software port of SLT User from 01 to 32.COS Group is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign a COS group to a SLT user during non-working hours: 1713-SLT-COS Group-#*Where, SLT = Software port of SLT User from 01 to 32.COS Group is from 01 to 15.

Step 4Use following command to assign a COS group to a DKP user during working hours: 1721-DKP-COS Group-#* Where, DKP = Software port of DKP User from 1 to 8.COS Group is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign a COS group to a DKP user during break hours: 1722-DKP-COS Group-#* Where, DKP = Software port of DKP User from 1 to 8.COS Group is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign a COS group to a DKP user during non-working hours: 1723-DKP-COS Group-#* Where, DKP = Software port of DKP User from 1 to 8.COS Group is from 01 to 15.

Example:Make a COS group '10' having features like internal dialing, call hold, call transfer, call pick up, DND, conference and call park. Assign it to SLT 207 and 208 (ports 07 and 08 respectively) for all the time zones. 1701-10-01-1-#* 1701-10-02-1-#* 1701-10-03-1-#* 1701-10-04-1-#* 1701-10-15-1-#* 1701-10-21-1-#* 1701-10-26-1-#* 1711-07-10-#* 1711-08-10-#* 1712-07-10-#* 1712-08-10-#* 1713-07-10-#* 1713-08-10-#*

3rd COS group is the default COS group.

Code Meaning0 Feature disabled1 Feature enabled


Matrix

Use following command to default a COS group: 1703-COS Group-#*

Range Commands

Relevant Topic: 1. Time Tables 300

=X=X=

Enable/Disable the feature in all the groups 1701-**-Feature Number-Flag-#* Assign a COS group to all SLTs in working hours 1711-**-COS Group-#* Assign a COS group to all SLTs in break hours 1712-**-COS Group-#* Assign a COS group to all SLTs in non-working hours 1713-**-COS Group-#* Assign a COS group to all DKPs in working hours 1721-*-COS Group-#* Assign a COS group to all DKPs in break hours 1722-*-COS Group-#* Assign a COS group to all DKPs in non-working hours 1723-*-COS Group-#*


Matrix


Communication Port

What's this?• The Cosine has a Communication port (DB9 connector), which is used to download the SMDR reports on the

computer.• The Communication port uses RS232C protocol.• The technical specifications of Communication Port are given below:

The Communication port parameters are fixed and not programmable. These are: • Baud Rate = 19200 bps • Data bits = 8 • Start bit = 1 • Stop bit = 1 • Parity bit = 0 • Flow control = none

The Communication Port can be assigned to Processes like, SMDR report generation, Programming with Jeeves. While the Communication Port is being used by any of the processes, the data communication between the process and the port can be paused and then resumed at convenience.

Use the following command to Pause/Resume data communication between the Process and Communication Port: 5920-Flag-#* Where,

Pause, stops the data communication between the Process and Communication Port.

A Resume command has to be issued to resume the data communication between the process and communication Port. Resuming the process, starts the data communication exactly from the point where it was paused.

Relevant Topics:1. Programming Using Jeeves 252 2. Station Message Detail Recording 284 3. Station Message Detail Recording-Incoming 285 4. Station Message Detail Recording-Outgoing 290

=X=X=

Pin No. Signal Name 1 Data Carrier Detect (DTD) 2 Receive Data (RXD) 3 Transmit Data (TXD) 4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) 5 Ground (GND) 6 Data Set Ready (DSR) 7 Request To Send (RTS) 8 Clear To Send (CTS) 9 Ring Indicator (RI)

Flag Meaning0 Pause1 Resume

Matrix

Conference-3 Party

What's this?The Cosine offers a facility of 3-party conference. 3-Party conference can be conducted at a spur of the moment without much prior planning. If a user is talking to some one and he feels that he needs to include a third person in his present talk and have a conference, he can do so without disconnecting his present talk. All he has to do is to hold present person, dial the third person and then dial conference code.

Following three combinations are allowed in 3-party conference:• All three stations.• Two stations and one trunk.• One station and two trunks.

How it works?

Flow chart on the next page explains these steps.

1 3-way mode as described in call splitting.2 Dial Flash-0. Conference tone for 4 sec. 3 way speech.

Start

Station A is speaking to Station B

They need to include Station C in their talk

Station a puts Station B on hold. Station A gets feature tone. Station B gets music.

Station A dials Station C

Station C answers the call. Station A and Station C are in speech. This is a normal situation occurring a call transfer.

Station A dials Flash-0 to activate 3-party conference

Station A, Station B and Station C are in speech.

Any Station disconnects?

Remaining two stations in normal 2-way speech.

Once again they can conduct a conference with a new station

End

Station A dials flash?

Station C goes on hold and gets music. Station A and Station B remain in speech.

This is normal situation occurring during a call transfer

End

No

Yes

Yes

No


Matrix

How to program?Access of Conference is programmable. Hence it can be allowed or denied to each user. Please refer section"Class of Service (COS)" for details on programming this feature. The Conference Tone (beeps) that is received at the time of conference establishment is programmable.

Use the following command to Enable/Disable the beeps at the time of conference establishment: 4002-Code-#* Where,


It is possible to have Conference-Unsupervised.This feature enables the operator to connect two trunks through the system and getting herself free from the discussion. This feature is used quite often nowadays to connect two local lines which otherwise if try to talk would be charged at long distance rates.

Suppose I am at city A. My two colleagues are at city B and city C. City B and City C are charged at long distance rates from each other. City B and City C are charged at local rates from city A. Now using this feature, I being at City A can make conference with City B and City C and once in conversation, if I disconnect then City B and City C can talk at local rates.

How to use it?

For more details, please refer "Call Splitting", "Call Transfer" and "Direct Inward System Access (DISA)".

Relevant Topics:1. Class of Service (COS) 1122. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 166

=X=X=

Code Meaning0 Disable1 Enable

1 Speech with trunk.2 Dial Flash. Feature tone. Trunk goes on hold.3 Dial 8 (Dial 6 for North American/South American users). Feature tone4 Dial Trunk Access Code. Dial tone of the trunk.5 Dial Telephone Number. Ring Back Tone 6 Speech with called party when the call is answered.7 Dial Flash-1. Speech with held party.8 Dial Flash-1. Speech with second trunk.9 Dial Flash-#. Trunk1-Trunk2 in speech.


Matrix

Conference-Multi Party

What's this?Telephonic conference is a useful facility because it saves time. It allows internal and external users to meet over the telephone without physically traveling to remote areas. There are total 5 conferencing circuits in the system. The Cosine supports maximum of 15-party conference. As it employs digital conferencing circuits, the number of parties involved in a conference does not affect the speech level.

How it works?• For each conference, there is a master. This master is responsible for conducting the conference. He can initiate a

conference, include participants, disconnect participants and terminate the conference.• The master calls up a participant and informs him about the scheduled conference. Then master dials 'flash' to put the

participant on hold. The participant starts hearing music. Now, master dials conference inclusion code. This way, the master contacts and includes all the participants. A participant can be an internal or external party.

• Once all the participants are ready and waiting for the conference to begin, the master dials conference activation code. The master and all the participants get a conference tone for a second and then on all are connected in speech mode. They can now converse among themselves.

• The master can disconnect an internal participant any time by dialing disconnection code followed by the station number from dial tone. But, he cannot disconnect an external participant mid-way. All the external participants can be disconnected only at the end of conference.

• The master can terminate a conference by dialing termination code from dial tone. All the participants are released from the conference and the resources are freed for other users to conduct new conferences. The internal participants get error tone. Where as, the external trunks are released whether incoming or outgoing.

Maximum conference participants 15Maximum simultaneous conferences (If all the conferences involve 3 parties) 5Maximum parties involve in conference (If all 15 parties in a single conference) 15


Matrix

Following flow chart high lights the conference logic:

Start

Master decides to hold a tele-conference

He prepare a list of all the participants to be included in the conference

Master contacts a participants

He informs the participants about the planned conference

He dials flash. Participant gets music.

Master dials conference inclusion code. Master gets confirmation tone.

The master goes ON-Hook (idle) and then OFF-Hook or waits for completion of confirmation tone. Master gets dial tone.

Any more participant to be included?

The master dials conference inclusion code again

Conference is activated. All participants can converse.

The master decides to involve a new participant

A

Yes

No

ConferenceInitiation

ConferenceActivation


Matrix

Include A new

Participant

Disconnecting a participant

A

The master goes ON-Hook (idle). All the present participants get music.

The master contact the new participant

He informs the participant about the conference

He dials Flash. New participant also gets music.

Master dials conference inclusion code. The master gets confirmation tone.

The master dials conference inclusion code again.

Conference is once again activated. All can converse including the new participant.

The master decides to disconnect a participant.

The master goes ON-Hook (Idle). All the participants get music.

The master dials the conference disconnection code followed by the internal participant’s number.

The master and the participants both get connected. Master asks the participant to go ON-Hook and disconnects the phone.

The master dials conference inclusion code

Once again the conference is activated. All remaining participants can converse.

B


Matrix

How to use it? To Initiate conference between Station A, Station B, Station C and Station D.

To Include Station E in the mid of the conference.

To Exclude Station C in the mid of the conference.

1 Lift the handset (From Station A). Dial tone 2 Dial Station B. Ring Back tone, Speech. 3 Dial Flash. Feature tone, Station B gets music.4 Dial 191. Dial tone 5 Dial Station C. Ring Back tone, Speech. 6 Dial Flash. Feature tone, Station C gets music.7 Dial 191. Dial tone 8 Dial Station D. Ring Back tone, Speech. 9 Dial Flash. Feature tone, Station D gets music.

10 Dial 191. Dial tone11 Dial 191. All in speech.

1 All in speech.2 Go ON-Hook. All participants get music on hold.3 Dial Station E. RBT. Speech.4 Dial Flash. Feature tone5 Dial 191. Dial tone6 Dial 191. All the participants including Station E in speech.

1 All participants in speech.2 Go ON-Hook. All participants get music on hold.3 Dial 192-Station C. Speech with Station C. Other participants get Music on hold. 4 Ask Station C to disconnect. Dial tone 5 Dial 191. All the remaining participants in speech.

ConferenceTermination

B

The master decides to terminate the conference

Participants exchange ‘Good Bye’.

The master goes ON-Hook (idle).

All the participants get music

The master dials conference termination code. He gets confirmation tone.

The master goes ON-Hook (idle)

End


Matrix

To Terminate the conference.

Few possible casesMultiparty conference among few stations

Multiple Multi Party conference among few Stations simultaneously.

Multi party conferences between one trunk and few stations

1 All participants in speech.2 Go ON-Hook. All participants get music on hold.3 Dial 190. All participants are released.

PSTN Cosine

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

A, B, C and D are in Conference

A

C

E

D

B

PSTN

Cosine

S1S2S3S4S5

S6S7S8S9

S10S11S12

A, B, C, D and E are in Conference1W, X, Y and Z are in Conference2F, G and H are in Conference3

A

C

E

D

B

W

Y

F

Z

X

H

G

PSTN

Cosine

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

A

C

E

D

B

T1T2T3T4T5


Matrix

Multiple conferences between few trunks and few stations

Multiparty Conference between few trunks and one station

Multiparty conference between few trunks and few stations only simultaneously

How to program?Access to Multiparty Conference is programmable. Hence this feature can be allowed or denied to each user. Refer section ‘Class of Service (COS)’ for details on programming of this feature.

One can program the system to receive the Conference Tone (beeps) on conference establishment. Use the following command to Enable/Disable the beeps at the time of conference establishment: 4002-Code-#* Where,


If the conference tone is enabled every time the master puts the conference on hold and restarts, the participants hear the beeps.

Timer of Relevance:Conference Timer: Time after which the held up participant will get disconnected if not included by the Master.Command: 4001-Timer-#*

Code Meaning0 Disable1 Enable

PSTN

CosineS1S2S3S4S5

S6S7S8S9

A

C

E

D

B

F

H

I

G

T1T2T3T4T5T6

PSTN

Cosine

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

A

C

E

D

B

T1T2T3T4T5

PSTN

S1

S2S3

S4S5S6S7

A

C

ED

B

FG

T1

T2T3T4T5T6

Cosine


Matrix

Range: 001 to 255 minutes.Default: 003 minutes.

Important Points:• The feature codes of Conference are programmable. Please refer 'Access Codes' for more details. • Any participant in conference can exclude himself simply by disconnecting. • At the end of conference, if the master forgets to dial conference termination code and simply goes on-hook then all

the participants gets music. This music comes for time = Conference Timer. • It is possible to have Multiparty conference from a remote location also. Suppose you want to have conference with

your friends at City A and City B but since it is Sunday the office is closed. All you have to do is: • Dial your office on a DISA enabled trunk. Call your City A friend. Put him on hold by dialing "#2". • Please note that you do not dial 'Flash' to put the participant on hold, else the call will get disconnected since you

are in DISA mode.• Mumbai participant gets music.• Dial conference inclusion code.• You get confirmation tone. • Go on-hook (Dial #0). • Go off-hook (Dial #1). • Call your City B friend and include him in conference mode. Dial conference activation code. All can converse.

Keep dialing any digit to continue the conference since you are in DISA mode.

Relevant Topics:1. Conference-3 Party 120 2. Class of Service (COS) 112 3. Access Codes 42

=X=X=


Matrix


Conflict Dialing

What's this?• Cosine allows overlapping among feature codes and station numbers i.e one access code can be a part of another

access code viz 4, 41, 412 etc. or the flexible number of stations can be 201, 2011, etc.• When an access code that is a subset of any other access code is dialed the system waits for some time for the user

to dial the next digit. In case the user does not dial any digit within that time, the system interprets it is the smaller access code.

• The time for which the system waits for the next digit to be dialed before resolving the access codes is called as Conflict Dialing Wait Timer.

• For Example, Let the access code of Call Pick Up be '4' and access code for Alarms be '41' and Auto Call Back be '412'. Now when the user dials '4', the system waits for time = conflict dialing wait timer before resolving the digit dialed. If no other digit is dialed before the conflict dialing wait timer expires the system interprets the code as '4'. If '1' is dialed before the conflict dialing wait timer elapses the system interprets it has '41'. Now the system waits for the next digit again for time = conflict dialing wait timer. If no other digit is dialed before the conflict dialing wait timer expires the system interprets the code as '41'. If '2' is dialed before the conflict dialing wait timer expires the system interprets the code as '412' (if there are no access codes like 4121 or 4123 etc. If any such access code exists the system waits for another time=conflict dialing wait timer for another digit). Once the access code is resolved the system responds accordingly.

• This allows faster response to features having sub set access codes.

How to program? Use the following command to program conflict dialing wait timer: Command: 5221-Timer-#*Default: 002 seconds.Valid Range: 001 to 255 seconds (This can be executed from SA Mode also).

Important Points:• This is different from Trunk Digit-Digit Wait Timer and Internal Digit-Digit Wait Timer. • If the value of the timer is very long, there could be a delay in the system response to the feature. If the value is too

small, there are chances of mis interpreting the access codes. So the value programmed must be optimum.

Relevant Topics: 1. Emergency Dialing 1862. Emergency Detection and Reporting 1853. Access Codes 424. Flexible Numbers 195

=X=X=

Matrix


Continued Dialing

What's this?• Continued Dialing allows a station to dial the desired external number, wait for the called party to answer and then dial

additional digits. • This helps users to access services like Auto Attendant, Voice Mail and Interactive Voice Response (IVR). • This also helps in using service provider features like Call Waiting.

How to use it?

Example:To use Call Waiting facility of service provider exchange from any station, perform following steps:

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow continued dialing to a user.

Important Point:• The system allows dialing the code within Trunk Digit-Digit Wait Timer after dialing Flash-*. If the code to be dialed on

trunk line is disable; after Trunk Digit-Digit Wait Timer of dialing; the system considers it to invalid code and does not pass on to the trunk line.

Relevant Topics:1. Class of Service (COS) 112 2. Flash Timer 193 3. Trunk Parameters 320

=X=X=

1 Speech with trunk.2 Dial Flash. Feature tone 3 Dial *. Feature tone stopped.4 Dial Desired Code.

1 Dial Flash-*. This informs the system to pass following code.2 Dial Flash-1. Speech with second call.3 Dial Flash-*. This informs the system to pass following code.4 Dial Flash-1. Speech with first call.5 Dial Flash-*. This informs the system to pass following code.6 Dial Flash-1. Speech with second call.

Matrix


Conversation Recording

What's this? Cosine offers flexibility to the user to record an on-line conversation by simply dialing a code.

How to use it?

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Conversation Recording to a user.

Important Point:• If the user not having a mailbox, issues the command for conversation recording, the message is stored in general

mailbox.

Relevant Topics:1. Class of Service (COS) 112 2. Voice Mail System (VMS) Gateway 327

=X=X=

1 Speech with caller.2 Dial 'Flash'. Feature tone 3 Dial 1095. Recording of conversation starts.

Matrix

Daylight Saving Time

What's this?• It is the new local time a region is assigned for a portion of the year, usually an hour forward from its standard official

time.• The clocks are advanced at the beginning of the daylight saving time and delayed at the end of the daylight saving

time.

How it works? The advancement of clocks (DST Mode) can be Disabled, Manual or Scheduled. • The daylight saving time is not applicable to certain regions (viz. Asia, South America, etc.). The system users of

these regions can program the DST Mode as Disabled. These regions always follow the standard time.• In Australasia, North America and Europe the DST time is fixed. The users from this region can program the DST

Mode as scheduled. Cosine will apply an extra hour to the time automatically.For Australasian Users

Daylight Saving Time begins at 02:00 AM on the last Sunday of March. Time reverts to standard time at 03:00 AM on the last Sunday of October. For the year 2005, DST begins on 27th March and ends on 30th October.

For European Users Daylight Saving Time begins at 01:00 AM on the last Sunday of March. Time reverts to standard time at 01:00 AM on the last Sunday of October. For the year 2005, DST begins on 27th March and ends on 30th October.

For North American Users Daylight Saving Time begins at 02:00 AM on the first Sunday of April. Time reverts to standard time at 02:00 AM on the last Sunday of October. For the year 2005, DST begins 3rd April and ends on 30th October. So for the system users in these regions can program the DST Mode as Scheduled.

• There can be certain regions which do not follow the scheduled DST, but have their own DST requirements. In such regions the DST mode is to be programmed as Manual and the time and date at which the clock is to be advanced and the time and date at which the clock is to be delayed has to be programmed separately.

How to program? Use following command to program the DST Mode: 1010-ModeWhere,

By default, 0 is the DST mode assigned to Asian/African/South American users. (Based on Region code) By default, 2 is the DST mode assigned to European/North American/Australasian users. (Based on Region code).

Use following command to advance the clock at the beginning of the DST (Required only if the DST mode is manual):1011-Date-Month-Current Time-Advance Time-#* Where,Date=01 to 31 (leading zero must in case of single digit date).Month=01 to 12 (leading zero must in case of single digit month).Current Time is in HH:MM format, HH from 00 to 23 and MM from 00 to 59 (leading zero must).Advance Time is in HH:MM format, HH from 00 to 23 and MM from 00 to 59 (leading zero must).This can be executed from the SA mode also.

The current time is the time that is presently followed by the system. The advance time is the time to which the Real Time Clock (RTC) should be set to. Please note that the advance time should be greater than the current time.

Use following command to delay the clock at the end of the DST (Required only if the DST mode is manual): 1012-Date-Month-Current Time-Delay Time-#* Where,Date=01 to 31 (leading zero must in case of single digit date).Month=01 to 12 (leading zero must in case of single digit month).Current Time is in HH:MM format, HH from 00 to 23 and MM from 00 to 59 (leading zero must).Delay Time is in HH:MM format, HH from 00 to 23 and MM from 00 to 59 (leading zero must).

Mode Meaning0 Disabled1 Manual2 Scheduled


Matrix

This can be executed from the SA mode also.

The current time is the time that is presently followed by the system. The delay time is the time to which the Real Time Clock (RTC) should be set to. Please note that the delay time should be less than the current time.

Use the following command to program the DST Type (Required only if the DST mode is Scheduled): 1013-Type-#*Where,

This can be executed from the SA mode also. • Type 1 is the default type applicable to Australasian users. • Type 2 is the default type applicable to European users. • Type 3 is the default type applicable to North American users.

Relevant Topic:1. Real Time Clock 261

=X=X=

Type Meaning0 None1 Type 12 Type 23 Type 3


Matrix

Default Settings

What's this?Every system comes with pre-defined set of variable like station's flexible numbers, timers and other parameters. These pre-defined settings are called default settings. The default value of each programmable parameter is mentioned in the respective section. If the default setting suits your requirement then, you may not even require to program the system and the system will work with the default settings.

When to use it?Many times it happens that due to some programming error, the system goes haywire and you are unable to analyse the problem. During such a situation, it is advisable to default the system. However, software default of the system can be done from the programming mode and hence programming password should be known. If you forget the password default cannot be done and in that case hardware default of the system should be done.

How to use it?The Cosine offers default values to suit the customers worldwide. By default, the values programmed are relevant to suit the Asian Users. The other users can load the default parameters to suit their requirements. Firstly the user has to select the suitable region code. Please refer 'Region Code' for more details. After choosing the region the user has to default the system to load the suitable default parameters.

Use the following command to load the default parameters: 5501-Reverse SE Password-#*

Use the following command to load the default timer values: 5502-#*

The following table lists the default values of various parameters:

Feature Parameters Asia Europe/Africa/Australia

North America/ South America

Alarms Alarm Ring Timer 45 60 60 Auto Call Back ACB Ring Timer 30 10 10 Auto Redial RBT Wait Timer 60 60 60 Auto Redial Ring Timer 45 10 10 Auto Redial Low Priority Retry Interval 30 100 100 Auto Redial Low Priority Retry Count 5 10 10 Automated Control Applications Mode Type Manual-ON

Manual-OFF Manual-Automatic Manual-Automatic

Automated Control Applications On Duration Timer 60 1 1

Automated Control Applications Off Duration Timer 60 1 1

Call Duration Control CDC Timer 160 999 999 Call Progress Tone Dial Tone Timer 7 10 10 Call Progress Tone Busy Tone 7 10 10 Call Progress Tone Feature Tone 7 10 10 DID Beeps Timer 10 7 7 DID Ring Timer 15 25 25 DID Busy Tone Timer 5 5 5 DID Error Tone Timer 3 5 5 DISA Inactivity Timer 90 90 90 Hotline Timer 3 3 3 LCR CPS State Off Off Off Station Group Rotation Off On On Station group Destination Ring timer 15 0 0


Matrix

Important Points:• When the default command is issued the parameters are loaded to suit the region code of the system at that time. • Default command does not default the region code. (The region code has to be changed explicitly). • The user has to select his region code and then default the system to load the default parameters to suit the region.

i.e By default, the region code is Asia and the default values of programmable parameters are set to suit the Asian market. Now when the system is shipped to North America, the user has to first set the region code to North America and then default the system to load the North American default values. If the same unit is shipped back to India, the user has to again set the region code to Asia and then default the system to load Asian defaults.

Relevant Topics:1. Programming the System 250 2. System Administrator (SA) Mode 296 3. System Engineer (SE) Mode 297 4. System Parameters 298 5. Region Code 262

=X=X=

Station group Continuous Ring Flag Off On On Time table (SLT/DKP/TRK) 1 (Auto) 0 (Manual) 0 (Manual) TAG Rotation On Off Off Trunk Parameters Pulse Dial Ratio 33:67 (Type =1) 40:60 (Type =2) 50:50 (Type =3) Trunk Parameters Pause Timer 1 1 1 CLIP(SLT/TRK) CLIP DTMF FSK ITU V.23 FSK Bell212 SLT Flash timer SLT Flash Timer 600ms 100ms 600ms Trunk Flash timer Trunk Flash Timer 600ms 100ms 600ms Date Date-Time Format DD-MM-YYYY DD-MM-YYYY MM-DD-YYYY Trunk Maturity Maturity Delay timer 15 15 15 Access Code Auto Call Back on Busy 2 5 5

Auto Call Back on No Reply 2 5 5 Interrupt Request 3 6 6 Barge-In 4 7 7 Raid 5 Not Allowed Not Allowed Cancel ACB on Busy/No Reply 102 105 105

Call Split 1 2 2 Conference 0 3 3 Conference Tone Off On On Emergency Number None 112,113,115 911 Trunk Reservation 6 8 8 Forced Answer 5 6 6

Feature Parameters Asia Europe/Africa/Australia

North America/ South America


Matrix

Department Call

What's this?• Many times it is required to call any one of the persons in a department (group). It is not important to talk to a

particular person.• The caller just wants any member of the group. Cosine offers flexibility to group of stations belonging to a particular

department. This group is called department group.• The call made to this group using a code is called Department Call. The access code used to make such call is called

Department Number.• Hence now the caller has to dial only the Department Number. However the caller can access individual station of the

group also by dialing the station number.

Department Call is allowed through DID call also. Hence if the caller is making a call to you for the first time and wants some information about your company then he may dial the Information Department instead of dialing any particular station or waiting for the operator. A call can be forwarded to a department group.

How to use it?

Example:To access any of the free stations in a group 1, dial 3901.

How it works? • Maximum 5 department groups can be formed. Groups are given numbers from 1 to 5. • Maximum 16 station groups can be formed and that will be assigned to Department Group. • Each station can either be a SLT or a DKP. Please refer the topic 'Station Group' for more details.

How to program?Step 1: Decide the number of department groups to be used.Step 2: Program Station Groups accordingly.Step 3: Program to assign Station Group to a Department Group using command 2401.Step 4: Program to assign Access Code to a Department Group using command 4310.

Step 1Decide the number of department groups to be used.

Step 2Program Station Groups for the purpose. Please refer the topic 'Station Group' for more details.

Step 3Use following command to assign a Station Group to a Department Group. 2401-Department Group Number-Station Group Number-#* Where, Department Group Number is from 1-5.Station Group Number is from 01-16.Default Department Groups is as follows:

Use following command to assign a Station Group to all Department Group. 2401-*- Station Group Number-#*

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone

2 Dial Department Number. Ring Back Tone (The call lands on the programmed station within the department group).

Department Group Number Station Group Number 1 01 2 01 3 01 4 01 5 01


Matrix

Step 4How to assign an access code of your choice to Department group?Department number is an access code dialed from the dial phase to call a department group. There are maximum 05 department groups. Each department group access code must be unique and should not match with either SLT station number or DKP station number or any of the features available from the dial phase.

A typical table for default access codes for the department groups looks like:

Use following command to program the access code for a department group: 4310-Department Group-Access Code-#* Where,Department Group is from 1 to 5.Access Code is of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits.

Use following command to clear the access code of a department group:4310-Department Group-#*

Use following command to default the access code of all department groups:4311-#*

Use following command to clear access codes for all department groups: 4312-#*

Relevant Topics:1. Station Group 279 2. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 161

=X=X=

Department Group Access Codes 1 3901 2 3902 3 3903 4 3904 5 3905


Matrix

Dial by Name Using DID

What's this? A caller can reach the desired person in an organization by dialing the name of the person. This helps the caller to access the desired person by his name in case his station number is forgotten. This is an advanced feature of an auto-attendant (DID).

How it works?

Start

Caller calls the Cosine

Cosine greets the caller as per the daytime/nighttime

System plays the dial message and beeps

A

Caller dials #

Cosine plays dial by Name message and beeps

Caller dials the digits corresponding to the abbreviated name

Digit dialed?

Cosine plays no dial message:“Sorry, Invalid Entry” and transfer the call to the programmed destination.

Call lands on TLG

End

All three valid digits dialed?

Cosine plays wrong dial message

EndB

Yes

No

No

Yes


Matrix

How to use it?• Call the Cosine. • Dial '#'. • Dial first three letters of the name of the person you wish to call. • Cosine transfers the call to the dialed station.

How to program?Step 1: Program the Station name for a SLT using command 1305.Step 2: Program the Station name for a DKP using command 1424.Step 3: Activate Voice Guidance on the trunks.

Step 1Use following command to program the station name for a SLT: 1305-SLT-Abbreviated Name-#* Where,SLT Station is the software port number of the station from 01 to 32.Abbreviated Name is the alphanumeric string of three characters.By default, abbreviated name is blank.

Use following command to clear a station name of a SLT: 305-SLT-#*

Step 2Use the following command to program the station name for a DKP:1424-DKP-Abbreviated Name-#* Where,DKP station is the software port number from 1 to 8.Abbreviated Name is the alphanumeric string of three characters.By default, Abbreviated Name is blank.

B

Cosine transfers the call

Dialed station busy/not responding/

answer the call?

Call processed

End

Cosine plays message gives busy tone to the caller

Cosine plays no reply message

AEnd

Not responding Busy

Answer the call

1 2 3

7

5 6

8 9

* 0 #

4

.


Matrix

Use following command to clear a station name of a DKP: 1424-DKP-#*

Step 3Please refer 'Voice Message Applications' for more details.

Example 1:Program station name 'Sumer' for SLT station 201 (s/w port 01)1305-01-786-#* (786 should be dialed because '7' corresponds to 'S', 8 corresponds to 'U' and '6' corresponds to 'M').

Example 2:Program station name 'Prakash' for DKP Station 301 (s/w port 1)1424-1-772-#*

Important Points:• It is mandatory to program the station name if this feature is to be used.• It is advisable to abbreviate the name of the station user to his first three alphabets. For example, Abbreviate Ganesh

to Gan, Hiren to Hir, Sagar to Sag, etc.• However, a station user's name can be abbreviated to any desirable acronym with maximum of three letters. (All the

alphabets are allowed).• It is advisable that the SE programs the station names in such a manner that no acronym corresponds to two different

names.• If in an organization, two persons have a same name then a suitable acronym should be given to each of them to

avoid any confusion. It is also possible to include such typical case in the Dial by Name Using DID message itself, which is programmable. For Example, the message could be recorded as: "Please dial first three letters of the name of the person you wish to talk. For Sumer Mehra dial 786 and for Sumer Mehta dial 728".

• Cosine allows programming of same name or names with common codes for multiple stations. When resolving, the call is diverted to the first match always.

• The caller should have telephone instrument with alphabets printed on the keys.• Cosine checks the dialed station name for its validity. If the dialed number is not valid, it plays wrong dial message

and asks the caller to dial again.• This feature can be used only via DID.

Relevant Topics:1. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 1612. SLT Parameters 2743. Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming 1564. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 166

=X=X=


Matrix


Dial by Name Using Abbreviated DialingWhat's this? • Some times it is easier to call some person, just by dialing his 'Name' because the user may not remember the station

number of that person. For this, a feature 'Dial by Name using Abbreviated Dialing' is provided in the system.• This feature makes use of the list of numbers programmed in the 'Abbreviated directory'. The 'Name' is correlated to

the number programmed in the directory. The user has to just remember the abbreviated dialing codes for making the call even he knows the name of the person to whom he wants to call.

• This feature can be used through EON42 and EON45 station only.

How it works? • This feature is not required to be allowed from 'Class of Service (COS)' before using it.• Name directory is prepared, using all the station names (SLT/EON42/EON45) and Global Directory names;

programmed in the system and is arranged in the alphabetical order. • User can navigate the name list using Up/Down arrow keys. • To make a call, user can select the name by using HOLD key (EON45) or Enter key (EON42). • System will dial the 'Number' considering following parameter for the Station from which the number is dialed:

• If the number is an internal station number, the system will check whether internal dialing is allowed or not to the station.

• If the number is the global directory number, the system will check whether global directory dialing is allowed or not to the station.

• First 8 characters of the LCD will display 'Name' and 'Number' is displayed in remaining characters.• While using this feature, the user should press the next key within 10 second after pressing 'spd' or the soft key

assigned, while entering the 'Name' because the Fixed Timer is '10' Seconds for the system. If no key is pressed during this time, user will get 'error tone'.

• When any key is pressed by the user, the first name corresponding to that key will be displayed.• The process of entering the name is same as in mobile phones for searching the number by name.

How to use it? To call a Station through EON45:

To call a Station through EON42:

Example:To Call 'Sumer', proceed as mentioned below: • Press '7' four times. First Name starting with 'S' will be displayed. • Press '8' two times. First name starting with 'Su" will be displayed. • Press '6' once. First name starting with 'Sum" will be displayed. • Press '3' two times. First name starting with 'Sume' will be displayed. • Press '7' three timers. First name starting with 'Sumer' will be displayed. • Press Hold key to call to Sumer Or Press '7' four times. First Name starting with 'S' will be displayed. • Navigate the name list with down arrow key and when Sumer is displayed, press Hold key or 'Enter' key to call to

Sumer.

Relevant Topics: 1. Abbreviated Dialing 39 2. Digital Key Phone-Operation 144 3. Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming 156

=X=X=

1 Press the key 'spd'. EON45 displays "Enter Name". 2 Enter the first character. EON45 displays the first name beginning with that character. Use the Up/

Down arrow keys to navigate to the name menu or enter the second character of the name to be searched.

3 Press 'hold' to select the person. The system calls the person.

You get RBT/Busy/Error tone

1 Press 'Soft key assigned'. EON42 displays "Enter Name". 2 Enter the first character. EON42 displays the first name beginning with that character. Use the

Up/Down arrow keys to navigate to the name menu or enter the second character of the name to be searched.

3 Press 'Enter' key to select the person. The system calls the person.

You get RBT/Busy/Error tone

Matrix

Digital Input Port (DIP)

What's this? • The Cosine provides Digital Input Port for various control applications. • An external device like fire alarm sensor, smoke sensor, glass-breaking detector, etc. which conforms to the

specifications of the DIP can be connected to it.

How it works? • When the sensor connected to the DIP instigates the DIP, the system works as per the programming. Suppose the

system is programmed to make an external call on receiving instigation on DIP then in such case when the DIP receives a signal from the sensor, the system makes an external call to a programmed destination as per the programming.

• The DIP can be programmed as normally close or normally open.

How to connect the external devices to the DIP?

Please be sure to connect the sensor as per the technical specifications of the DIP.

Technical Specifications of the DIP:

How to program?Step 1: Enable/Disable the DIP using Command 6801.Step 2: Program the DIP as Normally Close/Normally Open using command 6802.Step 3: Program the Event Sense Timer using command 6803.

Step 1Use the following command to enable/disable the DIP: 6801-Code-#* Where,

By default, Code is 0.

Step 2Use the following command to program the DIP as normally open/normally close: 6802-Code-#*

Type Loop Open/Close SensingLoop Current Supplied 10mA (max.)

Code Meaning 0 Disable DIP 1 Enable DIP

Fire Alarm


Matrix

Where,

By default, Code is 0.

Step 3Use the following command to program the Event Sense Timer:6803-Event Sense Timer-#* Where,Event Sense Timer is from 001 to 255 seconds.This timer signifies the time for which the instigator signal should remain on DIP to be identified as genuine signal.By default, Event Sense Timer is 005.

Relevant Topics:1. Automated Control Applications 68 2. Digital Output Port (DOP) 160 3. Security Dialer 268

=X=X=

Code Meaning 0 Program DIP as Normally Open 1 Program DIP as Normally Closed


Matrix

Digital Key Phone-Operation

What's this? Matrix offers two type of digital key phone (DKP): • EON45 • EON42S

EON45EON45 is a feature-rich, easy to use station with following characteristics:• 2-line x 16 character LCD.• Total 45 Keys.• Total 26 programmable keys. • Dual Color LEDs to show status of ports. Green LED gives the status for called station ringing (Green LED blinks), in

speech with station or incoming call (Green LED continuous ON). Red LED indicates various statuses like going OFF-Hook, internal dialing, dialing on trunk, on hold, other two stations in speech, etc.

• Handsfree operation.• Adjustable ringer type and level.• Adjustable speech levels.

EON42S• EON42S is a DKP with 2-line, 24 characters display (2X24 LCD Display).• User can detach EON45 and attach EON42S on the same DKP Port.• The Cosine itself will identify the attached type of DKP. No user command is required to distinguish the type of DKP

attached to DKP port. • Messages related to events are different for EON45 and EON42S. • The Cosine will identify the type of DKP connected to it and show relevant messages on its display. • In EON42S, the Direct Station Selection (DSS) keys from 01 to 25 are programmable including 'Headset' and

'Speaker' keys. Each DSS key has in built LED which is of dual colour.• There is a 'Ringer' LED on the top of right hand side. The Ringer LED cadence is same as Call Appearance key LED

cadence (ring cadence) when there is an incoming call on that port.• In EON42S there are only 24 DSS keys. Thus, all 24 keys are used for A-X alphabets while programming name. To

program remaining two Alphabets (Y and Z), you can use up key of EON42S as 'Y' alphabet and use down key of EON42S, as 'Z' alphabet.

• For details of DSS Key's LED status, refer chapter 'Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming'.

Key Map for EON45 and EON42S: • Table-1 explains the functions associated with keys in EON42S and shows difference between the key label of

EON45 and EON42S.• Key map of EON45, EON42S and default configuration for EON42 as Operator and Executive are also shown. • Text Messages for LCD display related to events for EON45 and EON42S are different.

Table-1: Comparison for Key functioning between EON45 and EON42S Key Map of EON45


Matrix

Key Map of EON45

Key Map of EON42S

Default Setting in the EON42S

1 2 3 redial

spd654

7 8 9 trf/fl

hold0

Fun

01061116

21

02071217

22

03081318

23

04091419

24

05101520

25

* #

Vol 26

Fixed Keys

ProgrammableKeys (01-25)

ProgrammableKey

01020304

0506

07

13141516

1718

080910

1112

Key Key

Fixed Keys

ProgrammableKeys

Ringer LED

* 0 #

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

ProgrammableKeys19

202122

2324

25 Programmable Key


Matrix

Key functions for a EON42S Operator (Cosine64)

Key functions for a EON42S Executive (Cosine64)

Ringer LED

* 0 #

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

01020304

0506

07

13141516

1718

080910

1112

Key Key

Trunk 03

Trunk 02Trunk 01CA 04

SLT04 SLT03SLT02SLT01

ConferenceForward

Dial by NameAuto Redial

DKP 4

CA 03CA 02CA 01

ReleaseTransfer

192021222324

DKP 3DKP 2DKP 1

Trunk 04

Ringer LED

* 0 #

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

01020304

0506

07

13141516

1718

080910

1112

Key Key

DKP 3

DKP 2DKP 1Trunk 04

SLT08SLT07SLT06SLT05

ConferenceForward


SLT04

Trunk 03Trunk 02Trunk 01

Auto Call BackTransfer

19202122

2324

SLT03SLT02SLT01

DKP 4


Matrix

Key functions for a EON42S Executive (Cosine32)

LCD Back Light Function for EON42: EON42 supports this feature for power saving. If no activity is performed on/by EON42 within defined time, back light of the EON42 LCD display will get turned OFF.

Following parameters can be programmed for Display settings. These parameters can be programmed from EON42 from Menu (Display Settings) and from SE commands.• LCD Contrast: It is programmable from minimum contrast to maximum contrast. • LCD Back Light: It is programmable from minimum intensity to maximum intensity. • LCD Back Light OFF Timer: It signifies time period after which the LCD back light will get turned off if no activity is

performed by/on EON42 within the configured time. The back light will remain continuously ON irrespective of LCD Back Light OFF Timer, when user is in speech.

• The LCD Back Light will remain ON for programmed "LCD Back Light Level" for programmed "LCD Back Light OFF Timer".

• The LCD backlight will be turned ON, in following conditions:• Incoming call comes on the EON42. • User goes OFF-Hook. • Any key pressed from the EON42 in any state EON42 user goes ON-Hook.

• The LCD back light will NOT be turned ON, in following conditions: • If EON42 is being monitored (Room Monitoring is performed by another station user on the EON42). • While updating RTC-Date and Time on EON42. • If LCD Back light level is set to '0'.

Second call indication on EON42:EON42 gives an indication on LCD display when second call comes while it is busy with first call. It does not give Ring or Tone indication for the second call. This is explained with following example: • Station '301' (EON42) and Station '201' are in speech. • During this time the station '202', calls '301'. In this condition Station '301' will not give any Ring indication. But the

user '301' can see new call information on the LCD of station '301'. • Now when user '301' goes on-hook, it will ring (provided call from station '202' is still present). • When station '301' answers the call the ring will be stopped. • Finally, Station '301' will be in speech with '202'.

Notes:• DKP refers to both EON45 and EON42, if not mentioned. • These all parameters can be copied using copy command for DKP.

Ringer LED

* 0 #

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

01020304

0506

07

13141516

1718

080910

1112

Key Key

DKP 3

DKP 2DKP 1Trunk 04

SLT09SLT08SLT07SLT06

ConferenceForward


SLT05

Trunk 03Trunk 02Trunk 01

Auto Call BackTransfer

19202122

2324

SLT04SLT03SLT02

SLT01


Matrix

How to program? Step 1: Assign a hardware ID to the DKP software ports using command 1202. (If required) Step 2: Assign the flexible numbers to access these DKPs using command 4304. Step 3: Program the CA for a DKP port using command 1401. Step 4: To set the ringer tune, ringer volume, ringer mode, ringer delay timer, auto acknowledge mode, ringer auto

acknowledge timer using commands 1402, 1403, 1404, 1405, 1406 and 1407.Step 5: To set the handset MIC volume and speaker volume to a DKP using commands 1408 and 1409. Step 6: To set the speaker phone MIC volume and speaker volume using commands 1410 and 1411.Step 7: To set the key click volume using command 1412.Step 8: To enable/disable DTMF generation flag using command 1414.Step 9: To adjust DTMF transmit level to a DKP using command 1415.Step 10: To program call answer type to a DKP using command 1416.Step 11: To program auto answer time on auto answer mode for DKP using command 1417.Step 12: To enable/disable connectivity on EON42 using command 1413.Step 13: To adjust LCD backlight level for EON42 using command 1426.Step 14: To adjust LCD contrast for EON42 using command 1427.Step 15: To adjust backlight OFF timer for EON42 using command 1428.Step 16: To set the destination of playing ring on EON42 using command 1429.Step 17: To assign the default settings to the DKP using command 1420.Step 18: To copy parameters from one DKP to another DKP using command 1421.Step 19: To lock/unlock the DKP keypad using command 5703.

Step 1Please refer "Software Port and Hardware ID" for details.

Step 2Please refer "Flexible Numbers" to know how to assign a Flexible number to the DKP.

Step 3Call Appearance (CA)A DKP can handle more than one call at a time. This is useful for operator stations where many calls can land simultaneously. Executive who use their telephones extensively need to handle more calls simultaneously. A DKP can be programmed to have a minimum of 2 CA and a maximum of 10 CA. The CA logic is elaborated in following points: • If the number of CA = 3, the second incoming call also lands successfully and the caller gets ring back tone. The DKP

user can use one CA to hold the previous call and another CA to handle the current call. The DKP user can use the CA keys to attend both the caller (toggle).

• If the number of CA = 10, then 9 calls can land on the station simultaneously.• An operator must be assigned optimum number of CA depending on the traffic.• A DKP must be assigned CA keys equal to the number of CA.• Consider a DKP that has 3 CA and 3 programmed CA keys. If there is an incoming internal/external call the call lands

on the first CA the key is blinking with green/orange color. The moment the DKP user answers the call, the blinking stops and there is a continuous glow with the respective color.

The DKP user is in speech with caller if a second party tries to call the station the DKP rings and the caller gets RBT. The DKP user can put a current party on hold by using various methods.• Pressing the Flash key. • Pressing the Hold key.• Pressing the DSS key programmed for the station in speech.• Pressing the CA key on which the call has landed.

When any of the above is performed the current party is held and remains in its CA. The LED now flashes slowly.The DKP user can talk to the second caller by pressing the station key. The second party will come into speech.The DKP user can toggle between both the calls by pressing the individual CA keys. The calls remain in the irrespective CA only until the call is released.For efficient call handling, an operator should not be loaded with more than 8 simultaneous calls.

Use following command to program Call Appearance for DKP stations:1401-DKP-Call Appearance-#* Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP station is from 1 to 8.Call Appearance is from 02 to 10.


Matrix

Use following command to program CA for all the DKPs:1401-*-Call Appearance-#*

CA LED display is as elaborated in the following table.

Step 4Ringer Tune The Cosine supports programmable ringer tunes. Each DKP user can select ringer tune of his choice. There are10 different ringer tunes to choose from.

Use following commands to set the ringer tune to a DKP:1402-DKP-Ringer Tune-#* Where, DKP is the software port from 1 to 8.Ringer Tune is 0-9 (EON45) and 1-8 (EON42).By default, Ringer Tune is 1.

Use following commands to set the ringer tune to all the DKPs: 1402-*-Ringer Tune -#*

Ringer VolumeThe Cosine supports programmable ringer volume. Each DKP user can select ringer volume of his choice. There are 9 different ringer volume levels to choose from.

Use following commands to set the ringer volume to a DKP:1403-DKP-Ringer Volume-#* Where, DKP is the software port from 1 to 8.Ringer Volume Level from 0-9 (EON45) and 1-9 (EON42).By default, Ringer Volume is 5.

Use following commands to set the ringer volume to all the DKPs: 1403-*-Ringer Volume-#*

Ringer Mode The Cosine supports programmable ringer mode. This mode decides when the ring on the DKP should start. There are four options: • Ring immediately as soon as a fresh calls lands on the DKP.• Ring only if the DKP is idle and not doing some activity.• Ring after a delay if the call is still not answered.• Ring always off (Silence mode).Each DKP user can select ringer mode of his choice.

Use following commands to program the ringer mode to a DKP: 1404-DKP-Ringer Mode-#* Where,DKP is the software port from 1 to 8.

By default, Ringer Mode is 1.

Use following commands to program the ringer mode to all the DKPs: 1404-*-Ringer Mode-#*

Internal External Green Orange

Speech Hold Ringing Speech Hold Ringing Continuous On Slow Blink Fast Blink Continuous On Slow Blink Fast Blink

Ringer Mode Meaning 0 Ring Off 1 Ring Immediately 2 Ring if Idle 3 Ring after Delay


Matrix

Ringer Delay Timer If delayed ringer mode is selected for a DKP, the Cosine supports programmable timer. This is called Delayed Ring Timer. Each DKP user can select the timer value of his choice.

Use following commands to program the ringer delay timer to a DKP:1405-DKP-Ringer Delay Timer-#* Where, DKP is the software port from 1 to 8.Ring Delayed Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds.By default, the ringer delay timer value is 10 seconds.

Use following commands to program the ringer delay timer to all the DKPs: 1405-*-Ringer Delay Timer-#*

Ringer Auto Acknowledge The Cosine supports programmable ringer acknowledge mode. This mode decides when the ring on the DKP should stop. There are two options: • Stop only when the call is answered or manually acknowledged. • Stop after delay. Each DKP user can select ringer acknowledge mode of his choice.

Use following commands to program the acknowledge mode to a DKP: 1406-DKP-Acknowledge Mode-#* Where,DKP is the software port from 1 to 8.

By default, Acknowledge mode is OFF.

Use following commands to program the acknowledge mode to all the DKPs: 1406-*-Acknowledge Mode-#*

Ringer Auto Acknowledge Timer If Auto Acknowledge mode is selected for a DKP, the Cosine supports programmable timer. This is called Auto Acknowledge Timer. Each DKP user can select the timer value of his choice.

Use following commands to program the ringer auto acknowledge timer to a DKP: 1407-DKP-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Timer-#* Where, DKP is the software port from 1 to 8.Ringer Auto Acknowledge Timer from 01 to 99 seconds.By default, the Ringer Auto Acknowledge Timer is 10 seconds.

Use following commands to program the ringer to all the DKPs: 1407-*-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Timer-#*

Step 5Handset/Handsfree volume settings It is possible to vary the Handset volume (Speaker or MIC).

Use following command to set the Handset MIC volume of a DKP:1408-DKP-Handset MIC Volume-#* Where, DKP is the software port from 1 to 8.Handset MIC Volume is 0-9 (EON45) and 1-4 (EON42).By default, Handset MIC Volume is 5 (EON45) and 2 (EON42). Assigning 0 means volume is OFF.

Use following command to set the Handset MIC volume of all the DKPs:1408-*-Handset MIC Volume-#*

Acknowledge Mode Meaning 0 Auto Acknowledge OFF 1 Auto Acknowledge ON


Matrix

Use following command to set the Handset Speaker Volume to a DKP: 1409-DKP-Handset Speaker Volume-#* Where,DKP is the software port from 1 to 8.Handset Speaker Volume is 0-9 (EON45) and 1-4 (EON42).By default, Handset Speaker Volume is 5 (EON45) and 2 (EON42). Assigning 0 means Volume is OFF.

Use following command to set the Handset Speaker Volume to all the DKPs:1409-*-Handset Speaker Volume-#*

Step 6Speaker Phone Volume SettingsIt is possible to change the speaker phone volume (Speaker or MIC).

Use following command to set speaker phone MIC volume to a DKP: 1410-DKP-Speaker Phone MIC Volume-#* Where, DKP is the software port from 1 to 8.Speaker Phone MIC Volume is 0-9 (EON45) and 1-4 (EON42).By default, Speaker Phone MIC volume is 5 (EON45) and 2 (EON42). Assigning 0 means volume is OFF.

Use following command to set speaker phone MIC volume to all the DKPs:1410-*-Speaker Phone MIC Volume-#*

Use following command to set the speaker phone speaker volume to a DKP: 1411-DKP-Speaker Phone Speaker Volume-#* Where, DKP is the software port from 1 to 8.Speaker Phone Speaker Volume is 0-9 (EON45) and 1-4 (EON42).By default, Speaker Phone Speaker Volume is 5 (EON45) and 2 (EON42). Assigning 0 means volume is OFF.

Use following command to set the speaker phone speaker volume to all the DKPs:1411-*-Speaker Phone Speaker Volume-#*

Step 7Key Click Settings It is possible to change the key click volume whenever a key is pressed. This assures the user of proper operation of the key.

Use following command to set the key click volume to a DKP: 1412-DKP-Key Click Volume-#* Where,

To Change DKP personal settings, you need to navigate through the menu. Three keys are used for navigation. • 'Func' key is used to go one-step back. It is analogous to 'ESC' of the computer keyboard.• 'Vol' key has two in-built keys. Left side of the key is used to decrement values (we call it 'Dec') and right side of the

key is used to increment values (we call it 'inc'). It is analogous to 'down arrow' and 'up arrow' key of the computer keyboard.

• 'Hold' key is used to enter a submenu. It is analogous to enter key of computer keyboard.

Please note that navigation menu is protected by user password. Hence only authorized person can change the DKP personal settings. However, it is mandatory to change default user password to navigate through the DKP. Default user password does not allow navigation through DKP.

Step 8DTMF GenerationUse the following command to enable/disable DTMF generation flag to a DKP: 1414-DKP-DTMF Generation Control-#*

DTMF Generation Control Meaning 0 DTMF Generation OFF 1 DTMF Generation ON


Matrix

Where, DKP is the software port from 1 to 8.

By default, DTMF Generation Control is On.

Use the following command to enable/disable DTMF generation flag to all DKP: 1414-*-DTMF Generation Control-#*

Step 9DTMF Transmit LevelUse following command to adjust DTMF Transmit Level to a DKP: 1415-DKP-DTMF Transmit Level-#* Where, DKP is the software port from 1 to 8. DTMF Transmit Level is 0 to 9 (EON45) and 1 to 4 (EON42). By default, DTMF Transmit Level is 5 (EON45) and 2 (EON42).

Use following command to adjust DTMF Transmit Level to all DKP: 1415-*-DTMF Transmit Level-#*

Step 10Call Answer TypeUse following command to program Call Answer type to a DKP: 1416-DKP-Call Answer Type-#* Where, DKP is the software port from 1 to 8.

By default, Call answer Type is Manual.

Use following command to program Call Answer type to all DKP: 1416-*- Call Answer Type-#*

Step 11Auto Answer TimeUse following command to program auto answer time for auto call answer mode set for a DKP: 1417-DKP-Auto Answer Time-#* Where, DKP is the software port from 1 to 8. Auto Answer Time is from 1 to 9 seconds. By default, Auto Answer Time is 1 second

Use following command to program auto answer time for auto call answer mode set for all DKP: 1417-*-Auto Answer Time-#*

Commands For EON42:Step 12Headset ConnectivityUse following command to enable Headset connectivity on EON42: 1413-DKP-Headset Connectivity-#*Where, DKP is the software port from 1 to 8.

By default, Headset Connectivity is Disconnected.

DTMF Generation Control Meaning0 DTMF Generation OFF1 DTMF Generation ON

Call Answer Type Meaning0 Manual1 Auto

Headset Connectivity Meaning0 Disconnected1 Connected


Matrix

Use following command to enable Headset connectivity on EON42: 1413-*-Headset Connectivity-#*

Step 13LCD Back Light IntensityUse following command to adjust the LCD Backlight Level of EON42: 1426-DKP-LCD Backlight Level-#* Where, DKP is the software port from 1 to 8. Backlight level is from 0-4Where, Back Light Level 0 = Back Light Off. Back Light Level 1 = Minimum Intensity. Back Light Level 4 = Maximum Intensity.Back Light Intensity shall increase from level 1 towards level 4.By default, Back light level is 2.

Use following command to adjust the LCD Backlight Level of all EON42: 1426-*-LCD Backlight Level-#*

Step 14LCD ContrastUse following command to adjust the Contrast level of the LCD of EON42: 1427-DKP-Contrast Level-#* Where, DKP is the software port from 1 to 8. Contrast level is from 1 to 4 (Default: 2). Contrast shall increase from 1 towards level 4.By default, Contrast Level is 2.

Use following command to adjust the Contrast level of the LCD of all EON42: 1427-*-Contrast Level-#*

Step 15LCD Back Light Off TimerUse following command to program 'LCD Backlight OFF Timer' for EON42: 1428-DKP-LCD Back Light OFF Timer-#*Where, DKP is the software port from 1 to 8. Back light off timer = 000-999 seconds.000 = Back light will remain continuously ON.999= Back light will remain on for 999 seconds.By default, Back Light OFF Timer is 060 seconds.

Use following command to program 'LCD Backlight OFF Timer' for all EON42: 1428-*- LCD Back Light OFF Timer-#*

Step 16Ring on Speaker or Headset (Ringer selection)• User can select the destination to play the ring for ring event on the Eon42 as per two options: Ring on Speaker

Phone or Ring on Headset• Note that the speech path of the 'headset' and 'handset' are common. If the 'headset' is not connected and the user

has set the option to play ring on the Headset, the ring will get played on the speaker of the handset.

Use following command to set the destination of playing 'ring' on EON421429-DKP-Ring Destination-#* Where, DKP is the software port from 1 to 8.

By Default, Ring Destination is 'Ring on Speaker of Speaker Phone'.

Ring Destination Meaning 1 Play Ring on Speaker of Speaker Phone2 Play Ring on Speaker of Headset/Handset


Matrix

Use following command to set the destination of playing 'ring' on all EON421429-*-Ring Destination-#*

Note: • In EON45, only speaker of speaker phone will ring during ring event, even if the DKP port it is configured to play ring

on handset/headset.

Step 17Use the following command to assign the default settings to the DKPs: 1420-DKP-#* On issuing this command all the parameters assigned to the software port of the DKP are assigned default values.

Step 18Use the following command to copy parameters if one DKP to other DKP: 1421-Source DKP-Destination DKP-#* On issuing this command the following parameters of the source DKP are assigned to the destination DKP: • Dynamic Allowed/Denied Lists• Toll Control Allowed/Denied Lists• COS Group• TAG• CPU Group• Flash Timer• CDC• Priority• Time Table• DND List• CLI Type• CLI Digit Padding Length• Auto Acknowledge Flag• Auto Acknowledge Timer All DKP Parameters programmed in other steps.

Step 19How to lock/unlock a DKP keypad remotely?Sometimes a DKP user leaves his place assuming that he would be back after sometime. Later he could not come. Since his DKP keypad is active and is not locked any unauthorized person can make a call from his station. Cosine helps to avoid this. He can ask SA to lock his keypad.

Use following command to lock/unlock the DKP keypad: 5703-DKP-Code-#* Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP user from 1 to 8.

By default, Keypad is unlocked.

Important Points:• EON45/EON42 will display only out of ordinary 'status', for example:

• 'B' for Break Hours. • 'N' for Non-Working Hour. • 'A' when station user is 'Absent'. • 'P', will not be displayed when station user is 'Present' became it is ordinary status.

• Following parameters will be defaulted when Eon45 is to be replaced with Eon42 and vice-versa: • Speech Controls parameters

• Handset Speaker Volume • Handset MIC Volume • Speaker Phone Speaker Volume • Speaker Phone MIC Volume • Key Click Volume • DTMF Transmit Level • DTMF Generation Control

Code Meaning 0 DKP unlock 1 DKP lock


Matrix

• Ringer Controls parameters • Ringer Tune • Ringer Selection • Ringer Volume• Ringer Mode• Ringer Auto Acknowledge

• Call Answer Type• Headset Connectivity (Only for EON42)• Display Settings

• LCD Contrast Level• LCD Back Light Level• LCD Back Light OFF Timer

• DKP Softkey parameters, i.e Key mapping (01-26 for EON45 and 01-25 for EON42).

=X=X=


Matrix

Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys ProgrammingWhat's this?It is possible to program the nature of the function that the DSS keys can perform. It is possible that on pressing a key a particular station is accessed or a particular trunk is accessed or a feature is activated, etc. Each DSS key possesses a LED, which glows when a station/trunk is accessed or a feature is activate4d. However, LED does not glow for few features like Raid/Interrupt Request/Barge-In, Last Caller Recall, etc.

Soft Keys (Programmable keys) The Cosine supports 26 programmable keys on the EON45. A location is made up of two entities viz. a DSS key and a LED. DSS key can be programmed to perform any function. If LED is relevant for the function then the LED glows on executing the function else it remains inactive. For example, a DSS key can be assigned for Call Pick Up feature but since LED is not relevant for this function, LED remains inactive for this function. Likewise, a DSS key can be assigned for Auto-Redial feature and since LED is relevant for this feature, it glows on setting Auto-Redial feature. The flexibility of assigning any function to a DSS key is useful in following situations: • Any key of these 26 keys can be programmed to access any station.• Different users can program these keys to access different stations of their choice.• Desirable and frequently used features can be accessed at a single touch.

A Key can be programmed to perform any function. There are two attributes of a key:• Physical location where the key is situated.• Function the key should perform.

Following diagram shows this relationship.

Physical location of a key is fixed as under: • Each key has fixed 2-digit location.• Location starts with 01.• Top-left location is always 01.• Location is incremented row wise. • Once all the keys of a row are done, roll over to the next row.

How to use key to Change User Password? • When this key is pressed, the DKP will ask for the old user password and if old user password is entered correctly,

user can enter new password.

How to use key for keypad lock? • When the DSS key of keypad lock is pressed, the DKP will ask for user password. If correct password is entered, user

will select the option to lock/unlock keypad. The DSS key shall glow only when the keypad is locked. • 'Headset' and 'Speaker' keys for EON42:

• User can program any programmable key of EON42 as 'Speaker' key or 'Headset' key. By default, key 25 is assigned for 'Speaker' function.

• If the user is communicating using the speaker phone, then he can shift the call on headset by pressing the 'Headset' key.


Matrix

• Similarly, while communicating from headset, if the user wants to shift the call to speaker phone's speaker and MIC, he can do so by pressing the 'Speaker' key.

• The LED on the key will glow when pressed. If the key is again pressed, the call will be released and LED will be turned OFF.

How to program? Use following command to assign a function to a DKP key: 1501-DKP-Key Location-Function Type-Function Number-#*Where, DKP = DKP Software Port Number from 1 to 8. Key Location is from 01 to 26. Function Type is from 0 to 8 as shown in table. Function Number depending on the Function Type. You can use copy commands to copy the Key map of one DKP to other DKPs.

Function:A function should be assigned to these Keys, which they should perform. There are 09 different types of functions, which can be assigned to a key. Each function that can be assigned to a key is given unique number. Following table lists all the function types available:

Please note that LED is not assigned for Department Group.

Function Type 08: Features

Function Type Meaning Function Range 0 Null 00 1 Access a SLT Port 01 to 32 2 Access a DKP Port 1 to 8 3 Access a Trunk 01 to 12 4 Trunk Access code 1 to 7 5 Department Group 1 to 5 6 AOP/PAS 1 7 Call Appearance 02 to 10 8 Features 01 to 49

Feature Name Function Number Key Prg. LED Prg.Call Pick Up-General 01 Yes No Call Pick Up-Selective 02 Yes No Auto Call Back 03 Yes Yes Redial 04 Yes No Auto Redial 05 Yes Yes Memory Dialing 06 Yes No Operator Dialing 07 Yes No Call Forward 08 Yes Yes Dynamic Lock 09 Yes Yes Hot Line 10 Yes Yes Alarm 11 Yes Yes Do Not Disturb 12 Yes Yes Interrupt Request 13 Yes No Barge In 14 Yes No Raid 15 Yes No Trunk Reservation 16 Yes No Hold Toggle 17 Yes No Conference 18 Yes Yes Call Park 19 Yes No Call Park Retrieve 20 Yes No Room Monitoring 21 Yes No


Matrix

Range Command

Copy Command

Default Commands

• If more than one operator is required, default key function can be assigned using command 1503.• By default, all DKP ports except DKP port number 1 are assumed as normal DKPs used by executives.

Cosine-64P: On power ON, the DKP instrument connected to port number 1 is assigned default key functions as shown below (Operator key map by default):

Personal Memory Dialing 22 Yes No Last Caller Recall 23 Yes No Walk-In Class of Service 24 Yes No DND Override 25 Yes No Login SE 26 Yes No Login SA 27 Yes No Change User Password 28 Yes No Page Zone 29 Yes No Cancel All Feature 30 Yes No Flashing on Trunk 31 Yes No User Not Present 32 Yes No Background Music 33 Yes No Message Paging 34 Yes No Last Five Call Record 35 Yes No VMS Message Pending 36 Yes Yes Flash 37 Yes No Answer 38 Yes No Release 39 Yes No Forced Answer 40 Yes No Auto Answer 41 Yes Yes Mute 42 Yes Yes Time Zone 43 Yes No Dial By Name 44 Yes No Transfer 45 Yes No Speaker 46 Yes Yes Hold 47 Yes No Headset 48 Yes Yes Key Pad Lock 49 Yes Yes

Program the same function at a key for all DKPs. 1501-*-Key Location-Function Type-Function Number-#*

Copy entire key map from one DKP to another DKP. 1504-Source DKP-Destination DKP-#*

To default key mapping of a DKP (Executive) 1502-DKP-#*To default key mapping of a Operator. 1503-DKP-#*

Feature Name Function Number Key Prg. LED Prg.


Matrix

On power ON, the normal (executive) DKP's are assigned default key functions as shown below (executive key map by default):

Cosine-32P: On power ON, all the DKP instrument connected are assigned default key functions as shown below:

Important Point:• Following table shows the relationship between the color of the LED and various events. Three different colors are

used to indicate various events.

Relevant Topic:1. EON45_EonSoft User's Guide

=X=X=

Cosine64operator

SLT01 SLT02 SLT03 SLT04 Flash DKP1 DKP2 DKP3 DKP4 Conference

Trunk01 Trunk02 Trunk03 Trunk04 Call Forward Trunk05 Trunk06 Trunk07 Trunk08 Auto Call Back

CA1 CA2 CA3 CA4 Auto Redial 1 2 3 Redial 4 5 6 Memory Dial 7 8 9 Transfer * 0 # Hold

Function Volume Speaker

Cosine64 Executive

SLT01 SLT02 SLT03 SLT04 Flash SLT05 SLT06 SLT07 SLT08 Conference DKP1 DKP2 DKP3 DKP4 Call Forward

Trunk01 Trunk02 Trunk03 Trunk04 Auto Call Back Trunk05 Trunk06 Trunk07 Trunk08 Auto Redial

1 2 3 Redial 4 5 6 Memory Dial 7 8 9 Transfer * 0 # Hold


Cosine32 SLT01 SLT02 SLT03 SLT04 Flash SLT05 SLT06 SLT07 SLT08 Conference DKP1 DKP2 DKP3 SLT09 Call Forward

Trunk01 Trunk02 Trunk03 Trunk04 Auto Call Back CA1 CA2 CA3 CA4 Auto Redial

1 2 3 Redial 4 5 6 Memory Dial 7 8 9 Transfer * 0 # Hold


LED Mode/Colour Continuously On Slow Blink Fast Blink

Green LED The key assigned for the station you are in speech

The key assigned for the station you have kept on hold

The key assigned for the station you are calling or you are being called

Red LED The key assigned for the station that is now busy with another station/trunk

The key assigned for the station which has held a station/trunk

The key assigned for the station/trunk that is called or being called by another station/trunk

Orange LED You are talking on a trunk You have held a trunk You have an incoming call on the trunk


Matrix


Digital Output Port (DOP)

What's this?• The Cosine provides a highly reliable, solid-state Digital Output Port for various control applications. • A DC contactor (60VDC Max.) shall be connected to the DOP. All external devices are interfaced to the DOP via this

DC contactor. Please ensure the external devices adhere to the specifications of the DC contactor. • The Cosine remembers the state of DOP during the power failure. Suppose, a water pump is being controlled using

this feature and if while it is running, power failure occurs then the operator need not turn the water pump again on power restoration. The Cosine shall retain the last state and shall switch ON the water pump on power restoration.

• The DOP can be operated from DISA also.

How it works?• The DOP can be programmed as normally open or normally close based on application.• By default, the DOP is programmed as normally open.

How to connect external devices to the DOP?

How to program? Use the following command to program the DOP as normally open/normally close: 6901-Code-#* Where,

By default, Code is assigned as 1.

The specifications of the DOP are given below:

Relevant Topics: 1. Automated Control Applications 682. Digital Input Port (DIP) 142

=X=X=

State Applications Normally Open Water Pump, Porch Lights, etc. Normally Close Mains Power Supply.

Code Meaning 0 Program DOP as normally close 1 Program DOP as normally open

Relay Type Solid State (CMOS) Relay Contact Arrangement 1 Normally Open, 1-Form-A Contact Rating (Resistive Load) 60VDC [email protected] Operation Time 5ms

Cosine

DOP

60VDC Max.

AC MainsR B Y N

NYBR

Load

Matrix

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

What's this?The System can perform the task of an operator by greeting the external caller and transferring the call to the desired station. This facility is called Auto Attendant or Direct Inward Dialing (DID).

By using this facility, frequent callers can reach desired stations by dialing the station numbers from their phone. There are following advantages:• Reduced traffic burden on the operator.• Calls are transferred faster and hence save the caller's time.• Useful even during non-working hours and holidays.• Professional image of the Company.

How it works? Flow charts on the next pages depict the logic the system follows for DID call.

Flow Chart 1: (Logic followed when only DID is enabled on the trunk)

Start

Ring on a trunk line

System detects the incoming ring and answers the call after the DID answer timer

System plays appropriate voice greeting to the caller and prompts him to dial station number/system plays music and beeps

The caller dials the valid station number

The system identifies the station and transfers the call

End


Matrix

Flow Chart 2: (Logic followed when DID/DISA/Fax Homing is enabled on a trunk)

Start

Ring on trunk

DID/DISA enabled?

Wait for DID/DISA/Fax answer wait timer

Play greetings and dial message or play music

Fax enabled?

Fax enabled?

Call processed as fax call

Trunk Landing Group

End

Play fax Homing message

Give beeps for DID/DISA beeps timer

DTMF code/Timeout?

C

A

DTMF code/Timeout?

If digits dialed, play ‘Wrong Dial’ message. If digits not dialed, play ‘No Dial’ message.

Trunk Landing Group

End

Fax enabled?

B

Trunk Landing Group

End

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

DTMF Code Timeout

Yes

Yes

No

No


Matrix

How to program DID on Trunks?Step 1: Enable DID on desired trunks for different time zones depending on requirement. Step 2: Program DID timers viz. DID music timer, DID wait answer timer, DID Busy tone timer, DID No Reply timer, DID

Error tone timer and DID beeps timer. Step 3: Record voice messages for different time zones (different messages during different times of the day), for dial

message, for wrong dial message, for busy tone message, No reply message and error tone cases. Step 4: Program privacy for DID calls on the stations, if required. Step 5: Enable/Disable voice guidance for different time zone using command 1611, 1612 and 1613.

Step 1Use following command to activate DID on a trunk during working hours: 3301-Trunk-Code-#* Where,Trunk = Software port number of the Trunk from 01 to 08.

Use following command to activate DID on a trunk during break hours: 3302-Trunk-Code-#* Where,Trunk = Software port number of the Trunk from 01 to 08.

Code Meaning 0 DID Deactivated 1 DID Activated


A

Call treated as dial by name call and processed accordingly

Call processed as per DISA logicB


System transfers the call to the dialed station. The caller gets RBT.

Plays busy tone to caller

C

End

Is the call answered within DID ring timer?

End

System connects caller to the dialed station

Play the DID no reply message or give routing tone

C

StationDial by Name

DISA Login

Busy

Free

No

Yes


Matrix

Use following command to activate DID on a trunk during non-working hours: 3303-Trunk-Code-#* Where,Trunk = Software port number of the Trunk from 01 to 08.

By default, DID is deactivated on all trunks during all time zones.

Step 2Use following commands to set the various timers: Timers of Relevance:

All timers can be set from 001 to 255.

Significance of Timers:• DID Inactivity Timer is the time after which the Cosine releases the trunk if no activity has taken place during this time.• DID Answer Timer is the time after which the Cosine answers a DID call.• DID Music Timer is the time for which the Cosine plays music after answering the DID call.• DID Beeps Timer is the time for which the Cosine plays 'SILENCE' after voice message has been played to the caller

prompting him to dial the desired station number. • DID Ring Timer is the time for which the Cosine rings the non-responding station.• DID Busy Tone Timer is the time for which the Cosine hunts the busy station.• DID Error Tone Timer is the time for which the Cosine gives error tone to the caller if he has dialed an invalid code.

Step 3For programming and recording voice messages, please refer topic "Voice Message Applications".

Step 4For setting privacy from DID call for each user, please refer topic "Privacy".

Step 5Use following command to enable/disable voice guidance on a trunk during working hours: 1611-Trunk-Flag-#* Where,Trunk = Software port number of the Trunk from 01 to 08.

Use following command to enable/disable voice guidance on a trunk during break hours: 1612-Trunk-Flag-#* Where,Trunk = Software port number of the Trunk from 01 to 08.

Use following command to enable/disable voice guidance on a trunk during non-working hours: 1613-Trunk-Code-#*


Timer Name Command Default (secs)DID Inactivity Timer 3311-Seconds-#* 060 DID/DISA/Fax Answer Wait Timer 3312-Seconds-#* 003 DID/DISA/Fax Music Timer 3313-Seconds-#* 004 DID/DISA/Fax Beeps Timer 3314-Seconds-#* 010 DID Ring Timer 3315-Seconds-#* 015 DID Busy Tone Timer 3316-Seconds-#* 005 DID Error Tone Timer 3317-Seconds-#* 003

Flag Meaning 0 Disabled 1 Enabled



Matrix

Where,Trunk = Software port number of the Trunk from 01 to 08.

By default, Voice Guidance on a trunk is 'Disabled' for all time zones.

Once the voice guidance is enabled for the different timezones it is applicable for DISA/Fax homing also.

Example:Let us activate DID for a trunk 2 (software port number 02) during working hours, break hours and Non-working hours. 1611-02-1-#* 1612-02-1-#* 1613-02-1-#*

Important Points:• DID inactivity timer will be loaded when the call is placed to TLG. • Digits dialed by the user (for navigation) during Voice Guidance will be sensed by the PBX. • When an incoming call arrives on a trunk programmed for DID voice greeting and if the VM is not free, the call is

routed directly to the programmed destination group. • When call lands and VM application is not activated, music will be played. After music timer gives beeps for DID

beeps timer. • When call lands and VM application is activated, VM messages will be played. After VM is over silence is maintained

for DID beeps timer.

Relevant Topics:1. Time Tables 300 2. Voice Message Applications 328 3. Privacy 247 4. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 1665. Fax Homing 189

=X=X=



Matrix

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

What's this?Direct Inward System Access (DISA) permits a user to use the system's resources from a remote location.

The user can:• Call any of the stations (Generally known as DID).• Make external calls.• Activate/deactivate features of his station.• Use PAS and such other facilities of the system.• Program or Administer the system.

DISA is a programmable facility for each trunk. In order to use DISA, one or more trunks should be programmed for DISA. Further, the station user has to have Class of Service (COS) rights to use DISA.

How it works?

PSTN

Cosine

T1

T2

T3

T4

StationsTrunks

S1

S2

S3


Matrix

Following flow chart elaborates the steps involved in using DISA:

Start

Ring on trunk

DID/DISA enabled?



Fax enabled?

Fax enabled?


Trunk Landing Group

End

Play Fax Homing message


DTMF code/Timeout?

A

DTMF code/Timeout?

Play wrong dial message or give error tone

Trunk Landing Group

End

Fax enabled?

B

Trunk Landing Group

End

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

DTMF Code Timeout

Yes

Yes

No

No


Matrix

A

Call treated as dial by name call and processed accordingly

B

StationDial by Name

DISA Login

Call resolved as a Fax/DID call and processed accordingly

Is DISA activated on the trunk?

System gives beep to the caller prompting him to login by dialing his station number

The caller dials his station number

Is the station number valid?

Call lands on TLG

End

System gives DID error message or error tone to the caller

End

System gives beeps

The caller dials his password

Is the password

valid?

System gives slow tone to the user indicating successful DISA login

System gives error message or error tone to the caller

End

C

XX

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No


Matrix

C

The caller is assumed in idle condition while he gets the tone. This is called DISA idle state.

Caller remains in DISA idle state for time=DISA idle timer

What has the caller dialed during

DISA idle timer?

System gives system dial tone to the caller

What is the activity done by

the caller

YY

System reloads DISA Idle Timer

System releases the trunk

Caller gets error tone to PSTN

End

Caller goes to DISA Idle State

System responds accordingly

Caller dials a telephone number

RBT of station

System loads inactivity timer on completion of dialingEndXX

D

Wrong digit dialed#0/No digit dialed

#1

No digit dialed Feature Access Code Trunk Access Code Station Number


Matrix

Please NoteDISA is a facility used from a remote location and the user is not directly connected with the system. The connection is through the CO where only voice is transmitted and received between the caller and the system. Due to this, activities like OFF-Hook (active), ON-Hook (idle) and dialing of 'Flash' are not possible. The Cosine supports these activities by the way of dialing special digits. They are as under: Activity What to dial ON Hook #0 OFF Hook #1 Flash #2 Pause #3 A #4 B #5 C #6 D #7 # ##

D

Is the called party free?

Called party answer the call

Caller and called party are in speech

Caller gets warning beeps for 15 seconds

Does the caller dial a digit within 15

secs.?

Both caller and called person remain in speech warning beeps stops

System release the grabbed trunk line/called station

Caller goes in DISA Idle State

XX

Caller goes ON-Hook by dialing #0.

Caller goes OFF-Hook by dialing #1.

Caller gets system dial tone.

YY

No

Yes

Yes

No


Matrix

A Flow chart showing this logic is shown below:

Calling a StationCalling a station from DISA is same as a call made from local station. Only differences are in the OFF-Hook and ON-Hook steps. As the caller is not physically connected with the system, he has to use appropriate code for giving OFF-Hook and ON-Hook.

Once speech is established between the caller and any other external person, it is likely that the caller will not dial a digit as long as he is talking to the called person. This null in the dialing might be taken as an event of no activity state by the system and it might terminate the DISA session forcing the caller to make a fresh call.

To overcome this problem, Cosine gives warning tone after time = DISA Inactivity timer. The Cosine waits for 15 seconds (fixed) after the warning tone for the caller to dial a digit. If the caller does not dial any digit even after this, Cosine disconnects the call and the caller gets slow beeps of the DISA idle state.

Start

Wait for DTMF digit

Is digit # dialed?

Is 0/1/2/No digit dialed within

2 secs.?

Interprete the dialed code as per the logic

End

Interprete as ON-Hook

Interprete as OFF-Hook

Interprete as Flash

Follow timeout logic

End End End End

No

Yes

0 dialed 1 dialed 2 dialed No digit dialed


Matrix

The caller can reach any station user just by dialing the respective station number. As such he cannot dial his own station number. He can reach and request a third person to transfer him on his own station.

Making an external call using DISA

As shown in the diagram the DISA caller can make an external outgoing call by grabbing a trunk and then dialing the required external number.

Following points are relevant:• The remote user is allowed all the features, trunk access and toll control programmed for his local station. • The outgoing trunks are subjected to the same treatment as if they were made from local station.

End

Caller has logged in and entered the DISA Idle State

Any digit dialed within 20 sec.?

The caller has dialed the OFF-Hook code and dialed an extension. DKP or external number.

Any digit dialed within 90 secs.?

The caller gets warning tone

Any digit dialed within 15 secs?

The call is disconnected

DISA session terminated. The trunk released.

Reload the inactivity timer

Start

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

PSTN

Cosine

T1

T2

T3

T4 StationsTrunks

S1

S2


Matrix

• Call Duration Control and SMDR features work the same way as a call being made from a local station. • When such calls are stored in the SMDR buffer, they are marked specifically and printed with character 'I' in the

remarks column.

Using features through DISA:Remote caller can use the features available on his station. He can activate or cancel any feature from DISA, as he would have done from his local station.These include:• Call Pickup.• Call Forward/Call Follow Me.• Setting and canceling Alarms.• Personal Lock Settings.• Conference.• PAS.• Abbreviated Dialing.• Others.

Please note that some of the features involve ring on station from the system. In such cases, the ring is given on the local station instead of the remote end. Obviously the Cosine does not know from where the caller is using DISA. And hence cannot reach him at the remote location.

Programming through DISA Cosine can be programmed through DISA mode since after DISA login, the remote end behaves as normal local station. Programming is done the same way as is done from a Local Station.

Terminating a DISA session If the caller dials the on-hook code from the DISA idle state, the DISA session is terminated and the trunk is released. During DISA state, the Cosine monitors dialing of the caller. In case there is no dialing of a digit for 90 seconds, the system assumes that the caller has hung-up. Accordingly, it terminates the DISA session and releases the trunk.

How to program? Following steps are needed to program and use DISA successfully:Step 1: Activate DISA on desired trunks during working hours using command 3401.Step 2: Activate DISA on desired trunks during break hours using command 3402.Step 3: Activate DISA on desired trunks during non-working hours using command 3403.Step 4: Program DISA Timers.Step 5: Program and record voice messages keeping DID in mind.Step 6: Assign COS group with DISA activated on desired stations.

Step 1Use following programming command to activate DISA on a trunk during working hours 3401-Trunk-Code-#* Where,Trunk = Software port number of the trunk from 01 to 08.

Use following programming command to activate DISA on a trunk during break hours:3402-Trunk-Code-#* Where,Trunk = Software port number of the trunk from 01 to 08.

Use following programming command to activate DISA on a trunk during non-working hours:3403-Trunk-Code-#* Where,

Code Meaning 0 DISA OFF1 DISA ON



Matrix

Trunk = Software port number of the trunk from 01 to 08.

By default, DISA is OFF for all timezone on all trunks.

Step 2Use following commands to program DISA timers:

Step 3To program and record DISA voice messages; please refer the topic "Voice Message Applications".

Step 4To allow DISA to a desired station, please refer the topic "Class of Service (COS)".

How to use it? • Dial a DISA enabled trunk.• PBX answers the call.• Dial DISA login code i.e. 119-Station Number-User Password.• You get DISA log-in beeps.• Dial Off-Hook Command.• Dial a station or grab a trunk line and dial an external number.• To continue the speech, dial any digit. • To terminate the speech, dial on hook command.• To terminate DISA mode, dial on-hook command again.

Important Point:• DISA inactivity timer is effective only in case any outgoing trunk call is made through DISA.

Relevant Topics:1. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 161 2. Voice Message Applications 328 3. Class of Service (COS) 112 4. Remote Programming 263 5. Fax Homing 189

=X=X=


Timer Name Command Valid Range Default DISA Idle State Timer 3411-Seconds-#* 000-255 020 Secs. DISA Inactivity Timer 3412-Seconds-#* 000-255 090 Secs. DISA Warning Beeps Timer Non Programmable 015 Secs. DISA Inter Digit Timer Non Programmable 002 Secs.


Matrix

Disconnect Signaling on SLT Port

What's this?• As a general application, telecom equipment like PCO machine is connected to the SLT port of the system. Now

whenever the called party (remote party) disconnects or goes ON-Hook it is required to inform the SLT port so that the PCO machine can consider the call as complete and stop billing. In absence of this signal, the call is considered as complete when the caller goes ON-Hook. But this will result in inaccurate billing.

• To avoid such problems, the system supports 'Disconnect signaling' on SLT. • If during a call from SLT to BRI/Trunk port or BRI/Trunk port to SLT, whenever Disconnect message is received on

BRI or Disconnect supervision signal is detected, this call disconnection information is passed on the SLT port and the call will be disconnected.

• Disconnect Signaling on SLT port is supported for both IC and OG calls. • It can be in the form of:

• None• Polarity Reversal• Open Loop Disconnect

How it works? • When a call is made from SLT Port to BRI/Trunk Port or BRI/Trunk Port to SLT and call gets matured, the system will

wait for disconnect message on the BRI/Trunk Port. The parameter is applicable only for SLT ports. • If Disconnect message is received on BRI or Disconnect signal is detected on Trunk Port or Disconnect tone is

detected on Trunk Port, the system will check the Disconnect Signaling programmed for the SLT port from where call has been originated or terminated. The options for Disconnect Signaling are mentioned below: • None: It is used when no signaling is to be generated on SLT for call disconnection. When call is disconnected,

user will get Error tone.• Polarity Reversal: It is used when the call disconnection is to be signaled in the form of Polarity Reversal. If

Disconnect message is received on BRI or Disconnect signal is detected on Trunk Port or Disconnect tone is detected on Trunk port, the Battery polarity of the SLT port will be reversed. For example, if the battery polarity of the SLT port is +ve for TIP and -ve for RING in speech condition then on disconnection on other port, TIP will become -ve and Ring +ve. When call is disconnected (user goes OFF-Hook), user will get Error tone. When SLT port goes On-hook again, the Battery polarity of the SLT port will get reversed and the user will not get error tone.

• Open Loop Disconnect: It is used when call disconnection is to be signaled in the form of Open Loop Disconnect pulse. During this:• The Battery voltage on SLT port will be removed for time of Open Loop Disconnect Timer programmed for that

SLT port and will be restored again. • However the Polarity of the SLT port battery voltage will not be changed. When call is disconnected, user will

get Error tone.

How to program? Use following command to program the signal to be generated as Disconnect Supervision on SLT port: 1308-SLT-Disconnect Supervision Signal-#* Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT from 01 to 32.


Use following command to program the signal to be generated as Disconnect Supervision on all SLT ports: 1308-**-Disconnect Supervision Signal-#*

Use following command to program the Open Loop Disconnect timer on SLT port: 1309-SLT-Open Loop Disconnect Timer-#* Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT from 01 to 32.Open Loop Disconnect Timer is from 001 to 999 ms.By default, 500ms for each port.

Disconnect Supervision Signal Meaning 0 None 1 Polarity (Battery) Reversal2 Open Loop Disconnect (Battery Removal or Current Removal)


Matrix

Use following command to program the Open Loop Disconnect Timer on all SLT ports:1309-**-Open Loop Disconnect Timer-#*

Important Points:• Disconnect Supervision Signal on SLT port will be generated only in 2-way speech. • Disconnect Supervision Signal will not be generated during held call when the trunk port is disconnected.

Relevant Topic:1. Answer Signaling on SLT Port 58

=X=X=


Matrix

Disconnect Supervision on Trunk Port

What's this?• As a general application telecom equipment like PCO machine is connected to the SLT port of the system. Now

whenever the called party (remote party) disconnects i.e goes on-hook it is required to inform the SLT port so that the PCO machine can consider the call as complete and stop billing. In absence of this signal, the call is considered as complete when the caller goes on hook. But this will result in inaccurate billing.

• When PBX is used for Gateway kind of application, it is desirable to disconnect the call when the call is terminated by either end. If the called party (subscriber of PSTN, in this case) disconnects whereas the calling party doesn't, the call within the system remains live. This becomes more critical when a call is routed from Trunk-to-Trunk.

• To avoid such problems, the system supports a feature 'Disconnect Supervision on Trunk port' for both IC and OG calls. It can be programmed with following options: • None.• Polarity Reversal.• Open Loop Disconnect.

Note: • Please contact your Authorised dealer to know about Hardware compatibility for 'Open Loop Disconnect on Trunk'.

How it works? • The parameter is applicable for IC and OG calls made to or from Trunk ports. • Detection of the Disconnect supervision signal is started when call gets matured in case of outgoing call and for

incoming call when it is answered by the system (Goes off-Hook).• Different options for the Disconnect Supervision Signal are mentioned below:

• None: It is used when no signaling is available from the CO. If this option is programmed, the Trunk port will be released (free) only if calling party disconnects even if called party has disconnected.

• Polarity Reversal: It is used when call disconnection is signaled in the form of Polarity Reversal. Polarity Reversal is a status signal which is generated by the PSTN by reversing the battery polarity from the normal condition. If polarity of line reverses i.e if it is high in mature condition and changes to Low or vice-versa, call is disconnected from remote user, Trunk port will be released (free) and caller will get error tone.

• Open Loop Disconnect: It is used when call disconnection is signaled in the form of Open Loop Disconnect pulse. Open Loop Disconnect is a pulse which is generated by the CO by removing the Battery (Current) for a specific time period and again connecting it. The duration for Open Loop Disconnect pulse varies from one Service Provider to other and country wise.

• System will check Open Loop Disconnect signal for the time programmed for Open Loop Disconnect Timer for each Trunk port. It is programmable. If Open Loop signal is detected for the time less than the Open loop disconnect timer programmed, it will not be considered as valid open loop signal for releasing the port. But if Open loop is detected continuously at least for the time programmed in the Open Loop Disconnect timer, it is considered as a valid Disconnect supervision signal.The call will be released and caller will get error tone. This timer can be programmed only if 'Open Loop Disconnect' option is selected.

How to program? Use following command to program the signal to be detected as Disconnect Supervision on Trunk port: 1627-Trunk-Disconnect Supervision Signal-#* Where,Trunk is from 01 to 08.


Use following command to program the signal to be detected as Disconnect Supervision on all Trunk ports: 1627-**-Disconnect Supervision Signal-#*

Use following command to program the Open Loop Disconnect timer on Trunk port: 1628-Trunk-Open Loop Disconnect Timer-#* Where,Trunk is from 01 to 08.Open Loop Disconnect Timer is from 001 to 999 ms.

Disconnect Supervision Signal Meaning 0 None 1 Polarity (Battery) Reversal 2 Open Loop Disconnect (Battery Removal)


Matrix

By default, 200ms for each port.

Use following command to program the Open Loop Disconnect Timer on all Trunk ports: 1628-**-Open Loop Disconnect Timer-#*

Important Points:• Open Loop Disconnect timer programmed should be less than the timer generated by the CO. Else the call may be

disconnected before the Open Loop signal is detected. • Disconnect supervision on Trunk is also applicable for Hot Outward Dialing.

Relevant Topics:1. Answer Supervision on Trunk Port 59 2. Trunk Parameters 320 3. Hotline 201

=X=X=


Matrix

Distinctive Rings

What's this?The Cosine supports different rings for different situations. For example, Incoming external call ring is different from internal call ring. Likewise, Internal call ring from a station with high priority is different from that from a station with equal priority and so on.

The following are the eight possible situations that generate a ring. The Cosine offers the following rings: • Internal.• External.• Alarm.• Auto Redeal.• Auto Call Back.• Priority.• Message Paging.• Programming.

Ring Cadence OFF Timer: • Some times the 'ring' on landing destination is stopped even if the incoming call is actually present. This is because

'ring' from CO-Office or PBX is such that 'ring off-timer' is quite long compared to the time for the system. For example; in Jordan during the incoming call the CO-Office gives ring in which ring OFF period is quite long.

• To solve such problem, the Cosine system supports a programmable feature 'Ring Cadence OFF timer for a Trunk'. By programming this, the incoming call with quite high ring off period can also be honored. 'Ring Cadence OFF Timer' will start when the ring OFF period starts and will be stopped if the ring ON is detected before ring cadence off timer expires.

How to program? Use following command to program cadences for a ring type: 5801-Application Type-Ring Type-#* Where,

Application Type Meaning 1 Internal 2 External 3 Alarm 4 Auto Redial 5 Auto Call Back 6 Priority 7 Message Paging 8 Programming

Ring Type Meaning On (ms) Off (ms) On (ms) Off (ms) On (ms) Off (ms) 0 Off Off 1 Continuous Continuous 2 Single 750 2250 - - - -3 Double 400 200 400 2000 - -4 Triple 400 200 400 200 400 2000 5 Long 1000 4000 - - - -6 Very Long 2000 4000 - - - -7 Fast 750 750 - - - -8 Short Fast 500 1500 - - - -9 Long Fast 1500 500 - - - -


Matrix

Default value of Ring Cadences is as follows:

Please refer 'Call Progress Tones' for more details of Distinctive Ring Parameters.

Ring Cadence OFF Timer:Use following command to program Ring cadence OFF Timer for Trunk: 1634-Trunk-Ring Cadence OFF Timer-#* Where,Trunk is from 01 to 08.Ring Cadence OFF Timer is from 1-9 seconds.By default, Ring Cadence OFF Timer is 4 seconds.

Use following command to program Ring cadence OFF Timer for ALL Trunks: 1634-**-Ring Cadence OFF Timer-#*

Relevant Topics:1. Region Code 262 2. Default Settings 134 3. Call Progress Tones 95 4. Trunk Parameters 320

=X=X=

Application Type Continent/s Ring Type Internal Asia Single

Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America Double External Asia Double

Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America Long Alarm Asia Long Fast

Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America Long Fast Auto Redial Asia Very Long

Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America Very Long Auto Call Back Asia Short Fast

Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America Short Fast Priority Asia Triple

Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America Triple Message Paging Asia Long

Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America Single Programming Asia Continuous

Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America Continuous


Matrix

Do Not Disturb (DND)

What's this? • Many times it happens that a user wishes privacy for some duration and would not like to be disturbed by phone calls.

Do Not Disturb (DND) feature is very useful in such situations.• Further a station user might wish to attend to calls from few important persons. For example; a station user would like

to deny all calls expect from few important people. Cosine supports this flexibility. A station user may program some important persons in his DND list. All the persons programmed in this list can call him. Persons not in this list cannot call him.

• However, if a caller is not available in destination's DND list, he can still call him but only if he has the access to override feature.

How it works? A flow chart shown on the next page is highlights the logic of this feature.

How to program?Step 1: Decide the Number of DND lists to be formed and the stations to be kept in one DND list.Step 2: Program the stations in a DND list using command 2701.

Start

Station A Calls Station B

Has station B enabled DND?

Is Station A available in DND list of Station B?

Is override feature available

to Station A?

Station A gets routing tone

Station A dials override feature

Is Station B free?

Call is placed

End

System checks for other features like call forward etc.

End

Call is placed

End

Call is placed

End

Call is blocked

End

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No


Matrix

Step 3: Assign DND list to a SLT using command 2702.Step 4: Assign DND list to a DKP using command 2703.Step 5: Take care that DND is allowed to the user from COS programming.

CommandsStep 1Take a pen and a piece of paper and decide the number of DND lists and the stations to be programmed in each DND list.

Step 2Use following command to program DND list: 2701-DND List-DND List Index-Station Type-Station-#* Where, DND list is from 01 to 15. DND list Index is from 1 to 8.Station Type and Station are:

Step 3Use following command to assign a DND list to a SLT: 2702-SLT-DND List-#* Where, SLT is the software port number of the SLT user from 01 to 32. DND list is from 01 to 15. By default, DND list is assigned 1.

Step 4Use following command to assign a DND list to a DKP: 2703-DKP-DND List-#* Where, DKP is the software port number of the DKP user from 1 to 8. DND list is from 01 to 15. By default, DND list is assigned 1.

Step 5Use COS command to assign a COS group with DND Enabled.A Complete table looks as below:

Example:Program a system for following constraints: SLTs 201, 202, 203 and 204 (s/w ports 01,02,03,04) cannot call DKP 301 (software ports 01).2701-01-1-1-01-#* 2701-01-2-1-02-#* 2701-01-3-1-03-#* 2701-01-4-1-04-#* 2703-1-01-#*

How to use it? • Dial 181 from your station. • A Person with override feature can access you; provided he is not in your DND list.

Station Type Meaning Station 0 Null Port 00 1 SLT Port 01 to 32 2 DKP Port 1 to 8 3 Trunk Port 01 to 12

Station Index/DND List Station 1 Station 2 ….. Station 8 01 00 08 22 02 10 26 03 : : : : :

15


Matrix

• To cancel DND, dial 180 from your station.• By default, no stations are programmed in DND lists.• By default, the DND lists for both SLT's and DKP's is 01.

Range Commands

Important Points:• DND is a programmable feature and hence can be allowed or denied to a user. Please refer section "Class of Service

(COS)" for details on how to enable this feature on a particular station. • By default, DND is disabled on all the stations.

Related Topics:1. Class of Service (COS) 112 2. Override 239

=X=X=

Assign the same call DND list for all SLTs 2702-**-DND List-#*Assign the same call DND list for all DKPs 2703-*-DN List-#*


Matrix


Dynamic Lock

What's this?• A user can lock his station to avoid misuse of local and long distance dialing in his absence.• When a user locks his station, his toll control changes to limited dialing or with no dialing permitted.• The lock operates with a 4-digits password. Each user has his personal password called User Password.• Station can be locked manually or automatically.• If manual lock is selected, then user should lock the station while leaving his work place by dialing the required code.

When the station user returns back, he can unlock the station.• In automatic lock is selected, the system locks the station after a set time automatically if there is no activity from the

station for some time.

How to use it?Change User Password for Dynamic Lock

Select Auto or Manual Lock

• Station User Password is a 4-digits secret code. Default Password is 1111.• Minutes specify delay in minutes after which the station gets locked automatically. • Set minutes to 00 for manual locking. Factory default is manual lock.• Range for time is 00 to 99 minutes. 00 for manual locking and 01-99 for auto locking.

To Lock your station manually

Open Dynamic Lock

• Once the station is locked, the station user will be able to dial the numbers depending on the dynamic toll control. • In case you forget your password, do not panic. Contact the System Administrator (SA) or the System Engineer (SE).

He can clear your password to its default value. Refer "System Engineer (SE) Mode and System Administrator (SA) Mode" for more details.

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Dynamic Lock to a user.

Important Point:• The dynamic lock feature cannot be accessed with default password.

Relevant Topics: 1. Toll Control 3052. User Password 326

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 114-Old User Password-New User Password. Confirmation tone

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 142-User Password-Minutes. Confirmation tone

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 140. Confirmation tone

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 141-User Password. Confirmation tone

Matrix


Emergency Detection and Reporting

What's this?Whenever an Emergency call is made by a station, it is detected by the system and reported to the Operator. This is useful when a distantly located station of Cosine dials an emergency number. In such cases, the Operator may not be aware of the emergency and when the Police reaches the site, the operator might be put in a jeopardize condition.

How it works? • When any station makes an emergency call the system informs the Operator by giving a continuous ring. • If Operator is SLT then it should ring continuously. • If Operator is DKP then it should ring continuously and display an emergency message on the LCD. A typical

message on the LCD could be:

Here line 2 of LCD shows that there is an emergency condition at station 2001. • Once the TAG is assigned for dialing emergency number, the system searches for a free trunk in this TAG to dialout

the emergency number.

Important Points:• Please note that no other feature access code should match with the feature access code of Emergency numbers.

For example: if 100 is to be programmed as an emergency number, the feature access code of 'Cancel all Station features' which is 100 by default has to be changed to some other value. Only after this change is done 100 will be accepted as an emergency number.

• However, an access code can be a subset of any other access code (Conflict Dialing).

Relevant Topics:1. Access Codes 42 2. Security Dialer 268 3. Emergency Dialing 186 4. Flexible Numbers 195 5. Conflict Dialing 129

=X=X=

317 HimanshuEmergency 2001

Matrix


Emergency Dialing

What's this?• Emergency Number can be dialed by a station as well as by an Operator. • While dialing the emergency number the system does not check the toll control level assigned to the station. • A station can dial emergency number:

• From the PBX dial tone. i.e. just after lifting the handset. • Grabbing the trunk line and then dialing the emergency number.

• Emergency number can be dialed out from all phases viz. dial, busy and blocked. • Maximum 3 emergency codes are allowed with different access codes.

How it works?• Emergency numbers can be of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits like any other feature code (They can be a subset of a feature code

i.e. an emergency number can be 100 and the system can have a feature code 1005). • When an emergency number is dialed from the dial tone, the system grabs a free trunk from the TAG assigned and

dials out the number on the trunk.• When an emergency number is dialed by explicitly dialing the trunk access code, the user may get a busy if all, the

trunks in the trunk access group are busy. Now if the user dials the emergency number the system grabs a free trunk from the TAG assigned to the emergency number and dials out the number. But when the user dials a trunk access code, if the system assigns a free trunk to the user, the emergency no. is dialed out on that (assigned) trunk only.

• If a user who is not allowed trunk access dial a trunk access code, he gets an error tone. But if he dials out the emergency number, the system grabs a free trunk from the TAG assigned to the emergency number and dials out the number.

• The emergency numbers are dialed out irrespective of the user's toll control settings.

How to program? Use following command to program the feature code for an emergency number: 4331-Feature Number-Feature Code-#* Where, Feature number is 1 to 3.Feature Code is a string of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits.By default, Emergency Numbers are 'Blank'.

Use following command to clear the feature code of an emergency number: 4331-Feature Number-#*

Use following command to default the feature codes of all emergency numbers: 4332-#*

Use following command to clear the feature codes of all emergency numbers:4333-#*

Use the following command to program a trunk access group for dialing the emergency number: 6623-Trunk Access Group-#* Where,Trunk Access Group is from 1 to 8.By default, TAG assigned is 1.

Example: Program the emergency number as 1000, 1010, 1020 respectively. Assign TAG '2' for dialing out emergency number. 4331-1-1000-#* 4331-2-1010-#* 4331-3-1020-#* 6623-2-#*

Relevant Topics:1. Emergency Detection and Reporting 185 2. Access Codes 42 3. Trunk Access Groups 311 4. Conflict Dialing 129

=X=X=

Matrix


External Call Forward (ECF)

What's this?It is possible to divert the calls on your personal trunk line to your residence or your mobile number. This facility of diverting your incoming trunk calls is known as External Call Forwarding or ECF in short.

How to program?Step 1: Decide the trunk of which the calls are to be forwarded.Step 2: Assign a trunk access group to be used to forward these calls.Step 3: Assign the destination number where the calls are to be forwarded.

Use following command to enable/disable ECF on a trunk:3201-Trunk-Code-#*Where,Trunk is the software port number of the trunk of which the calls are to be forwarded (01-12).

By default, this feature is disabled.

Use following command to assign destination trunk access group to forward the calls of a trunk: 3202-Trunk-Destination Trunk Access Group-#* Where,Trunk is the software port number of the trunk of which the calls are to be forwarded. (01 to 12).Destination Trunk Access Group is the trunk access group number from 1 to 8 through which the calls are to be forwarded.By default, ECF trunk access group is 1.

Use following command to assign destination number where the calls are to be forwarded for a trunk: 3203-Trunk-Telephone Number-#* Where,Trunk is the software port number of the trunk of which the calls are to be forwarded (01 to 12).Telephone Number is the number where the calls are to be forwarded.By default, ECF number is off on all the trunks.

Use the following command to clear the destination number assigned to a trunk: 3203-Trunk-#*

Example:Forward all the incoming calls on trunk 01 to 812-323-4053 using trunk access group 2. dial, 3201-01-1-#*3202-01-2-#* 3203-01-8123234053-#*

Important Point:• Once the speech is completed the called party goes ON-Hook. The trunk is released after 90 seconds. To release the

trunk immediately the called party should dial ##. This is applicable only to analog trunks. In case of digital trunks, the trunk is released only after 90 seconds.

Relevant Topic:1. Trunk Access Groups 311

=X=X=

Code Meaning 0 Feature disabled 1 Feature enabled

Matrix


External Music

What's this? Cosine provides a facility to give external music to the users by way of connecting an external music source.

External Music Source A hold-on music of your choice can be played while you keep a person on hold. The Cosine supports such external music interface on the CPU card by way of providing an Analog Input Port (AIP). An AIP can handle un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signal from an external music source.

The specifications of an Analog Input Port (AIP) are given below.

Any external device meeting above specifications can be connected with the system. The volume must be set to a level such that the music is not very low or very loud. The volume of the signal coming from this device must never increase beyond the specified limits.

The external music port is an audio input port and no electrical signal of higher value than the specified limit should be applied to this port. This may result in permanent damage to the system. Matrix warranty does not cover damages resulting from improper use.

Relevant Topic:1. Music on Hold 234

=X=X=

Specification Value Interface Type Audio signal Frequency 300 Hz to 3400 Hz Maximum voltage 0.707Vrms Isolation Internal Transformer Termination provided 100 Ohms

Cosine

External Music Port

Music Source

Matrix

Fax Homing

What's this?For optimum utilization of trunk lines, it is often required to use the same trunk line for speech as well as for fax. The Cosine has the capability to detect fax tone over trunk line and route the call to the extension where the fax machine is connected, provided fax tone of CNG signal (CNG stands for CalliNG, Frequency: 1100Hz ±50Hz; Cadence: 325ms> On Time <750ms, 1000ms> Off Time <5500ms) is available from the caller's end. This feature of routing the fax call to the fax machine and a speech call to the Trunk Landing Group automatically is known as Fax Homing.

How it works?The flowcharts below depict the logic of fax homing on a trunk when Fax Homing alone is enabled and DID/ DISA/Fax Homing is enabled on a trunk.

Flowchart 1: (Only Fax Homing enabled)

Start

Ring on trunk line

Wait for fax answer wait timer

Play greeting, play fax homing message.

Beeps for time = fax homing message

1100Hz signal (CNG Signal)

Place the call to fax destination. The call is answered within fax ring timer.

Fax call processed

End


Matrix

DID/DISA/Fax Homing is enabled

Start

Ring on trunk

DID/DISA enabled?



Fax enabled?

Fax enabled?


Trunk Landing Group

End

Play fax Homing message


DTMF code/Timeout?

C

A

DTMF code/Timeout?

Play wrong dial message or give error tone

Trunk Landing Group

End

Fax enabled?

B

Trunk Landing Group

End

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

DTMF Code Timeout

Yes

Yes

No

No


Matrix

How to program? Use the following steps to program Fax Homing Step 1: Enable Fax Homing on Trunk Lines for Working, Break and Non-working Hours using the command 4401, 4402

and 4403.Step 2: Define fax homing station for a trunk using the command 4404.Step 3: Program the Fax Homing timer using the command 4405.Step 4: Program the Fax Ring timer using the command 4406.

Step 1Use following command to enable/disable fax homing on CO line during working hours: 4401-Trunk-Fax Homing-#* Where,Trunk is from 01 to 08.

Use following command to enable/disable fax homing on all CO line during working hours: 4401-**-Fax Homing-#*By default, fax homing is disabled on all trunks during working hours.

Use following command to enable/disable fax homing on CO line during break hours: 4402-Trunk-Fax Homing-#* Where,Trunk is from 01 to 08.

Fax Homing Meaning 0 Disabled 1 Enabled


B

Is 11KHz signal available?


Trunk Landing Group

End

Place the call

Answered within fax ring

timer

Fax call processed

End

Play transfer message

Trunk Landing Group

End

Trunk Landing Group

End

Yes

No

No

Yes

Free

Busy


Matrix

Use following command to enable/disable fax homing on all CO line during break hours: 4402-**-Fax Homing-#*By default, fax homing is disabled on all trunks during break hours.

Use following command to enable/disable fax homing on CO line during non-working hours: 4403-Trunk-Fax Homing-#* Where,Trunk is from 01 to 08.

Use following command to enable/disable fax homing on all CO line during break hours: 4403-**-Fax Homing-#*By default, fax homing is disabled on all trunks during non-working hours.

Step 2Use following command to define fax homing station for a trunk: 4404-Trunk-SLT-#* Where,Trunk is from 01 to 08.SLT is from 01 to 32.

Use following command to define fax homing station for all trunks:4404-**-SLT-#*By default, Fax Homing destinations are as follows:

Step 3Use following command to define Fax Homing Timer for a trunk. Fax Homing Timer is the time for which the system senses the CNG signal (Frequency: 1100Hz ±50Hz; Cadence: 325ms> On Time <750ms, 1000ms> Off Time <5500ms): 4405-Fax Homing Wait Timer-#*Where,Fax Homing Wait Timer is 000 to 255.By default, Fax Homing Wait Timer is 010 seconds.

Step 4Use following command to define Fax Ring Timer: Fax Ring Timer is the time for which the fax destination rings after the fax call has been placed: 4406-Fax Ring Timer-#* Where,Fax Ring Timer is from 000 to 255 seconds.By default, Fax Ring Timer is 045 seconds.

Relevant Topics:1. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 161 2. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 166

=X=X=


Trunk Cosine-64P Cosine-32P 01 01 01 02 02 02 03 03 03 04 04 04 05 05 05 06 06 06 07 07 08 08


Matrix

Flash Timer

What's this?Pulse dialing is a type of signaling in which codes (digits) are dialed in pulses. Flash is also a code just same as digits 0 to 9. A hook switch or a Flash key is generally used to dial this code. Technically, Flash is breaking the loop current for 200 milliseconds to 900 milliseconds. Please note that since this code is not simulated in standard DTMF convention, one cannot dial it in DTMF mode. Flash Timer signifies the time period for which the loop current breaks. Flash timer is programmable it ranges from 83ms to 900ms. By default, Flash Timer, i.e. 600 milliseconds.

Where is it used? • Stations dial flash to use few PBX features and also to use few CO features. Flash is used in following cases:

• While transferring a call from one station to another.• While making conference between few stations.• While toggling call between two stations.

Now a days, more number of basic service providers and different types of advanced electronic telephone exchanges are prevailing. It is possible that one service provider interprets breaking of loop current for 300 ms as flash, other service provider interprets breaking of loop current for 900 ms as flash and system interprets breaking of loop current for 600 ms as flash. Hence if the system engineer sets the flash timer to 600 ms then he might not be able to use features provided by the service provider interpreting 900 ms for flash. To take care of this situation, Cosine offers Flexibility to program different flash timers for both stations and trunks.

How to program?Step 1: Program flash timer for SLT using command 5601.Step 2: Program flash timer for DKP using command 5602.Step 3: Program flash timer for Trunk using command 5603.

Step 1Use following command to program flash timer for a SLT: 5601-SLT-Flash Timer-#* Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT user from 01 to 32.Flash Timer is from 83 ms to 900 ms.By default, Flash Timer is 600ms for Asian/North American/South American user and 100ms for European/African/Australasian users.

Step 2Use following command to program flash timer for a DKP: 5602-DKP-Flash Timer-#* Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP user from 1 to 8.Flash Timer is from 83 ms to 900 ms.By default, Flash Timer is 600ms for all users.

Step 3Use following command to program flash timer for a Trunk: 5603-Trunk-Flash Timer-#* Where,Trunk is the software port number of the trunk from 01 to 08.Flash Timer is from 83 ms to 900 ms.By default, Flash Timer is 600ms for Asian/North American/South American user and 100ms for European /African/Australasian users.

Example:Program flash timer as 383 ms for SLT (S/w port 01) and DKP (S/w port 01). Also program flash timer as 400ms for a trunk (S/w port 01) 5601-01-383-#* 5602-1-383-#* 5603-01-400-#*


Matrix

Important Points:• Many times it happens that while transferring the call, the call either gets disconnected or is not transferred. This

happens due to mismatch of time for which the hook switch is pressed, if used for transferring the call hence it is advisable to use Flash Key of the telephone instrument.

• This problem may occur with Flash Key also, if the timer for the Flash Key on the telephone instrument and the flash timer of the system are not set properly. Please take care to see that the flash timer of the port is greater than the flash timer of the instruments.

• For example if a telephone instrument has a flash timer of 600ms, then the flash timer of the port to which the instrument is connected should be greater than 600ms.

• While using DISA facility, it is required to dial flash. Since the current loops are separate for different exchange lines, it is not feasible to sense following codes: • OFF-Hook. • ON-Hook (Making-breaking of loop-current) • Flash (momentarily breaking of loop-current)

The Cosine allows dialing of these codes by using combination of DTMF digits as under:

Please refer topic 'Direct Inward System Access (DISA)' for more details.

Relevant Topic:1. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 166

=X=X=

Activity What to dial ON Hook #0 OFF Hook #1 Flash #2 Pause #3 A #4 B #5 C #6 D #7 # ## Terminate String #*


Matrix

Flexible Numbers

What's this?Cosine offers flexibility to assign a code of your choice to access a station. This code is called flexible number. For example, to access first SLT having software port 01, one has to dial 201 (default flexible number). It is possible to change this code to any other number of your choice. Cosine offers two types of stations viz. SLT and DKP. The system loads default access codes (flexible numbers) to all the SLT and DKP stations on first power ON. Later on the stations can be assigned desired flexible numbers using a command.

A typical table of default SLT station numbers looks like:

A typical table of default DKP station numbers looks like:

How to program? For SLT Use following command to program the flexible number for a SLT station: 4301-SLT-Flexible Number-#* Where,SLT is a 2-digits number from 01 to 32.Flexible Number can be of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits.

Use following command to default the flexible numbers for all the SLT stations:4302-#*

Use following command to clear the flexible numbers for all the SLT stations: 4303-#*

For DKP Use following command to program the flexible number for a DKP station: 4304-DKP-Flexible Number-#* Where, DKP is from 1 to 8.Flexible Number can be of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits.

Use following command to default the flexible numbers of all the DKP stations:4305-#*

Use following command to clear the flexible numbers of all the DKP stations: 4306-#*

Cosine64 Cosine32Software Port Flexible Number Software Port Flexible Number

01 201 01 24 02 202 02 25 03 203 03 26 : : : : : : : :

32 232 12 35

Cosine64P Cosine32P Software Port Flexible Number Software Port Flexible Number

1 301 1 21 2 302 2 22 3 303 3 23 : : : : 8 308


Matrix

Example:It is required the Flexible numbers of SLT ports (S/w Ports 01 to 08) to be 4001 to 4008 and that of DKP ports (S/w ports 1 to 2) to be 5001 to 5002.

Use following commands to assign desired Flexible numbers to SLTs: 4301-01-4001-#* 4301-02-4002-#* 4301-03-4003-#* 4301-04-4004-#* 4301-05-4005-#* 4301-06-4006-#* 4301-07-4007-#* 4301-08-4008-#* 4304-1-5001-#* 4304-1-5002-#*

Important Points:• It is possible to have single digit, 2-digits, 3-digits and 4-digits flexible numbers. • It is also possible that few stations have single digit, few have 2-digits, few have 3-digits and remaining have four digit

flexible Numbers.• Flexible numbers are the codes dialed from dial phase to call another station. These flexible numbers should be

unique and should not match with either other SLT stations or DKP stations or any of the features available from the dial phase.

• Flexible number having common digits (subset) can be assigned to another station. For example if 3101 is used, then 310 can be programmed as the flexible number of another station. The conflict dialing wait timer will take care of dialing and resolving subset access codes without any error. For more details refer topic 'Access Codes and 'Conflict Dialing' in the system manual.

• Same flexible number cannot be assigned to two different stations. For example if you have used 211 for one station then 211 can't be assigned to any other station if both the stations are in the same tenant group.

• Use flexible numbers for all the features used from User mode. Software port numbers are to be used only during for SE Mode or SA Mode.

Relevant Topics:1. Access Codes 42 2. Conflict Dialing 129

=X=X=


Matrix


Forced Answer

What's this?• This feature enables the caller to force the called party to answer the call by making the destination station's speaker

go OFF-Hook. This is useful when the called party is not responding to the call in spite of the station ringing continuously. Now the caller can forcefully make the speaker go OFF-Hook and come in speech with the called party.

• This feature is helpful to managers who can simply call their secretary and deliver the message instead of waiting for the secretary to answer their call.

How to use it?

How to program? Please refer 'Class of Service (COS)' for details on how to allow forced answer to a user.

Important Points:• Forced Answer can be requested from both-SLT and DKP.• The destination can be DKP only.• The speaker LED glows when the DKP goes off-hook. • The user can dial Flexible Number and '5' in a line or Flexible Number and then '5' in RBT.• Forced Answer can be used even with a hold party. • From Interrupt Request and Barge-In, Forced Answer is not allowed.• Forced Answer is not allowed from DID.• Assume the operator is assigned 4 CA and is attending a call on CA1. Now if a calling party attempts forced answer,

the current party of the operator is held and the party that attempted forced answer comes into speech with the operator. On completion of the speech, the operator gets connected to the held party automatically.

=X=X=

Sr. User Action System Response 1 Lift the handset/Press 'Spk' key. Dial tone 2 Dial Flexible Number. Ring Back tone (if the called party is free).3 Dial '5'. RBT stops. Called Party's speaker goes off-hook. Speech with called party.

Matrix


Hold

What's this?This feature allows the user to talk to other station or external party without releasing the present party. This feature is also called Consultation-Hold. It is same as asking the person to wait in the waiting room while you want to attend another important guest simultaneously.

How to use it?

Relevant Topics:1. Call Splitting 992. Call Transfer 1033. Conference-3 Party 1204. Conference-Multi Party 122

=X=X=

1 Speech with Party A.2 Dial Flash. Party A goes on Hold and gets Music on Hold. Caller gets beeps. 3 Dial Station or Trunk Access Code. Speech with dialed station or trunk dial tone.

Matrix

Hotdesk

What's this?• Hot Desk enables the user to use all the features/facilities allowed to him from any station.• Generally in an organization persons with higher hierarchical positions have access to most of the important features.

But when these persons go away from their place of work within the organization, they are unable to use these features since the stations they might be then using may not have access to all the features. This restricts them from doing few important jobs like making a long distance call, receiving CLI based call, Hotline, etc.

• Hot Desk feature enables these important persons to use their features/facilities from their colleague's station.

How to use it?

To Set Hotdesk

To Cancel Hotdesk

How it works? • To use Hotdesk feature minimum two stations are required. One is called Host station and other is called Hotdesk

station. • Host station is the station which performs Hotdesk. • Hotdesk station is the station where Hotdesk is performed. • On using this feature, your colleague's station (Hotdesk station) works as your own station (Host station) for you. All

the properties of your station are copied to your colleague's station whereas the properties of your colleague's station are copied to your station i.e. the properties of both the stations are swapped.

• When your job is over and you are back to your seat, you can again Hotdesk your own station from your station. The properties of both the stations are again swapped and both behave with their original properties.

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow 'Hot Desk' to a user.

Important Points: • SLT users can Hotdesk only on other SLT port. • DKP users can Hotdesk only on other DKP port. • Hotdesk of a SLT user on a DKP port or viceversa is not allowed. • The User password of both the stations involved in Hotdesk should be different from the default password. • Hotdesk feature should be allowed from both the stations involved in Hotdesk. • While accomplishing Hotdesk, both the stations should be in idle condition. • No features/facilities except cancel Hotdesk are allowed from the host station (Station which has done Hotdesk from

other station).• Hot Desk is a programmable feature. Refer Class of Service (COS) for details. • Chaining of Hotdesk is not allowed. Suppose A hotdesks on B. So properties of A and B are swapped. Now if A

moves to C then he cannot hotdesk C unless hotdesk made by him in B is cleared by him from B or from A. • Consider a scenario where Station B (2109) and Station C (2100) are in speech. Another Station D (2101) has

assigned DSS keys for both the Station B and C. The respective LED's are glowing at this instance of time if Station A (2108) hotdesks Station D (2101), the properties of Station A (2108) and Station D (2101) are swapped except for the LED status of the station keys. i.e. these LED's are off in Station A (2108) which how bears the properties of Station D (2101). When the conversation between Station B (2109) and Station C (2100) is over, the information is sent to Station D. The LED's for the respective stations are already OFF here. The Station D (now station A) does not receive any indication of the conversation being complete so the LED's remains ON. These LED's remain ON even when Hotdesk is cancelled.

• If station A has set Call Forward the LED for the Call Forward key glows. If Station B hotdesks Station A, the properties of stations are swapped. The LED status of the Call Forward is also swapped. Now if Station B (now Station A) cancels the Call Forward feature, then corresponding LED if OFF. When the hot desking is cancelled this is reflected.

1 Your are at your colleague's station.2 Lift the handset. Dial tone 3 Dial 1091-Your Station Number-User Password. Confirmation tone

1 Your are at the host station or hotdesk station.2 Lift the handset. Dial tone 3 Dial 1090. Confirmation tone


Matrix


=X=X=


Matrix

Hotline

What's this?• Hotline eliminates repeated dialing of a station number.• As soon as the user picks up his handset, the Cosine automatically dials the fixed station. The station starts ringing

and the user gets ring back tone.• In an office environment, it is found that a boss calls his secretary or his co-worker frequently. He can use this feature.

How to use it?

Example:The boss needs to speak to his secretary (station number 202) many times in a day. He can avoid repeated dialing by activating the Hotline feature from his station:151-202

Delayed hot line is possible. After lifting the handset you do not get connected to the station immediately but get regular dial tone. If the user does not dial anything during this short dial tone, the Cosine places the hotline call to the station. This delay timer allows the user to dial other numbers without canceling hotline.

Set Hotline Timer

• The default value of hot line timer is 3 seconds and its range is 1-9 seconds. • The hot line timer cannot be set to 0 seconds.

Hot Outward Dialing (HOD)

What's this? • You get connected to a desired trunk the moment you lift the handset. • This feature is useful when you are making more number of trunk calls compared to internal calls. Once this feature is

enabled, as soon as you lift the handset you get the trunk dial tone after the set time.

How to use it?

Example:To simulate dialing of trunk access code 62 immediately on lifting the handset, dial 152-62

• Delayed HOD is possible as on a station. After lifting the handset you do not get connected to the trunk line immediately but get a regular dial tone. This HOD delay timer is same as Hotline delay timer.

HOD With Number

What's this? • You get connected to a desired external number the moment you lift the handset. • This feature is useful when you are making call to a particular external number many times in a day. Once this feature

is enabled, as soon as you lift the handset, the system dials the telephone number and you get connected to the external person.

How to use it?

Example:

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 151-Station. Confirmation tone

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 154-Seconds. Confirmation tone

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 152-Trunk Access Code. Confirmation tone

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 153-Trunk Access Code-Number-#*. Confirmation tone


Matrix

Let us activate HOD for external number 812-323-3053. Let us assume trunk access code '63'. Dial following code to set this feature: 153-63-8123233053-#*

• Delayed HOD With Number is possible from any station. After lifting the handset you do not get connected to the external number immediately instead you get a normal dial tone. You get connected to the external number only after the set time. This HOD delay timer is same as Hotline delay timer.

• This allows you to dial other numbers without canceling HOD.

Cancel Hotline/Hot Outward Dialing

What's this? • There is a common code to cancel both Hotline and Hot Outward Dialing.

How to use it?

• Please note that the cancellation code must be dialed from the Cosine dial tone. If the delay timer is kept at its minimum of 1 second, you have to be very quick in dialing the code.

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Hot line to a user.

Important Point: • Hotline and HOD cannot be activated on the same station at the same time.

Relevant Topics: 1. Class of Service (COS) 112 2. Toll Control 305 3. Answer Supervision on Trunk Port 59 4. Disconnect Supervision on Trunk Port 177

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 150. Confirmation tone


Matrix


Interrupt Request

What's this? • When your call is urgent and you cannot wait for the called person to become free, you can land in his conversation

after intimating him.• While landing, you get RBT and the called person gets beeps for as per the Interrupt Request Timer.• During the beeps, the called person can dial 'Flash' to answer your call. He can talk to you while his previous partner

is put on hold and gets music.• Replace your handset once your talk is over. This will automatically restore his original speech with the held-up party.

How to use it?

Important Points:• Interrupt Request works even when the destination is talking on a trunk line.• Interrupt Request works if the called person is in 2-way, normal speech.• Interrupt Request is ineffective if the called person is having call privacy from Interrupt Request.• The called party requested Interrupt Request can toggle both the calls.• Interrupt Request can also be used after putting one party in hold. An important trunk call can be transferred to a busy

station after putting the calling party in hold and interrupting the busy destination to inform him about his call. This is most advantageous feature for the operator while transferring calls.

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Interrupt Request to a user.

Timer of Relevance:Interrupt Request Timer: Time for which the station on which interrupt request is made gets the beeps.Command: 3002-Seconds-#*Default: 045 seconds.Valid Range: 001 to 255 seconds.


=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial Station. Busy tone 3 Dial 3. RBT. The Called person gets beeps. 4 The destination dials 'Flash'. Speech with the called person.

Matrix

ISDN-An IntroductionThe ISDN TechnologyISDN stands for “Integrated Services Digital Network”. “Integrated Services” refers to ISDN's ability to deliver two or more simultaneous connections, in any combination of data, voice, video, and fax, over a single line. “Digital” refers to ISDN's purely digital transmission, as opposed to analog transmission of Plain Old Telephone System (POTS). ISDN transmits data digitally, resulting in a very clear transmission quality. “Network” refers to the fact that ISDN is not simply a point-to-point solution like a leased line. ISDN networks extend from the local telephone exchange to the remote user and include all the telecom and switching equipment in between.

ISDN is based around two types of channels: • Bearer channel commonly called B-channel. • Common Signaling channel commonly called D channel.

The Bearer Channel (B-Channel)• The B-channels are logical "pipes" in a single physical ISDN line.• The B-channel is a 64 Kbps clear channel whose entire bandwidth is available for user information since call setup.

The user information can take several forms such as data or PCM encoded voice. One of the B-channels can be used for a device such as telephone or fax machine, while the other B-channel can be used for data transfer. Alternatively, two B-channels can be combined to download data at very high speeds to a PC.

• B-channels form circuit-switched connections, which resemble analog telephone connections in that they are end-to-end physical circuits temporarily dedicated to transfer information between two devices. The circuit-switched nature of B-channel connections, combined with their reliability and high bandwidth, makes ISDN suitable for voice, video, fax, and data applications.

• B-channels can be used to transfer any layer 2 or higher protocols across a link within the OSI model.• Although B-channels are normally used for on-demand connections, taking full advantage of the circuit-switched

networks upon which they are based, they can also be configured as semipermanent or "nailed-up" connections, which are always "up", much like a leased line. However, this can cause a capacity problem for carriers and ISPs, which can be solved by an emerging feature of ISDN called "Always On/Dynamic ISDN (AO/DI)".

The Common Signaling Channel (D-Channel)• Unlike B-channels, which function as "pipes", the D-channel is associated with higher level protocols at layers 2 and 3

of the OSI model that form the packet-switched connections.• D-channel uses packet-switched connections, which are best adapted to the intermittent but latency-sensitive nature

of signaling traffic, thus accounting for the vastly reduced call setup time of 1 to 2 seconds on ISDN calls (vs. 10 to 40 seconds using an analog modem).

• D-channel transmits at either 16 Kbps (for BRI) or 64 Kbps (for PRI). • The D-channel is used mostly for administrative signaling, to instruct the carrier to set up or terminate a B-channel

call, to ensure that a B-channel is available to receive a call, or to provide signaling information for features like CLIP, CLIR, COLP, COLR, etc.

Following two sketches show the call setup process in POTS and in ISDN network.Call setup process in POTS:

Human TelephoneTelephoneNetwork

CalledParty

Pick up handset

Off-hook signalDial tone

Dial tone

Enter number

Tones or Pulses

Ringback signal

“Hello”“Hi, Sumer here”

Tones or pulses

Ringback signal

“Hello”

“Hi, Sumer here”

Ring Current

“Hello”



Matrix

Call setup process in ISDN:

Basic Rate Interface (BRI) ISDN• The most common ISDN service is called Basic Rate or BRI. BRI is also referred to as 2B+D. Two B-channels carry

data and services at 64 Kbps (or combine for 128 Kbps) whereas one D-channel carry signaling and administrative information at 16Kbps to set up and terminate calls.

• A BRI line consists of two B-channels, which can be viewed as two logical pipes supported by a B-channel as shown below:

• BRI is intended to be the access point for Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) such as ISDN telephones, ISDN Fax and other ISDN terminal equipment.

• Maximum eight ISDN devices can be connected to this single physical line, and all the devices share the B-channels and D-channel. Individual devices are distinguished through the use of Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs), with a different ISDN number assigned to each device. D-channel signals automatically route communications to appropriate ISDN device.

• Point-to-Point BRI configuration and Point-to-Multipoint BRI configurations are shown below in the figure.

• In a Point-to-Point physical configuration, the NT (NT1 or NT2) and the TE (TE1 or TA) can be up to 1km apart. • There are two configurations possible in Point-to-Multipoint configuration viz. short passive bus configuration and

extended passive bus configuration. In case of short passive bus configuration, eight TEs can be connected to a single NT on a bus up to 200 meters. In extended passive bus configuration, multiple TEs are grouped together at one end of a bus, up to 1 km from the NT.

• Although only two B-channels are available at any point in time, numerous other calls can be put "on hold" via D-channel signaling, a feature referred to as "multiple call appearances".

• BRI can be used in small offices to support all of its voice and data communication requirements. In a larger office, one or more BRI lines can be divided among multiple users and applications via a server or a PBX.

HumanISDN

Telephone NetworkCalledParty

Pick up handset SetupSetup AcknowledgeDial tone

Enter numberTones or Pulses

Ringback signal

“Hello”“Hi, Sumer here”

“Hello”


“Hello”


Information

D-ChannelB-Channel

Call Proceeding

Alerting

Connect

Connect Acknowledge

Setup

Call Proceeding

Alerting

Connect

Connect Acknowledge

ISDN BRI ServiceISDN NT 1D-Channel

U Interface S/T Interface

TENT

TE

NT

TE TE

TE

NT

TETE

Point-to-Point BRI configuration BRILine

BRILine

Point-to-Multi point short passive Bus BRI configuration

Point-to-Multi point extended passive Bus BRI configuration

ISDNNetwork

ISDNNetwork

ISDNNetwork

BRILine


Matrix

Primary Rate Interface (PRI) ISDN • To support higher bandwidth requirements, ISDN is also available in primary rate or PRI (Primary Rate Interface).

This service differs depending upon the region where it is deployed. In North America, Japan and Korea PRI supports 23B-channels and one 64 Kbps D-channel. In the rest of the world it provides 30B channels and one 64 Kbps D-channel. These are referred to as 23B+D and 30B+D respectively.

• A PRI line consists of thirty B-channels, which can be viewed as thirty logical pipes supported by two D-channels as shown below. One of the D-channel is permanently used for framing, synchronization and other administrative purpose. Hence, the user has access to only D-channel for signaling.

• Unlike BRI, PRI does not support a bus configuration i.e. multiple devices cannot be connected to a PRI line. However, a PBX can be used to reallocate PRI resources.

• A single PRI connection is usually much less expensive than obtaining the equivalent number of B-channels through multiple BRI connections.

• Primary benefit of PRI is that the bandwidth can be dynamically allocated among applications. E.g. certain channels can be allocated for voice calls, but as those calls are terminated, the unused B-channels can be reallocated to such high-bandwidth applications as video conferencing. This is usually accomplished via a PBX or a server capable of distributing the E1 bandwidth on a PRI link.

The ISDN Terminology Various new terms used in context of ISDN are explained below.

ISDN functional devices and reference points: The ISDN standards define several different types of devices. Each device type has certain functions and responsibilities but may not represent an actual physical piece of equipment. Hence these are called functional devices. The LE, NT1, NT2, TE1, TE2 and TA are examples of the functional devices. Since functional devices do not work in isolation, there are several device-to-device interfaces, each requiring a communications protocol. Each of these device interfaces is called a reference point. The functional devices and reference points are explained below in detail. Please refer the figure given below.

Network Termination Type1 (NT1) This functional device represents the termination of the physical connection between the customer site and the Local Exchange (LE). The NT1's responsibilities include line performance monitoring, timing, physical signaling protocol conversion, power transfer and the multiplexing of the B and D channels.

Network Termination Type2 (NT2) These functional devices refer to those devices that provide customer site switching, multiplexing, and concentration. This includes PBXs, LANs, mainframe computers, terminal controllers and other CPE for voice and data switching. NT2 is generally absent in some ISDN environments, such as residential or Centrex ISDN service.

ISDN PRI ServiceISDN

D-ChannelB-Channels


Matrix

Terminal equipment (TE) refers to end-user devices, such as an analog or digital telephone, X.25 data terminal equipment, ISDN workstation, or integrated voice/data terminal (IVDT).

Terminal equipment type1 (TE1) are those devices that utilize the ISDN protocols and support ISDN services, such as an ISDN telephone or workstation.

Terminal equipment type2 (TE2) are non-ISDN compatible devices, such as the analog telephones in use on today's telephone network.

Terminal Adaptor (TA) allows a non-ISDN device (TE2) to communicate with the network. TAs allow analog telephones, X.25 DTEs, PCs, and other non-ISDN devices to use the network by providing any necessary protocol conversation. R reference point -It is the reference point between non-ISDN equipment and a TA.

S reference point: It is the reference point between ISDN user terminals (TE1 or TA) and the network termination equipment (NT1 or NT2).

T reference point: It is the reference point between customer site switching equipment (NT2) and the local loop termination (NT1). In absence of the NT2, the user-network interface is usually called the S/T reference point.

U-The reference point between NT1 devices and line-terminations equipment in the local exchange. The U reference point is relevant only in North America, where the NT1 function is not provided by the local exchange. In other countries, the ISDN service providers provide NT1 along with the services i.e. the U-interface is built in feature of the service. The customer gets S/T interface.

=X=X=

TE 2 device(Standard

Phone)

NT 2 NT 1

NT 2 NT 1

TA NT 2 NT 1

4-wire 4-wire 2-wire

S T U

S T U

S T UR

TE 1 device(Computer)

TE 1 device(ISDN Phone)

4-wire 4-wire

4-wire 4-wire

2-wire

2-wire2-wire

ISDNSwitch

ISDNSwitch

SwitchedNetwork

PacketNetwork


Matrix

ISDN-BRI

What's this?• DDI allows the user to call another user on an ISDN compatible PBX or private network without operator intervention. • A telephone number (ISDN number) is thought to consist of two parts viz. MSN number and the DDI Number. MSN

number is the network number of a given subscriber whereas DDI Number is the address of the stations beyond the point defined by the MSN number. This is shown below.

• MSN number is provided by the Service Provider whereas the DDI Numbers can be selected by the user. However the number of digits to be used for DDI Numbers has to be informed to the Service Provider. The number of digits to be used for DDI Numbers should also be programmed in the PBX.

• The Cosine supports TE mode only. • Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) feature of ISDN allows multiple telephone numbers to be assigned to a single

ISDN line (whether BRI). MSN in fact, is a type of ISDN numbering scheme. Maximum 8 different numbers can be assigned to one BRI line. These numbers could be totally different or it could be in sequence. For example number can be 2765401, 2798301, 2734561, etc. or it can be 039 2453612 to 039 2453619.

How it works?Incoming Call Routing Logic:• The ISDN numbering plan with Cosine revolves around Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) and Direct Dialing In

(DDI).• With MSN feature, practically all the station users or other specific terminals can be given a unique telephone number.

One station can be assigned a number 2765400, other station can be assigned 27546301, etc. Hence, for one subscriber the Service Provider can assign multiple numbers. Hence this feature is called Multiple Subscriber Number.

• The Cosine can be programmed to land all the calls coming through various channels of the BRI line on a desired station or a group.

• Alternatively, using DDI feature of ISDN the calls can be made to land directly on the desired stations. To accomplish this requirement, each station should be given a unique DDI number. On assigning DDI number, a table is formed internally, called DDI table as shown below:

• When a caller calls a MSN number, the call lands on the PBX. The PBX compares the incoming number with the MSN/DDI table. If the incoming number matches with any number in the MSN/DDI table, it routes the call to the specific station or group. If the incoming number does not match with any number in the MSN/DDI table then it is matched with CLI number. If it matches with any number in the CLI table, the call is routed according to the CLI table. If the number does not match with either of these tables then the call is routed to the trunk landing destination. Depending upon the ISDN number user can program number and desired station in the MSN/DDI routing table. e.g. For BRI port 1:

Best-fit method is used to route the call on desired station. Consider an example where MSN/DDI table is programmed with following number. 2765401 > Station Group-01 27654019 > DKP-01

Station (S/w Port No.) Directory Number01 0306 0407 0509 0610 07

Index MSN/DDI Number Working TZ Destination Break TZ Destination Non-Working TZ Destination 01 2765451 SLT-01 SLT-01 SLT-01 02 3001 DKP-01 DKP-01 DKP-01 03 2764519 Station Group-01 Station Group-02 Station Group-03 : : : : : : : : : :

10 2323435 DKP-02 DKP-02 DKP-02

Telephone Number 27654 000MSN

NumberDirectoryNumber


Matrix

If the number we received is 2765401 then call is routed to Station Group-01. If the number we receive is 27654019 then the call is routed to DKP-01. But now if the number we received is 27654012 then call is routed to Station Group-01.

Outgoing Call Routing Logic: When an outgoing call is made using BRI line, MSN/DDI number of call originating station is sent as calling party number. It is user's responsibility to program MSN/DDI number of individual station for each BRI port. If MSN/DDI number is not programmed then calling party number will not be sent.

How to connect the BRI line? • Most of the Service Providers provide the NT1 along with the BRI line. • At the Customer's Premises, the BRI line is terminated on the NT1. The S/T interface of the NT1 is connected to BRI

port of the Cosine. This is shown in the figure given below:

The configuration details of S/T interface (RJ-45) on NT1 are given below:

Please refer 'Installing the System' for pin details of BRI port.

How to program? Step 1: Program the BRI dial type using command 7101.Step 2: Program the type of number for Source using command 7102.Step 3: Program the Source numbering plan identification using command 7103.Step 4: Program the type of number for Destination using command 7104.Step 5: Program the destination numbering plan identification using command 7105.Step 6: Assign MSN/DDI number to SLT stations for each BRI port using command 7153.Step 7: Assign MSN/DDI number to DKP stations for each BRI port using command 7154. Step 8: Program the MSN/DDI number for a BRI port in MSN/DDI table to land calls with this MSN number on a desired

station using command 7141.Step 9: Program the Destination Type and Destination port number for a BRI port in MSN/DDI table to land calls with this

MSN number on a desired station for working hour, break hour and non working hour using the command 7142, 7143, 7144 respectively.

Step 10: Set BRI MSN/DDI transmit method using command 7161.Step 11: Set the overlap receiving timer using command 7162.Step 12: Program MSN/DDI ring timer using command 7147.

Step 1Use following command to program the dial type of BRI: 7101-BRI-Code-#* Where,BRI is the software port from 1 to 2.

By default, BRI dial type is 1.

Step 2Use following command to program the Type of Number for Source (Cosine):

Pin Number Pin Detail 3 RX1 4 TX1 5 TX2 6 RX2

Code Meaning 1 Called Party Facility 2 Key Pad Facility

ISDNNetwork NT 1

PowerU-Interface

(2 wire)S/T

Interface


Matrix

7102-BRI-Type of Number-#* Where,BRI is the software port from 1 to 2.

By default, Type of Number is 'Unknown'.

Step 3Use following command to program the Numbering Plan Identification for source (Cosine): 7103-BRI-Numbering Plan Identification-#* Where, BRI is the software port from 1 to 2.

By default, Numbering Plan Identification is 'ISDN/Telephone'. Step 4Use following command to program the Type of Number for destination (ISDN exchange): 7104-BRI-Type of Number-#* Where,BRI is the software port from 1 to 2.

By default, Type of Number is 'Unknown'.

Step 5Use following command to program the Numbering Plan Identification for destination (ISDN Exchange): 7105-BRI-Numbering Plan Identification-#* Where,

Type of Number Meaning of the Type of number

1 Unknown: This is used when the user or network has no a prior information about the numbering plan. In this case, the Address-Value field is organized according to the network dialing plan, e.g. prefix or escape digits might be present.

2 International Number.3 National Number: Prefix or escape digits might be present.

4 Network Specific Number: This is used to indicate administration/service number specific to the serving network, e.g. used to access an operator.

5 Subscriber Number: This is used when a specific short number representation is stored in one or more SCs as part of a higher layer application.

6 Abbreviated Number.7 Reserved Number.

Numbering Plan Identification Meaning 1 Unknown 2 ISDN/Telephone 3 Data Numbering 4 Telex Numbering 5 National Standard 6 Private Numbering 7 Reserved

Type of Number Meaning of the Type of number

1 Unknown: This is used when the user or network has no a prior information about the numbering plan. In this case, the Address-Value field is organized according to the network dialing plan, e.g. prefix or escape digits might be present.

2 International Number.3 National Number: Prefix or escape digits might be present.

4 Network Specific Number: This is used to indicate administration/service number specific to the serving network, e.g. used to access an operator.

5 Subscriber Number: This is used when a specific short number representation is stored in one or more SCs as part of a higher layer application.

6 Abbreviated Number.7 Reserved Number.


Matrix

BRI is the software port from 1 to 2.

By default, Numbering Plan Identification is 'ISDN/Telephone'.

Step 6Use following command to assign a MSN/DDI number to SLT for BRI: 7153-SLT-BRI-MSN/DDI Number-#*Where,SLT is from 01-32BRI is the software port from 1 to 2.MSN/DDI Number is of maximum 16 digits.By default, MSN/DDI Number for both BRI port is 'Blank'.

Use following command to clear a MSN/DDI number to SLT for BRI: 7153-SLT-BRI-#* Where, SLT is from 01 to 32. BRI is the software port from 1 to 2.

Use following command to assign a MSN/DDI number to All SLT for BRI: 7153-**-BRI-MSN/DDI Number-#*

Use following command to clear a MSN/DDI number to All SLT for BRI:7153-**-BRI-#*

Step 7Use following command to assign a MSN/DDI number to DKP for BRI: 7154-DKP-BRI-MSN/DDI Number-#*Where,DKP is from 1 to 8.BRI is the software port from 1 to 2.MSN/DDI Number is of maximum 16 digits.By default, MSN/DDI Number for both BRI port is 'Blank'.

Use following command to clear a MSN/DDI number to DKP for BRI: 7154-DKP-BRI-#* Where, DKP is from 1 to 8.BRI is the software port from 1 to 2.

Use following command to assign a MSN/DDI number to All DKP for BRI: 7154-*-BRI-MSN/DDI Number-#*

Use following command to clear a MSN/DDI number to All DKP for BRI:7154-*-BRI-#*

Step 8Use following command to program MSN/DDI Number for an index of MSN/DDI table: 7141-BRI-Index-MSN/DDI Number-#* Where,BRI is the software port from 1 to 2.Index is from 01 to 10.MSN/DDI Number is of maximum 16 digits.By default, MSN/DDI number is 'Blank'.

Numbering Plan Identification Meaning 1 Unknown 2 ISDN/Telephone 3 Data Numbering 4 Telex Numbering 5 National Standard 6 Private Numbering 7 Reserved


Matrix

Use following command to assign a MSN/DDI Number to all BRI: 7141-*-Index-MSN/DDI Number-#*

Use following command to clear an Index:7141-BRI-Index-#* Where, BRI is the software port from 1 to 2.Index is from 01 to 10.

Use following command to clear an Index to all BRI: 7141-*-Index-#*

Step 9Use following command to program Destination Port for an index of MSN/DDI table for working hours: 7142-BRI-Index-Destination Type-Destination Port No-#* Where, BRI is the software port from 1 to 2. Index is from 01 to 10.

By default, Destination Type is Station Group-01

Use following command to program Destination Port for an index of MSN/DDI table for working hours for all BRI: 7142-*-Index-Destination Type-Destination Port No-#*

Use following command to program Destination Port for an index of MSN/DDI table for Break hours: 7143-BRI-Index-Destination Type-Destination Port No-#* Where, BRI is the software port from 1 to 2. Index is from 01 to 10.


Use following command to program Destination Port for an index of MSN/DDI table for Break hours for all BRI: 7143-*-Index-Destination Type-Destination Port No-#*

Use following command to program Destination Port for an index of MSN/DDI table for Non-working hours: 7144-BRI-Index-Destination Type-Destination Port No-#* Where, BRI is the software port from 1 to 2.Index is from 01 to10.


Use following command to program Destination Port for an index of MSN/DDI table for Non-working hours for all BRI: 7144-*-Index-Destination Type-Destination Port No-#*

Step 10Use following command to set BRI MSN/DDI transmit method: 7161-BRI-MSN/DDI Digits Tx method-#*

Destination Type Meaning Destination Port 1 SLT 01-32 2 DKP 1-8 3 Station Groups 01-16




Matrix

Where,BRI software port is from 1 to 2.MSN/DDI digits Tx method is:

By default, MSN/DDI Tx method is set to "Enbloc".

Step 11Use following command to set overlap receiving timer: 7162-Timer-#* Where, Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds. By default, Timer is 06 seconds.

Notes:• This timer is applied when SETUP message is received on BRI-TE port and Sending Complete message is not

received in the SETUP message. • When the timer is expired, the incoming call will be routed as per the logic.

Step 12ISDN/DDI Ring Timer: This timer signifies the time for which the station on which the incoming call received through ISDN rings. On expiry of this timer, the incoming call is routed to the Operator.

Use following command to program ISDN/DDI Ring Timer:7147-MSN/DDI Ring Timer-#* Where,MSN/DDI Ring Timer is from 001 to 255 seconds.By default, MSN/DDI ring Timer is 045 seconds.

Important Points:• Trunk software ports are automatically assigned to the BRI port by the system. • Please note that DID does not work on BRI line. • The dial type of the trunks must be pulse type. • Numbering plan is a type of numbering scheme used in telecommunication. This is set of rules used for making

numbers. • The command for 'BRI MSN/DDI Transmit Method' is used in making call from TE to NT. • Parameter called "BRI MSN/DDI Transmit Method on BRI" is applicable in Store & Forward dialing case only. For

example: LCR-Number Based or LCR-Mixed or CPS ON or Redial or Abbreviated Dialing or where called party number is available in the system.

• In Overlap, dialing digits are sent digit by digit i.e. digits are sent immediately when user dials it. For Direct trunk access of BRI through TAC or Selective Trunk Access, the number is out dialed to the network in Overlap method.

• In Enbloc, dialing digits are sent in a single block.

Relevant Topics:1. ISDN-An Introduction 204 2. Software Port and Hardware ID 276

=X=X=

MSN/DDI Digits Tx Method Meaning 1 Enbloc 2 Digit By Digit


Matrix


Last Caller Recall

What's this? • Cosine offers a facility to trace last caller to your station.

How to use it?

Example:• Station 201 wants to find that who made a last call to it. Station 201 should dial 112 from his station. The station that

last called 201 rings. Speech is established when the called party answers the call.

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 112. The Station that last called you rings. You get RBT. 3 Called party answers the call. Speech.

Matrix


Last Five Calls Trace

What's this? • This feature helps the DKP user to know last five external calls to it.

How it works? • Cosine supports Calling Line Identification and Presentations. If CLIP storage is enabled on a trunk then the Cosine

senses the digits sent by the CO before/during the ringing phase. It sends this information to the landing station/operator along with the ringing signal. Simultaneously, it stores this information in memory and the Incoming SMDR buffer. If name is assigned to a telephone number in the CLIP table then the name of the caller is stored in memory and the Incoming SMDR buffer.

• When Last Five Call Trace feature activated on a station by dialing its access code, Cosine collects list of last five external caller numbers or names from the memory of Incoming SMDR buffer and display it on LCD of DKP.

How to use it? • DKP user can know last five external callers either by navigating through the menu or by using a feature code. • To use this feature using feature code:

Please refer 'EON45_EonSoft User's Guide' to use this feature by navigating through the menu.

Important Points:• Maximum five telephone numbers are displayed. • The telephone numbers of the external incoming calls cannot be deleted or edited. • The system uses FIFO method to clear the numbers. • The list consists of both attended as well as missed calls. • It is also possible to display the name of the caller provided it is programmed in the CLI table. The system on sensing

the incoming number matches with the number programmed in the CLI table and if it matches with the programmed number then searches for the corresponding name in the CLI table. If the name is present in the CLI table then it is displayed else the number itself is displayed on the LCD of the DKP.

• The DKP user can see the number or the name of the caller but cannot dial out from the same menu. For calling the caller, he has to dial out the number.

Relevant Topic:1. Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP) 106

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 113. Last external caller's number or the name is displayed.3 Use 'inc' or 'dec' keys to see last five external callers.

Matrix


Last Number Redial

What's this? • This feature redials the last external number dialed. It cannot dial internal station. • This feature saves time during retrying a busy external number. It is same as REDIAL button of the telephone

instrument. • This feature is also known as Last Number Redial (LNR).

How to use Redial from SLT?

How to use Redial from DKP?

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow redial to a user.

Timer of Relevance:Pause Timer: Please refer the topic 'Trunk Parameters'.

Important Points:• The system uses the same Trunk Access Code you used for dialing the number last time. • Dialing '7' can do redialing of the external number. • The 'Redial' button of the SLT can be used to redial internal station only.

Relevant Topics:1. Class of Service (COS) 112 2. Trunk Parameters 320

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 7. Silence.3 The System grabs a trunk. Trunk dial tone 4 The system inserts pause.5 The Cosine dials out the last number.

1 Press Redial. Silence.2 The System grabs a trunk. Trunk dial tone 3 The system inserts pause.4 The Cosine dials out the last number.

Matrix


Least Cost Routing-An Introduction

What's this? Different basic service providers offer different rates for different times of the day and the destination numbers. For example, SP1 may offer cheaper rates compared to SP2 for calls made during peak hours. i.e. 09.00 to 20.00. Whereas SP2 may offer cheaper rates as compared to SP1 during off peak hours i.e. 20.00 to 09.00.Least cost routing logic is used to select the cheapest trunk from the total allotted trunks to the station to make outgoing calls. This way, the cost of outgoing calls can be minimized, by selecting the most economical trunk depending upon the time of call and the destination number.

Above diagram shows that few trunks of both SP2 and SP1 are interfaced with Cosine. Here it is desirable to use LCR facility if these service providers offer different rates.

Cosine offers three different types of LCR logic. Time Based LCR• This logic is used when different SPs provide different rates during different timings of the day. This logic uses online

dialing. In online dialing, the digits dialed by the user are directly passed on the trunk.

Number Based LCR• This logic is used when different SPs provides different rates for different areas, different phone numbers. For

example, BSNL provides cheaper rates for a call made from Baroda to Delhi as compared to Reliance. This logic uses Store and Forward dialing. In Store and Forward dialing, the digits are first stored in a memory location and then these are dialed on the trunk.

Mixed LCR• This logic is used when the rates of service providers differ both time wise and number wise. For example, SP1

provides cheaper rates for a call made from city A to city B during peak hrs (09.00 to 20.00) as compared to SP2. Whereas SP2 provides cheaper rates for a call made from city A to city B during off peak hours (20.00 to 09.00). This logic uses Store and Forward dialing. In Store and Forward dialing, the digits are first stored in a memory location and then these are dialed on the trunk.

Carrier Pre Selection LCR• In countries where the telephone system has been deregulated it is possible for subscriber to choose the carrier they

want to use for long distance calls. The choice of the carrier is based on cost of calls and the number of lines offered. The subscriber does not have to change his telephone lines to be able to access cheap long distance call service.

How to program? • To program the LCR, first of all the type of LCR for a TAG has to be chosen (viz. Time Zone, Number, Mixed LCR) and

a service provider code to each trunk has to be assigned. • To program LCR-CPS the CPS has to be enabled for the TAG. • For more details on how each type is to be programmed refer the respective topics viz. Least Cost Routing-Number

Based, Least Cost Routing-Time Based, Least Cost Routing-Destination and Time Based, Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection.

Relevant Topics:1. Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection 218 2. Least Cost Routing-Destination and Time Based 220 3. Least Cost Routing-Number Based 223 4. Least Cost Routing-Time Based 226

=X=X=

SP1

SP2

CO

T1T2

S1

S2

S3

SnCosine

T3T4

T5

T6

T7

Matrix

Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-SelectionWhat's this? This feature is used in Australasian/European/African and the North American/South American market. In Asia the same service provider provides local call and long distance call service. However, in European and other western countries this is not true. In these countries, the service providers for short distances (Local area) and long distances are different unlike India, where the service provider is the same for short and long distances. For e.g. in India SP1, SP2, SP3, etc. provide both short distance as well as long distance services. In simple words, a customer stationed at City A and has a SP1 connection can call a friend in City A using SP1 services. Also he can call another friend in City B using SP1 services because SP1 also provides services in City B. However this is not true in North American/South American, Australasian/European/African market.

A user is a subscriber of SP1 and has trunk lines of SP1 only. He can call other subscriber in the local area simply by grabbing a trunk. However, when he wants to make a long distance call, he needs to dial a string (Called CPS string) to select a carrier (trunk) of the desired long distance Service Provider. That is accessing a secondary service provider by dialing a short code. He can make the long distance call using SP1, SP2 or SP3 and to select either of these SPs, he needs to dial a CPS string. Once the trunk of the secondary SP is selected all your calls are rerouted to your secondary SP's network.

How to program?Step 1: Enable/disable CPS on a TAG using command 4701.Step 2: Program the CPS string table for every TAG 4702 and 4704.

Step 1Use the following command to enable/disable CPS for a trunk access group: 4701-TAG-Code-#* Where,TAG is from 1 to 8.

By default, state of LCR CPS is 'OFF'.

Step 2Each TAG can have a CPS string table with 16 entries. The complete CPS string table looks like the figure below:

The CPS string table for a Trunk Access Group is created in two steps: • Program the Destination numbers in the CPS string table for a trunk access group.

Use the following command to program the destination numbers in the CPS string table for a trunk access group:

Code Meaning 0 CPS Off 1 CPS On

Index Destination CPS String 01 DDDD…. DDDD… 02 DDDD… DDDD… : DDDD… DDDD…

16 DDDD… DDDD…


Matrix

4702-TAG-Index-Destination Number-#*Where,TAG is from 1 to 8. Index is from 01 to 16.Destination Number is of maximum 08 digits.

Use the following command to clear a destination number in the CPS string table for a trunk access group: 4702-TAG-Index-#* Where,TAG is from 1 to 8.Index is from 01 to 16.

Use the following command to clear all destination number in the CPS string table for TAG:4703-TAG-#*

• Program the CPS string in the CPS string table for a trunk access group. Use the following command to program the CPS strings in the CPS string table for a trunk access group: 4704-TAG-Index-CPS String-#* Where, TAG is from 1 to 8. Index is from 01 to 16.

Use the following command to clear an entry of CPS string from the CPS string table of TAG: 4704-TAG-Index-#*

Use the following command to clear all the CPS strings in the CPS string table for a trunk access group: 4705-TAG-#* Where, TAG is from 1 to 8.

CPS String is of maximum 08 digits. A special digit '#3' can be a part of the CPS string to insert pause. The pause generated is the same as pause timer programmed for the system. i.e. using the commands 4702 and 4704, if a CPS string table as below is constructed for a TAG#1.

Whenever, the user dials out 2630555 on TAG#1 the system dials out 19912630555 on the trunk.

Use the following command to copy the entire CPS string table of one TAG (source) to another TAG (destination): 4711-Source TAG-Destination TAG-#* Where, Source TAG is from 1 to 8.Destination TAG is from 1 to 8.

How to construct a CPS string table by compressing destination numbers? • When constructing the CPS string table, it is advisable to collect all the destination numbers for which Carrier Pre-

Selection is required.• Sort the destination number in increasing order. Write the applicable CPS strings against each destination number. • Select destination number having common digits (2, 3, 4 or more) with same CPS strings.• Use this truncated destination number as a common destination code for all destination codes in this group. • Program the common truncated code with the common CPS string for the whole group.• Repeat the procedure to find out other such groups with common CPS strings.• The destination numbers, which do not belong to any group should be entered individually as separate entries. • This method of entering a common truncated destination numbers, accommodates more entries in the CPS string

table.

Relevant Topic:1. Least Cost Routing-An Introduction 217

=X=X=

Index Destination CPS String 01 2630555 1991 : : : : : :


Matrix

Least Cost Routing-Destination and Time BasedWhat's this? • This logic is used when the rates of service providers differ both time wise and number wise (Mixed). For example,

SP1 provides cheaper rates for a call made from city A to city B during peak hrs (09.00 to 20.00) as compared to SP2. Whereas SP2 provides cheaper rates for a call made from city A to city B during off peak hours (20.00 to 09.00). This logic uses Store and Forward dialing. In Store and Forward dialing, the digits are first stored in a memory location and then these are dialed on the trunk.

How to program?Step 1: Decide the type of LCR to be programmed to a trunk access group viz. No LCR, Time Zone Wise LCR, Number

Wise LCR or Mixed LCR using command 4830.Step 2: Assign the service provider code to each trunk using command 4831. Step 3: Program the LCR table as per the LCR type selected using command 4820, 4821 and 4822.

Step 1Decide the LCR type i.e. whether no LCR, Time wise LCR, Number wise LCR or Mixed LCR. Use following command to program LCR type for a trunk access group: 4830-Trunk Access Group-LCR Type-#* Trunk Access Group is from 1 to 8.

Step 2Assign the service provider code to a trunk.Use following command to assign code of a service provider:4831-Trunk-Service Provider Code-#*Where,Trunk-Software port number of the trunk is from 01 to 12.Service Provider Code is from 1 to 4.You can assign any code to any service provider. Suppose we have four service providers viz. SP1, SP2, SP3and SP4 then you can give code 1 to SP1, code 2 to SP2, code 3 to SP3 and code 4 to SP4.

Step 3Make the following table on a plain paper.

Suppose we have four basic service providers viz. SP1, SP2, SP3 and SP4.

For Area code 022 (Number String 1) in time zone 08.00-12.00, (time zone 1), SP1 provides cheapest services followed by SP2, SP3 and SP4. Then the first entry in first row would be as shown.For Area code 011(Number String 2) in time zone 08.00-12.00 (time zone 1), SP4 provides cheapest services followed by SP1, SP3 & SP2, then the second entry in first row would be as shown.For Area code 022(Number String 3) in time zone 12.00-18.00 (time zone 2), cheapest services are offered by SP3 followed by SP2, SP1 and SP4 the 1st entry in 2nd row would be as shown in the table.

Use following command to program Time Zone Index for Mixed LCR: 4821-Time Zone Index-Start Time-End Time-#* Where,Time Zone Index is from 1 to 9.Start Time is the time in HH:MM format when the Time zone starts.End Time is the time in HH:MM format when the Time zone ends.

LCR Type Meaning 0 No LCR 1 Time Zone wise LCR 2 Number wise LCR 3 Mixed LCR (Time + Destination)

Number Index/ Time Zone Index 022 011 033 ……. 9

08.00 to 12.00 1,2,3,4 4,1,3,2 : : : 12.00 to 18.00 3,2,1,4 : : : :

: : : : : : 04:00 to 08:00 : : : : :


Matrix

By default, Time zone is 00.00 to 23.59.

The time zone table looks like:

Use following command to program Number Index for Mixed LCR:4822-Number Index-Number String-#* Where,Number Index is from 01 to 20.Number String can be a complete telephone number, a truncated telephone number or an area code. Number string is of maximum 16 digits.By default, Number string is 'Blank'. The Number string table looks like:

Use the following command to clear a number index for mixed LCR: 4822-Number Index-#*

Use following command to program the Service Provider (SP) sequence for the each Number and Time Zone: 4823-Number Index-Time Zone Index-SP1-SP2-SP3-SP4-#* Where, Number Index is from 01 to 20. Time Zone Index is from 1 to 9. SP1: Service Provider 1 is the cheapest service provider. SP2: Service Provider 2 is the cheaper service provider.SP3: Service Provider 3 is the cheap service provider.SP4: Service Provider 4 is the costly service provider.

Use following command to default Mixed LCR: 4820-#*By default, Number Index is 'Blank'.By default, Time zone is 00.00 to 23.59.By default, Service Provider sequence is 1, 2, 3, 4.

Default mixed LCR table is shown below:

Example:• SP1 is cheapest for City A to City B (022 long distance code) call during 08.00-20.00 followed by SP4, SP3 and SP2. • SP3 is cheapest for City A to City C (011 long distance code) call during 20.00 to 08.00 followed by SP1, SP4 and

SP2.

Time Zone/ Index Start Time End Time 1 HH:MM HH:MM 2 HH:MM HH:MM : : : : : : 9 HH:MM HH:MM

Number Index Number String 01 (16 digits allowed) 02 (16 digits allowed) : :

19 (16 digits allowed) 20 (16 digits allowed)

Number Index/Time Zone Index B B …… B

00:00 to 23:59 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 : 1, 2, 3, 4 00:00 to 23:59 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 : 1, 2, 3, 4

: : : : : : : : : :

00:00 to 23:59 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 : 1, 2, 3, 4


Matrix

Use following command to define LCR type: 4830-1-3-#*

Use following command to program time zone index in mixed LCR: 4821-1-0800-2000-#* 4821-2-2000-0800-#* Use following command to program number index in mixed LCR: 4822-01-022-#* 4822-02-011-#*

Use following command to assign SPs for respective number wise & time zone wise LCR: 4823-01-1-1-4-3-2-#* 4823-02-2-3-1-4-2-#*

The table will look as below:

Range Commands:

Important Point:• If no match is found in the table the first entry in the table is used.

Relevant Topics:1. Trunk Access Groups 311 2. Trunk Parameters 320 3. Least Cost Routing-An Introduction 217

=X=X=

Number Index/TZ Index 022 011 ……….. B

08:00 to 20:00 1, 4, 3, 2 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 20:00 to 08:00 1, 2, 3, 4 3, 1, 4, 2 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4

: : : : : : : : : :

00:00 to 23:59 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4

Assign the same LCT type for all Trunk Access Group 4830-*-LCR Type-#*Assign the same SP for all the trunks 4831-**-SP-#*


Matrix

Least Cost Routing-Number Based

What's this? This logic is used when different SPs provides different rates for different areas, different phone numbers. For example, BSNL provides cheaper rates for a call made from Baroda to Delhi as compared to Reliance. This logic uses Store and Forward dialing. In Store and Forward dialing, the digits are first stored in a memory location and then these are dialed on the trunk.

How to program?Step 1: Decide the type of LCR to be programmed to a trunk access group viz. No LCR, Time zone wise LCR, Number

wise LCR or Mixed LCR using command 4830.Step 2: Assign the service provider code to each trunk using command 4831.Step 3: Program the LCR table as per the LCR type selected using command 4810, 4811 and 4812.

Step 1Decide the LCR type i.e. whether No LCR, Time wise LCR, Number Wise LCR or Mixed LCR. Use following command to program LCR type for a trunk access group: 4830-Trunk Access Group-LCR Type-#* Trunk Access Group is from 1 to 8.

Step 2Assign the service provider code to a trunk.Use following command to assign code of a service provider:4831-Trunk-Service Provider Code-#* Where,Trunk-Software port number from 01 to 12.Service Provider Code is from 1 to 4. You can assign any code to any service provider. Suppose we have four service providers viz. SP1, SP2, SP3and SP4 then you can give code 1 to SP1, code 2 to SP2, code 3 to SP3 and code 4 to SP4.By default, Service Provider code is 1.

Step 3Make following table on a plain paper.

In the above table for Number Index 1 (Number string in Number Index 01 can be a complete telephone number, a truncated number or an area code), program the service providers in hierarchical order of increasing cost. For example, if we have four service providers viz. SP1, SP2, SP3 and SP4 and if for area code 022, the services of SP1 are cheapest followed by SP3, SP4 and SP2 then the first row in the table would appear as shown.

Use following command to program Number Index:4811-Number Index-Number String -#* Where,Number Index is from 01 to 20.Number String can be a complete telephone number, a truncated telephone number or an area code. Number string is of maximum 16 digits.By default, Number String is 'Blank'.

LCR Type Meaning 0 No LCR 1 Time Zone wise LCR 2 Number wise LCR 3 Mixed LCR (Time Zone wise + Number wise)

Number Index Service Providers in hierarchical order of increasing cost 01 (022) 1 3 4 2

02 2 1 3 4 : : : : : : : : : :

20 B B B B


Matrix

Use the following command to clear a number string for a number index: 4811-Number Index-#* Where,Number Index is from 01 to 20.

The number string table looks like:

Use following command to program the Service Provider (SP) sequence for the each Number: 4812-Number Index-SP1-SP2-SP3-SP4-#*Where, Number Index is from 01 to 20.SP1: is the cheapest service provider. SP2: is the cheaper service provider. SP3: is the cheap service provider. SP4: is the costly service provider.Please note that it is mandatory to complete this command. You have to program the service provider sequence for each number. If the number of service provider are less complete it with the cheapest service provider. By default, Service Provider Sequence is 1, 2, 3, 4.

Use following command to default Number wise LCR table: 4810-#*By default, Number String is blank.By default, Service Provider Sequence is 1, 2, 3, 4.

The default number wise LCR table would look like:

Example:• SP1 is cheapest for City A-City B call followed by SP3 and SP4. • SP2 offers cheapest service if a local is made to 813-323-2045 from 813-323-2046 followed by SP3, SP1 and SP4. • SP3 offers cheapest service for City A-City B call followed by SP1, SP2 and SP4.

Use following command to program number wise LCR type: 4830-1-2-#*

Use following command to program number index for LCR:4811-01-022-#* (Where 022 is the area of City B)4811-02-8133232045-#*4811-03-011-#* (Where 011 is the area code of City C)

Use following command to assign SPs for respective numbers:4812-01-1-3-2-4-#* 4812-02-2-3-1-4-#* 4812-03-3-1-2-4-#*

Number Index Number String 01 (16 digits allowed) 02 (16 digits allowed) : :

19 (16 digits allowed) 20 (16 digits allowed)

Number Index Service Providers in hierarchical order of increasing cost B 1 2 3 4 B 1 2 3 4 : : : : : : : : : : B 1 2 3 4


Matrix

With above programming the Number LCR table will look as below:

Range Commands


Relevant Topics:1. Trunk Access Groups 311 2. Trunk Parameters 320 3. Least Cost Routing-An Introduction 217

=X=X=

Number Index Service Providers in hierarchical order of increasing cost 22 1 3 2 4

813-323-2045 2 3 1 4 11 3 1 2 4 B 1 2 3 4 B 1 2 3 4 B 1 2 3 4 B 1 2 3 4 B 1 2 3 4 B 1 2 3 4 B 1 2 3 4

Assign the same LCR Type for all Trunk Access Group 4830-*-LCR Type-#*Assign the same SP for al the trunks 4831-**-SP-#*


Matrix

Least Cost Routing-Time Based

What's this? This logic is used when different SPs provide different rates during different timings of the day. This logic uses online dialing. In online dialing, the digits dialed by the user are directly passed on the trunk.

How to program?Step 1: Decide the type of LCR to be programmed to a trunk access group viz. No LCR, Time Zone Wise LCR, Number

Wise LCR or Mixed LCR using command 4830.Step 2: Assign the service provider code to each trunk using command 4831.Step 3: Program the LCR table as per the LCR type selected using command 4801, 4802 and 4803.

Step 1Decide the LCR type i.e. whether no LCR, Time wise LCR, Number wise LCR or Mixed LCR. Use following command to program LCR type for a trunk access group: 4830-Trunk Access Group-LCR Type-#* Where,Trunk Access Group is from 1 to 8.

Step 2Assign the service provider code to a trunk.Use following command to assign code of a service provider:4831-Trunk-Service Provider Code-#* Where,Trunk-Software port number of the trunk is from 01 to 12.Service Provider Code is from 1 to 4.You can assign any code to any service provider. Suppose we have four service providers viz. SP1, SP2, SP3 and SP4 then you can give code 1 to SP1, code 2 to SP2, code 3 to SP3 and code 4 to SP4.

Step 3Make following table on a plain paper.

In the above table for different time zones, program the service providers in hierarchical order of increasing cost. For example, If we have four service providers SP1, SP2, SP3 and SP4 and if for time zone 1 (08.00 to 20.00) the services of SP3 are cheapest followed by SP2, SP1 and SP4 then the first row in the table would appear as shown in the table.

Use following command to program Time Zone Index: 4802-Time Zone Index-Start Time-End Time-#* Where, Time Zone Index is from 1 to 9.Start Time is the time in HH:MM format when the Time zone starts.End Time is the time in HH:MM format when the Time zone ends.

LCR Type Meaning 0 No LCR 1 Time Zone wise LCR 2 Number wise LCR 3 Mixed LCR (Time Zone wise + Number wise)

Time Zone Index Service Providers in hierarchical order of increasing cost 08.00-20.00 3 2 1 4

2 2 1 3 4 : : : : : : : : : : 9


Matrix

The time zone table looks like:

Use following command to program the Service Provider (SP) sequence for the each Time Zone: 4803-Time Zone Index-SP1-SP2-SP3-SP4-#* Where, Time Zone Index is from 1 to 9. SP1: is the cheapest service provider. SP2: is the cheaper service provider. SP3: is the cheap service provider. SP4: is the costly service provider. Please note that it is mandatory to complete this command. If fewer number of service providers are used, then the repeat the cheapest service provider for remaining SPs.

Use following command to default Time Zone wise LCR table: 4801-#*By default, time zone is 00.00 to 23.59.By default, service provider sequence is 1, 2, 3, 4.

The default time zone wise LCR table would look like:

Examples:Given: Four service providers are available viz. Service Provider Code 1, 2, 3, 4. Four trunks with software port numbers 01, 02, 03 and 04 are available. 01 and 02 are from SP1, 03 is from SP2 and 04 is from SP3. All the trunks are in trunk access group 1.

First assign the SP code to each trunk using following command: 4831-01-1-#* 4831-02-1-#* 4831-03-2-#* 4831-04-3-#*

Example:• SP1 is cheapest during 08.00 to 16.00 followed by SP3, SP2 and SP4.• SP4 is cheapest during 16.00 to 20.00 followed by SP1, SP2 and SP3.• SP3 is cheapest for 20.00 to 23.00 followed by SP1, SP4 and SP2.• SP2 is cheapest for 23.00 to 08.00 followed by SP2, SP3 and SP4.

Use following command to program time zone LCR type for the trunk access group: 4830-1-1-#*

Use following command to program LCR time zones: 4802-1-0800-1600-#* 4802-2-1600-2000-#* 4802-3-2000-2300-#* 4802-4-2300-0800-#*

Time Zone Index Start Time End Time 1 HH:MM HH:MM 2 HH:MM HH:MM : : : : : : 9 HH:MM HH:MM

Time Zone Index Service Providers in hierarchical order of increasing cost 00.00-23.59 1 2 3 4 00.00-23.59 1 2 3 4

: : : : : : : : : :

00.00-23.59 1 2 3 4


Matrix

Use following commands to assign service providers for the respective time zone: 4803-1-1-3-2-4-#* 4803-2-4-1-2-3-#* 4803-3-3-1-4-2-#* 4803-4-1-2-3-4-#*

With above programming the time zone LCR table will look as below:

Range Commands:


Relevant Topics:1. Trunk Access Groups 3112. Trunk Parameters 3203. Least Cost Routing-An Introduction 217

=X=X=

Time Zone Index Service Providers in hierarchical order of increasing cost 08.00 to 16.00 1 3 2 4 16.00 to 20.00 4 1 2 3 20.00 to 23.00 3 1 4 2 23.00 to 08.00 1 2 3 4 00.00 to 23.59 1 2 3 4 00.00 to 23.59 1 2 3 4 00.00 to 23.59 1 2 3 4 00.00 to 23.59 1 2 3 4 00.00 to 23.59 1 2 3 4 00.00 to 23.59 1 2 3 4

Assign the same LCR Type for all Trunk Access Group 4830-*-LCR Type-#*Assign the same SP for all the trunk 4831-**-SP-#*


Matrix


Live Call Screening

What's this? • Live Call Screening is useful when a VMS is interfaced with the Cosine.• Many times user wants to be away from calls and hence forwards all his calls to the VMS. However he wants to know

the caller and the purpose of his call.• This feature of LCS satisfies this requirement.• With LCS activated, whenever the caller starts recording a message in the mailbox of the user/called person, the

speaker of the DKP (station of Cosine) of the user turns ON. The message being recorded in the mailbox is thereby also heard by the user. If the user feels to talk to the caller, he simply needs to go OFF-Hook.

• When the user goes off-hook, the caller is connected to the user whereas recording of the message in the mailbox stops. Pressing the 'SPK' key the recording continuous but conversation is not heard.

• LCS can be activated/deactivated as per the User's requirement.• LCS would work only if LCS is enabled from the COS and activated by the user.

How to use it? To use LCS

To use LCS feature, it should be activated. Use following command to activate/deactivate LCS.

To activate LCS

To deactivate LCS

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow LCS to a user.

Timer of Relevance:LCS Timer: Time for which the speaker remains ON while the message from the caller is being recorded.Command: 3901-Seconds-#*Default: 015 seconds.Range: 001 to 255 seconds.

Important Point:• If VMS of Matrix is installed with Cosine it is advisable that only one station should be associated with the extension.


=X=X=

1 Caller is recording message in the mailbox. Message is heard on the speaker also.2 Lift the handset. Caller gets connected to the user. Whereas gets disconnected from the VMS.

1 Press ̀ SPK' key. Dial tone 2 Dial 1033. Confirmation Tone. LCS activated.3 Press `SPK' key. Idle state.

1 Press `SPK' key. Dial tone 2 Dial 1034. Confirmation Tone. LCS deactivated.3 Press `SPK' key. Idle state.

Matrix


Live Call Supervision

What's this?A person with higher hierarchy in an organization can know to which destination his subordinate is making a call/received a call.

How it works?The last external number dialed by the station/the last external number that called the station is stored in the system's memory. When the boss requests live Call Supervision for a station, the system retrieves this number (which is to be supervised) and presents it on the LCD of the requesting station.

How to use it?

How to program? Live Call Supervision is a programmable feature. Please refer 'Class of Service (COS)' for details on how to allow Live Call Supervision to a user.

Important Points:• This feature can be used even when the station that is to be supervised is in speech with an external party. • This feature is supported on SLT ports only if the CLI phone are connected. • Users of Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America after having asked for LCS, the last three digits of the

number will be masked with '000', that is if number is '0212345678' then display of number will be '0212345000'.

Relevant Topics:1. SLT Parameters 274 2. Class of Service (COS) 112

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 1035-Station. Confirmation tone 3 Disconnect. Station rings. The Number is displayed. 4 Lift the handset. Dial tone

Matrix

Message Paging

What's this? • The Station User can page a message of his choice to a group of stations.• This feature can be used by both DKP and SLT. However, SLT cannot receive a page.• Five different messages can be paged.• Paging messages are programmable.

How to use it?

How to program? A page message can be entered from a DKP or from a computer (using Jeeves).

Use following command to program a message: 3102-Page Message Number-Message String-#* Where,Page Message Number is from 1 to 5.Message String is a string of alphanumeric characters.Maximum 16 characters are allowed.


2 Dial 1032-Page Zone-Message Index.

Paging station gets confirmation tone. Paged DKP gets a ring. When the ring is answered the message is displayed on the LCD of the DKP.

Start

User dials message paging code with page zone and message index

Cosine gives confirmation tone to the user and checks whether station in the dialed paging group are free.


Cosine rings the station and waits for the called station to answer

Does the station answers the call

before message page ring timer?

Cosine delivers the message on the first line of the LCD of the DKP

End

Cosine waits for the station to become free

The message is not delivered

End

Yes

No

No

Yes


Matrix

Use following command to clear a message string:3102-Page Message Number-#*

Use first 25 keys on the DKP to enter the name. The alphabets are mapped to the keys as shown below:

Page Message Ring Timer: The timer signifies the time for which the station to which the message is paged rings.Use following command to program Page Message Ring Timer:3103-Page Message Ring Timer-#* Where,Page Message Ring Timer is in seconds from 001 to 255 seconds.By default, Page Message Ring Timer is 010 seconds.

Please refer 'Class of Service (COS)' for details on how to enable 'Message Paging' for a user.

By default, following page messages are available:

Important Points:• If paging port is included in the paging zone then the message to this port will be ignored.• Message paging depends on paging zone and hence paging zones should be defined intelligently so that both the

features viz. Paging and Message Paging can be optimally used.• When the message is paged and if the paged station is busy then the message will be delivered when the station

becomes free. When the station becomes free, it rings. The message is displayed when the paged station answers the ring.

• Different type of ring is assigned for message paging. • The access to this feature is programmable. Please refer topic "Class of Service (COS)" for more details.

Relevant Topics:1. Paging 240 2. Class of Service (COS) 112 3. Access Codes 42 4. Distinctive Rings 179

=X=X=

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y 1 2 3 Z 4 5 6 'Space' 7 8 9 '.' * 0 # 'Enter'

Not Used '&’ '-' ','

Message Index Message1 "I am in Office" 2 "Please Call Me" 3 "Let us Meet" 4 "Going for Lunch" 5 "Going Home"


Matrix


Message Wait

What's this? • The Cosine supports this feature if Matrix VMS viz. Cadence is interfaced with it.• Whenever there is a new message in the mailbox of the mailbox owner, the Cadence sends a string of digits to the

cadence to inform about it.• The Cosine changes the dial tone of the relevant station (DKP to SLT) to feature tone.• Also, the LED on the SLT (if telephone instrument supports it) and LED on the DKP (if LED is assigned) glows steady

ON.

How to program? No special programming is required for this feature. It is allowed to all the stations. However, a LED for message wait should be assigned on a DKP.

Relevant Topics:1. Voice Mail System (VMS) Gateway 327 2. Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming 156

=X=X=

Matrix


Music on Hold

What's this?Whenever a person is put on hold while his call is being transferred or otherwise, the person gets music. Cosine supports three types of music sources.

Internal Music Sources: A 16-tune melodies music IC is used to give music.External Music Sources: Continues music from a CD player, tape recorder etc. of one's choice can be played back as Hold-on-Music. Please refer 'External Music' for more details.

How to program? Step 1: Decide the music source. Step 2: Program the music source type.

Step 1Configure the system for music source using jumper SW2 (Cosine 64P) and SW3 (Cosine 32P) as per following table:

Step 2Use following command to program music source type: 5301-Music Source Type-#* Where,

Selection of Internal Music/External Music is done by jumper. By default, the music source type is 1. This command can be executed from the SA Mode also.

Example:Program the system such that when stations are kept on hold, they get internal Music on Hold. Dial 5301-1-#*.

Relevant Topics:1. Background Music (BGM) 72 2. External Music 188 3. Voice Message Applications 328

=X=X=

Jumper Meaning A-B External Music Source B-C Internal Music Source

Music Source Type Meaning 1 Internal Music/External Music 2 Voice Module

Built-In Music Source Voice Module

Music

External Music Source

Matrix


Mute

What's this? • This feature helps the user to disconnect the speech transmission path in between a conversation.• The user can still listen to the opposite party because the receiving path is not disconnected.• This is very useful to handle calls received midway of a discussion and bar the caller from listening to your discussion.

How to use it?

Important Point:• Whenever the DSS key assigned for 'Mute' is pressed, the LED of the DSS key blinks. On pressing the DSS key

again the LED is OFF.

Relevant Topic:1. Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming 156

=X=X=

Action Response Speech with a party.

Press the DSS key assigned for 'Mute'. Transmission path disconnected. You can still hear the calling party.Press the DSS key assigned for 'Mute'. Mute Off.

Matrix


Name Programming

What's this?• Cosine allows Programming a Name for SLT, DKP and Trunks. Name can be maximum of 8 characters consisting of

alphabets, numbers, punctuation marks and spaces. If a Name is programmed for a SLT, it is displayed on the LCD of the DKP when the station calls the DKP. This makes the identification of the caller easier.

• When a Name is programmed for a DKP, it appears on the LCD of the DKP. When this DKP calls another DKP then the name is displayed on the LCD of the Called party's DKP.

• When a Name is programmed for Trunk, it is displayed on the LCD of DKP when an external call is received on this trunk by the DKP. It is also displayed when the trunk is grabbed to make an outgoing call.

• In EON42 there are only 24 DSS keys. Thus, all 24 keys are used for A-X alphabets while programming name. To program remaining two Alphabets (Y and Z), use Up key of EON42 as 'Y' alphabet and use Down key of EON42 as 'Z' alphabet.

How to program?Use the following command to program a name to a SLT: 1304-SLT-Name-#*Where,SLT is from 01 to 32Name is a string of 8 characters.By default, Name is blank.

Use the following command to clear the SLT name: 1304-SLT-#* Where,SLT is from 01 to 32.The name is printed in the SLT parameters report.

Use the following command to program a name to a DKP: 1423-DKP-Name-#* Where,DKP is from 1 to 8.Name is a string of 8 characters.By default, Name is blank.

Use the following command to clear the DKP name: 1423-DKP-#*The name is printed in the DKP parameters report.

Use the following command to program a name to a Trunk: 1624-Trunk-Name-#* Where,Trunk is from 01 to 12.Name is a string of 8 characters.By default, Name is blank.

Use the following command to clear the Trunk Name: 1624-Trunk-#* The name is printed in the Trunk parameters report.

Relevant Topics:1. SLT Parameters 274 2. Trunk Parameters 320

=X=X=

Matrix

Operator

What's this? • Operator is a person who handles more number of calls at a time. She acts as a link between the caller and the called

person.• Any DKP or SLT can be interpreted as Operator.• If SLT is made an Operator, she can handle only one call at a time. Similarly, if a DKP having one CA key is made an

operator she can handle only one call at a time.• A DKP user can be made an operator by assigning him more number of CA.• The operators can be defined based on time zones i.e. you can program one operator station for working hours,

another station for break hours and a third station for non-working hours.

How it works? • There is only one operator at a time.• When any SLT or DKP presses '9' ('0' for North American/South American users) the system diverts the call to the

operator (may be security) assigned.• An Operator should be assigned Key functions and LED functions. For more details, please refer "Digital Key Phone-

Soft Keys Programming".• When the Operator leaves her desk, she can dial a command to make Operator absent. On coming back to her desk,

she can dial a command to make Operator present.• A time table can be assigned to the operator.

How to program?Step 1: Assign Operator for SLTs and DKPs using command 2101, 2102 and 2103.Step 2: Assign a Timetable to the operator using the command 2111 and 2112.

Step 1Use following command to program the Operator during working hours:2101-Station Type-Station-#* Where, Station is from 01 to 32 for SLT. Station is from 1 to 8 for DKP.

By default, Operator during working hour is the DKP connected to software port 1.

Use following command to program the Operator station during break hour: 2102-Station Type-Station-#* Where, Station is from 01 to 32 for SLT. Station is from 1 to 8 for DKP.

Use the following command to program the operator station for non-working hours: 2103-Station Type-Station-#* Where, Station is from 01 to 32 for SLT. Station is from 1 to 8 for DKP.

Station Type Meaning Station 0 Null port 00 1 SLT port 01-32 2 DKP port 1-8




Matrix

Step 2Use following command to assign timetable to the operators: 2111-Timetable-#* Where,Timetable is from 0 to 5.By default, Timetable is 1.

Use the following command to assign the time zone if the timetable is set 0 (No timetable or Manual): 2112-Zone-#* Where,

By default, the Zone is 1.

Example:• DKP 1 is operator for working hours, 2 is for break hours and 3 for non-working hours. • The operator must be assigned timetable 4.

Solution:2101-2-1-#* 2102-2-2-#* 2103-2-3-#* 2111-4-#*

Cosine offers a facility to operator to absent himself when he leaves his desk. Once the operator has absented himself no caller can call to the operator station. This feature enables the caller to know the operator is absent and can call a second station.

To make Operator Absent, dial 104-User Password-0.To make Operator Present, dial 104-User Password-1. By default, Operator is present.

Important Point:• When the system is loaded with Asian/Australasian/European/African defaults, the Operator is accessible with dialing

'9'. But when the system is loaded with North American/South American defaults, the operator is accessible by dialing '0'.

Relevant Topics:1. Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming 156 2. Time Tables 300

=X=X=

Zone Meaning 1 Working Hours 2 Break Hours 3 Non Working Hours


Matrix


Override

What's this? • Important people can override 'Do Not Disturb' feature of the called person. • This ensures selective privacy for the users.

How to use it?

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow override to a user.

Important Points:• Override feature is relevant only when the called person has activated Do Not Disturb (DND) on his station.• If the caller is in the DND list of the called person, he gets routing tone.• Thus, the caller knows that the called person needs privacy. • If his call is important and he wishes to override the 'Do Not Disturb' (DND), he can exercise his override right.• Override feature is effective only if the called person is not using privacy against it.• Override is a programmable feature. Refer Class of Service (COS) for details.

Relevant Topics:1. Class of Service (COS) 112 2. Do Not Disturb (DND) 181 3. Privacy 247

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial Station. Routing tone 3 Dial 4. RBT. The destination gets overridden.

Matrix

Paging

What's this? You can deliver a message to a mass of people just by lifting your handset and dialing a code. This feature is helpful when it is required to call few people for a meeting. This feature is of great use in factories, offices, etc. where it is not feasible to provide more number of stations. In such cases, if you need to call somebody you can just make an announcement naming him to come and see you or call you. This can also be used for mass communication.

The Cosine supports two types of paging. Paging on DKPEach DKP is equipped with built-in hands-free speaker. A user can use this for announcements. As soon as the access code for a paging zone is dialed, the speaker of the DKP is activated and the caller's voice is heard.

One or more destinations (DKP Stations and Paging port) can be paged simultaneously depending on the zone programming.

Paging on paging portMany times it is required to make announcements in a hall, in a lobby or on a shop floor. In such situations, Paging on DKP might not serve the purpose because of limited voice level available on the small speaker of a DKP. As higher power output is needed, the signal needs to be amplified using an external amplifier and then fed to a speaker.

The Cosine supports one paging port on the CPU card. The paging port outputs un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signal. This signal can be amplified by an external amplifier and then fed to a speaker. The specifications of an Analog Output Port (AOP) are given below: Specification Value Interface Type Audio signal Frequency 300 Hz to 3400 Hz Maximum voltage 0.707 Vrms Source impedance 100 ohms Isolation Internal Transformer

Paging

Paging on DKP Paging on Paging Port

Cosine

DKP

DKP

DKP


Matrix

Paging Interface block diagram is given below:

Please refer 'Configuring the System' for pin details of paging port on the MDF connectors.

How to use it? • A User needs to dial paging access code followed by paging zone number for making announcement in a paging

zone. A paging zone may contain one or more DKPs. A paging zone may also contain few/all DKPs and the paging port itself.

• It is also possible that a paging zone may contain only the paging port.When a user dials a paging code following by the page zone number, all the speakers of the zone get activated and the announcement made by the caller is heard on all the speakers included in the paging zone.

Once the announcement is over, user needs to replace the handset. The system deactivates all the speakers.

The flow chart elaborates these steps.

It is also possible to make an announcement only on a paging port.

How to program? The Cosine supports maximum of five (5) paging zones. Each zone can have maximum of eight (8) paging ports. A port can be a DKP or a paging port.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 1031-Page Zone Number. You get connected to the paging zone. 3 Start announcement when the ring back tone stops.

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 3921. You get connected to the paging port.3 Start announcement.

5F M 3 1 0 6 7

RD SSEEK

1 2 3 4 5 6RPT RN DI S D SD - D +

AFPTY

CDTUNERBAND

LOCM ON

TAPS

CLK

PagingPort

AmplifierSpeaker

Start

User dials a paging zone code

System activates the free ports

User speaks out his message. The message is heard on all the speakers.

The user disconnects

System release all the paging ports and deactivates the speakers

End

Making an Announcement

Terminating anAnnouncement


Matrix

Paging zone table looks like:

Use following command to program an entry for a paging zone in the paging zone table: 3101-Paging Zone-Port Index-Station Type-Station-#* Where, Paging Zone is from 1 to 5. Port Index is from 1 to 8.Station Type is the paging destination port type.

Access Codes Use following command to program the access code for a paging port: 4313-AOP-Access Code-#* Where,AOP is 1.Access Code is of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits.

Use following command to default the access code of an AOP:4314-#*

Use following command to clear access codes for an AOP: 4315-#*

Example 1:Announcement is to be made on DKP ports 1, 2 and 3 in paging zone 1.3101-1-1-2-1-#* 3101-1-2-2-2-#* 3101-1-3-2-3-#*

Example 2:Announcement is to be made on paging port and on DKP ports 1, 2 and 3 in paging zone 2.3101-1-1-6-1-#* 3101-1-2-2-1-#* 3101-1-3-2-2-#* 3101-1-4-2-3-#*

By default, Cosine-64P the paging zone does not contain any DKP port or a Paging port. By default, Cosine-32P the paging zones will have the following ports assigned:

Relevant Topic:1. Configuring the System 18

=X=X=

ZonePort 1 Port 2

.....Port 8

Station Type Station Station Type Station Station Type StationZone1 2 3 2 4 : 2 1Zone2 3 1 2 1 : 2 2Zone3 : : : : : : :Zone4 : : : : : : :Zone5 : : : : : : :

Station Type Meaning Station 0 Null Port 0 2 DKP Port 1-8 6 Paging Port 1

Zone Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 Port5 Port6 Port7 Port8Zone1 DKP1 DKP2 DKP3 AOP Null Null Null NullZone2 DKP1 DKP2 DKP3 AOP Null Null Null NullZone3 DKP1 DKP2 DKP3 AOP Null Null Null NullZone4 DKP1 DKP2 DKP3 AOP Null Null Null NullZone5 DKP1 DKP2 DKP3 AOP Null Null Null Null


Matrix


Power Down Mode

What's this?During power failure, it is desirable to have trunk lines available directly on few stations. This is known as Power Down Mode. When mains power returns, normal operation resumes. Change over from normal to power down operation and back is automatic.

During power failure condition, calls can be made from these stations. Also the incoming calls lands on respective stations. This way, your link with the outside world is retained even during dark-outs.

How it works? Following block diagram shows the power fail transfer function for one port:

• The table below elaborates the stations to which the trunks get connected during power down mode by default.• At the time of power failure/Power return ongoing calls will be disconnected.

Relevant Topics:1. Installing the System 29 2. Appendix B: Troubleshooting 340

=X=X=

Trunks/Stations Cosine-64 Cosine-32P L1 201 24 L2 202 25 L3 203 26 L4 204 27 L5 205 L6 206 L7 207 L8 208

Telephoneconnectionin the field

Normal Condition

StationCircuit

P&TLine

NO

NO

NC

NC

C

C

Power Fail Condition

NO

NO

NC

NC

C

CStationCircuit

P&T Line

Telephoneconnectionin the field

Matrix


Printer Port

What's this?The Cosine-64P offers a built in parallel port for connecting a printer with the system. This port is available (in the form of a 25 pin connector) on the CPU card of the system.

How it works? Any standard printer can be attached with the system. The system sends data in the pure ASCII format. No special characters or control sequences are sent.

The Printer Port (not applicable to Cosine-32P) can be assigned to Processes like SMDR Report generation (both On-line and Off-line). While the Printer Port (not applicable to Cosine-32P) is being used the data communication can be paused and then resumed at convenience.

Use the following command to Pause/Resume data communication between the Printer Port (not applicable to Cosine-32P) and the process assigned to it. 5930-Flag-#* Where,

Pause, stops the data communication between the process and Printer Port (not applicable to Cosine-32P). A Resume command has to be issued to resume the data communication between the process and Printer Port (not applicable to Cosine-32P). Resuming, starts the data communication exactly from the point where it was paused.

Relevant Topics:1. Station Message Detail Recording 284 2. Communication Port 119

=X=X=

Flag Meaning 0 Pause 1 Resume

Matrix

Priority

What's this? All callers do not have same hierarchical position in an organization. It is not advisable to keep a call from some important person waiting just because there is already one unimportant call pending at the destination.

The important caller should be allowed to jump the queue and be attended first ahead of other earlier pending calls.

Following cases highlight the utility of this feature: • Calls from CEO.• Calls on a special or private trunk line.• Calls on a help or emergency line.• Calls on a hot line.All the above calls can be given priority from other normal calls.Priority is relevant only when there is more than one call pending on the destination.

How it works? When the destination answers a call by going OFF-Hook or by pressing ANSWER key, the call with the highest priority is connected to him.In case of a DKP user, the second line of the LCD shows the call with the highest priority. And this will be the first call to be answered whenever the user lifts his handset or presses the ANSWER key. In case of a SLT user, the priority is not relevant because there cannot be more than one call ringing on a SLT.

The Cosine supports flexible priority assignment for different users. Each port can be assigned a priority level between "1" to "9". Higher the priority level, more important the caller is. Accordingly 1 has the least priority and 9 has the highest priority.Following ports can be programmed with a desired priority level:• SLT users. • DKP users.• Trunk lines.• Priority logic also applies to operators.

Above example shows arrival of calls on the operator in following chronological order:

When operator answers calls by going OFF-Hook or by pressing answer key, above calls will be answered in the following order: • DKP#201• TRUNK#01• SLT#301• SLT#302Of Course the DKP user can alter the above sequence by manually answering the calls using DKP's DSS keys.

How to program? Use following command to assign priority to SLT:

Caller Time of the call Priority SLT 301 10:00:00 1 SLT 302 10:00:05 1 TRUNK 01 10:00:10 4 DKP 201 10:00:15 7

PSTN Eternity

Trunk Line #001

Priority : 4Incoming Call at 10:00:10

Operator

SLT#301, Priority : 0(Calls Operator at 10:00:00)

SLT#302, Priority : 0(Calls Operator at 10:00:05)

DKP#201, Priority : 7Chief Executive(Calls Operator at 10:00:15)


Matrix

2901-SLT-Priority-#* Where, SLT is the software port number of the user from 01 to 32. Priority is a single digit number from 1 to 9.By default, priority of SLT is 1.

Use following command to assign priority to DKP: 2902-DKP-Priority-#* Where, DKP is the software port number of the user from 1 to 8. Priority is a single digit number from 1 to 9.By default, priority of DKP is 1.

Use following command to assign priority to Trunk: 2903-Trunk-Priority-#* Where, Trunk is the software port number of the trunk from 01 to 12. Priority is a single digit number from 1 to 9.By default, priority of Trunk is 2.

Example:Program priority for the following stations in the given hierarchical structure:Station for CEO is a DKP (S/w port number 01)Station for GM is a DKP (S/w Port number 02).Stations for four Department heads are DKP (S/w port Numbers 3, 4, 5, 6).Stations for five Executives are SLT (S/w port numbers 01, 02, 03, 04, 05).Stations for office staff persons are SLT (S/w port numbers 07, 08, 09, 10).Station for two office boys are SLT (S/w port numbers 11, 12)

2902-1-9-#* 2902-2-8-#* 2902-3-7-#* 2902-4-7-#* 2902-5-7-#* 2902-6-7-#* 2901-01-6-#* 2901-02-6-#* 2901-03-6-#* 2901-04-6-#* 2901-05-6-#* 2901-07-5-#* 2901-08-5-#* 2901-09-5-#* 2901-10-5-#* 2901-11-1-#* 2901-12-1-#*

Range commands:

=X=X=

Assign the same priority to all SLTs 2901-**-Priority-#*Assign the same priority to all DKPs 2902-*-Priority-#*Assign the same priority to all trunks 2903-**-Priority-#*


Matrix

Privacy

What's this?While two stations are in speech, it is desired that no third person can listen their talk i.e. privacy of their conversation is maintained.

However, if few important stations are allowed to use features like interrupt request, barge-in and raid, they can intrude the conversation. Also if DID is activated, outside caller can reach any station or if there is a call from another trunk line, it will interrupt your conversation by giving intrusion tone. Some times this is very annoying and undesirable. Cosine provides privacy against all these types of intrusions. This is known as Privacy.

There are four types of intrusions against whom a user might wish privacy: • Privacy from Interrupt Request and Barge-In.• Privacy from Raid.• Privacy from Trunk Call Intrusion.• Privacy from DID Call.

These four types are provided as programmable features in the Class of Service groups. A user can be assigned any combination of above four privacy flags by selecting an appropriate Class of Service Group. If it is required that no other station can Raid you then the corresponding flag i.e. Privacy-Raid in the Class of Service should be made '1'. Likewise other flags should be made '1' or '0' as per the requirement. For more details, please refer section 'Class of Service (COS)‘.

How it works? Following flow charts depicts the series of events in which it works.Privacy from IR/Barge-In/Raid

Start

Station A and Station B are in speech

Station C calls Station A. He is gets busy tone.

Station C dials interrupt request. Barge-In or Raid code.

Is Station C allowed the dialed

number?

Is Station A programmed with

Privacy against interrupt request/Barge-In or

Raid?

Station A gets beeps in his speech.

Logic of interrupt request, Barge-In and Raid follows here

End

Call blocked station C gets error tone

End

Yes

No

Yes

No


Matrix

Privacy from trunk call beeps

Privacy from DID calls

How to program? Access to Call Privacy is programmable from Class of Service. Any station can be allowed or denied Call Privacy through Class of Service programming.

To deny Call Privacy set the flag to '1' and to allow Call Privacy set the flag to '0'. (To have privacy from Trunk Call Intrusion set the flag to '0').

Start

Station A and Station B are in speech

Fresh call arrives on Trunk T. Station A is the first destination for this trunk.

Is Station A programmed with

Privacy against trunk call beeps?

System gives beeps to station A for trunk landing timer

Does Station A attends the trunk

call?

Station B goes on hold. Caller gets connected to Station B.

End

System routes the call to the next destination in trunk landing group

Station A is not interrupted system lands the call on next landing station in the trunk landing group

End

Yes

No

Yes

No

Start

An external call lands on a trunk programmed for DID

The external call dials Station A

Is Station A programmed with Privacy against

DID?

The caller is routed to Station A. He gets ring.

End

The caller gets DID error message or DID error tone

End

Yes

No


Matrix

Example:To program station 201 such that no other station can raid it, enable this feature i.e. set this bit to '1'.


=X=X=


Matrix

Programming the System

What's this? Cosine is a flexible system and can be programmed to suit your needs. Programming can be done at three levels: • System Engineer Level At this level, System Engineer does the programming. This is called System Engineer mode.

For more details, please refer the topic "System Engineer (SE) Mode".• System Administrator Level At this level, System Administrator does the programming. This is called System

Administrator mode. For more details please refer the topic "System Administrator (SA) Mode".• User Level At this level, User does the programming for himself for features like Alarms, Call Follow Me, etc. For more

details, please refer respective sections.

Tools for Programming The Cosine can be programmed using following tools: • Conventional Telephone Instrument.• Digital Key Phone (EON45 and EON42).• Matrix Jeeves.

Programming the Cosine using a conventional telephone instrument • This is the most commonly used method of programming the system. However, care should be taken while issuing

commands which need to be terminated using '#*'.

Programming the Cosine using an EON45• Programming the Cosine using an EON45 is very convenient since it displays the commands being keyed in on the

LCD. It also displays the current values of the parameters being programmed. For e.g. when a command for the abbreviated dialing is issued for an index, it displays the telephone number assigned for the index to be programmed. The SE has the flexibility to add few digits to the telephone number or change the telephone number instead of entering the complete command again.

Programming the Cosine using an EON42: • The command structure for programming the Cosine is same for EON45 and EON42. • If command is entered for EON42 and value entered by SE is more than the maximum value for EON42, SE will get

Confirmation tone and maximum value for EON42 will be programmed. • If command is entered for EON42 and value entered by SE is more than the minimum value for EON42, SE will get

Confirmation tone and minimum value for EON42 will be programmed. • If command is entered for EON42 and value entered by SE is within the range for EON42, SE will get Confirmation

tone and the value entered by the SE will be programmed.

Programming the Cosine using Matrix Jeeves• Programming the Cosine using the Jeeves, please refer 'Programming Using Jeeves'.

Important Points:• Programming can be done at the site without opening the system from any Station.• System can also be programmed from a remote end from anywhere in the world. For more details, please refer

section “Remote Programming".• Programming is accomplished by dialing separate codes (string of digits) for different settings. This eliminates need

for entering long and confusing programming sequences. Programming commands are broken into two parts: Codes and Values.

• The system continues to function normally even during programming. This allows the SE or SA to change the settings without disturbing any communication.

Programming Level

SE Level

User LevelSA Level


Matrix

• The SE mode and the SA mode are password protected so that no other person can make any unauthorized alterations and subsequent misuse of features and facilities.

Relevant Topics:1. System Engineer (SE) Mode 2972. System Administrator (SA) Mode 2963. Remote Programming 2634. Programming Using Jeeves 2525. Getting Started 34

=X=X=


Matrix

Programming Using JeevesMatrix supplies a customized, windows based software to program the Cosine known as Jeeves. The Jeeves is a flexible and friendly tool with mouse operated GUI. Jeeves supports following functions: • Single command programming.• Wild card programming.• Storing and retrieval Customer profile.• Retrieval of existing configuration of the Cosine.

How to program? Step 1Use following command to assign a port for Jeeves. The Jeeves uses this port for data communication with the System: 5901-Code-#*Where,

By default, the COM Port is assigned to Jeeves.

Assigning None to Jeeves means Programming with Jeeves is disabled. Assigning 1, means the SMDR Report Generation assigned to the communication port will be deassigned.

Step 2After the port is assigned to Jeeves, to activate the data transfer between the assigned port and the Jeeves the Start command has to be given explicitly.

Use following command to Start/Abort the data communication between the Jeeves and the assigned port: 5902-Code-#* Where,

The data communication between the Jeeves and Port can be aborted at any instance of time. The Start command has to be issued again for restarting the data communication.

Code Meaning 0 None 1 Communication Port

Code Meaning 0 Abort1 Start


Matrix

Relevant Topic:1. Communication Port 119

=X=X=

Start

Install the Jeeves on a PC with working COM Port

Connect the PC and the Cosine using standard RS232C serial cable (crossed)

Set COM Port parameters in the Jeeves

Set the COM Port parameters on the Cosine

Set the Cosine COM Port for Jeeves application (By default, COM Port is assigned for Jeeves)

Download the existing Cosine configuration on the Jeeves is needed.

Make necessary changes in the configuration parameters

Up load the modified configuration on to the Cosine

Verifying by checking various features on the Cosine

End


Matrix

Programming using Phone Wizard

What's this? • Matrix supports a special mode for quickly programming some of the Basic Features like Setting Current Date, Setting

Current Time, etc. of Cosine. This is called Phone Wizard.• These basic programming parameters and other parameters for advanced programming of features like DID, DISA,

FAX Homing, etc. with default values are also provided in other chapters.

How it works? • Like normal programming method, it will be required to enter the programming mode to start programming. For

allowing Phone Wizard Programming mode, the parameter 'SE Programming' should be allowed from COS (Class of Service).

• Wizard command can be of 2 or 3 digits.• Each Wizard command is terminated by #*. Upon receiving #* the command is decoded further.• Wizard Exit command is "0-#*".

How to program? • To enter programming mode, dial:

1#98-SE Password. By default, Password is '1234'.

The Wizard consists of commands for following parameters: • System Parameters • Extension Parameters • Trunk Parameters

System ParametersFollowing parameters are programmed: • Set Current Date• Set Current Time• Set New SE Password• Set New SA Password

Set Current DateCommand: 27-Date-Month-Year-Day-#*Where,Date is from 01 to 31, Month is from 01 to12, Year is from 05 to 99 (Base year is '2000'. Enter '07' for year '2007').Day is from 1 to 7 (1 = Sunday). For more details, please refer chapter 'Real Time Clock'.

Example: To program the system for today's date and day, say 14-12-2007, dial 27-14-12-07-6-#*

Set Current TimeCommand: 28-Hour-Minute-#*Where,Hour is from 00 to 23.Minute is from 00 to 59.Time has three parameters: hour, minute and seconds. Above command has only two parameters. Third parameter will be taken as '00' whenever new time is programmed. For more details, please refer chapter 'Real Time Clock'.

Example:To program system for time of 17:00 hours, dial 28-1700-#*

Set New SE PasswordCommand: 291-New SE Password-#*Where, SE Password is a 4 digits number string.


Matrix

Valid digits are from 0-9. SE password can not be less than 4 digits. For more details, please refer chapter 'System Engineer (SE) Mode'

Example:To change the SE Password from '1234' to '6789', dial 291-6789-#*

Set New SA PasswordCommand: 292-New SA Password-#*Where,New SA Password is a 4 digits number string.Valid digits are from 0-9. SA password can not be less than 4 digits. For details, please refer chapter 'System Administrator (SA) Mode'.

Example:To change the SA Password from '1111' to '3456', dial 292-3456-#*

Extension ParametersFollowing parameters are programmed: • Class Of Service • Toll Control • Clear All The Features • Flash Timer For Extension • Flexible Number and Load Default Flexible Numbers • Operator Extension

Note:• Commands for all above parameters are applicable for SLT and DKP extension numbers except Flexible Number and

Load Default Flexible Numbers where only SLT flexible numbers can be programmed.

Class of Service (COS)Command: 31-Ext-Day COS Group-Night COS Group-#*Command for All Extensions: 31-*-Day COS Group-Night COS Group-#*Where,Ext is flexible number of the extension. Flexible number is a 4 digit number string. Flexible number can be of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits.Day COS group is from 0 to 14.Night COS Group is from 0 to 14.For details, please refer chapter 'Class of Service (COS)'.

When above chapter is used, separate commands are used to assign Day time COS and Night time COS to a Station.

Example:To assign COS group '4' for Day time and '6' for Night time to the Extension '23' use following command: 31-23-4-6-#*

Toll ControlCommand: 32-Ext-Day AL/DL List-Night AL/DL List-#*Command for All extensions: 32-*-Day AL/DL List-Night AL/DL List-#*Where,Ext is flexible number of the extension. Flexible number is a 4 digit number string. Flexible number can be of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits.Allowed List (AL) is from 0 to 14.Denied List (DL) is from 0 to 14.For details, please refer chapter 'Toll Control'.

Example:To program AL/DL List number 3 for Day time and 4 for Night time for extension '25', dial 32-25-03-04-#*


Matrix

Clear All the FeaturesCommand: 343-Ext-#*Where,Ext is the flexible number of a extension. Flexible number is a 4 digit number string. Flexible number can be of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits. This is same as using Access Code '100'. But this code can be used by a user whereas command '343' can be used by SE only. For details, please refer chapter 'Cancel Station Features'.

Flash Timer for ExtensionCommand: 36-Ext-Flash Timer Count-#*Command for All Extensions: 36-*-Flash Timer Count-#*Where,Ext is the flexible number of an extension. Flexible number is a 4 digit number string. Flexible number can be of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits.Flash Timer Count is from 1 to 9 (Count 1 implies 100ms) i.e Flash Timer Count is 6 then Flash timer is 600ms.For details, please refer chapter 'Flash Timer'.

Example:To program Flash timer of 800ms for Extension 25, dial36-25-8-#*

Flexible Number and Load default Flexible Numbers Command: 37-Software Port No.-Flexible Number-#* Command to load Default Flexible Numbers: 37-*-0-#* Where,Software Port number is from 00-31 (Cosine 64P) 00-11 (Cosine 32P)Flexible number is a 4 digit number string. Flexible number can be of 1, 2, 3 or 4. Two stations can not have the same flexible number.For details, please refer chapter 'Flexible Numbers'.

Example:To assign Software port number 10 for the Flexible number 25, dial 37-10-25-#*

Operator ExtensionCommand: 391-Ext-#*Where,Ext is the flexible number of an extension. Flexible number is a 4 digit number string. Flexible number can be of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits. For details, please refer chapter 'Operator'.

Example:To program extension 25 as an Operator Extension, dial 391-25-#*

Trunk ParametersFollowing parameters are programmed: • Enable/Disable and Dial Type • DID On/Off • Fax Homing On/Off • DISA On/Off • Trunk Landing Destination For Day Mode • Trunk Landing Destination For Night Mode • Fax Homing Destinations • Hunt Timer • Hunting Scheme

Enable/Disable and Dial TypeCommand: 41-Trunk-Enable/Disable Flag-Dial Type-#*Command for All Trunks: 41-*-Enable/Disable Flag-Dial Type-#*Where,Trunk is from 0 to 7 (Cosine64P) 0 to 3 (Cosine32P)Enable/Disable flag:• 0 : Disable• 1 : Enable


Matrix

Dial type can be Pulse or Tone type:• 0 : Pulse• 1 : ToneFor details, please refer chapter 'Trunk Parameters'.

Example:To Enable the trunk-3 and program it for Dialing type as 'Pulse type', dial 41-3-1-0-#*

DID On/OffCommand: 43-Trunk-Day Code-Night Code-#*Where,Trunk is from 0 to 7 (Cosine64P) 0 to 3 (Cosine32P)Day Code/Night Code:• 0 : Disable• 1 : EnableFor details, please refer chapter 'Direct Inward Dialing (DID)'.

Example:To program the Trunk-3 for not allowing DID facility in Day time and allowing only during Night time, dial 43-3-0-1-#*

Fax Homing ON/OFFCommand: 44-Trunk-Day Code-Night Code-#*Where,Trunk is from 0 to 7 (Cosine64P) 0 to 3 (Cosine32P)Day Code/Night Code:• 0 : Disable• 1 : EnableFor more details, please refer chapter 'Fax Homing'.

Example:To enable the Fax Homing feature during day time and night time on a Trunk-2, dial 44-2-1-1-#*

DISA ON/OFFCommand: 45-Trunk-Day Code-Night Code-#*Where,Trunk is from 0 to 7 (Cosine64P) 0 to 3 (Cosine32P)Day Code/Night Code• 0 : Disable• 1 : EnableFor details, please refer chapter 'Direct Inward System Access (DISA)'.

Example:To enable the DISA feature during day time and night time on a Trunk-2, dial 45-2-1-1-#*

Trunk Landing Destination for Day ModeCommand: 47-Trunk-Ext1-Ext2-Ext3-Ext4-Ext5-#*Command for All Trunks: 47-*-Ext1-Ext2-Ext3-Ext4-Ext5-#*Where,Trunk is from 0 to 7 (Cosine64P) 0 to 3 (Cosine32P)Ext1 to Ext5 are the flexible numbers. Flexible number is a 4 digit number string. Flexible number can be of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits. Maximum five destinations can be programmed for one trunk.For details, please refer chapters 'Station Group' and 'Trunk Landing Group'.

Example: To assign extension numbers 21, 22 and 23 as Trunk landing extensions for a Trunk-1 for Day Time, dial 47-1- 21-22-23-#*


Matrix

Trunk Landing Destination for Night ModeCommand: 48-Trunk-Ext1-Ext2-Ext3-Ext4-Ext5-#*Command for All Trunks: 48-*-Ext1-Ext2-Ext3-Ext4-Ext5-#*Where,Trunk is from 0 to 7 (Cosine64P) 0 to 3 (Cosine32P)Ext1 to Ext5 are the flexible numbers. Flexible number is a 4 digit number string. Flexible number can be of 1, 2, 3 or 4.For more details, please refer chapters 'Station Group' and 'Trunk Landing Group'.

Example:To assign Extension numbers 24, 25, as Trunk landing extensions for a Trunk-1 for Night Time, dial 48-1-24-25-#*

Fax Homing DestinationCommand: 49-Trunk-Ext-#*Where,Trunk is from 0 to 7 (Cosine64P) 0 to 3 (Cosine32P).Ext is the flexible number of an extension. Flexible number is a 4 digit number string. Flexible number can be of1, 2, 3 or 4 digits. Only SLT flexible number can be programmed. For more details, please refer chapter 'Fax Homing'.

Example:To assign Extension numbers 24, as Fax Homing Destination for a Trunk-1, Dial 49-1-24-#*

Hunt TimerCommand: 212-Timer-#*Where,Timer is from 01-99 seconds.For details, please refer chapter 'Station Group'.

Notes:• Hunt Timer is defined as the 'Time' for which an Extension rings when a call lands on that station. It is similar to

parameter, 'ring timer'. On expiry of this 'Time', next station of the Station Group assigned to the Trunk will ring.• For example, Maximum five stations can be programmed for one trunk. Now if the CO office gives ring for 90 seconds

and the Hunt Timer programmed is 18 seconds; then all five stations will get ring for 18 seconds each. Refer command '46' for more detail. Default is 18 seconds.

Example:To program the time for Hunt timer as 20 second, dial 212-20-#*

Hunting SchemeCommand: 46-Trunk-Day Hunting Scheme-Night Hunting Scheme-#*Command for All Trunks: 46-*-Day Hunting Scheme-Night Hunting Scheme-#*Where,Trunk is from 0 to 7 (Cosine64P) 0 to 3 (Cosine32P).Hunting Scheme is from 0 to 3.• 0 : Hunting Off• 1 : Round Robin• 2 : Delayed Simultaneous• 3 : Immediate SimultaneousFor details, please refer chapters 'Station Group' and 'Trunk Landing Group'.

Different hunting schemes are explained below:• Hunting Off: The call lands on the programmed extension and only that extension would ring.• Round Robin: The call lands on the programmed extension, rings on that extension for time = hunt timer, then it goes

to next defined extension, again rings there for time = hunt timer and so on. Hence this scheme is called round robin.• Delayed Simultaneous: The call lands on programmed extension, the extension rings for time = hunt timer. Then all

the extensions starts ringing till the call is answered. The call can be answered from any of the ringing extensions.• Immediate Simultaneous: The call lands on programmed extensions and all the extensions start ringing

simultaneously till the call is answered. Any extension can answer the call.


Matrix

Example:To program the system so that the call on trunk-1 lands in round robin fashion on programmed extensions during daytime and lands simultaneously on these extensions during night time, dial 46-1-1-3-#*

=X=X=


Matrix


Raid

What's this?• Without knowledge of the called busy station, you can enter his conversation by using this feature. • The station you raid does not come to know that you have entered in his conversation (programmable) unless you

speak something.

How to use it?

CAUTION!

Raid is a sensitive feature. The System Administrator and the System Engineer should restrict access to this feature. If a user is allowed the access to raid, he should use this responsibly.

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow raid to a user.

You can program the system to indicate you (receive beeps) when a party raids your station. Use the following command to Enable/Disable the beeps at the time of raid: 4002-Code-#* Where,


If the beeps are enabled, every time a party raids your conversation, you hear the beeps.

Important Points:• When user raids a station, a 3-party conference ensues. All the three persons can speak and hear to each other. • Raid is a programmable feature. Refer Class of Service (COS) for details. • A station can be raided if he is in 2-way speech either with a station or with a trunk. In all other cases, raid does not

apply. • If the busy station is programmed with privacy against raid, he cannot be raided. Refer "Privacy" for details. • This feature is disabled for the users of Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America. Users will get error

tone when an attempt is made to use it.


=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial Station. Busy tone 3 Dial 5. Speech.4 Start talking.

Code Meaning 0 Disable 1 Enable

Matrix


Real Time Clock

What's this?Various features and facilities provided by the Cosine use date and time parameters. Such facilities work properly only if the system is set with correct date and time values. These features are: • Alarms• SMDR• Time Zones

The Cosine is equipped with built in Real Time Clock (RTC) circuit. This circuit is to be set once with current date, day and time values. It then updates itself regularly to keep track of the parameters. However, please note that the RTC circuit can drift over a long period. Hence it is recommended to check and reset RTC values at least once every month to correct this drift. Please note that the system RTC takes care of the leap year.

How to program? Use following command to choose the date format type: 1001-Date Format-#* Where,

By default, Date format is DD-MM-YYYY.

Use following command to set date parameters as per date format: 1002-Date Parameter-#* Where,Date Parameters are:Date = 01 to 31 (leading zero must in case of single digit date)Month = 01 to 12 (leading zero must in case of single digit date)Year = 2001 to 9999.

Use following command to set the day of week:1003-Day-#* Where,

Use following command to set time: 1004-Hours-Minutes-Seconds-#* Where,Hours = Hours in 24-hours format in two digits from 00 to 23 (leading zero must).Minutes = Minutes in two digits from 00 to 59 (leading zero must).Seconds = Seconds in two digits from 00 to 59.

Example:Set the system with 1st April 2002, Monday at 9:00 am in DD-MM-YYYY format, dial 1001-1-#*1002-01-04-2002-#*1003-2-#*1004-090000-#*

=X=X=

Date Format Meaning 1 DD-MM-YYYY 2 MM-DD-YYYY

Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Matrix


Region Code

What's this? The Cosine is a versatile system that can operate to suit customer requirements worldwide. There are certain feature access codes and parameter values which are region dependant. The user is required to change the region code as per requirement.

How to program?By default, the system is loaded with the Asian defaults (for all feature access codes and default settings). The user who wants to operate the system in the other regions needs to change the region code accordingly.

Use the following command to select the Region: 5511-Region Code-#* Where,

By default, the Region Code is 2 (Asia).

The selection of the region code does not alter any parameter values of the system. The user now needs to default the system to load the default parameter values to suit the region selected (Note that the default command does not default the region code). For more details please refer the topic 'Default Settings'.

Relevant Topics:1. Call Progress Tones 95 2. Distinctive Rings 179 3. Operator 237 4. Trunk Access Groups 311 5. Abbreviated Dialing 39 6. Default Settings 134

=X=X=

Region Code Meaning 1 Africa 2 Asia 3 Australasia 4 Europe 5 North America 6 South America

Matrix

Remote Programming

What's this? One can program Cosine from any remote location. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) facility of the system allows a remote user to login and use most of the functions of the system. Programming is one of such functions allowed to the remote user. The remote user can program the system using the same commands as used by the normal local station to program the system.

How it works? Following flow chart depicts the process:

How to use it?• Make a DISA call.• On getting DISA Login beeps, enter SE/SA mode as if you are a local station user.• Make programming changes.• Exit SE/SA mode.• Terminate DISA call.• In case none of the trunk lines have DISA facility and it is required to do remote programming, then follow following

steps:• From the remote location, make a call to the system.

Start

Dial log-in as a DISA user remotely. For more details please refer selection DISA.

User is in DISA idle state

User to dial command for entering program mode followed by SE password

Is SE password correct?

Error tone

System gives programming tone

User to dial any programming command

Is the command dialed correct and accepted by the

system?

System gives dial tone

Error tone

Wait for error tone to get over

End

Confirmation tone

Wait for confirmation tone to get over

No

Yes

NoYes

Exit programmode


Matrix

• Ask the person answering the call at the system end to keep you on hold by dialing Flash. When the person at the system end dials 'Flash', you get hold on music.

• The person at the system end dials 1#91-SE Password. On completion of the command, he gets confirmation tone. He can disconnect and carry on with the routine job.

• The person at the remote end gets DISA beeps.• He dials #1 and gets the dial tone.• Now he can program the system from the remote end. He has to dial 1##91-SE Password. He can come out of

the SE mode by dialing '00-#*'. He gets dial tone again. He can call the operator to inform about the completion of programming or terminate the call by dialing #0 twice.

Relevant Topic:1. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 166

=X=X=


Matrix


Room Monitor

What's this?• Room Monitor lets a user to listen to the sounds in a colleague's room or cabin. • A supervisor would like to listen to what is happening in a manufacturing area.

How to use it?

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Room Monitor to a user.

CAUTION!

Room Monitor is a sensitive feature. It can breach the privacy of users. The System Administrator and the System Engineer should restrict access to this feature. If a user is allowed the access to Room Monitor, he should use this responsibly.

Important Points:• Room Monitor can be used from both-SLT and DKP. • The destination station must be a DKP. • This feature will work when the DKP is idle. • Microphone of the destination DKP is activated when the caller uses Room Monitor. But, the speaker is not activated. • One-way speech is established. The caller can listen to the sound in the room but the destination cannot listen the

caller's sound. • Room Monitoring is terminated when the caller disconnects or the called party lifts the handset to dial or the called

party gets a call from any other station. • Room Monitor feature can be used by a station whose priority is higher than the station, which has to be monitored.


=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 101-Station.3 Start Listening.

Matrix

Scheduled Dialing

What's this?• The system can be programmed to dial out a pre-defined number on a trunk at a programmed time.• Eight different numbers can be dialled out at a pre-set time.• This facility is of great use in offices, house, work-place, etc. where people tend to forget locking the Out-dial facility,

long distance dialing facility on their trunk line after making a call. This facility can be used to dial out the locking codes for Out-dial facility, long distance dialing facility, etc. The lock codes for these facilities should be programmed in the system along with the time at which these codes should be dialed out.

How it works? Following flowchart explains how this feature works:

How to program?Step 1: Program a number to be dialed in the Scheduled Dialing table using command 6502.Step 2: Program the trunk to be used to dial the number programmed using command 6503.Step 3: Program the time at which the number is to be dialed using command 6504.Step 4: Default all the parameters of the Scheduled dialing using command 6501. (if required)

On using above commands, a table shown below is formed:

Step 1Use following command to program a number in the scheduled dialing table: 6502-Number Index-Number-#* Where,Number Index is from 1 to 8. (Maximum eight different numbers can be dialed).Number is the number to be dialed. The number can have maximum 16 digits.

Step 2Use following command to program a trunk for the number to be dialed out: 6503-Number Index-Trunk-#* Where, Number Index is from 1 to 8. Trunk is from 01 to 12.

Number Index Number to be dialed Trunk Time 1 1611912112 01 09:00 2 1611912111 02 18:00 : : : : 8 : : :

Start

The system keeps track of timings stored in the scheduled dialing table

Current time = programmed time

System dials out the number stored for the programmed time and disconnects

No

Yes


Matrix

Step 3Use following command to program time at which the number is to be dialed out: 6504-Number Index-HH-MM-#* Where,Number Index is from 1 to 8.HH-MM is 24-hour format.

Step 4Use following command to default all the parameters related to scheduled dialing: 6501-#*

By default:No numbers are programmed in the Scheduled dialing table Trunk = 01Scheduled Time = 00:00

Important Point:• This facility is used to lock the long distance facility on the trunk line.

Relevant Topic:1. Real Time Clock 261

=X=X=


Matrix

Security Dialer

What's this?The Cosine offers a security feature by virtue of which it informs an internal station or an external party (as per the programming) about the emergency. This feature finds its application in case of fire, burglary, etc. A factory manager can program an internal station (Security Station) in working hours/break hours and his residence phone number in non-working hours to get information about the emergency.

How it works?• To accomplish this feature, the Cosine supports a Digital Input Port marked 'DIP'. An Emergency Switch, Output of a

Smoke Detector, Glass Break Detector, Fire Alarm, etc. can be connected as an activator.• Whenever the DIP gets activated, the Cosine considers it to be an emergency condition and places a call as per the

programming. The call can be placed either to an internal station or to an external party. The Cosine can also be programmed to take no action on receiving the instigation from the DIP.

• If the Cosine is programmed to place a call to an internal party, the station (SLT/DKP) on which the call is placed rings for the time equal to the RBT timer.

• If the Cosine is programmed to place a call to an external party, the system dials out a number assigned for Emergency situation. When the called party answers the call, the Cosine delivers a pre-recorded Emergency message. If the called party is busy, the system tries another Emergency number and tries to deliver emergency message. This is repeated for all the three external emergency numbers. (The external emergency numbers are taken from the global directory). If the Emergency message is delivered to all the emergency numbers, and the acknowledgment is obtained this activity is suspended otherwise the system keeps trying all the unserved requests for the programmed number of trials. The system considers the request to be served when the called party answers the call, and gives acknowledgments.

• This feature could be of great help in Banks. When the Banks are raided by the burglars, all the employees of the bank are made standstill. In such a situation, if the cashier presses the Emergency Alarm (which could be placed quite close to the cashier), the burglars would not come to know whereas the system would dial out the Emergency number, which could be of Police, Security Agency and another branch office.

• Likewise, this could be of great help in offices. A smoke detector connected to the DIP gets activated on sensing smoke and in turn calls an internal station. The internal station rings continuously in case of emergency.

Instigation Process Response

Digital Input Port (Sensor,Panic Switch,

etc.)

NoAction

ExternalNumber

SLT/ DKP

SecurityDialer


Matrix

How to program?Step 1: Program a SLT/DKP port when the emergency information is required using the command 6602.Step 2: Program the global memory index for Emergency numbers using the command 6603.Step 3: Program the number of trials for one external number/SLT or DKP using the command 6604.Step 4: Program the time interval between two trials using the command 6605.Step 5: Assign the timetable using the command 6606 and 6607.Step 6: Program the delay dial timer using the command 6608.Step 7: Program the response type various time zones using the command 6611, 6612 and 6613.Step 8: Assign default values for security dialer using command 6601.

End

The system senses an instigation of DIP

Is DIP activation received?

Emergency destination = internal

station or external station

The system dials out the emergency number and decrements the counter for this number by one.

Has called party answered

the call?

PBX checks the counter for the next emergency number

Is current count = maximum

count?

The system stops further retries

The system plays the emergency message to the called party and stops the retries for the last dialed number

Start

The system places the call on the programmed SLT/DKP and decrement the counter for this number by one.

Has the called party answered

the call?

Station rings countinuously

EndThe system terminate the process

End

No

Yes

Internal Station

External Station

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No


Matrix

Step 1Use following command to program a SLT/DKP port to receive the emergency call: 6602-Port Type-Port Number-#* Where,

By default, Port Type is Null.

Note: Only one station can be programmed.

Step 2Use following command to program the external numbers: 6603-Index-Global Memory Index-#* Where,Index is from 1 to 3.Global memory Index is the index of the global directory.

Note: Maximum of three emergency numbers can be programmed. No number is available by default. The external number have to be stored in global directory and the global directory index has to be assigned in the command. Please refer 'Abbreviated Dialing' for more details.

Step 3Use following command to program the number of trials for one external number: 6604-Count-#* Where,Count is 01 to 99.By default, Count is 03.

Step 4Use following command to program the time interval between two trials: 6605-Time Interval-#* Where,Time Interval is 001 to 255By default, Time Interval is 020 seconds.

Step 5Use following command to program the time table: 6606-Timetable-#* Where,Timetable is 0 to 5.By default, Timetable is 1.

Use the following command to assign the timezone if the timetable assigned is 0: 6607-Zone-#* Where,

By default, the Zone is 1.

Step 6Use following command to program the delay dial timer: 6608-Timer-#* Where,Timer is 00 to 99.By default, Delay Dial Timer is 15 sec.

Port Type Meaning Port Number0 Null port 00 1 SLT port 01 to 32 2 DKP port 1 to 8

Zone Meaning 1 Working Hours 2 Break Hours 3 Non Working Hours


Matrix

Delay timer signifies the time after which the system start dialing the number (internal or external) on receipt of instigation at DIP.

Step 7Use following command to program the DIP response for working hours: 6611-Response-#* Where,

Use following command to program the DIP response for break hours: 6612-Response-#* Where,

Use following command to program the DIP response for Non-working hours: 6613-Response-#* Where,

By default, the response for all timezones is NO action.

Step 8Use following command to assign default values to the security dialing parameters: 6601-#*

Example 1:A bank has installed a panic switch alarm to take care of emergency condition. The requirement is that on pressing the panic switch Police Station(100), Hospital(102) and Fire Brigade(101) are called automatically at any time of the day. The Bank wishes the numbers to be tried five times each. The working hours of bank are 10:00AM to 4:00PM, 1:00PM to 1:30PM is lunch Break and 4:01PM to 9:59AM non working hours. (This time table is maintained in timetable 2). The emergency numbers used in this example are with reference to Indian defaults.

Solution:Program the three emergency numbers in the global directory using the Trunk Access Group 7. 2301-11-100-#* 2301-12-102-#* 2301-13-101-#* 2302-11-7-#* 2302-12-7-#* 2302-13-7-#*

Program these numbers as emergency external numbers 6603-1-11-#* 6603-2-12-#* 6603-3-13-#*

Program the trial count as 5. 6604-05-#*

Assign the Timetable as 2. 6605-2-#*

Response Meaning 0 No action 1 Internal Call 2 External Call




Matrix

Assign the emergency response type for all the three timezone as external call. 6611-3-#* 6612-3-#* 6613-3-#*

Example 2:If the above example has to be modified to suit the North American/South American users, the emergency number to be dialed out is 911. The number of trials is 5. The working hours of bank are 10:00AM to 04:00PM, 01:00PM to 01:30PM is lunch break and 04:01PM to 09:59AM non-working hours (This timetable is maintain in timetable 3).Program the emergency number 2301-11-911-#* 2302-11-8-#*

Program the number as emergency external number: 6603-1-11-#*

Program the trial count as 5: 6604-05-#*

Assign the timetable as 3: 6606-3-#*

Assign the emergency response type for all the three timezone as external call: 6611-3-#* 6612-3-#* 6613-3-#*

Important Points:• Only one response type can be selected. This is based on time table hence the user gets maximum flexibility.• If the response type chosen is external number the call is considered served if the called party dials '0' (9 for North

American/South American users) while the message is being played.• The response can be terminated by issuing an acknowledgment via the command 6620-#* (This command can be

issued in SA Mode also). This command is helpful to terminate the response generated by mistake.• This feature works on tone sensing. It is possible that there could be lot of disturbances on the trunk line and tones

may not be sensed properly. In such case, it is possible that the system might consider an immature call as a served request. Hence, it is advisable to install dedicated security devices to ensure 100% security.

• If three emergency numbers are programmed then the system first tries the first number. Then after the programmed time duration, it tries second number. If all three numbers are found busy then system starts a fresh from first number again.

=X=X=


Matrix


Selective Trunk Access

What's this?The station user can access a particular trunk by dialing a code.

How to use it?

• To grab trunk 01, the user should dial '6901'.• To grab trunk 04, the user should dial '6904'.

To grab a trunk of BRI 1, the user should dial 6909 or 6910. Likewise, to grab a trunk of BRI 2, the user should dial 6911 or 6912.

Relevant Topic:1. Trunk Access Groups 311

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 69-Trunk Software Port Number. Dial tone of the trunk.3 Dial desired external number.

Matrix

SLT Parameters

What's this? The SLT port of the Cosine can be programmed for a number of features like Flexible Number, Name, Abbreviated Name, Priority, etc. In addition the SLIC used with each SLT port provides a facility to adjust the AC Impedance of the SLT port.

AC ImpedanceThe SLIC used with each SLT port provides a facility to adjust the AC impedance of the SLT port with the communication equipment connected to it. Mostly, telephone instruments are connected which have nominal characteristics impedance of 600 Ohms. The Cosine provides a facility to connect a communication equipment with AC impedance other than 600 Ohms also.

Use following command to program the AC Impedance for a SLT: 1306-SLT-Code-#* Where,SLT is the Software Port Number of the SLT from 01 to 32.

By default, AC Impedance for SLT is 1.

If the AC Impedance is programmed then it is reflected only after the system is switched OFF and turned ON.

Use the following command to set the AC impedance of all the SLTs: 1306-**-Code-#*

Default Settings After programming, the SLT port can be set to default values. Use following command to default settings of SLT Parameters: 1301-SLT-#* Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT user from 01 to 32.

On giving this command, all the features programmed for the software port number of the SLT are assigned default values.

Copy Parameters Use following command to copy the programmable parameters of one SLT to other SLT: 1302-Source SLT-Destination SLT-#*

On issuing this command the following parameters from the source SLT are copied to the destination SLT: • Dynamic Allowed/Denied Lists • Toll Control Allowed/Denied Lists • COS Group • TAG • CPU Group • Flash timer • CDC • Priority • Time Table • DND List • CLI Type • CLI Digit Padding Length • AC Impedance • Signal for Answer Supervision • Signal for Disconnect Supervision • Open Loop Disconnect Timer

Code Meaning 1 600 Ohms 2 900 Ohms 3 Complex (350 Ohms in series with (0.21µF // 1000 Ohms)


Matrix

Timer of Relevance: Internal Digit-Digit Wait Timer: While dialing a DKP or a SLT, the system waits for some time between the digits. This timer is called Internal Digit-Digit Wait Timer. During this time the user does not hear any tone. If the user does not dial another digit during this time then the system gives error tone. Command: 5220-Seconds-#* Range: 001 to 255 seconds. Default: 007 seconds.This command can be executed from the SA Mode also.

=X=X=


Matrix

Software Port and Hardware ID

What's this?The Cosine supports various types of ports as under:

The Cosine treats a port as an entity and processes it based on the type of the port and the programmed attributes.

Software PortThe Cosine takes a software port as fundamental entity. It processes the software port. Hardware ID and the access code (flexible number in case of station and trunk access code in case of trunk) are just two attributes of a software port and hence they are not used anywhere in processing and programming.

Software ports are always numbered from 1 to the maximum ports supported for the port type. Following table lists this range for each port type. Port Type Max. Ports Supported Port Number Range

SLT 32 01-32 DKP 8 1-8 Trunk 12 01-12

Port

StationPort

TrunkPort

SLT DKP Analog BRI

Software Port

Type of PortSLTDKPTrunkBRI

Attributes of PortAccess CodeCOS GroupToll Control ListsDID etc.

Hardware Port

Port Number


Matrix

Each type of software port has different attributes. The System Engineer (SE) programs these attributes at the time of installing the Cosine. For example, a Cosine system of configuration 4x4x16 (4 trunks, 4 DKPs and 16 SLTs) is to be installed.

Since 4 trunks are connected, the software ports used for trunks will be 01-04. A trunk software port has following attributes: • Hardware ID.• Trunk Enabled/Disabled. • Dial Type (Pulse/Tone).• Trunk Name. • Priority. • Flash Timer.• DISA Enabled/Disabled. • DID Enabled/Disabled.

Since 4 DKPs are connected, the software ports used for DKPs will be 1-4. Each DKP software port has following attributes: • Hardware ID.• Access Code (Flexible Number).• Class of Service (COS) Group.• Toll Control Group.• Time Table.• Call Pick Up (CPU) Group.

Since 16 SLTs are connected, the software ports used for SLTs will be 01-16. Each SLT software port has following attributes: • Hardware ID.• Access Code (Flexible Number).• Class of Service (COS) Group. • Toll Control Group.• Time Table.• Call Pick Up (CPU) Group.• Priority.• Flash Timer.• Trunk Access Group.

Please note:• Hardware ID is an attribute of a software port. Hence, all the programming is done for the software port and not for the

hardware ID. Accordingly, the software port number is used for all the programming.• An access code is just a flexible number assigned to the software port. Programming is for the software port and not

for the Access Code (Flexible Number). Accordingly, the software port number is used for all the programming. • The System Engineer allocates software port numbers to different users. This allocation is flexible and any software

port number can be assumed for any user. Hardware ID is not relevant at this stage. Hardware ID can be programmed for a software port any time. Further, it can be changed any time in case of hardware failure of a port.

Following example elaborates this point.

Please take note of following points:• Software port numbers start from 01/1 for all different port types.• Order is not important while allocating software port numbers.

Name Position Port Type Software Port Used Anil Sharma Managing Director DKP 1 Nikhil Rao VP (Marketing) DKP 2 Revathi Thyagarajan VP (Finance) DKP 3 Anand Chakraborty Manager (HRD) SLT 01 Pankaj Shah Accountant SLT 03 Ravi Tandon Sales Executive SLT 02 Conference Room --- DKP 4 Canteen --- SLT 04 Leased Line --- Trunk 01


Matrix

Hardware IDThe hardware ID of a software port decides where the port is physically located. Please refer table given for MDF cable to find hardware port in the topic, "Configuring the System". On first power ON, all the software ports are assigned hardware ports as per following table:

Assigning hardware ID to a SLT Use following command to assign hardware ID to a SLT software port: 1201-SLT-Hardware ID-#* Where, SLT = Software port number of SLT from 01 to 32. Hardware ID is from 00 to 32.

Assigning hardware ID to a DKP Use following command to assign hardware ID to a DKP software port: 1202-DKP-Hardware ID-#* Where, DKP = Software port number of DKP from 1 to 8. Hardware ID is from 0 to 8.

Assigning hardware ID to a Trunk Use following command to assign hardware ID to a Trunk software port: 1203-Trunk-Hardware ID-#* Where, Trunk = Software port number of Trunk from 01 to 08. Hardware ID is from 00 to 08.

Assigning '00' as hardware port ID to a SLT software port or Trunk and '0' as hardware port ID to a DKP hardware port is equivalent to deassigning the Hardware port.

Example 1:Program for following constraints: • SLT Software Port No.: 01 • Hardware ID: 03

Dial 1201-01-03-#*

Example 2:Program hardware port ID-25 for a SLT software port number 24. 1201-24-25-#*

Important Point:• On assigning a new Hardware ID to a port the system has to be reset to reflect the new change.

Relevant Topic:1. Configuring the System 18

=X=X=

SLT DKP TrunkS/w H/w S/w H/w S/w H/w 01 01 1 1 01 01 02 02 2 2 : : : : : : : : : : 8 8 : : : : 08 08

32 32


Matrix

Station Group

What's this? Station group is a group of stations. The destinations in this group can be used as destinations for incoming call or destinations for department call.

A station group can be programmed as Trunk Landing Group or as department group. Same station group can also be assigned for all the two features viz. Trunk Landing and Department Call.

How it works?• Maximum 16 station groups can be formed.• Maximum 8 stations can be programmed in each station group.• The time for which each station rings can be programmed.• The sequence in which various stations in the group should ring can be arranged.• The number of stations that should ring at a time can be programmed. All the stations can be programmed to ring

simultaneously.• Once a station receives a ring, it can be set to ring continuously till the call matures. Such a station continues ringing

even when other stations of the group are hunted. This is called "Continuous" ringing and can be programmed for each station.

• If the call is not answered even after hunting the last station, the system will loop back and start from the first station once again till the ring from the exchange expires.

• A fresh call can start hunting either from the first station of the group or from the station where the previous call was terminated. This method is called Rotation Method and can be set for each group. If rotation method is enabled, the fresh call will land on the destination next to the one, which received the last call. This would enable equal distribution of incoming calls to all the destinations within the group. If the rotation method is disabled, the fresh call will always land on first station of the station group.

• Any station can answer the call using call pick up feature.• Any station group can be programmed as Department group.• Any station group can be programmed as Trunk Landing Group.

How to program?Step 1: Decide the number of station groups to be formed, decide the sequence in which the stations should be

arranged. Program these parameters using command 4502.Step 2: Define ring timer for which each station should ring using command 4503.Step 3: Decide whether the station should get continuous ring and program it using command 4504.Step 4: Program the rotation type for the station group using command 4505.Step 5: It is possible to default a station group using command 4501.Step 6: It is possible to program null in all index of a station group using command 4510.

Each group entry in the station group table looks like:Dest1 ….. Dest8

Member Number Ring Timer Continuous Ring Rotation Method ON or OFF

StationGroup

TrunkLandingGroup

DepartmentCall


Matrix

Step 1Use following command to program station group: 4502-Station Groups-Destination Index-Station Type-Station-#* Where, Station Group is from 01 to 16. Destination Index is from 1 to 8.

Use following command to program null at an index (Clear an index) in a station group: 4502-Station Group-Destination Index-0-00-#*

Use following command to program same station at the same index in all station groups: 4502-**-Destination Index-Station Type-Station-#*

Step 2Use following command to program the time for which each station in the group should ring: 4503-Station Group-Destination Index-Ring Timer-#*Where, Station Group is from 01 to 16. Destination Index is from 1 to 8. Timer is in seconds from 000 to 255.By default, Timer value is 015 seconds.

Use following command to program the same ring timer for destination index in all the station groups: 4503-**-Destination Index-Ring Timer-#*

Step 3Use following command to program continuous or non-continuous ring for a destination in the group: 4504-Station Group-Destination Index-Continuous Ring Flag-#* Where, Station group is from 01 to 16. Destination Index is from 1 to 8.

By default, the Continuous Ring Flag is '0' for users of Asia, and '1' for users of Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America.

Use following command to program continuous or non-continuous ring at the same destination index in all the station groups: 4504-**-Destination Index-Continuous Ring Flag-#*

Step 4Use following command to program rotation method for a station group: 4505-Station Group-Rotation Method-#* Where, Station group is from 01 to 16.

By default, the Rotation Method is '0' for users of Asia, and '1' for users of Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America.

Use following command to program rotation method for all the station groups: 4505-**-Rotation Method-#*

Station Type Meaning Station0 NULL 00 1 SLT 01-32 2 DKP 1-8

Continuous Ring Flag Meaning 0 The station rings for the ring timer 1 The station rings till the call matures

Rotation Method Meaning 0 Fresh call lands on the first station within the group 1 Fresh call lands following last landing destination within the group


Matrix

Step 5Use following command to default a station group: 4501-Station Group-#* Where,Station group is from 01 to 16.

Default value of Station Groups for Asia is as follows:Station Groups

Member Number Rotation Method1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Group 01 Members SLT-01 SLT-02 SLT-03 SLT-04 SLT-05 SLT-06 SLT-07 SLT-08 OFF Ring Timer 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 Continuous Ring Flag Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off


Group 03 Members SLT-01 SLT-02 SLT-03 SLT-04 SLT-05 SLT-06 SLT-07 SLT-08 OFF Ring Timer 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 015 Continuous Ring Flag OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF














Matrix

Default value of Station Groups for Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America is as follows:


StationGroups

Member Number RotationMethod1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Group 01 Members SLT-01 SLT-02 SLT-03 SLT-04 SLT-05 SLT-06 SLT-07 SLT-08 ON Ring Timer 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 Continuous Ring Flag ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON














Station Groups

Member Number Rotation Method1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


Matrix

Step 6Use following command to program null in all index of a station group: 4510-Station Group-#* Where,Station group is from 01 to 16.

Relevant Topics:1. Trunk Landing Group 317 2. Department Call 136

=X=X=



StationGroups

Member Number RotationMethod1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


Matrix


Station Message Detail Recording

What's this?The Cosine can record the details of incoming (IC) and outgoing (OG) calls made from/to all the stations. This is called Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR).The Cosine can send the details of these calls on communication ports or the printer port. These can be printed either immediately on completion of the call or afterwards when desired.

Following diagram shows the logic in which the calls are stored and printed.

The Cosine offers facility to store the call details as per the requirement and even print the call as per the requirement. All the parameters like Incoming calls-Storage filters, Incoming calls-Printing filters, Outgoing Calls Storage filters and Outgoing Call-Printing filters, etc. programmed for Incoming Calls and Outgoing Calls can be printed in the form of a report.

SMDR report for default parameters is attached on next page for ready reference.

Please refer 'Station Message Detail Recording-Incoming' and 'Station Message Detail Recording-Outgoing' for more details.

Relevant Topics:1. Station Message Detail Recording-Incoming 285 2. Station Message Detail Recording-Outgoing 290

=X=X=

SMDR for Incoming Call

Storage(As per filters)

ReportGeneration

Online Mode

Offline Mode(As per filters)

SMDR Details

SMDR for Outgoing Call

Storage(As per filters)

ReportGeneration

Online Mode

Offline Mode(As per filters)

Matrix

Station Message Detail Recording-IncomingIncoming calls can be stored and printed in a desired way.

Incoming calls-Storage Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) facility is used to keep track of the incoming calls received by the Cosine. SMDR is useful in monitoring and managing the incoming traffic in more effective manner. The Cosine can keep log of each call received by it in the SMDR buffer. The buffers for the incoming calls and outgoing calls are different. Each incoming call is stored in the form of a record in the buffer. A maximum of 500 records can be stored. The SA or SE can generate the reports (in desired form and way) of these calls on a printer or on the communication port. This data can be used for future analysis and storage.

A record has following fields:• Trunk.• Date and time of the call.• Station to which the call was routed.• Time taken to answer the call.• Speech duration.• Hold duration in seconds.• Remarks.

The information of a single incoming call can be stored as one or more records in the buffer. When an Incoming call is transferred on another station, a new entry will be made in the SMDR buffer. This is called 'Call Splitting'. By default, the Call Splitting is ON.

The SMDR buffer data is maintained even during power failures.It is advisable to take frequent printouts of the calls to avoid accidental loss of the data.

Maximum 500 records can be stored in the SMDR IC buffer. Once the SMDR buffer is full, the next incoming call is stored in place of the oldest call in the SMDR IC buffer. This is known as First In First Out (FIFO) logic. The SA or SE can clear the SMDR IC buffer using appropriate command and password from the admin mode.

CommandsMaster command: This command enables/disables the storage of incoming calls depending upon the storage filters set. Use following command to set SMDR storage mode:3601-Storage Flag-#* Where,

Filter commands: These commands enable the user to select the type of calls to be stored viz. All calls, Trunk wise calls, Un-answered calls, DID calls, etc.

Where, MM is Minutes which ranges from 00-59. SS is seconds which ranges from 00-59.

Storage Flag Meaning 0 Do not store the incoming calls 1 Store the incoming calls

Filter Command Store Normal Calls 3602-Flag-#* Store DID Calls 3603-Flag-#* Store Unanswered Calls 3604-Flag-#* Store DID Unanswered Calls 3605-Flag-#* Store DISA Calls 3606-Flag-#* Store Calls on a trunk 3610-Trunk-Flag-#* Store Calls on all trunks 3610-**-Flag-#* Store Calls-Speech Duration 3611-MM-SS-#* Store Calls-Unanswered Duration 3612-MM-SS-#* Store Calls-Hold Duration 3613-MM-SS-#*


Matrix

Use following command to default the incoming call storage filters: 3620-#* By default,All incoming calls will be storedAll the calls on all the trunks will be storedThe speech duration is set to 00:00.The unanswered duration is set to 00:00.The Hold Duration is set to 00:00.

Use following command to clear SMDR-Incoming buffer: 3625-Reverse SE Password-#*

Incoming Calls-Printing Each SMDR record has following parameters or fields: • Serial Number.• Calling Number (optional).• Trunk port number on which the call was received.• Station Number who received the call.• Date on which the call is received.• Time when the call arrived.• Call Answer Duration.• Call Hold Duration.• Call Speech Duration.• Remark.

The Cosine can generate SMDR reports on • Printer • Computer

Any standard printer can be connected to the system via the Centronics parallel port of the system. Standard A4 size paper is assumed with 60 lines x 80 characters per page. Header and footer are printed on every page of the report. Maximum 40 records are printed on a page. The reports are transferred on a computer through the RS232C (COM) port of the Cosine. ASCII format is used for this.

Report Generation• The Cosine can generate reports Online (as and when the call is made provided a printer or a computer is connected)

or Offline (When required). The calls are stored in the SMDR buffer in both cases. Basically for report generation, the system must be assigned a Destination Port.

• Calls will get printed in online and offline report for both the following cases:• Number is not programmed in Allowed List or Denied List.• Number is programmed in both lists.

OnlineStep 1: Program the destination port for online printing. Step 2: The reports of the outgoing calls are generated as and when the call is made adhering to the storage filters set.

Use following command to assign a destination port for online printing: 3650-Code-#* Where,

By default, the port assigned is None. This means the Online printing is disabled.* Assigning the printer port for online printing is not possible in Cosine-32P.

Flag Meaning 0 Don't Store 1 Store

Code Meaning 0 None 1 Communication Port 2 Printer Port *


Matrix

• On assigning the communication port or the printer port as the destination port, the report generation is directed to the assigned port after the incoming call is completed.

• If Jeeves is assigned to the Communication port, then assigning the process offline report generation to the communication port is logically incorrect. Since Jeeves has more priority than offline report generation, offline report will not be generated. So care should be taken by the SE not to overlap the assignment of same port to different processes.

OfflineStep 1: Assign the port for report generation. Step 2: Program the filters as per the need.

Step 1Use following command to assign a destination port for offline printing: 3655-Code-#*Where,

By default, the port assigned is None. This means the Offline printing is disabled. * Assigning the printer port for offline printing is not possible in Cosine-32P.

• On assigning the communication port or the printer port as the destination port, the report generation is directed to the port assigned.

• If Jeeves is assigned to the Communication port, then assigning the process offline report generation to the communication port is logically incorrect. Since Jeeves has more priority than offline report generation, offline report will not be generated. So care should be taken by the SE not to overlap the assignment of same port to different processes.

Step 2Various filters can be used to generate a customized report. These commands enable the user to select the type of call reports generated viz. Normal calls, DID calls, Unanswered calls, Long Speech Duration calls. It is also possible to generate call reports for a range of SLT's, DKP's, Trunks etc. A summary of the report is printed at the end of each report.

Where, MM is Minutes which ranges from 00-59. SS is Seconds which ranges from 00-59. Allowed List is 00-15.

Use following command to default the report generation filters: 3680-#*


Filter Command Normal calls 3662-Flag-#* DID Calls 3663-Flag-#* Unanswered Calls 3664-Flag-#* DID Unanswered Calls 3665-Flag-#* DISA Calls 3666-Flag-#* Calls Unanswered for a duration 3672-MM-SS-#* Calls With a Particular Speech Duration 3671-MM-SS-#* Calls put on Hold for a particular Duration 3673-MM-SS-#* Call report for a range of SLT's 3674-SLT-SLT-#* Call report for a range of DKP's 3675-DKP-DKP-#* Call report for a range of TRK's 3676-TRK-TRK-#* Calls between two specific dates 3677-Date-Date-#* Calls between a specific time 3678-Time-Time-#* Calls by specific numbers 3679-Allowed List-#*


Matrix

By default, The speech duration is set to 00:00.The unanswered duration is set to 00:00.The Hold Duration is set to 00:00.The SLT's range is 00-32.The DKP's range is 0-8.The Trunk range is 01-12.The Date range is the date the system was last defaulted (5501-Reverse SE Password-#*) to Current Date.The Time range is 00:00-23:59.The Allowed List assigned is 00. (All numbers)

In the command 3674 if the SLT range is 00 to 00 then SLT details is not reflected in the reports.In the command 3675 if the DKP range is 0 to 0 then DKP details is not reflected in the reports.

The Cosine also supports two modes of Offline report generation. Manual: The Reports are generated on giving the Start command. Scheduled: The report generation can be scheduled to be generated Daily, Weekly or Monthly.

Print commands: Once the port is assigned and the filters are set, the Cosine is ready to generate the reports.

Manual Report Generation: An explicit start command has to be issued to initiate the report generation.Use following command to Start/Abort report generation: 3656-Code-#* Where,

Once the start command is issued, the report generation stops only after the complete report based on the filters set is generated. Cosine provides a facility to abort the report generation midway (3656-0-#*). Once the report generation is aborted, then it has to be explicitly started (3656-1-#*).

The Scheduled Report Generation: Can be programmed to start automatically at a particular time (Daily), or at a particular time on a particular day of the week (Weekly) or at a particular time on a particular date of a month (Monthly). Once these parameters are programmed, and the report generation is enabled, there is no need of any initiation command. Daily Reports Use following command to program the time for Daily Scheduled reports: 3692-HH-MM-#* Where, HH and MM is in 24 hour format.By default, HH:MM is 18:00.

Use following command to enable/disable the generation of Daily reports: 3691-Flag-#*Where,

By default, the generation of Daily Scheduled reports is disabled.

Weekly Reports Use following command to program the day and time for Weekly Scheduled reports: 3694-Day-HH-MM-#* Where,HH and MM is in 24 hour format.Day is from 1 to 7 (1 is Sunday, 2 is Monday ……… and 7 is Saturday).By default, HH:MM is 10:10 and Day is 1.

Use following command to Enable/Disable the generation of Weekly reports: 3693-Flag-#*

Code Meaning 0 Abort 1 Start



Matrix

Where,

By default, the generation of Weekly scheduled reports is disabled.

Monthly Reports Use following command to program the date and time for Monthly scheduled reports: 3696-Date-HH-MM-#* Where,HH and MM is in 24 hour format.Date is from 01 to 31.By default, HH:MM is 10:10 and Date is 01.

Use following command to Enable/Disable the generation of Monthly reports: 3695-Flag-#*Where,

By default, the generation of Monthly scheduled reports is disabled.

The scheduling of Daily, Weekly and Monthly reports can be executed from SA mode also.

Cosine provides a facility to abort the scheduled report generation midway (3656-0-#*). This aborts the current report generation but does not affect any other scheduled report generation. The abortion of a report does not affect its consecutive schedule. That is if a daily report is aborted on Monday, it does not affect the report generation schedule of Tuesday.

Relevant Topics:1. Station Message Detail Recording 284 2. Communication Port 119 3. Printer Port 244

=X=X=



SMDR INCOMING CALLS REPORT AS ON 01-01-2008(Tue) AT 12:12 Slt:01-32 Dkp:1-8 Trk:01-12 Date: 01-01-2008 to 01-01-2008 Time: 00:00-23:59 Call Type-> Normal: Y, DID: Y, UnAnswered: Y, DIDUnAnswered: Y, DISA: Y Timers-> Answer = 00:00 Hold = 00:00 Speech = 00:00 Allowed List : 00 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- SR NUMBER TRK STN DATE TIME ANSWER HOLD SPEECH REM ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 01 201 01-01-2008 11:35 00:00:14 00:00:00 00:00:00 N 2 301 01 01-01-2008 11:35 00:00:10 00:00:00 00:00:00 U 3 301000000 01 01-01-2008 11:36 00:00:11 00:00:00 00:00:00 U 4 301000000 01 307 01-01-2008 11:38 00:00:07 00:00:00 00:00:05 N 5 301000000 01 201 01-01-2008 11:39 00:00:10 00:00:00 00:00:07 N 6 10 01-01-2008 11:59 00:00:04 00:00:00 00:00:00 U 7 10 01-01-2008 11:59 00:00:08 00:00:00 00:00:00 U 8 10 01-01-2008 12:00 00:00:07 00:00:00 00:00:00 U 9 10 01-01-2008 12:00 00:00:08 00:00:00 00:00:00 U ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total:- Calls: 9 Ans: 0000:01:19 Speech: 0000:00:12 Hold: 0000:00:00 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- N: NORMAL, D: DID, U: UNANSWERED, DU: DIDUNANSWERED, I: DISA ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- MATRIX COSINE64P V5R1 Page:01


Matrix

Station Message Detail Recording-Outgoing

Outgoing calls can be stored and printed in a desired way.

Outgoing Calls-StorageStation message detail/recording facility is used to keep records of calls made from the system. SMDR is useful in monitoring and controlling the cost of telephone calls. The Cosine can keep track of each call made by any station. Each call is stored in form of a record in the SMDR buffer. One outgoing call occupies one record space in the SMDR buffer. The SMDR buffer data is maintained even during power failures. A maximum of 500 records can be stored.

It is advisable to take frequent printouts of the calls to avoid inadvertent or accidental loss of the SMDR records. Maximum 500 records can be stored in the SMDR buffer. Once the SMDR buffer is full, the next call is stored in place of the oldest call in the SMDR buffer. This is known as First In First Out (FIFO) logic.

The SMDR parameters report shows the number of SMDR records in the buffer. The SA or SE can clear the SMDR-OG buffer by using appropriate password from the admin mode. The System Administrator (SA) or the System Engineer (SE) can print these calls on a printer. The SA or SE can even transfer this data on a computer for storage or further analysis.

Each outgoing call is stored with following fields: • Station who made the call • Trunk line port used for the call • Number dialed (16 digits) • Date and time when the call matured • Duration of the call in seconds • Call type (Normal, DISA, ECF, etc.)

In case of a call transfer from one station to another station, the system stores two calls with same number but different duration for both the stations. This is called 'Call Splitting'. If call splitting mode is kept on, the cost of the call as per the duration of the call will be added to both the stations.

CommandsMaster command: This command enables/disables the storage of OG calls depending upon the filters set.

Use following command to set SMDR storage flag:3701-Storage Flag-#* Where,

Filter commands: These commands enables the user to select the type of calls to be stored viz. trunk wise, destination number wise, duration wise or cost wise.

Trunk wiseUse following command to store outgoing calls made on particular trunk: 3702-Trunk-Storage Flag-#* Where,Trunk is the software port number from 01 to 12.

Use following command to store outgoing calls made on all trunks: 3702-**-Storage Flag-#*

Destination WiseIt is possible to store outgoing calls selectively depending on the destination numbers. The Cosine supports this feature in association with Allowed and Denied Lists. An outgoing call will be stored only if the number matches with an entry in the Allowed list. Let the requirement be that all the long distance calls (that start with '0') except to City A (area code 022)

Storage Flag Meaning 0 Do not store the outgoing calls 1 Store the outgoing calls

Storage Flag Meaning 0 Do not store the outgoing calls 1 Store the outgoing calls


Matrix

are to be stored. To meet this need string '0' has to be stored in the Allowed List and string '022' in the denied list. When a call is made to City A, the Cosine as a routine searches the Allowed list and then the Denied list. Since the best fit is found in Denied list the call is not stored.

Use following command to assign an allowed list containing numbers for call storage: 3703-Allowed List-#* Where,Allowed List is 01 to 15.By default, Allowed List assigned is 01.

Use following command to assign a denied list containing numbers for call storage: 3704-Denied List-#* Where,Denied List is 01 to 15.By default, Denied List assigned is 15.

Duration wiseSometimes it is required to filter out the calls of small durations. Use following command to set the filter of call duration: 3705-Minutes-Seconds-#* Where, Minutes is from 00 to 59. Seconds is from 00 to 59.By default, Minutes is 00 and Seconds is 00.

Use following command to default the outgoing call storage filters: 3710-#*By default,All outgoing calls will be stored.All the calls on all the trunks will be stored.The duration is set to 00 minute and 00 sec.

Supportive commands:Use following command to set the call splitting flag: 3711-Call Splitting Flag-#* Where,

By default, Splitting is ON.

Use following command to set the originating flag: 3712-Originating Flag-#* Where,

By default, the flag is ON and the calls are charged for the originating station.

Use following command to clear SMDR-Outgoing buffer: 3725-Reverse SE Password-#*

Outgoing Calls-Printing Each SMDR record has following parameters or fields: • Serial Number • Calling Number (optional) • Trunk port number on which the call was received • Station Number who received the call • Date on which the call is received • Time when the call arrived • Call Answer Duration

Call Splitting Flag Meaning 0 Splitting OFF 1 Splitting ON

Originating Flag Meaning 0 OFF 1 ON


Matrix

• Call Hold Duration • Call Speech Duration • Remark

The Cosine can generate SMDR reports on: • Printer • Computer

Any standard printer can be connected to the system via the centronics parallel port of the system. Standard A4 size paper is assumed with 60 lines x 80 characters per page. Header and Footer are printed on every page of the report. Maximum 40 records are printed on a page. The reports are transferred on a computer through the RS232C (COM) port of the Cosine. ASCII format is used for this. Report Generation • The Cosine can generate these reports On-line (as and when the call is completed provided a printer or a computer is

connected) or Off-line (when required). The calls are stored in the SMDR buffer in both cases. Basically for Report generation the system must be assigned a destination port.

• Calls will get printed in Online and offline report for both the following cases:• Number is not programmed in allowed list or denied list.• Number is programmed in both lists.

On-Line Step 1: Program the destination port for On-line printing.Step 2: The reports of the outgoing calls are generated as and when the incoming call is completed adhering to the

storage filters set.

Use following command to assign a destination port for On-line printing: 3750-Code-#* Where,

By default, the port assigned is None. This means the On-line printing is disabled. * Assigning the printer port for on-line printing is not possible in Cosine-32P.

• On assigning the communication port or the printer port as the destination port the report generation is directed to the assigned port as and when an incoming call is completed.

• If Jeeves is assigned to the Communication port, then assigning the process of offline report generation to the communication port is logically incorrect. Since Jeeves has more priority than offline report generation, offline report will not be generated. So care should be taken by the SE not to overlap the assignment of same port to different processes.

Off-lineStep 1: Assign the port for report generation.Step 2: Program the filters as per the need.

Step 1Use following command to assign a destination port for Off-line printing: 3755-Code-#* Where,

By default, the port assigned is None. This means the Off-line printing is disabled. * Assigning the printer port for off-line printing is not possible in Cosine-32P.

• On assigning the communication port or the printer port as the destination port when the report generation is desired the reports are directed to the port assigned.




Matrix

• If Jeeves is assigned to the Communication port, then assigning the process of offline report generation to the communication port is logically incorrect. Since Jeeves has more priority than offline report generation, offline report will not be generated. So care should be taken by the SE not to overlap the assignment of same port to different processes.

Step 2Various filters can be used to generate a report. These commands enable the user to select the type of call reports generated. It is also possible to generate call reports for a range of SLT's, DKP's, Trunks etc. A summary of the report is printed at the end of each report.

Filter Command

Where,MM is Minutes which ranges from 00:59.SS is Seconds which ranges from 00:59.Allowed List is from 00 to 15.

Use following command to default the report generation filters:3780-#*By default,The SLT's range is 01-32.The DKP's range is 1-8.The Trunk range is 01-12.The Date range is the date the system was last defaulted (5501-Reverse SE Password-#*) to Current Date.The Time range is 00:00-23:59.The Allowed list is 00. (All numbers)In the command 3761 if the SLT range is 00 to 00 then SLT details is not reflected in the reports.In the command 3762 if the DKP range is 0 to 0 then DKP details is not reflected in the reports.

The Cosine also supports two modes of off-line report generation.Manual: The Reports are generated on giving the Start command. Scheduled: The reports can be programmed to be generated automatically Daily, Weekly or Monthly.

Print commands: Once the port is assigned and the filters are set, Cosine is ready to generate the reports as and when desired.

Manual report generation requires an explicit Start command to initiate report generation. Use following command to Start/Abort report generation: 3756-Code-#* Where,

Once the Start command is issued the report generation stops only after the complete report generation according to the filters set. Cosine provides a facility to abort the report generation midway (3756-0-#*). Once the report generation is aborted then it has to explicitly started (3756-1-#*).

Scheduled report generation starts automatically at a particular time (daily), or at a particular time on a particular day of the week (weekly) or at a particular time on a particular date of a month (monthly). Once these parameters are programmed and printing is enabled the report generation is automated and does not require any initiation command.

Daily Reports Use following command to program the time for Daily scheduled reports:

Call report for a range of SLT's 3761-SLT-SLT-#* Call report for a range of DKP's 3762-DKP-DKP-#* Call report for a range of TRK's 3763-TRK-TRK-#* Calls between two specific dates 3764-Date-Date-#* Calls between a specific time 3765-Time-Time-#* Calls by a specific Number 3766-Allowed List-#* Calls lengthier than a fixed Duration 3767-MM-SS-#*

Code Meaning 0 Abort 1 Start


Matrix

3792-HH-MM-#* Where, HH and MM is in 24 hour format. By default, HH:MM is 18:00

Use following command to enable/disable the generation of Daily reports: 3791-Flag-#* Where,

By default, the generation of daily scheduled reports is disabled.

Weekly Reports Use following command to program the day and time for Weekly scheduled reports: 3794-Day-HH-MM-#* Where,HH and MM is in 24 hour format.Day is from 1 to 7 (1 is Sunday, 2 is Monday ……… and 7 is Saturday).By default, HH:MM is 10:10 and Day is 1.

Use following command to Enable/Disable the generation of Weekly reports: 3793-Flag-#* Where,

By default, the generation of Weekly scheduled reports is disabled.

Monthly Reports Use following command to program the date and time for Monthly scheduled reports: 3796-Date-HH-MM-#* Where,HH and MM is in 24 hour format.Date is from 01 to 31.By Default, HH:MM is 10:10 and Date is 01.

Use following command to enable/disable the generation of Monthly reports: 3795-Flag-#* Where,

By default, the generation of Monthly scheduled reports is disabled.

The scheduling of Daily, Weekly and Monthly reports can be executed from SA mode also.

Cosine provides a facility to abort the scheduled report generation midway (3756-0). This aborts the current report generation but does not affect any other schedule. The abortion of report does not affect its consecutive schedule. That is, if a daily report is aborted on Monday, it does not affect the report generation of Tuesday.

Relevant Topics:1. Station Message Detail Recording 284 2. Communication Port 119 3. Printer Port 244





Matrix

=X=X=

SMDR OUTGOING CALLS REPORT AS ON 01-01-2008(Tue) AT 12:11 Slt: 01-32 Dkp: 1-8 Trk: 01-12 Time: 00:00 - 23:59 Date:01-01-2005 to 01-01-2005 Duration = 00:00 Allowed List : 00 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- SR STN TRK NUMBER DATE TIME DUR REM ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 301 01 25896325 01-01-2008 11:32 00:01:21 N 2 301 01 25896325 01-01-2008 11:34 00:00:37 N 3 307 02 1234567890 01-01-2008 11:35 00:00:31 N 4 301 01 201 01-01-2008 11:42 00:00:14 A 5 301 01 307 01-01-2008 11:47 00:00:01 N 6 301 01 201 01-01-2008 11:47 00:00:02 N 7 307 01 201 01-01-2008 11:47 00:00:04 N 8 301 01 205 01-01-2008 11:48 00:00:05 N 9 206 01 307 01-01-2008 11:49 00:00:05 N 10 301 01 201 01-01-2008 11:50 00:00:21 N 11 301 01 201 01-01-2008 11:50 00:00:56 N 12 307 01 201 01-01-2008 11:52 00:00:17 N 13 307 05 258596 01-01-2008 11:53 00:00:28 N 14 301 05 258596 01-01-2008 11:53 00:00:04 N 15 301 01 201 01-01-2008 11:56 00:00:05 A 16 301 01 307 01-01-2008 11:57 00:00:09 A -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total:- Calls: 16 Dur: 0000:05:32 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- O: DISA Call E: ECF Call N: Normal Call A: Auto Redial -------------------------------------------------------------------------------MATRIX COSINE64P V5R1 Page:01


Matrix


System Administrator (SA) Mode• SA mode allows SA to change few system settings without entering the SE mode. It is a subset of the full blown SE

mode and hence supports only a few programming commands.• In this mode, only SA or SE can do programming. • This mode is password protected so that no other person can make any unauthorized alterations and subsequent

misuse of features and facilities. • System Administrator is a person who carries out routine jobs like taking SMDR printouts, making operator absent/

present, etc. Generally an operator in an organization is selected as a System Administrator.

How to use it?

• SA Password is a 4-digits secret code used to avoid unauthorized access to SA mode. • Default SA Password is 1111. • In case the SA password is forgotten, the new password can be assigned from the System Engineer (SE) mode. • System gives programming tone on entering SA mode. • If the SA password is not entered correctly, system gives error tone. • Only one person can enter SA mode at a time. • To exit SA, dial '00-#*' from the programming tone. You get Matrix dial tone. • Following programming commands are allowed from the SA mode:

• SMDR Reports Printing Commands • Manual Day/Night Commands • Operator Present/Absent

The system can be programmed as per requirements. To meet the basic requirements of any system and for simple, efficient and hassle free programming, please refer 'Getting Started' for more details.

How to change SA Password (From SE Mode)? Use following command to change SA password: 5707-New SA Password-#* Where,New SA password is a number string of 4-digits.By default, SA password is 1111.

Relevant Topics:1. System Engineer (SE) Mode 297 2. Getting Started 34

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 1#92-SA Password. Programming tone

Matrix


System Engineer (SE) Mode

What's this? • SE mode allows SE to program the system for main basic functions like assigning access codes to the stations,

programming destinations for trunk lines, Activation of DISA facility on few lines, assigning feature access levels to stations, etc.

• In this mode, only SE can do programming.• All the commands are allowed from SE mode. For more details refer the individual topics.• This mode is password protected so that no other person can make any unauthorized alterations and subsequent

misuse of features and facilities.• System engineer is a person who programs the system as per the need. He is the person to make major alternations

in the system. No other person can change the system settings without his knowledge provided the password is kept secret. Depending upon the organization structure, a person is designated as system engineer.

How to use it? • SE password is 4-digits secret code used to avoid unauthorized access to SE mode. • Default SE password is 1234. • In case the SE password is forgotten, the same can be cleared to its default value. For more details on this, please

refer How to default SE Password? • System gives programming tone on entering SE mode. • If the SE password is not entered correctly, system gives error tone. • Only one person can enter SE mode at a time. • To exit SE, dial '00-#*' from the programming tone. You get Matrix dial tone.

How to change SE Password? Use following command to change password: 5706-New SE Password-#* Where,New SE password is a number string of 4-digits. By default, SE Password is 1234.

How to default SE Password? • It is very important to remember the SE password. Without this password, it is not possible to enter the program mode

and change the settings. It is advisable to make a note of this password at a safe place.• However, if the system engineer (SE) password is lost, then it can be set to its default value. Following steps describe

the procedure:• Switch OFF the system.• Locate a mini jumper SW1 on the CPU card for Cosine-64P and SW4 on the CPU card for Cosine-32P.• Put the jumper in A-B Position.• Switch ON the system.• Wait for 15 seconds.• Switch OFF the system.• Restore the jumper in its original position (B-C) and switch ON the system.• The SE password gets default to 1234. Now you enter SE Mode by dialing 1#91-1234.

Relevant Topic:1. Programming the System 250

=X=X=

Matrix

System Parameters

What's this?Following options are desirable: • Program the customer's name.• Know the version and revision of the system.• Program the master time zone of the system.

Customer Name• Customer's name can be programmed. It appears on the SMDR reports. • A customer's name can be of maximum 50 characters consisting of alphanumeric characters, punctuation marks and

spaces.

Customer name can be programmed from the DKP or using the Jeeves.Use following command to program the customer name through DKP: 5505-Customer Name-#* Where,Customer Name is a string of alphanumeric characters (maximum 50).

Use following command to clear the customer name:5505-#*

Use first 25 keys on the DKP to enter the name. The alphabets are mapped to the keys as shown below:

Select A/µ LawUse the following command for A/µ law selection: 5503-Flag-#* Where,

By default, A law is applied.

Software Version and RevisionUse following commands to know the software version and revision of the system:

5506-#* This command should be issued from DKP only. On giving this command the DKP would display the current version and revision of the system.

Example:Program the customer name 'Holiday Inn'.5505-Holiday Inn-#*

Please note that DKP allows name programming only in upper case whereas Jeeves allows name programming in either case.

A B C D EF G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y 1 2 3 Z 4 5 6 'Space' 7 8 9 '.' * 0 # 'Enter'

Not Used '&’ '-' ','

Flag Meaning 1 A Law 2 µ Law


Matrix

Master Time Zone• Timetable can be assigned to each station and trunk. Based on this time table, time zones are fixed for the stations

and trunks.• Also the station user can set personal time zones if time table assigned is in Manual Mode.• Thus, SE has to remember time table assigned to each station and trunk and has to program again the required time.• To avoid this, the parameter 'Master Time Zone' is programmed by both SE and SA command which will be applicable

for whole system.

Use following command to program the Master Time zone for the system:5508-Code-#*Where,

By default, Master Time zone is '0' i.e Not applicable.

• If Master Time Zone is programmed as "Not Applicable":• All the trunks and stations will work as per their individual timetable and time zone settings.

• If Master Time Zone is programmed other than "Not Applicable":• Programmed Master Time Zone will override the time table and time zone set by the trunks and stations. • On assigning Master Time Zone, the Time Table assigned and time zone set by the stations and trunks will not get

defaulted. • Thus only the Master Time Zone programmed is applicable for the system.

Relevant Topics:1. Station Message Detail Recording 284 2. Default Settings 1343. Time Tables 300

=X=X=

Code Meaning0 Not Applicable1 Working Hour2 Break Hour3 Non-Working Hour


Matrix

Time Tables

What's this?A user having access to long distance dialing would prefer this facility disabled to avoid misuse during nonworking hours once the office is closed. Trunk calls should be routed to the security staff once the office is closed. An operator would prefer the system to route calls directly to marketing department during break hours. A different greeting message needs to be played on a holiday.

Above examples highlight the need for the system to behave differently depending on the time of the day. The Cosine offers a very flexible programming for different time zones. A day can be divided in three time zones viz. Working hours, Break hours and Non-working hours. Each day of the week can be programmed with different time zones. Such a schedule of a week is called a timetable. Thus, a timetable is a weekly schedule of three time zones for each day of the week.

The Cosine offers maximum of five such timetables.

A default timetable for users of Asia is shown below:

Default value of Time Table for the users of Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America is as follows:

How to program?Step 1: Program timetables using command 1101 and 1102.Step 2: Assign a timetable to SLT using command 1111.

Timezones/Weekdays

Working Hours Break Hours Non-Working HoursStart End Start End Start End

Sunday 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 23:59Monday 09:00 18:00 00:00 00:00 18:00 09:00Tuesday 09:00 18:00 00:00 00:00 18:00 09:00Wednesday 09:00 18:00 00:00 00:00 18:00 09:00Thursday 09:00 18:00 00:00 00:00 18:00 09:00Friday 09:00 18:00 00:00 00:00 18:00 09:00Saturday 09:00 18:00 00:00 00:00 18:00 09:00

Timezones/Weekdays




Matrix

Step 3: Assign a timetable to DKP using command 1112.Step 4: Assign a timetable to trunk using command 1113.Step 5: Assign a timezone to SLT using command 1115.Step 6: Assign a timezone to DKP using command 1116.Step 7: Assign a timezone to trunk using command 1117.

Step 1Please note that there are three fixed time zones for each day in the timetable.• Time Zone 1: Working Hours.• Time Zone 2: Break Hours.• Time Zone 3: Non-Working Hours (non-programmable).

Use following command to program an entry for working hours in a timetable:1101-Timetable-Day-Start Time-End Time-#* Where,Timetable = 1 to 5.Start Time = Time Zone start time in 24-hour, Hour:Minute format.End time = Time Zone end time in 24 hour, Hour:Minute format.

Use following command to program an entry for break hours in a timetable: 1102-Timetable-Day-Start Time-End Time-#* Where,Timetable = 1 to 5.Start Time = Time Zone start time in 24-hour, Hour: Minute format. End time = Time Zone end time in 24 hour, Hour:Minute format.

Example 1:Let us program a timetable with normal office hours of 9:00 am to 6:00 PM from Monday to Friday. Saturday is half day from 9:00 am to 1:00 PM and Sunday is holiday. We need following zones: • Working Hours.• Non-Working Hours.

Please note:We shall program Time zone (Working Hours) 1 for 09:00 to 18:00 and since there is no break, we shall program Time Zone 2 (Break Hours) for time 00:00 to 00:00. There is no need to program the third Time Zone as the system automatically puts the leftover duration in this zone. Once programmed, the timetable will look like:

Use following command to affect above programming: 1101-1-1-0000-0000-#* 1101-1-2-0900-1800-#* 1101-1-3-0900-1800-#* 1101-1-4-0900-1800-#* 1101-1-5-0900-1800-#* 1101-1-6-0900-1800-#* 1101-1-7-0900-1300-#*



Timezones/Weekdays




Matrix

1102-1-1-0000-0000-#* 1102-1-2-0000-0000-#* 1102-1-3-0000-0000-#* 1102-1-4-0000-0000-#* 1102-1-5-0000-0000-#* 1102-1-6-0000-0000-#* 1102-1-7-0000-0000-#*

Example 2:Assume an office where:• Working days are from Monday to Friday.• Normal office timings are 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM.• Breaktime is from 12:30 PM to 1:00 PM.• Saturday is half day from 8:00 AM to 1:00 PM.• Weekly off is on Sunday.

Following zones are needed:• Working Hours.• Break Hours.• Non-Working Hours.Please note that Non-Working Hours need not be programmed since the system automatically puts the leftover duration in this zone.

Once programmed, the timetable will look like:

Use following commands to achieve above programming: 1101-2-1-0000-0000-#* 1101-2-2-0800-1700-#* 1101-2-3-0800-1700-#* 1101-2-4-0800-1700-#* 1101-2-5-0800-1700-#* 1101-2-6-0800-1700-#* 1101-2-7-0800-1300-#* 1102-2-1-0000-0000-#* 1102-2-2-1230-1300-#* 1102-2-3-1230-1300-#* 1102-2-4-1230-1300-#* 1102-2-5-1230-1300-#* 1102-2-6-1230-1300-#* 1102-2-7-0000-0000-#*

Use following command to default a Time Table: 1103-Time Table-#* Where,Time Table is from 1 to 5.

Time Zones and Stations Following stations parameters can be programmed differently for different time zones: • Class of Service (COS).• Toll Control Group.• Trunk Access Group.

Timezones/Weekdays




Matrix

With this programming, it is possible to allow the station to dial long distance codes in certain period of time. A station user can be assigned a timetable matching his timings. Let us assume that in an office people work in two shifts. With these 5 different timetables to choose from, a user can be allocated a timetable that matches his working hours.

Step 2Use following command to assign a timetable to a SLT:1111-SLT-Timetable-#*Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT user from 01-32.Timetable is from 0 to 5.By default, time table assigned is 1.

Step 3Use following command to assign a timetable to a DKP: 1112-DKP-Timetable-#* Where, DKP is the software port number of the DKP user from 1 to 8.Timetable is from 0 to 5.By default, time table assigned is 1.

Example:Assign timetable 2 to SLT 2001 (S/w port number 01) and timetable 1 to DKP 3001 (S/w port number 01).1111-01-2-#*1112-1-1-#*

Time Zones and TrunksFollowing trunk parameters can be programmed different for different time zones:• DID • DISA • Trunk Landing Group A trunk can have different personalities for different time zones. For example, it can be programmed to land on the operator station during working hours. During breaktime, it can land on the canteen station and finally in the Non-Working, the same trunk can land on the security station.

Step 4Use following command to assign a timetable to a Trunk: 1113-Trunk-Timetable-#* Where, Trunk is software port number of the trunk user from 01-12.Timetable is from 0 to 5. Assigning timetable 0 to a trunk means no timetable is assigned and the timezone have to be programmed explicitly. By default, Time Table assigned is 1.

Example:Assign timetable 2 to trunk 01 and timetable 1 to trunk 02:1113-01-2-#*1113-02-1-#*

Step 5Use following command to assign a timezone to SLT for which timetable assigned is 0: 1115-SLT-Time Zone-#* Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT user from 01-32.

By default, Timezone is 1.

Step 6Use following command to assign a timezone to DKP for which timetable assigned is 0:

Time Zone Meaning1 Working Hours2 Break Hours3 Non-Working Hours


Matrix

1116-DKP-Time Zone-#* Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP user from 1-8.


Step 7Use following command to assign a timezone to a trunk for which timetable assigned is 0: 1117-Trunk-Time Zone-#* Where,Trunk is the software port number of the trunk user from 01 to 12.


Range Commands:

How the station user can program the timezone for station without intervention of SE/SA?

Where,

By default, Zone is 1.

Relevant Topics:1. Real Time Clock 261 2. Class of Service (COS) 112 3. Toll Control 305 4. Trunk Access Groups 311 5. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 166 6. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 161 7. Trunk Landing Group 317 8. System Parameters 298

=X=X=



Assign the same time table to all SLTs 1111-**-Time Table-#* Assign the same time table to all DKPs 1112-*-Time Table-#* Assign the same time table to all trunks 1113-**-Time Table-#* Assign the same timezone to all the SLTs with time table 0 1115-**-Time Zone-#* Assign the same timezone to all the DKPs with time table 0 1116-*-Time Zone-#* Assign the same timezone to all the trunks with time table 0 1117-**-Time Zone-#*

Lift the handset. Dial toneDial 115-User Password-Zone. Confirmation tone



Matrix

Toll Control

What's this?Toll Control can:• Restrict dialing all local telephone numbers.• Restrict dialing certain local telephone numbers.• Restrict dialing long distance calls (00).• Restrict dialing certain areas.• Restrict dialing telephone numbers in a particular area.• Restrict dialing telephone numbers starting with a particular digit.• Restrict dialing telephone numbers starting with particular area code. (022).• Allow dialing only certain telephone number. (2630555).• Allow dialing only certain area. (02 and 04).• Allow dialing only certain area code.• Allow dialing only those telephone numbers starting with particular digit (1).

How it works? • Cosine uses Allowed Lists and Denied Lists to support this feature.• When a call is made, the Cosine compares each digit of the dialed number string with the number strings in allowed

list and denied list.• If the dialed number string matches with any of the number strings available in allowed list, the Cosine dials the

number on the trunk, else compares with the number strings in the denied list.• If the dialed number string matches with any of the number strings available in denied list, the Cosine restricts dialing

the number and gives error tone to the station user.• If the dialed number matches with a number string that is available in both allowed and denied list then allowed list is

given priority and the dialed number is dialed on the trunk.

How to use it? • By default, few number strings are available in the allowed list and denied list. If these number strings satisfy the

requirement then these should be assigned to the station for individual time zone. • If the requirement is not met by default allowed and denied list then customized allowed list and denied list should be

programmed. • The number strings which are to be allowed should be programmed in allowed list. • The number strings which are to be denied should be programmed in denied list. • One such allowed and a denied list should be assigned to each station for individual time zone. • If customized toll control is to be provided then customized numbers should be programmed in the allowed list and

the denied list. For example, the requirement is that station 201 can make a long distance call to City A but should make any other long distance call. In this case, the area code of City A should be programmed in one of the locations of the allowed list and should be assigned to station 201. Similarly, station 201 is not allowed any long distance call, hence it should be assigned default denied list 01.

• One such allowed and a denied list should also be assigned to the station for the locked condition. • Once the station has been locked, the station user can make calls as per the allowed and denied lists assigned to the

station for the locked condition. This is called Dynamic Toll Control. • By default, Allowed List and Denied List is 02 for SLT and DKP.• Allowed list 01 and Denied list 01 are assigned in locked condition by default.


Matrix

The following flow chart explains the logic:

How to program? Step 1: List the toll control to be programmed station wise. Step 2: Check whether the requirement can be met by using default Allowed Lists and Denied Lists. Step 3: If default allowed lists satisfy the requirement, assign allowed list to the stations using commands 1911, 1912,

1913 and 1921, 1922, 1923 for individual time zones.Step 4: If default denied lists satisfy the requirement, assign denied lists to the stations using commands 1961, 1962,

1963 and 1971, 1972, 1973 for individual time zones.Step 5: If the requirement cannot be satisfied by default allowed lists and denied lists then list down the customized

numbers to be programmed in allowed list and denied list.Step 6: Program the numbers/number strings to be allowed, in the allowed list using command 6301.Step 7: Program the number/number strings to be denied, in the denied list using command 6302.Step 8: Assign customized allowed list to the stations using commands 1911, 1912, 1913, 1921, 1922 and 1923.Step 9: Assign customized denied lists to these stations using commands 1961, 1962, 1963, 1971, 1972 and 1973.Step 10: Also assign a default/customized allowed list to these stations for the locked condition using commands 1931

and 1932.Step 11: Similarly, assign a default/customized denied lists to these stations for the locked condition using commands

1981 and 1982.

CommandsStep 1Take a pen and a paper. Write down the toll control to be assigned to each station.

Step 2Have a look at default Allowed List and Denied List and check whether the requirement can be meet with these lists.

Step 3 and Step 4Please refer step 8 and step 9 for details on assigning Allowed/Denied Lists to stations.

Start

Station grabs a trunk

Station dials a outside number

Does the dialed number string matches

with any number in allowed list?

Does the number matches with any

number in denied toll control list?

System dials the number

End

System dials the number

End

System gives error tone to the user

End

Yes

No

Yes

No


Matrix

Step 5If the requirement is not met by default Allowed List and Denied List then write down the requirement on a piece of paper and make corresponding Allowed List and Denied List using step 6 and step 7.

Step 6 and Step 7Please refer "Allowed List and Denied List".

Step 8Use following command to assign allowed list to a SLT during Working Hours: 1911-SLT-Allowed List-#* Where, SLT is the software port number of the user from 01 to 32.Allowed List is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign allowed list to a SLT during Break Hours: 1912-SLT-Allowed List-#* Where, SLT is the software port number of the user from 01 to 32.Allowed List is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign allowed list to a SLT during Non-Working Hours: 1913-SLT-Allowed List-#* Where, SLT is the software port number of the user from 01 to 32.Allowed List is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign allowed list to a DKP during Working Hours: 1921-DKP-Allowed List-#* Where, DKP is the software port number of the user from 1 to 8.Allowed List is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign allowed list to a DKP during Break Hours: 1922-DKP-Allowed List-#* Where, DKP is the software port number of the user from 1 to 8.Allowed List is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign allowed list to a DKP during Non-Working Hours: 1923-DKP-Allowed List-#* Where, DKP is the software port number of the user from 1 to 8.Allowed List is from 01 to 15.

Step 9Use following command to assign denied list to a SLT during Working Hours: 1961-SLT-Denied List-#* Where, SLT is the software port number of the user from 01 to 32. Denied List is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign denied list to a SLT during Break Hours: 1962-SLT-Denied List-#* Where, SLT is the software port number of the user from 01 to 32. Denied List is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign denied list to a SLT during Non-Working Hours: 1963-SLT-Denied List-#* Where, SLT is the software port number of the user from 01 to 32.Denied List is from 01 to 15.


Matrix

Use following command to assign denied list to a DKP during Working Hours: 1971-DKP-Denied List-#* Where, DKP is the software port number of the user from 1 to 8. Denied List is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign denied list to a DKP during Break Hours: 1972-DKP-Denied List-#*Where, DKP is the software port number of the user from 1 to 8. Denied List is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign denied list to a DKP during Non-Working Hours: 1973-DKP-Denied List-#* Where, DKP is the software port number of the user from 1 to 8. Denied List is from 01 to 15.

Step 10Use following command to assign allowed list to a SLT for locked condition: 1931-SLT-Locked Allowed List-#*Where, SLT is the software port number of the user from 01 to 32. Locked Allowed List is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign allowed list to a DKP for locked condition: 1932-DKP-Locked Allowed List-#* Where, DKP is the software port number of the user from 1 to 8. Locked Allowed List is from 01 to 15.

Step 11Use following command to assign denied list to a SLT for locked condition: 1981-SLT-Locked Denied List-#* Where, SLT is the software port number of the user from 01 to 32. Locked Denied List is from 01 to 15.

Use following command to assign denied list to a DKP for locked condition: 1982-DKP-Locked Denied List-#* Where, DKP is the software port number of the user from 1 to 8. Locked Denied List is from 01 to 15.

Example:Let us program the system for following conditions:We have two SLT users 201 and 202 (S/w port no. 01 and 02) and one DKP user 301 (S/w port no. 1).For 201: During working hours: Allow 011-6565655 and 011-6565656 but restrict all other 011 calls. Allow all 022 calls

but restrict 022-7878787 and 022-7878788. Allow all local calls and other long distance calls Restrict all calls during break hours and non-working hours, where 011 and 022 are area codes of city A and city B.

For 202: Allow only local calls. Restrict long distance calls during all the timings of the day.For 301: All calls allowed. No restriction.

Solution:For Station 201 It is advisable to make changes for any customised requirement in allowed and denied lists that are blank and not assigned by default to stations are altered. Let us make an allowed list 06 which shall allow 011-6565655, 011-6565656 and 022. Let us make a denied list 07 which shall restrict 022-7878787, 022-7878788 and 011 but shall allow all other calls. These can be assigned for working hours. Default allowed and denied lists take care of break and non-working hour requirements.

For Station 202Assigning default denied list 05 for all timezones will meet the requirement.

For Station 301Assigning default allowed list 14 and denied list 08 will meet the requirements.

Use following command to program allowed list 06: 6301-06-01-0116565655-#* 6301-06-02-0116565656-#* 6301-06-03-022-#*


Matrix

Use following command to program denied list 07: 6302-07-01-0227878787-#* 6302-07-02-0227878788-#* 6302-07-03-011-#*

Use following command to assign allowed list to SLT 201 during Working Hours: 1911-01-06-#*

The default allowed list 01 is assigned to the station 201 during Break and Non-Working Hours suffices the requirement.

Use following command to assign denied list to SLT 201 during Working Hours: 1961-01-07-#*

The default denied list 01 is assigned to the station 201 during break and non-working hours suffices the requirements. The default allowed list assigned (01) to station 202 will suffices the requirements.

Use following command to assign denied list to SLT 202 during Working Hours: 1961-02-05-#*

Use following command to assign denied list to SLT 202 during Break Hours: 1962-02-05-#*

Use following command to assign denied list to SLT 202 during Non-Working Hours: 1963-02-05-#*

Use following command to assign allowed list to DKP 301 during Working Hours: 1921-1-14-#*

Use following command to assign allowed list to DKP 301 during Break Hours: 1922-1-14-#*

Use following command to assign allowed list to DKP 301 during Non-Working Hours: 1923-1-14-#*

Use following command to assign denied list to DKP 301 during Working Hours: 1971-1-08-#*

Use following command to assign denied list to DKP 301 during Break Hours: 1972-1-08-#*

Use following command to assign denied list to DKP 301 during Non-Working Hours: 1973-1-08-#*

Range Commands: Assign same allowed list to all SLTs for working hours 1911-**-Allowed List-#* Assign same allowed list to all SLTs for break hours 1912-**-Allowed List-#* Assign same allowed list to all SLTs for non-working hours 1913-**-Allowed List-#* Assign same allowed list to all DKPs for working hours 1921-*-Allowed List-#* Assign same allowed list to all DKPs for break hours 1922-*-Allowed List-#* Assign same allowed list to all DKPs for non-working hours 1923-*-Allowed List-#* Assign same denied list to all SLTs for working hours 1961-**-Denied List-#* Assign same denied list to all SLTs for break hours 1962-**-Denied List-#* Assign same denied list to all SLTs for non-working hours 1963-**-Denied List-#* Assign same denied list to all DKPs for working hours 1971-*-Denied List-#* Assign same denied list to all DKPs for break hours 1972-*-Denied List-#* Assign same denied list to all DKPs for non-working hours 1973-*-Denied List-#* Assign same dynamic allowed list to all SLTs 1931-**-Allowed List-#* Assign same dynamic allowed list to all DKPs 1932-*-Allowed List-#*


Matrix

By default:Allowed list 02 is the default allowed list.Denied list 02 is the default denied list.Allowed list 01 is the default locked allowed list.Denied list 01 is the default locked denied list.

Relevant Topics:1. Allowed List and Denied List 52 2. SLT Parameters 274 3. Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming 156

=X=X=

Assign same dynamic denied list to all SLTs 1981-**-Denied List-#* Assign same dynamic denied list to all DKPs 1982-*-Denied List-#*

Assign same allowed list to all SLTs for working hours 1911-**-Allowed List-#*


Matrix

Trunk Access Groups

What's this?Trunk Access Groups provide efficient allocation of trunks to different stations. • All the trunks connected to the system can be bunched in different groups called Trunk Access Group. • Maximum 8 trunks can be put in one trunk access group. 8 such Trunks Access Groups can be formed. • These Trunks Access Groups can be allotted to each individual station. • A station can be allotted different Trunk Access Groups during different timings of the day.

How it works? System uses two methods while selecting a trunk from the trunk access group viz. Remember last trunk and Don't Remember last trunk. In Remember last trunk method, the system remembers the last trunk used and allots next trunk in the group to the station. In don't remember last trunk method, the system searches for a free trunk from the first trunk programmed in the group.


Matrix

Following flow chart depicts the chronology of events when a station grabs a trunk.

Start

Station user dials trunk group access codes

Which LCR type is

selected?

System finds the cheep port trunk from the group depending upon the time on which call is made and following rotation logic

System allots a free trunk from the TAG depends upon the rotation flag

System allots free trunk from the trunk access group as per number logic and rotation logic

A

Is the cheapest trunk free?

End

System allots the trunk to the station

End

Is the cheapest trunk free?

Select next cheapest trunk in this group

System gives busy tone to the station

System waits for next action from the user

End

System waits for dialing of entire number

System finds cheapest trunk for this number

Is cheapest trunk

available?

System dials out the number

End

Select next cheap trunk in this group

Is cheaper trunk

available?


System waits for next action from user

End

Time Based LCR Mixed LCR No LCRNumber Based LCR

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

No


Matrix

How to program?Step 1: Decide number of trunk access groups to be formed. Program these groups using command 1802.Step 2: Program rotation code to select a trunk within the trunk access group using command 1803.Step 3: Assign trunk access groups to the stations using commands 1811,1812,1813 and 1821,1822,1823.Step 4: Assign flexible access code of our choice to the each trunk access group.

Step 1Use following command to put trunks in a trunk access group: 1802-Trunk Access Group-Index-Trunk-#* Where,Trunk Access Group is from 1 to 8.Index is from 1 to 8.Trunk is from 00 to 12 (Cosine64P) and 00 to 06 Cosine32P). Assigning trunk 00 to an index clears the index.

Step 2Use following command to program rotation code for a group:

A

Is cheaper trunk with respect to the

LCR logic free?

System finds the cheaper trunk from the grabbed TAG depending upon time, number logic and rotation logic

System waits for dialing of entire number

Is the number dialed, allowed

from this cheapest trunk?

System dials out the number

End

Are other trunks available

within TAG?


System waits for next action from user

End

Are other trunks available

with TAG?

Select next cheaper trunk within the group

System gives busy tone to station

System waits for next action system user

End

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

YesYes

No


Matrix

1803-Trunk Access Group-Rotation Code-#* Where,Trunk Access Group is from 1 to 8.

By default, rotation is ON.

Step 3Use following command to program trunk access group to SLT during working hours: 1811-SLT-Trunk Access Group Index-Trunk Access Group Number-#*Where,SLT = Software port number of the SLT user from 01 to 32.Trunk Access Group Index is from 1 to 7 (This corresponds to 0, 5, 61,…., 65 (for Asian/Australasian/European/African users) (9, 5, 81 to 85 for North American/South American users) access code in default state).Trunk Access Group Number is from 1 to 8.

Use following command to program trunk access group to SLT during break hours:1812-SLT-Trunk Access Group Index-Trunk Access Group Number-#* Where,SLT = Software port number of the SLT user from 01 to 32Trunk Access Group Index is from 1 to 7 (This corresponds to 0, 5, 61,…., 65 (for Asian/Australasian/European/African users) (9, 5, 81 to 85 for North American/South American defaults) access code in default state).Trunk Access Group Number is from 1 to 8.

Use following command to program trunk access group to SLT during non-working hours:1813-SLT-Trunk Access Group Index-Trunk Access Group Number-#* Where,SLT = Software port number of the SLT user from 01 to 32Trunk Access Group Index is from 1 to 7 (This corresponds to 0, 5, 61,…., 65 (for Asian/Australasian/European/African users) (9, 5, 81 to 85 for North American/South American users) access code in default state).Trunk Access Group Number is from 1 to 8.

Use following command to program trunk access group to DKP during working hours:1821-DKP-Trunk Access Group Index-Trunk Access Group Number-#* Where,DKP = Software port number of the DKP user from 1 to 8Trunk Access Group Index is from 1 to 7 (This corresponds to 0, 5, 61,…., 65 (for Asian/Australasian/European/African users) (9, 5, 81 to 85 for North American/South American users) access code in default state).Trunk Access Group Number is from 1 to 8.

Use following command to program trunk access group to DKP during break hours: 1822-DKP-Trunk Access Group Index-Trunk Access Group Number-#* Where,DKP = Software port number of the DKP user from 1 to 8Trunk Access Group Index is from 1 to 7 (This corresponds to 0, 5, 61,…., 65 (for Asian/Australasian/European/African users) (9, 5, 81 to 85 for North American/South American users) access code in default state).Trunk Access Group Number is from 1 to 8.

Use following command to program trunk access group to DKP during non-working hours:1823-DKP-Trunk Access Group Index-Trunk Access Group Number-#* Where,DKP = Software port number of the DKP user from 1 to 8Trunk Access Group Index is from 1 to 7 (This corresponds to 0, 5, 61,…., 65 (for Asian/Australasian/European/African users) (9, 5, 81 to 85 for North American/South American users) access code in default state).Trunk Access Group Number is from 1 to 8By default, TAG for all Trunk Access Code is 1.

Step 4How to assign an access code of your choice to Trunk Access group?

Rotation Code Meaning 0 Trunk rotation OFF within the group, system always selects the first trunk of the group 1 Trunk rotation ON within the group


Matrix

These are Flexible access codes. Trunk access codes are common for all the users. They cannot be different for different station.

A default trunk access code table is given below:

Use following command to program the desirable access code for a Trunk Access Group: 4307-Trunk Access Group Index-Access Code-#* Where,Trunk Access Group Index is from 1 to 7.Access Code is of 1, 2, 3 or 4 digits. (Generally access code for trunk is of two digits).

Use following command to clear the desirable access code of a Trunk Access Group:4307-Trunk Access Group Index-#*

Use following command to default the access code of all Trunk Access Groups:4308-#*

Use following command to clear the access code of all Trunk Access Groups:4309-#*

Default assignment of Trunks in TAG for Cosine-64P:

Default assignment of Trunks in TAG for Cosine-32P:

TAG Index

Trunk Allowed

Trunk Access Codes Asia Europe/Africa/ Australia North/South America

1 1-8 0 0 9 2 1-8 5 5 5 3 1 61 61 81 4 2 62 62 82 5 3 63 63 83 6 4 64 64 84 7 5 65 65 85

Trk01 Trk02 Trk03 Trk04 Trk05 Trk06 Trk07 Trk08 TAG1 Trk01 Trk02 Trk03 Trk04 Trk05 Trk06 Trk07 Trk08 TAG2 Trk01 Trk02 Trk03 Trk04 Trk05 Trk06 Trk07 Trk08 TAG3 Trk01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TAG4 Trk02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TAG5 Trk03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TAG6 Trk04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TAG7 Trk05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TAG8 Trk06 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Trk01 Trk02 Trk03 Trk04 Trk05 Trk06 Trk07 Trk08 TAG1 Trk01 Trk02 Trk03 Trk04 00 00 00 00TAG2 Trk01 Trk02 Trk03 Trk04 00 00 00 00TAG3 Trk01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TAG4 Trk02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TAG5 Trk03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TAG6 Trk04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 TAG7 Trk05 Trk06 00 00 00 00 00 00 TAG8 Trk01 Trk02 Trk03 Trk04 00 00 00 00


Matrix

How to use it?

Use following command to default a Trunk Access Group: 1801-TAG-#*

Default Commands:

Relevant Topics:1. Least Cost Routing-An Introduction 217 2. Time Tables 300 3. Class of Service (COS) 112

=X=X=


2 Dial 0 (9 for American defaults), 5, 61, 62, 63, 64 or 65 (for 81 to 85 for American defaults). Dial tone of the trunk.

3 Dial desired external number.

To program the same trunk at the same index in all TAG 1802-*-Index-Trunk-#* To program the rotation mode for all TAG 1803-*-Rotation Code-#* To set a same TAG to all SLTs during working hours 1811-**-Trunk Access Group Index-TAG-#* To set a same TAG to all SLTs during break hours 1812-**-Trunk Access Group Index-TAG-#* To set a same TAG to all SLTs during non-working hours 1813-**-Trunk Access Group Index-TAG-#* To set a same TAG to all DKPs during working hours 1821-*-Trunk Access Group Index-TAG-#* To set a same TAG to all DKPs during break hours 1822-*-Trunk Access Group Index-TAG-#* To set a same TAG to all DKPs during non-working hours 1823-*-Trunk Access Group Index-TAG-#*


Matrix

Trunk Landing Group

What's this?When more number of trunks is interfaced with the system and if all the trunks are programmed to land on operator then it would become difficult for the operator to answer the calls efficiently. This would result in inefficient call management. Cosine helps in such condition. It is possible to make groups of stations on which a particular trunk shall land. This group is called Trunk Landing Group.

How it works?• A Station Group should be assigned to a trunk as Trunk Landing Group. • Different Station Groups can be assigned to a trunk during Working Hour, Break Hour and Non-Working Hour. • Please refer 'Station Group' for more details.

How to program?Step 1: Decide the number of Station Groups to be used as Trunk Landing Groups.Step 2: Program to assign TLG group to a trunk for Working Hour using command 2011.Step 3: Program to assign TLG group to a trunk for Break Hour using command 2012.Step 4: Program to assign TLG group to a trunk for Non-Working Hour using command 2013.

Step 1Please refer 'Station Group' on how to program a station group.

Step 2Use following command to assign Trunk Landing Groups to a trunk for Working Hour: 2011-Trunk-Station Group-#* Where,Trunk is from 01 to 12. Station Group is from 01 to 16.

Use following command to assign Trunk Landing Groups to all trunks for Working Hour:2011-**-Station Group-#*

Step 3Use following command to assign Trunk Landing Groups to a trunk for Break Hour:2012-Trunk-Station Group-#* Where, Trunk is from 01 to 12.Station Group is from 01 to 16.

Use following command to assign Trunk Landing Groups to all trunks for Break Hour:2012-**-Station Group-#*Where,Station Group is from 01 to 16.

Step 4Use following command to assign Trunk Landing Groups to a trunk for Non-Working Hour: 2013-Trunk-Station Group-#* Where, Trunk is from 01 to 12.Station Group is from 01 to 16.

Use following command to assign Trunk Landing Groups to all trunks for Non-Working Hour: 2013-**-Station Group-#* Where, Station Group is from 01 to 16.

Example:Program system for following constraints: • 3 CO lines (S/w ports 1 to 3) are interfaced with Cosine. • First two CO lines, CO1 and CO2 should land on station 201, 203, 205, 202 (S/w ports 01, 02, 03, 04 respectively)

during day time. Rotation to be allowed.


Matrix

• CO1 and CO2 should ring on each station for 10 seconds. Station should ring in the given sequence only. • First two CO lines, CO1 and CO2 should land on station 201 (S/w ports 01). • CO1 and CO2 should ring on station 201 continuously. • Third line should land on station 208 and 209 simultaneously (S/w port 07 and 08 respectively) during working, break

and non-working hours. • CO3 should ring continuously on both the stations.

Use following commands:Make Group 01 as per the requirement:4502-01-1-01-#* 4502-01-2-02-#* 4502-01-3-03-#* 4502-01-4-04-#* 4503-01-1-010-#* 4503-01-2-010-#* 4503-01-3-010-#* 4503-01-4-010-#* 4504-01-1-0-#* 4504-01-2-0-#* 4504-01-3-0-#* 4504-01-4-0-#* 4505-01-1-#*

Make Group 02 as per the requirement: 4502-02-1-01-#* 4503-02-1-010-#* 4503-02-2-010-#* 4503-02-3-010-#* 4503-02-4-010-#* 4504-02-1-1-#* 4504-02-2-1-#* 4504-02-3-1-#* 4504-02-4-1-#*

Make Group 03 as per the requirement: 4502-03-1-07-#* 4502-03-2-08-#* 4503-03-1-010-#* 4503-03-2-010-#* 4503-03-3-010-#* 4503-03-4-010-#* 4504-03-1-1-#* 4504-03-2-1-#* 4504-03-3-1-#* 4504-03-4-1-#* 4505-03-0-#*

Assign Station group as TLG group to a trunk for Working Hour, Break Hour and Non-Working Hour: Use the following commands:2011-01-01-#* 2011-01-02-#* 2011-01-03-#* 2012-01-01-#* 2012-01-02-#* 2012-01-03-#* 2013-01-01-#* 2013-01-02-#* 2013-01-03-#*


Matrix

Relevant Topics: 1. Time Tables 300 2. Station Group 279

=X=X=


Matrix

Trunk Parameters

What's this?Trunks differ in their parameters like pulse type or tone type, hotline or normal line, etc. The Cosine offers flexible settings for each trunk.

How to program? Trunk parameters can be programmed in following hierarchy: • Enable/disable a trunk using command 1601. • Define dial type of the trunk using command 1602. • Define the trunk type by using command 1603. • Define the Trunk First Digit Wait Timer using command 1604. • Define Trunk Inter Digit Timer using command 1605. • Define speech connection Delay Timer using command 1606. • Define Pause Timer using command 1607. • It is also possible to copy parameters of trunk to other trunk using command 1622. • Define the Pulse Dial Ratio using the command 1608. • Program Trunk Maturity Timer using command 1609.

Trunk Enable/DisableA trunk port can individually be enabled or disabled. This can be useful when a particular trunk goes out of order and should be stopped from being allocated to a user.

Use following command to enable/disable a trunk: 1601-Trunk-Code-#* Where,Trunk = Trunk Software Port Number from 01 to 12.

By default, Trunk is enable.

Example:Let us disable trunk port 05:1601-05-0-#*

Dial Type The Cosine supports pulse and tone (DTMF) dialing on the trunk ports. Depending on a trunk port's dial type, thesame can be programmed.

Use following command to program the dial type of a trunk:1602-Trunk-Code-#* Where,Trunk = Trunk Software Port Number from 01 to 08.

Example:Let us program trunk port 05 with tone dialing 1602-05-2-#*By default, trunks (01-08) are of tone type and trunks (09-12) are of pulse type.

Trunk Type Use following command to program the trunk type: 1603-Trunk-Type-#* Where,

Code Meaning 0 Trunk port disabled 1 Trunk port enabled

Code Meaning 1 Pulse2 Tone (DTMF)


Matrix

Trunk is from 01 to 12.

By default, Trunk Type is normal.

Timers of Relevance:Trunk First Digit Wait Timer: It is the time before which the station should dial the digits on the trunk line after grabbing the trunk. If the outside telephone number is not dialed during this time, the system gives error tone.This is a global timer and is applicable to all the trunks. It is recommended to keep this timer slightly more than the First Digit Wait Timer of the trunk line itself.Command: 1604-Seconds-#*Default timer is 025 seconds.Range of this timer is 001 to 255 seconds.

Trunk Digit-to-Digit Wait Timer: It is the time between dialing of two digits on the trunk. If this timer is too large then the user will have to wait for long time to transfer the call to other station. If this timer is too small then it is possible that few last digits of the telephone number dialed on the trunk will get skipped in the OG SMDR report.This is a global timer and is applicable to all the trunks.Command: 1605-Seconds-#*Default timer is 005 seconds.Range of this timer is 001 to 255 seconds.

Speech Connection Delay Timer: It is the time after which the system gives dial tone to the station user on grabbing the trunk line. To understand the significance of this timer, let us consider a situation. A telephone line coming from an old telephone exchange is interfaced with the Cosine. Now when the user station not having access to long distance numbers, grabs a trunk line and dials a number 1022-2630555. The PBX allows this number since it starts with 1 but since the actual dial tone from the telephone exchange comes after some time, the telephone exchange interprets this number as 022-2630555 and establishes the speech. This way a station user not having access to this number can dial out a long distance number. To avoid this situation, Cosine offers this timer. This timer can be set for individual trunks.

Use following command to program Speech Connection Delay Timer for a trunk:1606-Trunk-Speech Connection Delay Timer-#* Where, Trunk = 2-digit software port number from 01 to 12. Speech Connection Delay Timer = Timer in seconds from 0 to 9.By default, Speech Connection Delay Timer is 0 seconds.

Pause Timer: It is the time for which the system waits before dialing the outside number after grabbing the trunk. Some times it is observed that after grabbing the trunk line, the user does not get CO dial tone immediately. Instead he gets the dial tone from the CO after some time. This is due to old types of COs. When user himself is dialing the number, he inadvertently waits for the dial tone and then dials the number. But this is not so when PBX dials the number. When Redial or Auto-Redial or Abbreviated Dialing feature is used the PBX grabs the trunk line and dials the number at its own. Now if there is no pause time and if the CO is of old type then it is possible that the PBX may dial out the number before getting the dial tone. This may result in dialing wrong number. To avoid this situation, Cosine offers pause timer, which can be set for individual trunks. Pause timer is used during Redial, Auto Redial and Memory Dialing.

Use following command to program Pause Timer for a trunk: 1607-Trunk-Pause Timer-#*Where, Trunk = 2-digit software port number from 01 to 12.Pause Timer = Timer in seconds from 1 to 9.By default, Pause Timer is 1 second.

Pulse Dial Ratio of Trunks Use the following command to set the pulse dial ratio for the trunks of the system: 1608-Code-#* Where,

Type Meaning 1 Normal2 Hotline Type

Code Value 1 33:67 ms


Matrix

By default, the pulse dial ratio for the trunks is 1.

Trunk Maturity Timer Use following command to program Maturity Delay Timer: 1609-Trunk-Timer-#* Where, Trunk is from 01 to 12. Timer is from 001 to 255 seconds.By default, Maturity Delay Timer is 015 seconds.

Default CommandUse following command to default all the parameters of a trunk: 1621-Trunk-#*Using this command following parameters of trunks will set to default values:• Priority • Flash Timer • Pause Timer • PEC Count • Speech Connection Delay Timer • DID will get OFF • DISA will get OFF • Trunk Landing Group • Time Table • Name and CLI Type • Dial Type • Maturity Timer • Pulse Dial Rate • All trunks are enabled

Copy Command Use following command to copy all the parameters of a trunk to another trunk:1622-Source Trunk-Destination Trunk-#*

On issuing this command the following parameters of the source trunk are assigned to the destination trunk: • Flash Timer • Pause Timer • Name • DID Enable/Disable (only if Analog Trunk Both Source and Destination) • DISA Enable/Disable (only if Analog Trunk Both Source and Destination) • FAX Enable/Disable • Trunk Landing Group • Trunk Enable/Disable • Priority • Service Provider • Maturity Type • Pre-PSTN Count • Speech Delay Timer • Maturity Timer • Call Forward Enable/Disable • Call Forward Tag • Line Type • Dial Type (only if Analog Trunk Both Source and Destination) • CLI Type (only if Analog Trunk Both Source and Destination) • Signal for Supervision on Trunk Port • Forced Maturity Timer • Disconnect Supervision on Trunk Port • Disconnect Tone's ON Time • Disconnect Tone's OFF Time

2 40:60 ms 3 50:50 ms

Code Value


Matrix

• Enable/disable Disconnect Tone Detection for DID No Digit Dial State • Enable/disable Disconnect Tone Detection for Outgoing Call + All Incoming Call Status other than DID No Digit Dial

State• DID Disconnect Tone Detection Timer • Ring Cadence OFF Timer

Range Commands:

Relevant Topics:1. Distinctive Rings 179 2. Call Disconnect Tone (CDT) 78 3. Answer Supervision on Trunk Port 59 4. Disconnect Supervision on Trunk Port 177

=X=X=

Enable/Disable all trunks 1601-**-Code-#* To set a dial type for all trunks 1602-**-Code-#* Define a trunk type for all the trunks 1603-**-Trunk Type-#* To define speech connection delay timer for all trunks 1606-**-Speech Connection Delay Timer-#* To define pause timer for all trunks 1607-**-Pause Timer-#* To define Maturity timer for all trunks 1609-**-Maturity Timer-#*


Matrix


Trunk Reservation

What's this?• An important user can reserve a particular trunk for him for some time. • He need not share the trunk with others as long as the reservation is in effect.

How to use it?

Cancel Trunk Reservation

A reserved trunk can be freed manually by a command before its timer expires manually.

• Once your important calls are over, do not forget to cancel the reservation. This will enable others to use the trunk. • If more than one station try to reserve the same trunk, the station that is identified first by the system will be given the

reservation. All the other stations will get busy tone.

How to program? Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow trunk reservation to a user.

Timer of Relevance:Trunk Reservation Timer: Time for which the trunk is reserved for you.Command: 3004-Minutes-#*Default: 010 Minutes.Valid Range: 001 to 255 minutes.

Important Points:• Trunk reservation is used once the user gets busy tone for a trunk access code.• Part of this feature is similar to Auto Call Back.• As soon as a trunk from the requested group is available, he gets ring.• When the user answers the ring, he gets connected with the trunk and hears the dial tone.• Now, this trunk is reserved for him.• The trunk remains reserved for time=Trunk Reservation Timer.• During this time other users cannot access this trunk even if it is free.• Station which requested trunk reservation can make more than one call during Trunk Reservation Timer.• The trunk becomes available to other users after the timer. This timer is called Trunk Reservation Timer and is

programmable.

Relevant Topics:1. Class of Service (COS) 1122. Auto Call Back (ACB) 61

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial Trunk Access Code. Busy tone 3 Dial 6. Confirmation tone

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 102. Confirmation tone

Matrix


User Absent/Present

What's this?• User can absent himself when he leaves his desk. Once the user has absented himself, no caller can call the user. • This feature enables the caller to know the user is absent and can call a second station.

How to use it?To make User Absent, dial 104-User Password-0.To make User Present, dial 104-User Password-1.By default, User is present.

How to make SLT user absent/present remotely? Sometimes a SLT user leaves his place assuming that he would be back after sometime. Later he could not come. Since his SLT is in present mode the incoming calls could land on this station or any station can call him. All these calls will not be answered since he is not present. Cosine offers flexibility to make SLT absent remotely.

Use following command to make SLT absent/present remotely:5705-SLT-Mode-#* Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT user from 01 to 32.

By default, the SLT user is present.

How to make DKP user absent/present remotely? Sometimes a DKP user leaves his place assuming that he would be back after sometime. Later he could not come. Since his DKP is in present mode the incoming calls could land on this station or any station can call him. All these calls will not be answered since he is not present. Cosine offers flexibility to make DKP absent remotely.

Use following command to make DKP absent/present remotely: 5704-DKP-Mode-#* Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP user from 1 to 8.

By default, the DKP user is present.

Relevant Topic:1. System Engineer (SE) Mode 297

=X=X=

Mode Meaning 0 Absent 1 Present

Mode Meaning 0 Absent 1 Present

Matrix


User Password

What's this?Cosine provides the user security of its station from unauthorized use. It also helps user to use few important features that are password protected. The user can be a SLT/DKP station user.• Each station of Cosine can have a password. This password helps the user in using following features:

• Call Follow Me.• Dynamic Lock.• DISA.• Walk-In Class of Service.• User Absent/Present.

• User password is a 4-digits string. It cannot have either less than or more than 4 digits.• User password can be changed from the station or remotely by the SE.• The default user password is 1111 for all the users. Please note that the features requiring password don't accept the

default password. Thus it is compulsory for the user to change the user password, if he wishes to use any of the features that are protected by the password.

• In case the user has forgotten his password, the System Engineer (SE) can assign a new password.

How to use it?Change the User Password

How to program?Use following command to assign user password to the SLT: 5701-SLT-Password-#*Where,SLT is the software port number of the SLT user from 01-32.Password is a number string of 4 digits.

Use following command to assign user password to the DKP: 5702-DKP-Password-#*Where,DKP is the software port number of the DKP user from 1 to 8.Password is a number string of 4 digits.By default, the password of all SLT's and DKP's is 1111.

Relevant Topics: 1. System Engineer (SE) Mode 297 2. Call Follow Me 87 3. Dynamic Lock 184 4. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 166 5. Walk-In Class of Service 333 6. User Absent/Present 325

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone2 Dial 114-Old User Password-New User Password. Confirmation tone

Matrix


Voice Mail System (VMS) Gateway

What's this?• Cosine-VMS integration works well if the exchange of information between the two is perfect. • VMS Gateway is a protocol that enables perfect exchange of information between Cosine and VMS.

The Cosine offers a feature of grouping SLT ports in a VMS group. Doing so, whenever a station accesses VMS by dialing a department number. The Cosine allots him one of the free links to him. Hence, the caller doesn't have to dial individual station number to access VMS.

How to connect a VMS to Cosine?The port of VMS should be connected to any SLT port of the Cosine using a single pair telephone cable. The figure given below shows connection of the VMS with the Cosine where four ports of VMS are interfaced with the Cosine.

As shown in the figure, the VMS is connected on four SLT ports of the Cosine. If all the calls are to be routed through the VMS, the Cosine should be programmed in such a way that all the incoming calls land on these four ports of the VMS. Alternatively, the Cosine can be programmed such that incoming calls of other trunks land on other stations. When an incoming call lands on the VMS, the VMS processes the call and guides the caller to reach the desired station.

How it works? Gateway uses DTMF digits to signify various Call Progress events.When a call lands on a VMS it keeps the caller on hold and dials a station number, when the dialed station rings, a defined DTMF digit is sent by the Cosine to the VMS. VMS interprets that the call has landed and waits for the call to be answered. As soon as the call is transferred, the Cosine sends another defined DTMF digit to signify the event of call answer. Since codes are used for transfer of information, this protocol of information exchange is instantaneous and perfect.

How to program?Use following command to program a VMS group: 3801-VMS Group-#* Where,VMS group is a department group from 0 to 5.VMS group is actually a department group, SE should first make a station group for department group and then assign department group as VMS group. Please refer 'Department Call' for more details on how to form department group and default department group. Please take care not to program 'Immediate Simultaneous' mode for this department group.If the value of VMS group is programmed as 0 in the above command it means there is no VMS group.

Relevant Topic:1. Department Call 136

=X=X=

26

2827

Matrix

Voice Message Applications

What's this?Cosine can store various voice messages. These messages can be played back to the caller/user depending on the situation. In case DID is activated on few trunk lines then it is possible to guide caller to reach his desired person using this facility. The Cosine supports 16 voice messages of 16 seconds each.

This facility can be used for four different features as enumerated below:• DID/DISA/Fax Greeting Message

• During Working Hours • During Break Hours • During Non-Working Hours

• DID/DISA guidance messages • Dial Message • Wrong Dial Message • Busy Message • No Reply Message • No Dial Message

• Feature Messages • Alarm • Auto Redial Message • Dial by Name • Hold on Music (recorded).

All the sixteen voice messages can be played back simultaneously.

Applications of Voice Messages

Voice Messages for DID/DISA/Fax • Greeting Message for Working Hours

“Welcome to Cotton Software”.• Greeting Message for Break Hours

“Welcome to Cotton Software. This is lunchtime. Please call after 2.00PM”. • Greeting Message for Non-Working Hours

“Welcome to Cotton Software. We are closed for the day. Please call later”.• Dial Message

“Please dial the desired station or dial '#' to Dial by Name or dial '9' for assistance”. • Wrong Dial Message

“Sorry you have dialed an invalid station number. Your call is being transferred”. • Busy dial message

“The station you have dialed is busy. Please hold the line or try any other station number”.• No Reply Message

“The station you have dialed is not responding. Please try another station”.• Transfer Message

“Please hold on. The call is being transferred”.

Voice Message for Alarm This feature is very useful in hotels where it is required to wake up guests at odd time. At the same time it is alsorequired to greet them. When the guest picks up the handset on getting ring, he is greeted with this recordedmessage.Popular greeting message for alarms is:

“Good Morning, Sir. This is a wake up call. You may please call room service for any assistance. Thanks. Have a nice day”.

Voice Message for Music on Hold Normally, when a caller is kept on hold, he gets internal hold on music. This internal music can be replaced with the external music (Please refer section “Music on Hold“). But to feed external music, a separate music source is required which may not be feasible all the time. However, this same requirement can be fulfilled using this feature. Any message like advertisement of your company or any message related to your new plans can be recorded and can be played back to the caller when he is kept on hold. This way, two jobs are done at a time; the operator can attend to other call and the message, which otherwise you had to give to the caller, has reached him in a much better manner. Messages for Music on hold can be:


Matrix

“Welcome to Progressive Bearings. We are glad to announce that we are now an ISO 9001 company. Best and continued efforts of our employees to deliver optimum quality products have made this possible”.

Voice Message for Dial ToneNormally, when a caller goes OFF-Hook to dial a station, he gets the dial tone for a fixed time interval (Dial Tone Timer). If the caller does not respond within that time, he gets a error tone. The caller may not be aware of this instead if a message is played back, this time out situation can be ruled out. Message for Dial Tone

“Please dial the number immediately after the beep”.Take care that the length of the message is shorter then the dial tone timer.

Voice Message for Ring Back Tone When the caller dials a station if the station is free, the caller gets a Ring Back Tone instead a messages like:

“The station you have dialed is free. Please wait till the station responds” can be made to play back. Take care that the length of the message is shorter then Ring Back Tone Timer.

Voice Message for Dial by NameThis guides the user to dial the extension by name like.

“Please enter the first three characters of the person you want to call”.

Voice Message for Emergency Message “An emergency occurred at XYZ and Co. We are placed at 394, GIDC, Makarpura”.

Voice Guidance for Auto Redial During auto redial, if the call goes through and the system detects ring back tone, the system gives ring to the Station, which has requested auto redial. At this point of time both, the Station as well as the destination are ringing. Now if the destination answers the before the Station, he gets internal hold on music. It could be surprising for him, why should he get music while answering a fresh call. This event can be avoided by replacing music with a voice message. An appropriate voice message can be recorded and can be played back in such situation. Messages for Auto redial could be:

“Please hold. The call is coming on the line soon”.

How it works? Cosine comes with prerecorded messages. The VM space is divided in two groups viz. System and User messages. The VM programming is done in two levels viz. Limited and Full VM programming.

System VM MessagesSystem VM programming area has 8 parts (01-08 messages). System VM programming is protected area and can be reached only after setting advanced VM programming flag. System messages area is fixed and cannot be changed.

Use following command to activate Advance VM Programming: 3510-Flag-#* Where,

By default, Flag is '0'.

This flag is not part of system configuration and hence not saved. This flag is cleared by the system every time SE enters programming mode. SE can listen to System Messages without setting Advanced VM Programming Flag.

How to program?Step 1: Program to allow recording of System Messages for a part 01-08 using command 3511.Step 2: Program to play back recorded System Messages for a part 01-08 using command 3512.Step 3: Program to assign a system application to a System VM partition using command 3513.Step 4: Program to assign VM Part Time Duration using command 3514.Step 5: Program to set default values for System VM Applications programming using command 3515.

Step 1Use following command to allow recording of System Messages for a part 01-08:

Flag Meaning 0 Only limited VM programming allowed 1 Full VM programming allowed


Matrix

3511-Part-#* Where,Part is from 01 to 08.

Step 2Use following command to play back recorded System Messages for a part 01-08: 3512-Part-#* Where,Part is from 01 to 08.

Step 3Use following command to assign system application to a System VM partition: 3513-Application-Part-#* Where,Application is from 1 to 8Part is from 00 to16.

Step 4Use following command to assign VM part time duration: 3514-VM Part-Time Duration-#* Where,VM Part is from 01 to 08.Time Duration is from 00 to 16 seconds.

Step 5Use following command to set default values for System VM Application: 3515-#*

User VM MessagesUser VM programming area has 8 parts. VM part numbers 09-16 are assigned as User VM messages. User VMprogramming is not protected area and can be reached directly from SE programming.

How to program?Step 1: Program to allow recording of User Messages for a part 09-16 using command 3501.Step 2: Program to play back recorded User Messages for a part 09-16 using command 3502.Step 3: Program to assign a system application to a User VM partition using command 3503.Step 4: Program to assign VM Part Time Duration using command 3504.Step 5: Program to set default values for User VM Applications programming using command 3505.

Step 1Use following command to allow recording of User VM Messages for a part 09-16:3501-Part-#* Where,Part is from 09 to 16.

Step 2Use following command to play back recorded User VM Messages for a part 09-16:

Sys. VM Appl. No.

System Messages Default VM Part No. Default VM Duration

Asia Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America Asia Europe/Africa/Australia/North

America/South America 1 DID-DISA No dial 01 01 00 00 2 DID-DISA Wrong dial 02 02 00 00 3 DID-DISA Transfer 03 03 00 00 4 DID-DISA busy 04 04 00 00 5 DID-DISA No reply 05 05 00 00 6 Programming-Tone 00 06 00 00

7 Programming-Confirmation Tone 00 07 00 00

8 Programming-Error Tone 00 08 00 00


Matrix

3502-Part-#* Where,Part is from 09 to 16.

Step 3Use following command to assign system application to a User VM partition: 3503-Application-Part-#* Where,Application is from 01 to 16.Part is from 00 to 16.

Step 4Use following command to assign User VM Part Time Duration: 3504-VM Part-Time Duration-#* Where,VM Part is from 09 to 16.Time Duration is from 00-16 seconds.

Step 5Use following command to set default values for User VM Application:3505-#*

Use following command to select source for VM recording. 3520-Source-#* Where,

By default, Source for VM Recording is “Telephone”.

How to record/verify a voice message (User Message)?Recording from a telephone: • This method is very simple. Whatever we speak on the phone is recorded. It is done as follows:

• Select a good quality extension with good telephone. • Request a person with clear voice to record the message in his or her voice.• Select a peaceful place. Switch OFF fans and other sources of noise.

User VM App. No.

User Messages Default VM Part No. Default VM Duration

Asia Europe/Africa/Australia/North America/South America Asia Europe/Africa/Australia/North

America/South America

01 DID/DISA/FAX Working Hour 09 09 00 00

02 DID/DISA/FAX Break Hour 10 10 00 00

03 DID/DISA/FAX Non-Working Hour 11 11 00 00

04 DID-DISA Dial Message 12 12 00 00 05 DID Dial By Name message 13 13 00 00 06 Fax Homing Message 00 00 00 00 07 Music On Hold Message 14 14 00 00 08 Background Music 00 15 00 00 09 Dial Tone Message 00 00 00 00 10 Error Tone message 00 00 00 00 11 Ring Back tone message 00 00 00 00 12 Busy Tone message 00 00 00 00 13 Confirmation tone message 00 00 00 00 14 Alarm message 00 00 00 00 15 Auto Redial Message 15 00 00 00 16 Security Dialer Message 16 16 00 00

Source Meaning 1 Telephone 2 AIP(Analog Input Port)


Matrix

• Avoid room noise to maintain clarity of the message. • Enter in the programming mode from this extension. • Issue command 3520-1-#*. You will get confirmation message/tone.• Issue command 3501-Part-#*. You will get confirmation message/tone.• Start recording your message.• The recording is now going on. Whatever you speak on the phone is being recorded.• Replace the handset as soon as the message is over. You may use your hand to press the hook switch to reduce

the delay.• You will get ring because you are in programming mode.

• To verify the recording, issue command: 3502-Part-#*. • Listen to the whole message. • Repeat above procedure if you are not satisfied with the message.

The simple method described above is good enough for most of the applications. But if a better quality of voice message is required, we need to eliminate all the room noise picked up by the phone while recording. A better option is supported by Cosine to record high quality message. We need a cassette or CD player with pre-amplified output port. This can be done as follows: • Select the piece of music or message you want to record. • Get this message recorded with the proper media. • Select the track or the position on the media so that when you press PLAY, the desired message should start without

delay. • Connect the player with the Cosine using an audio cable. • The external music source can be connected to the music port. • Enter in the programming mode from a station. • Issue command: 3520-2-#*. You will get confirmation message/tone. • Issue command: 3501-Part-#*. You will get confirmation message/tone. • Start the player. • The recording has started. • Replace the handset as soon as the message is over. You may use your hand to press the hook switch to reduce the

delay. • You will get ring because you are in the programming mode. • Stop the music source. • To verify the recording, issue the command: 3502-Part-#*. • You will get confirmation message/tone. • Listen to the whole message. • Repeat the above procedure if you are not satisfied with the message.

The same method can be followed to record system message also. Please ensure that the VM Programming Level is programmed as Full VM programming.

Recording Messages Through the Jeeves • Jeeves supports recording of the voice messages, both system and user voice messages. • Connect the AIP port (External Music Port) of Cosine to the audio output port of the Computer. • Fro VM recording from ‘Analog Input Port’, using Jeeves, set jumper ‘SW2’ (Cosine64) and ‘SW3’ (Cosine32) to ‘AB’

position. i.e. External Music Source. If it is not set, you cannot record Voice Message from Jeeves.• Record the required message and store it .wav format. • From Jeeves (Voice Message Application Page) select the file and part number. Click on start. The message from the

file is now recorded in the selected part number. • If the system messages are to be recorded, please ensure that Full VM programming is enabled. Communication

between the Matrix Voice Message Recording Tool and Port.

Important Points:• It is possible to use the voice module for multiple applications.• Programming/feature tone, Confirmation tone and Error tone are heard only, if Voice Message Application is busy or

VM Part Number is not assigned to this tone. If Voice Message Application is free, 'Programming/Feature', 'Confirmation' and 'Error' messages are played instead of them.

Relevant Topics:1. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 161 2. Class of Service (COS) 112

=X=X=


Matrix


Walk-In Class of Service

What's this?• A user can make calls from some other stations according to his Class of Service (COS) and Toll Control

programming.• A user can make calls from any other station and still put the calls in his account.• This feature is useful to managers when they move away from their desk. Using this feature, they can make long

distance calls from any other station where such dialing is not allowed.• This facility is protected with the user password.

How to use it?

Example:A user is having station number 203. His user password is 3535. He is sitting at station number 205. He needs to make a long distance call from 205 but such facility is not allowed from there.

The user can dial Walk-In Class of Service from 205 and make necessary calls by dialing:111-203-3535On dialing above command, the system gives confirmation tone. The user can dial the trunk access code to get trunk dial tone during the confirmation tone. Alternately he can wait for the dial tone once the confirmation tone expires.

Important Points:• Only one call is allowed at a time using this feature.• To make two calls one after the other, the user needs to dial the code twice.• Walk in Class of Service is not allowed with the default user password.• Walk in Class of Service is available to all the stations. • CDC is not effective during a Walk-In.

Relevant Topic:1. User Password 326

=X=X=

1 Lift the handset. Dial tone 2 Dial 111-Station-User Password. Dial tone 3 Dial out the desired outside number.

Section 3: Appendices

Matrix

Appendix A: Technical SpecificationsSystem Capacity (Cosine-32P/64P)

Expansion Cards:

Optional Items:

Transmission Parameters:

CO Lines (FXO):

Hardware Application Cosine 32P Cosine 64P Total Ports -- 21 52 CO lines (FXO) Analog PSTN/CO Line connectivity 4 8 ISDN BRI Trunk Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Line connectivity 1 (2B+D) 2 (2B+D) Stations (FXS) Analog Phone, Modem, Fax connectivity 12 32 Digital Ports Digital Key Phone connectivity 3 8 Analog Input Port External Music 1 1 Analog Output Port Public Address System 1 1 Serial (RS-232C) Port Computer Connectivity 1 1 Printer Port (Centronics) Printer connectivity - 1 Digital Input Port Sensors/Panic Switches 1 1 Digital Output Port Door Lock, Relay Port, etc. 1 1 Security Dialer Emergency Dialing 1 1 Voice Module Auto Attendant and Other Voice Based Applications 256 Sec 256 Sec Real Time Clock (RTC) LCR, Alarms, Scheduled Dialing, Day/Night Mode 1 1 DTMF Decoders -- Separate for each Analog port DTMF Encoders -- Separate for each Analog port Conference Multi-Party Conference 15 Party

Card Application Cosine 32P Cosine 64P TRK1 1 CO Line port card NA Yes SLT2 2 Station ports card NA Yes DKP1 1 Digital port card NA Yes BRI1 1 ISDN BRI port card Yes NA BRI2 2 ISDN BRI ports card NA Yes AA8 8 ports Auto Attendant card Yes Yes

EON45 and EON42 : Digital Key PhoneEonSoft : PC Based Digital Key PhoneJeeves : PC Based Programming Tool

Switching : PCM/TDM, Digital Switching, 100% non-blocking

Return Loss : More than 20dBInsertion Loss : Less than 1 dBInter channel cross-talk : Less than -65dBmIdle channel noise : Less then -65dBmLongitudinal Balance : Better than 40dB

OFF-Hook Line Impedance : 600 OhmsLoop Limit : 1500 OhmsPulse Dialing : 10PPS +/-5%, Make/Break = 33:67DTMF Dialing and Reception : As per ITU-T Q.23 and Q.24CLI Reception : DTMF, FSK ITU-T V.23 and FSK Bellcore 212


Matrix

Stations Lines (FXS):

BRI Trunks:

DKP (Digital Key Phones):

Environmental Conditions:

Call Maturity : Delay TypeProtection : As per EN55024 standard (External primary protection required)Connectivity : • Amphenol 36-way connector for Cosine64P (20-Pair cable, 0.5mm/0.019”).

• Push Type for Cosine32P (Single pair wire, 0.5mm/0.019”).Answer Supervision on Trunk : None, Polarity ReversalDisconnect Supervision on Trunk

: None, Polarity Reversal, Open Loop Disconnect

Loop Limit : 1500 Ohms Maximum (Excluding Telephone)Loop Current : 39mARing Voltage : 60Vrms 25HzOFF-Hook Line Impedance : Resistive 600 Ohms and Complex [350 Ohms + (1000 Ohms // 0.21 F)] as per

FCC Part 68Pulse Detection : 10 PPS +/-5%, Make/Break = 33:67DTMF Detection : As per ITU-T Q.24CLI Presentation : DTMF, FSK ITU-T V.23 and FSK Bellcore 212Protection : As per EN55024 StandardConnections : • As per 36-way connector for Cosine64P (20-pair cable, 0.55/0.019”)

• Push Type connector for Cosine32P (Single pair wire, 0.5mm/0.019”)

Channels : 2B+DPersonality : Network (NT) and Terminal (TE)Signaling : Euro ISDN ETSI DSS1 CTR3 (NET3), ITU-T Q.921, Q.931, US National ISDN-1,

German 1TR6, France VNx, Australian TS-013, TS-031.Countries Supported : Europe, USA, Germany, France, UK, Australia, China, Hong Kong, Korea,

SingaporeSupplementary Services : Euro ISDN, US Nation ISDN

Interfaces : Single pair for Speech, Signaling and Powerchannels : 2B+DSignaling : Proprietary ProtocolLoop Limit : 150 Ohms MaximumProtection : Built-In Secondary protection. External primary protection required

Analog Input Port (AIP) : 0.7Vrms, Isolated, Push Type ConnectorAnalog Output Port (AOP) : 0.7Vrms, Isolated, Push Type ConnectorDigital Input Port (DIP) : Loop Sensing-Open/Close, 5mA, Push Type ConnectorDigital Output Port (DOP) : VDC Max= 60VDC, IDC max = 0.15A, Push Type ConnectorPower Failure Transfer : All CO lines to fixed stationsPower Supply : 90-265VAC, 47-65Hz

Cosine32: 20W typicalCosine64: 40W typical

Battery Backup : 24V, 7-10 AH

Operating Temperature : 0oC to +55oC (34oF to 131oF)Operating Humidity : 5-95% RH, non-condensingStorage Temperature : -40oC to +85oC (-40oF to 185oF)Storage Humidity : 0-95% RH, non-condensing


Matrix

Packaging:

CompliancesFCC Directives:FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class A.

TEC Interface Approval:• Cosine-64P complies with Standard “Privately Owned PABX With 2 Wire Interface-IR/PBX-01/02 Jan 2003” FCC, CE,

TEC approvals for Cosine-32P are under process.

Note:• Refer Appendix F: Regulatory Information for other compliances.

=X=X=

Cosine-32PDimension (wxhxd) : 310 x 505 x 75 mm (12.20 x 19.88 x 2.95 Inch)Weight : 2 Kg. (4.4 lbs)Installation : Wall MountableCosine-64PDimension (wxhxd) : 250 x 330 x 75 mm (9.84 x 12.99 x 2.95 Inch)Weight : 3 Kg. (6.6 lbs)Installation : Wall Mountable


Matrix

Appendix B: Troubleshooting• All servicing to be undertaken ONLY by qualified service personnel. There are no user serviceable parts inside the

unit.• Always switch off "MAINS" and "BATTERY" marked switches of the system before opening the system, and remove

power cable from Mains plug, to avoid risk of electric shock.• Fuse locations are marked on PCB as 'F1' and 'F2', where 'F1' means Fuse provided for AC Mains and 'F2' means

fuse provided for external battery port.

Cosine is not turning ON • Check the Mains Power.• Check the Mains Switch. • Check the Mains Fuse (F1).• Check the MOV (275/20).• Check for loose connection of PT3 connector (connecting PS card to CPU card for Cosine-64P).• Please contact authorised Matrix dealer.

Cosine does not work in power down mode • Check the battery power. The battery should be charged properly.• Check the Battery Switch.• Check Battery Fuse (F2).• Check the Battery connector and the battery cable for any open circuit.• Please contact authorized Matrix dealer.

One Station is not working• Change the telephone instrument and check.• Check wiring of that Station.• Please contact authorised Matrix dealer.

When I call 21 Station the call goes to 22• Dial 130 from 21 (your call might have been forwarded).• Station not ringing.• Check ringer volume of the telephone instrument.• Try replacing the telephone instrument.• Dial 130 to disable call forward/call follow me feature.

Station found busy• Check whether hook-set is properly kept on the cradle.• Try replacing telephone instrument.• Check wiring.

Station cannot dial • Try replacing telephone instrument.• Ensure dialling is not disabled through programming.

Incoming Call does not land correctly• Ensure proper programming of trunk landing group for the trunk.• Check for Call Privacy from incoming calls.• Check the Time programmed in the PBX. This is a time sensitive feature.

CLI Number does not come on the Station • Please check up with your Telephone Company (Service Provider) for CLI facility.• Please check whether the Station where you are checking CLI function is programmed as CLI Phone.• Please contact authorised Matrix dealer.

There is lot of hum on PAS port• Please check PAS port.• Please check the amplifier.

Location Cosine-64P Cosine-32P F1 Fuse 3.15A Slow Blow Fuse 2A Slow Blow F2 Fuse 3.5A Fast Blow Fuse 2A Fast Blow


Matrix

• Please check for any open in the wiring.• Please check for any mismatch of speaker and amplifier.

Digital Output Port does not operate• Please check the connections made.• Please check for the polarity. Refer to the figure shown in topic "Digital Output Port (DOP)".• Please check for any open circuit in the wiring.

Security Dialer does not work• Please check the connections of the Panic Switch/Sensor to the "Digital Input Port (DIP)". • Please check for any open circuit in the wiring. • Please check the programming for Security Dialer • Please contact authorized Matrix dealer.

=X=X=


Matrix


Appendix C: Software Specifications

=X=X=

Parameters Maximum Value Allowed Lists and Denied Lists : 15Alternate Numbers : 99 Auto Call Back-No Reply : Any Number Auto Call Back-On Busy : 8 Auto Redial : 8 Call Duration Control tables : 5 Call Pick Up Groups : 8 Call Progress Tone Type : 10 Class of Service Groups : 15 Conference-15 Party : 1 Conference-3 party : 5 Daily Alarms : 8 Date and Time Alarms : 8 Date Formats : 2 Department Groups : 5 Distinctive Rings Type : 9 Do Not Disturb Lists : 15 Duration Alarms : 8 Emergency Numbers : 3 Global Abbreviated Directory : 89 LCR Types : 4 Maximum Number of IC Calls : Equal to trunk lines Maximum Number of OG Calls : Equal to trunk lines Music Sources : 2 Number of Service Providers : 4 Operator : 1 Paging Zones : 5 PBX Expansion Count : 9 Personal Abbreviated Directory : 10 Priority Levels : 9 Region Code : 6 SE/SA Mode : 1 SMDR Incoming Buffer : 500 SMDR Outgoing Buffer : 500 Station Group : 16 Time Alarms : 8 Time Tables : 5 Trunk Access Groups : 8 Trunk Landing Groups : 8 VMS Groups : 5 Voice Messages : 16

Matrix

Appendix D: Features at a GlanceAbbreviated Dialing

Alarms

Auto Call Back

Auto Redial

Back Ground Music

Barge-In

Call Follow Me

Call Forward

Call Park

Call Pick Up

Global/Personal Abbreviated Dialing 8-Directory Code or 6-Location CodeProgram Numbers in Personal Memory Directory 108-Location Code-Trunk Access Code-Number-#*

Set Duration Alarms 161-MinutesSet Time Alarms 162-Hours-Minutes Set Daily Alarms 163-Hours-MinutesSet Date and Time Alarms 164-Date-Month-Year-Hours-Minutes Set Remote Alarms 165-Station-Alarm Type-Parameters Cancel Alarm 160 or 165-Station-0

Auto Call Back-On Busy or No Reply 2 Cancel Auto Call Back 102

Auto Redial 171 Cancel Auto Redial 170

Enable/Disable Back Ground Music 1099

Barge-In 4

Set Call Follow Me 135-Station-User Password Cancel Call Follow Me 130

Call Forward-All Calls to Another Station 131-Station Call Forward-All Calls to External Number 131-Trunk Access Code-Destination Number-#* Call Forward-If Busy 132-Station Call Forward-If Busy-All Calls to External No. 132-Trunk Access Code-Destination Number-#* Call Forward-If No Reply 133-Station Call Forward-If No Reply-All Calls to External. No. 133-Trunk Access Code-Destination Number-#* Call Forward-If Busy or No Reply 134-Station Call Forward-If Busy or No Reply-All to Extr. No. 134-Trunk Access Code-Destination Number-#* ECF-for Internal or External or Both 137-Code Call Forward-Dual Ring 1361 Disable Call Forward-Dual Ring 1360Cancel Call Forward 130

Park a Call 117 Retrieve the Parked Call 118

Call Pick Up-General 4 Call Pick Up-Selective 12-Station


Matrix

Call Splitting

Call Transfer

Cancel Station Features

Conference-3 Party


Continued Dialing

Conversation Recording

Department Call

Directory Dialing by Name


Dynamic Lock

Forced Answer

Hold

Hotdesk

Hotline

Call Splitting Flash-1

Call Transfer Flash-StationCall Transfer-Trunk-to-Trunk Flash-#

Cancel Station Features 100

Conference-3 Party Flash-0 Conference-Unsupervised Flash-#

Conference-Multi Party Flash-191

Continued Dialing Flash-*

Conversation Recording Flash-1095

Department Call Department Number

Call a Station #-First Three Characters of the Name

Set DND 181 Cancel DND 180

Change User Password 114-Old User Password-New User Password Select Auto-Manual Lock 142-User Password-Minutes Lock Station Manually 140 Open Dynamic Lock 141-User Password

Forced Answer 5

Put the Caller on Hold Flash

Set Hot Desking 1091-Station Number-User Password Cancel Hot Desking 1090

Set Hotline 151-Station Set Hot Outward Dialing 152-Trunk Access Code HOD with Number 153-Trunk Access Code-Number-#* Set HotLine Timer 154-Timer Cancel Hotline/HOD 150


Matrix

Interrupt Request

Last Caller Recall

Last Five Call Trance

Last Number Redial

Live Call Screening

Live Call Supervision

Message Paging

Mute

Operator

Override

Paging

Programming using Phone Wizard

Raid

Room Monitor

Selective Trunk Access

System Administrator (SA) Mode


Interrupt Request 3

Trace Last Caller to your Station 112

Last Five Call Trace 113

Last External Number Dialed 7

Activate LCS 1033 Deactivate LCS 1034

Live Call Supervision 1035-Station

Message Paging 1032-Page Zone-Message Index

Mute Press the DSS key assigned for Mute

Call on Operator Station 9 or 0

Override 4

Announcement on a Port 3921 Meet Me Paging 1031-Page Zone Number

Enter Phone Wizard Mode 1#98-SE Password Exit Phone Wizard Mode 0-#*

Raid 5

Room Monitor 101-Station

Access a Particular Trunk 69-Trunk Software Port Number or 89-Trunk Software Port Number

Enter SA Programming Mode 1#92-SA Password Exit SA Programming Mode 00-#*

Enter SE Programming Mode 1#91-SE Password Exit SE Programming Mode 00-#*


Matrix

Time Table

Trunk Access Groups

Trunk Reservation

User Absent/Present

User Password

Walk-In Class Of Service

=X=X=

Set Time Zone for a Station 115-User Password-Zone

Grab Trunk Access Group 6-Trunk Access Index or 8-Trunk Access Index

Reserve a Trunk 6 Cancel a Reserved Trunk 102

To make User Absent 104-User Password-0 To make User Present 104-User Password-1

To Change the User Password from the Station 114-Old User Password-New User Password

To Walk-In Class Of Service 111-Station-User Password


Matrix

Appendix E: System CommandsAbbreviated Dialing

Access Codes

Alarms

Allowed List and Denied List

Alternate Number Dialing

Answer Signaling on SLT Port

Answer Supervision on Trunk Port

To program telephone number at a particular location 2301-Index-Number-#*To clear an index in global memory 2304-Index-#*To assign a TAG to a number in global directory 2302-Index-Trunk Access Group-#*To program name to a particular location 2305-Index-Name-#*To clear name to a particular location 2305-Index-#*

To program a feature code for a dial phase feature 4316-Feature Number-Feature Code-#*To clear a feature code of a dial phase feature 4316-Feature Number-#*To default the feature codes of all dial phase features 4317-#*To clear the feature codes of all dial phase features 4318-#*To program the feature code for a routing phase feature 4319-Feature Number-Feature Code-#*To clear the feature code of a routing phase feature 4319-Feature Number-#*To default the feature codes of all routing phase feature 4320-#*To clear the feature codes of all routing phase features 4321-#*To program the feature code for a block phase feature 4322-Feature Number-Feature Code-#*To clear the feature code of a block phase feature 4322-Feature Number-#*To default the feature codes of all block phase features 4323-#*To clear the feature codes of all block phase features 4324-#*To program the feature code for a placed phase feature 4325-Feature Number-Feature Code-#*To clear the feature code of a placed phase feature 4325-Feature Number-#*To default the feature codes of all placed phase feature 4326-#*To clear the feature codes of all placed phase features 4327-#*To prog. the feature code for a matured phase feature 4328-Feature Number-Feature Code-#*To clear the feature code of a matured phased feature 4328-Feature Number-#*To default the feature codes of all matured phase 4329-#*To clear the feature codes of all matured phase 4330-#*

To program alarm ring timer 12801-Seconds-#*To program alarm ring timer 22802-Seconds-#*

To program numbers in allowed list 6301-Allowed List-Location Index-Number-#*To program numbers in denied list 6302-Denied List-Location Index-Number-#*To clear an index in a allowed list 6301-Allowed List-Location Index-#*To clear an index in a denied list 6302-Denied List-Location Index-#*

To program alternate group number 2303-Index-Alternate Group Number-#*To assign same AGN to all Global memory indexes 2303-**-Alternate Group Number-#*

To program answer supervision on SLT port 1307-SLT-Answer Supervision Signal-#*

To program answer supervision on trunk port 1626-Trunk-Answer Supervision Signal-#*To program forced maturity timer for trunk 1609-Trunk-Forced Maturity Timer-#*


Matrix

Auto Call Back

Auto Redial

Automated Control Applications

Background Music (BGM)

Barge-In

Behind the PBX Application

Call Disconnect Tone (CDT)

Call Duration Control

Call Forward

Call Park

To program auto call back ring timer 3001-Seconds-#*

To program low priority auto redial timer 2204-Seconds-#*To program a number of trial counts for low priority AR 2205-Count-#*To program high priority auto redial timer 2206-Seconds-#*To program a number of trial counts for high priority AR 2207-Count-#*To program auto redial dial tone wait timer 2201-Seconds-#*To program auto redial RBT wait timer 2202-Seconds-#*To program auto redial ring timer 2203-Seconds-#*

To choose the mode of operation for the DOP 6401-Mode-#*To program ON duration timer 6402-ON Duration Timer-#*To program OFF duration timer 6403-OFF Duration Timer-#*To program the schedule ON time 6405-Index-Schedule ON Time-#*To program the schedule OFF time 6406-Index-Schedule OFF Time-#*To enable/disable an entry in the timetable 6404-Index-Flag-#*To operate the DOP manually 6407-Flag-#*To default the control application parameter of the DOP 6408-#*

To program background music 5302-Music Type-#*

To program barge-in timer 3003-Seconds-#*

To program PBX expansion count (PEC) for a trunk 5001-Trunk-PEC Count-#*

To program disconnect tone’s ON time for trunk 1631-Trunk-ON Time-#*To program disconnect tone’s OFF time for trunk 1632-Trunk-OFF Time-#*To ena/dis CDT for DID no digit dial state 1629-Trunk-Flag-#*To ena/dis CDT for OG+IC other than DID no digit dial 1630-Trunk-Flag-#*To prog. DID disconnect tone detection timer for trunk 1633-Trunk-Timer-#*

To enable CDC for outgoing call 6202-CDC Table-Code-#*To enable CDC for incoming call 6203-CDC Table-Code-#*To assign allowed list to a table 6205-CDC Table-Allowed List-#*To assign denied list to a table 6206-CDC Table-Denied List-#*To assign CDC timer 6207-CDC Table-CDC Timer-#*To assign disconnection flag 6208-CDC Table-Disconnection Flag-#*To assign a CDC table to a SLT user 6211-SLT-CDC Table-#*To assign a CDC table to a DKP user 6212-DKP-CDC Table-#*

To program call forward-RBT timer 2601-Seconds-#*

To program call park timer 4201-Seconds-#*


Matrix

Call Pick Up

Call Progress Tones

Call Taping

Call Transfer

Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)

Calling Line Identification Based Routing

Class Of Service (COS)

To program call park count 4202-Count-#*

To program call pickup group for SLT user 2501-SLT-Call Pickup Group-#*To program call pickup group for DKP user 2502-DKP-Call Pickup Group-#*

To program cadence time for a type of CPT 5201-Tone Type-Cadence no-On/Off Timer-#* To program frequency for a CPT 5202-Tone Type-Frequency-#*To program the dial tone timer 5211-Seconds-#*To program the ring back tone timer 5212-Seconds-#*To program the busy tone timer 5213-Seconds-#*To program the feature tone timer 5216-Seconds-#*To program the feature confirmation tone timer 5215-Seconds-#*To program the programming confirmation tone timer 5219-Seconds-#*To program the programming error tone timer 5218-Seconds-#*

To prog. a port in whose mailbox the call is to be taped 7001-Station Type-Station-#*To enable/disable call taping of external calls for SLT 7010-SLT-Flag-#*To assign a allowed list to a SLT 7011-SLT-Allowed List-#*To enable/disable call taping of external calls for DKP 7020-DKP-Flag-#*To assign a allowed list to a DKP 7021-DKP-Allowed List-#*To enable/disable call taping of internal calls from SLT 7031-SLT-Flag-#*To enable/disable call taping of internal calls from DKP 7032-DKP-Flag-#*To enable/disable the beeps at the time of call taping 4002-Flag-#

To program transfer-while ringing timer 4101-Seconds-#*To program transfer-on busy timer 4102-Seconds-#*To program trunk-to-trunk inactivity timer 4103-Seconds-#*

To ena/dis CLI storage and CLI display on a trunk 6101-Trunk-CLI Type-#*To program a CLI type for a SLT 6105-SLT-CLI Type-#*To program digit padding on SLT 6106-SLT-Count-#*To program CLIP-Hold type for a SLT 6107-SLT-Type-#*To program CLIP-Hold type for a DKP 6108-DKP-Type-#*

To program the incoming number in a CLI table 6102-Index-Telephone Number-#*To program CLI based routing destination type for an Index 6103-Index-Station Type-Station-#*To program the name of calling party 6104-Index-Name-#*To clear a number from a index in the CLI table 6102-Index-#*To clear a name from a index in the CLI number 6104-Index-#*

To enable/disable feature in a COS group 1701-COS Group-Feature Number-Code-#*To enable/disable all the features in a COS group 1702-COS Group-**-Code-#*To default a COS Group 1703-COS Group-#*To assign a COS group to a SLT user during WH 1711-SLT-COS Group-#*To assign a COS group to a SLT user during BH 1712-SLT-COS Group-#*


Matrix

Communication Port

Conference 3-Party


Conflict Dialing

Daylight Saving Time

Default Settings

Department Call

Dial by Name Using DID

Digital Input Port (DIP)

Digital Key Phone-Operation

To assign a COS group to a SLT user during NWH 1713-SLT-COS Group-#*To assign a COS group to a DKP user during WH 1721-DKP-COS Group-#*To assign a COS group to a DKP user during BH 1722-DKP-COS Group-#*To assign a COS group to a DKP user during NWH 1723-DKP-COS Group-#*

Pause/resume data comm. between process & COM 5920-Flag-#*

To enable/disable conference beeps timer 4002-Code-#*

To enable/disable conference beeps timer 4002-Code-#*To program conference timer 4001-Timer-#*

To program conflict dialing wait timer 5221-Timer-#*

To program the DST mode 1010-ModeTo advanced the clock at the beginning of the DST 1011-Date-Month-Current Time-Adv. Time-#*To delay the clock at the end of DST 1012-Date-Month-Cur. Time-Delay Time-#*To program the DST type 1013-Type-#*

To load the default parameters 5501-Reverse SE Password-#*To load the default timer values 5502-#*

To assign station group to a Department Group 2401-Dept. Group No.-Station Gp. No.-#*To program a access code for a department group 4310-Department Group-Access Code-#*To clear a access code for a department group 4310-Department Group-#*To default the access code of all the department group 4311-#*To clear a access codes of all the department group 4312-#*

To program the station name for a SLT 1305-SLT-Abbreviated Name-#*To clear a station name for a SLT 1305-SLT-#*To program the station name for a DKP 1424-DKP-Abbreviated Name-#*To clear a station name for a DKP 1424-DKP-#*

To enable/disable the DIP 6801-Code-#*To program a DIP as a active high/active low 6802-Code-#*To program the event sense timer 6803-Event Sense Timer-#*

To program CA for DKP station 1401-DKP-Call Appearance-#*To set the ring er tune to a DKP 1402-DKP-Ringer Tune-#*To set the ringer volume to a DKP 1403-DKP-Ringer Volume-#*To program the ringer mode to a DKP 1404-DKP-Ringer Mode-#*To program the ringer delay timer to a DKP 1405-DKP-Ringer Delay Timer-#*To program the acknowledge mode to a DKP 1406-DKP-Acknowledge Mode-#*


Matrix

Digital Key Phone-Soft Key Programming

Digital Output Port (DOP)

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Disconnect Signaling on SLT Port

To program the ringer auto acknowledge timer to a DKP 1407-DKP-Ringer Auto Ack. Timer-#*To set the handset MIC volume of a DKP 1408-DKP-Handset MIC Volume-#*To set the handset speaker volume to a DKP 1409-DKP-Handset Speaker Volume-#*To set the speaker phone MIC volume of a DKP 1410-DKP-Speaker Phone MIC Volume-#*To set the speaker phone speaker volume to a DKP 1411-DKP-Speaker Phone Speaker Volume-#*To set the key click volume to a DKP 1412-DKP-Key Click Volume-#*To enable/disable DTMF generation flag to a DKP 1414-DKP-DTMF Generation Control-#*To adjust DTMF transmit level to a DKP 1415-DKP-DTMF Transmit Level-#*To program call answer type to a DKP 1416-DKP-Call Answer Type-#*To program auto answer time to a DKP 1417-DKP-Auto Answer Time-#*To enable headset connectivity on EON42 1413-DKP-Headset Connectivity-#*To adjust LCD backlight level of EON42 1426-DKP-LCD Backlight Level-#*To adjust contrast level of EON42 1427-DKP-Contrast Level-#*To program LCD backlight OFF timer of EON42 1428-DKP-LCD Backlight OFF Timer-#*To set the destination to playing ring on EON42 1429-DKP-Ring Destination-#*

To assign a function to DKP keys 1501-DKP-Key Location-Func. Type-Function No.-#*To copy entire key map to one DKP to another 1504-Source DKP-Destination DKP-#*To default the key mapping of a DKP (Executive) 1502-DKP-#*To default the key mapping of an operator 1503-DKP-#*

To program a DOP as a normally open/normally closed 6901-Code-#*

To active DID on a trunk for working hours 3301-Trunk-Code-#*To active DID on a trunk for break hours 3302-Trunk-Code-#*To active DID on a trunk for non-working hours 3303-Trunk-Code-#*To program DID inactivity timer 3311-Seconds-#*To program DID/DISA/Fax answer wait timer 3312-Seconds-#*To program DID/DISA/Fax music timer 3313-Seconds-#*To program DID/DISA/Fax beeps timer 3314-Seconds-#*To program DID ring timer 3315-Seconds-#*To program DID busy tone timer 3316-Seconds-#*To program, DID error tone timer 3317-Seconds-#*To enable/disable voice guidance on a trunk for WH 1611-Trunk-Flag-#*To enable/disable voice guidance on a trunk for BH 1612-Trunk-Flag-#*To enable/disable voice guidance on a trunk for NWH 1613-Trunk-Flag-#*

To active DISA on a trunk for working hour 3401-Trunk-Code-#*To active DISA on a trunk for break hour 3402-Trunk-Code-#*To active DISA on a trunk for non-working hour 3403-Trunk-Code-#* To program DISA idle state timer 3411-Seconds-#*To program DISA inactivity timer 3412-Seconds-#*

To program disconnect supervision on SLT 1308-SLT-Disconnection Supervision Signal-#*To program open loop disconnect time on SLT 1309-SLT-Open Loop Disconnect Timer-#*


Matrix

Disconnect Supervision on Trunk Port

Distinctive Rings


Emergency Dialing

External Call Forward (ECF)

Fax Homing

Flash Timer

Flexible Numbers

Interrupt Request

ISDN-BRI

To program disconnect supervision on Trunk 1627-Trunk-Disconnection Supervision Signal-#*To program open loop disconnect timer on Trunk 1628-Trunk-Open Loop Disconnect Timer-#*

To program cadences for a ring type 5801- Application Type-Ring Type-#*To program ring cadence OFF timer for trunk 1634-Trunk-Ring Cadence OFF Timer-#*

To program DND list 2701-DND List-DND List Index-Station Type-Station-#*To assign a DND list to a SLT 2702-SLT-DND List-#*To assign a DND list to a DKP 2703-DKP-DND List-#*

To program an emergency number 4331-Feature Number-Feature Code-#*To clear the an emergency number 4331-Feature Number-#*To default the all emergency numbers 4332-#*To clear the all emergency numbers 4333-#*To program a TAG for dialing the emergency number 6623-Trunk Access Group-#*

To enable/disable ECF on a trunk 3201-Trunk-Code-#*To assign destination TAG to forward the calls of trunk 3202-Trunk-Destination TAG-#*To assign dest. No. where the calls are to be frwd. 3203-Trunk-Telephone Number-#*To clear the destination number assigned to a trunk 3203-Trunk-#*

To enable/disable fax homing on CO line for WH 4401-Trunk-Fax Homing-#*To enable/disable fax homing on CO line for BH 4402-Trunk-Fax Homing-#*To enable/disable fax homing on CO line for NWH 4403-Trunk-Fax Homing-#*To define fax homing station for a trunk 4404-Trunk-SLT-#*To define fax homing timer for a trunk 4405-Fax Homing Wait Timer-#*To define fax homing ring timer 4406-Fax Ring Timer-#*

To program flash timer for a SLT 5601-SLT-Flash Timer-#*To program flash timer for a DKP 5602-DKP-Flash Timer-#*To program flash timer for a trunk 5603-Trunk-Flash Timer-#*

To program a flexible number for a SLT 4301-SLT-Flexible Number-#*To default the flexible number of all the SLTs 4302-#*To clear the flexible number of all the SLTs 4303-#*To program a flexible number for a DKP 4304-DKP-Flexible Number-#*To default the flexible number of all the DKPs 4305-#*To clear the flexible number of all the DKPs 4306-#*

To program interrupt request timer 3002-Seconds-#*

To program the dial type of BRI 7101-BRI-Code-#*To program type of number for source(Cosine) 7102-BRI-Type of Number-#*


Matrix

Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection (LCR-CPS)

Least Cost Routing-Destination and Time Based

Least Cost Routing-Number Based

Least Cost Routing-Time Based

Live Call Screening

To prg. Numbering plan Identification for Source 7103-BRI-Numbering Plan Identification-#*To program Type of number for destination (ISDN Exchange)

7104-BRI-Type of Number-#*

To program Numbering Plan Identi. for Dest. (ISDN Exch.) 7105-BRI-Numbering Plan Identification-#*To assign MSN/DDI number to SLT for BRI 7153-SLT-BRI-MSN/DDI Number-#*To assign MSN/DDI number to DKP for BRI 7154-DKP-BRI-MSN/DDI Number-#*To program MSN/DDI No. for an Index of MSN/DDI Table 7141-BRI-Index-MSN/DDI Number-#*To program Dest. Port for an index of MSN/DDI for WH 7142-BRI-Index-Dest. Type-Destination Port No.-#*To program Dest. Port for an index of MSN/DDI for BH 7143-BRI-Index-Dest. Type-Destination Port No.-#*To prg. destination Port for an index of MSN/DDI for NWH 7144-BRI-Index-Dest. Type-Destinaiton Port No.-#*To set BRI MSN/DDI Transmit Method 7161-BRI-MSN/DDI Digits Tx Method-#*To set Overlap receiving timer 7162-Timer-#*To set MSN/DDI ring Timer 7147-MSN/DDI Ring Timer-#*

To enable/disable CPS for a Trunk Access Group 4701-Trunk-Code-#*To program the number in CPS string table for TAG 4702-TAG-Index-Destination Number-#*To clear the number in CPS string table for TAG 4702-TAG-Index-#*To clear all numbers in CPS string table for TAG 4703-TAG-#*To program CPS string in CPS string table for TAG 4704-TAG-Index-CPS String-#*To clear an entry from CPS string table for TAG 4704-TAG-Index-#*To clear all CPS strings in CPS string table for TAG 4705-TAG-#*To copy entire CPS string table of one to another TAG 4711-Source TAG-Destination TAG-#*

To program LCR type for a TAG 4830-TAG-LCR Type-#*To access code of a service provider 4831-Trunk-Service Provider Code-#*To program time zone index for mixed LCR 4821-TZ Index-Start Time-End Time-#*To program number index for mixed LCR 4822-Number Index-Number String-#*To clear a number index from mixed LCR 4822-Number Index-#*To program SP sequence for each number and TZ 4823-Number Index-TZ Index-SP1-SP2-SP3-SP4-#*To default mixed LCR 4820-#*

To program LCR type for a TAG 4830-TAG-LCR Type-#*To access code of a service provider 4831-Trunk-Service Provider Code-#*To program number index 4811-Number Index-Number String-#*To clear number string for number index 4811-Number Index-#*To program SP sequence for each number index 4812-Number Index-SP1-SP2-SP3-SP4-#*To default number wise LCR table 4810-#*

To program LCR type for a TAG 4830-TAG-LCR Type-#*To access code of a service provider 4831-Trunk-Service Provider Code-#*To program time zone index 4802-TZ Index-Start Time-End Time-#*To program SP sequence for each time zone 4803-Time Zone Index-SP1-SP2-SP3-SP4-#*To default time zone wise LCR table 4801-#*

To program live call screening timer 3901-Seconds-#*


Matrix

Message Paging

Music On Hold

Name Programming

Operator

Paging

Printer Port

Priority

Programming Using Jeeves

Programming Using Phone Wizard

To program a message 3102-Page Message No.-Message String-#*To clear a message string 3102-Page Message Number-#*To program page message ring timer 3103-Page Message Ring Timer-#*

To program music source type 5301-Music Source Type-#*

To program a name to a SLT 1304-SLT-Name-#*To clear the SLT name 1304-SLT-#*To program a name to a DKP 1423-DKP-Name-#*To clear the DKP name 1423-DKP-#*To program a name to a Trunk 1624-Trunk-Name-#*To clear the Trunk name 1624-Trunk-#*

To program the operator for working hour 2101-Station Type-Station-#*To program the operator for break hour 2102-Station Type-Station-#*To program the operator for non-working hour 2103-Station Type-Station-#*To assign time table to the operator 2111-Time Table-#*To assign time zone if timetable set is manual 2112-Zone-#*

To program an entry for a PZ in the paging zone table 3101-PZ-Port Index-Station Type-Station-#*To program the access code for a paging port 4313-AOP-Access Code-#*To default the access code of an AOP 4314-#*To clear access codes for an AOP 4315-#*

To pause/resume data comm. between printer and process 5930-Flag-#*

To assign priority to SLT 2901-SLT-Priority-#*To assign priority to DKP 2902-DKP-Priority-#*To assign priority to trunk 2903-Trunk-Priority-#*

To assign a port for Jeeves 5901-Code-#*Start/abort the data commu. between the Jeeves ass. port 5902-Code-#*

Set Current Date 27-Date-Month-Year-Day-#*Set Current Time 28-Hour-Minutes-#*Change New SE Password 291-New SE Password-#*Change New SA Password 292-New SA Password-#*Set Day/Night Class of Service 31-Extension-Day COS Group-Night COS Group-#*Set Day/Night Toll Control 32-Extension-Day AL/DL List-Night AL/DL List-#*Clear all the features 343-Extension-#*Set Flash Timer for extension 36-Extension-Flash Timer Count-#*Give flexible number to the extension 37-Software Port Number-Flexible Number-#*Load default flexible number 37-*-0-#*Assign Operator extension 391-Extension-#*


Matrix

Raid

Real Time Clock

Region Code

Scheduled Dialing

Security Dialer

SLT Basic Parameters

Enable/Disable and set dial type to the trunk 41-Trunk-Enable/Disable Flag-Dial Type-#*Set DID ON/OFF 43-Trunk-Day Code-Night Code-#*Set Fax Homing ON/OFF 44-Trunk-Day Code-Night Code-#*Set DISA ON/OFF 45-Trunk-Dat Code-Night Code-#*Set Trunk Landing Destination for Day Mode 47-Trunk-Ext1-Ext2-Ext3-Ext4-Ext5-#*Set Trunk Landing Destination for Night Mode 48-Trunk-Ext1-Ext2-Ext3-Ext4-Ext5-#*Set Fax Homing Destination 49-Trunk-Ext-#*Set Hunt Timer 212-Timer-#*Set Hunting Scheme 46-Trunk-Day Hunting Sch.-Night Hunting Sch.-#*

To enable/disable the beeps at the time of raid 4002-Code-#*

To choose the date format type 1001-Date Format-#*To set date parameters as per date format 1002-Date Parameters-#*To set the day of week 1003-Day-#*To set time 1004-Hours-Minutes-Seconds-#*

To select the Region 5511-Region Code-#*

To program a number in the scheduled dialing table 6502-Number Index-Number-#*To program a trunk for the number to be dialed out 6503-Number Index-Trunk-#*To program time at which the number is to be dialed out 6504-Number Index-HH-MM-#*To default all parameters related to scheduled dialing 6501-#*

To program SLT/DKP port to receive the emergency call 6602-Port Type-Port Number-#*To program the external number 6603-Index-Global Memory Index-#*To program the number of trials for an external number 6604-Count-#*To program the time interval between two trials 6605-Time Interval-#*To program the time table 6606-Time Table-#*To assign the TZ if the timetable assigned is manual 6607-Zone-#*To program the delay dial timer 6608-Timer-#*To program the DIP response for working hour 6611-Response-#*To program the DIP response for break hour 6612-Response-#*To program the DIP response for non-working hour 6613-Response-#*To assign default values to the security dialing para. 6601-#*

To program a name to a SLT 1304-SLT-Name-#*To clear the SLT name 1304-SLT-#*To program a SLT for abbreviated name 1305-SLT-Abbreviated Name-#*To clear abbreviated name of a SLT 1305-SLT-#*To default settings of SLT parameters 1301-SLT-#*To copy the SLT parameters to one SLT to another SLT 1302-Source SLT-Destination SLT-#*To program AC impedance for a SLT 1306-SLT-Code-#*To program inter digit-digit wait timer 5220-Seconds-#*


Matrix

Station Group

Software Port and Hardware ID

Station Message Detail Recording-Incoming

To program Station Group 4502-Station Group-Dest. Index-Station Type-Station-#*

To program null in all index of a station group 4510-Station Group-#*To program Time for which destination in group should ring 4503-Station Group-Destination Index-Ring Timer-#*To program conti./non-conti. ring for dest. in the group 4504-Station Grp-Dest. Index-Continuous Ring Flag-#*To program rotation method for a Station Group 4505-Station Group-Rotation Method-#*To default a station group 4501-Station Group-#*

To assign hardware ID to a SLT software port 1201-SLT-Hardware ID-#*To assign hardware ID to a DKP software port 1202-DKP-Hardware ID-#*To assign hardware ID to a trunk software port 1203-Trunk-Hardware ID-#*

To set SMDR storage mode 3601-Storage Mode-#*To store normal calls 3602-Flag-#*To store DID calls 3603-Flag-#*To store Unanswered Calls 3604-Flag-#*To store DID unanswered calls 3605-Flag-#*To store DISA calls 3606-Flag-#*To store calls on a trunk 3610-Trunk-Flag-#*To store calls-speech duration 3611-MM-SS-#*To store calls-unanswered duration 3612-MM-SS-#*To store calls-hold duration 3613-MM-SS-#*To assign a destination port for online printing 3650-Code-#*To assign a destination port for offline printing 3655-Code-#*To set filter for Normal calls 3662-Flag-#*To set filter for DID calls 3663-Flag-#*To set filter for Unanswered calls 3664-Flag-#*To set filter for DID unanswered calls 3665-Flag-#*To set filter for DISA calls 3666-Flag-#*To set filter for calls unanswered for a duration 3672-MM-SS-#*To set filter for calls with a particular speech duration 3671-MM-SS-#*To set filter for calls put on hold for a particular duration 3673-MM-SS-#*To set filter for calls on a range of SLTs 3674-SLT-SLT-#*To set filter for calls on a range of DKPs 3675-DKP-DKP-#*To set filter for calls on a range of Trunks 3676-TRK-TRK-#*To set filter for calls between two specific dates 3677-Date-Date-#*To set filter for calls between a specific time 3678-Time-Time-#*To set filter for calls by specific numbers 3679-Allowed List-#*To default the report generation filter 3680-#*To start/abort report generation 3656-Code-#*To program the time for daily scheduled report 3692-HH-MM-#*To enable/disable the generation of daily report 3691-Flag-#*To program the time for weekly scheduled report 3694-Day-HH-MM-#*To enable/disable the generation of weekly report 3693-Flag-#*To program the time for monthly scheduled report 3696-Date-HH-MM-#*To enable/disable the generation of monthly report 3695-Flag-#*


Matrix

Station Message Detail Recording-Outgoing

System Administrator (SA) Mode


System Parameters

Time Tables

To set SMDR storage flag 3701-Storage Flag-#*To store outgoing calls made on particular trunk 3702-Trunk-Storage Flag-#*To assign an allowed list containing nos. for call storage 3703-Allowed List-#*To assign a denied list containing nos. for call storage 3704-Denied List-#*To set the filter of call duration 3705-Minutes-Seconds-#*To default the outgoing call storage filter 3710-#*To set the call splitting flag 3711-Call Splitting Flag-#*To set the originating flag 3712-Originating Flag-#*To clear the SMDR-Outgoing buffer 3725-Reverse SE Password-#*To assign a destination port for online printing 3750-Code-#*To assign a destination port for offline printing 3755-Code-#*To set filter for calls on a range of SLTs 3761-SLT-SLT-#*To set filter for calls on a range of DKPs 3762-DKP-DKP-#*To set filter for calls on a range Trunks 3763-TRK-TRK-#*To set filter calls between two specific dates 3764-Date-Date-#*To set filter calls between a specific time 3765-Time-Time-#*To set filter calls by a specific number 3766-Allowed List-#*To set filter calls lengthier than a fixed duration 3767-MM-SS-#*To default the report generation filters 3780-#*To start/abort report generation 3756-Code-#*To program the time for daily scheduled report 3792-HH-MM-#*To enable/disable the generation of daily reports 3791-Flag-#*To program the time for weekly scheduled report 3794-Day-HH-MM-#*To enable/disable the generation of weekly reports 3793-Flag-#*To program the time for monthly scheduled report 3796-Date-HH-MM-#*To enable/disable the generation of monthly reports 3795-Flag-#*

To change SA password 5707-New SA Password-#*

To change SE password 5706-New SE Password-#*

To program the customer name 5505-Customer Name-#*To clear the customer name 5505-#*To set A/m law selection 5503-Flag-#*To display the software version/revision of the system 5506-#*To program the master time zone 5508-Code-#*

To program an entry for working hour in a timetable 1101-Timetable-Day-Start Time-End Time-#*To program an entry for break hour in a timetable 1102-Timetable-Day-Start Time-End Time-#*To default a time table 1103-Time Table-#*To assign a time table to a SLT 1111-SLT-Time Table-#*To assign a time table to a DKP 1112-DKP-Time Table-#*To assign a time table to a trunk 1113-Trunk-Time Table-#*To assign a TZ to SLT for which timetable is manual 1115-SLT-Time Zone-#*To assign a TZ to DKP for which timetable is manual 1116-DKP-Time Zone-#*To assign a TZ to trunk for which timetable is manual 1117-Trunk-Time Zone-#*


Matrix

Toll Control

Trunk Access Groups

Trunk Landing Group

Trunk Parameters

To assign allowed list to SLT for working hour 1911-SLT-Allowed List-#*To assign allowed list to SLT for break hour 1912-SLT-Allowed List-#*To assign allowed list to SLT for non-working hour 1913-SLT-Allowed List-#*To assign allowed list to DKP for working hour 1921-DKP-Allowed List-#*To assign allowed list to DKP for break hour 1922-DKP-Allowed List-#*To assign allowed list to DKP for non-working hour 1923-DKP-Allowed List-#*To assign denied list to SLT for working hour 1961-SLT-Denied List-#*To assign denied list to SLT for break hour 1962-SLT-Denied List-#*To assign denied list to SLT for non-working hour 1963-SLT-Denied List-#*To assign denied list to DKP for working hour 1971-DKP-Denied List-#*To assign denied list to DKP for break hour 1972-DKP-Denied List-#*To assign denied list to DKP for non-working hour 1973-DKP-Denied List-#*To assign allowed list to SLT for locked condition 1931-SLT-Locked Allowed List-#*To assign allowed list to DKP for locked condition 1932-DKP-Locked Allowed List-#*To assign denied list to SLT for locked condition 1981-SLT-Locked Denied List-#*To assign denied list to DKP for locked condition1 982-DKP-Locked Denied List-#*

To put trunk in a trunk access group 1802-TAG-Index-Trunk-#*To program rotation for a group 1803-TAG-Rotation Code-#*To program TAG to SLT for working hour1 811-SLT-TAG Index-TAG Number-#*To program TAG to SLT for break hour 1812-SLT-TAG Index-TAG Number-#*To program TAG to SLT for non-working hour 1813-SLT-TAG Index-TAG Number-#*To program TAG to DKP for working hour 1821-DKP-TAG Index-TAG Number-#*To program TAG to DKP for break hour 1822-DKP-TAG Index-TAG Number-#*To program TAG to DKP for non-working hour 1823-DKP-TAG Index-TAG Number-#*To program the desirable access code for a TAG 4307-TAG Index-Access Code-#*To clear the access code for a TAG 4307-TAG Index-#*To default the access code of all TAGs 4308-#*To clear the access code of all TAGs 4309-#*To default a trunk access group 1801-TAG-#*

To assign TLG to a trunk for Working hour 2011-Trk-Station Group-#*To assign TLG to a trunk for Break hour 2012-Trk-Station Group-#*To assign TLG to a trunk for Non working hour 2013-Trk-Station Group-#*

To enable/disable a trunk 1601-Trunk-Code-#*To program the dial type of a trunk 1602-Trunk-Code-#*To program the trunk type 1603-Trunk-Type-#*To program trunk first digit wait timer 1604-Seconds-#*To program trunk digit to digit wait timer 1605-Seconds-#*To program speech connection delay timer for a trunk 1606-Trunk-Speech Connection Delay Timer-#*To program pause timer for a trunk 1607-Trunk-Pause Timer-#*To set the pulse dial ratio for the trunks of the system 1608-Code-#*To program maturity delay timer 1609-Trunk-Timer-#*To default all the parameters of a trunk 1621-Trunk-#*To copy all the parameters of a trunk to another trunk 1622-Source Trunk-Destination Trunk-#*


Matrix

Trunk Reservation

User Absent/Present

User Password

Voice Mail System (VMS) Gateway

Voice Message Applications

=X=X=

To program trunk reservation timer 3004-Minutes-#*

To make DKP absent/present 5704-DKP-Mode-#*To make SLT absent/present 5705-SLT-Mode-#*

To assign a user password to the SLT user 5701-SLT-Password-#*To assign a user password to the DKP user 5702-DKP-Password-#*

To program a VMS group 3801-VMS Group-#*

To activate Adv. VM programming 3510-Flag-#*To record System VM for a part 01-08 3511-Part-#*To play back recorded Sys. VM for a part 01-08 3512-Part-#*To assign sys. Appli. to a sys.VM partition 3513-Application-Part-#*To assign VM part time duration 3514-VM Part time Duration-#*To set default value for Sys. VM Appli. programming 3515-#*To record User VM messages for a part 09-16 3501-Part-#*To play back recorded User VM for a part 09-16 3502-Part-#*To assign Sys. Appli. to a User VM partition 3503-Application-Part-#*To assign User VM part time duration 3504-VM Part time Duration-#*To set default value for User VM Appli. programming 3505-#*To select Source for VM Recording 3520-Source-#*To program to stop VM recording 3521-<Enter>


Matrix

Appendix F: Regulatory Information


Matrix

=X=X=


Matrix


Glossary

=X=X=

AIP : Analog Input Port.AOP : Analog Output Port.CO : Central Office.DID : Direct Inward Dialing. Caller can access any station directly from outside without the help of

the Operator.DISA : Direct Inward System Access. A facility to allow a remote login.DKP : Digital Key Phone. A proprietary telephone instrument provided by Matrix.DTMF : Dual Tone Multi Frequency. When a code (digit) is dialed, two different specific frequencies

are transmitted.FLASH : A code required to use various system features.LCD : Liquid Crystal Display.LED : Light Emitting Diode.MDF : Main Distribution Frame.OFF-HOOK : A condition in which the handset of the telephone instrument is lifted from the cradle. ON-HOOK : A condition in which the handset of the telephone instrument rests on the cradle. (Idle

condition of the phone).PULSE DIALING : A type of signaling in which codes (digits) are dialed in pulses.PULSE : A waveform generated by making and breaking of loop current. RTC : Real Time Clock. Date and Time keeping circuit.SA MODE : System Administration Mode. General housekeeping functions are allowed from SA mode.SA : System Administrator.SE MODE : System Engineer Mode. Entire programming can be done from this mode.SE : System Engineer.SLT : Single Line Telephone. It is a normally used telephone instrument. SMDR : Station Message Detail Recording. Cost calculation of the calls made by a station.SP : Service Provider.STATION : A port of the system where either a SLT or a DKP is connected.TONE DIALING : A type of signalling in which codes (digits) are dialed in DTMF mode.TONES : Different frequencies used for signaling.TRUNK : An external trunk line coming from Service Provider. For some parameters, it is also referred

Two Wire Trunk (TWT) port.PBX : Private Branch Exchange.

Matrix

IndexAAC Impedance-See “SLT Parameters” on page 274. Advanced VM Programming-See “Voice Message Applications” on page 328. Alternate Group Number-See “Alternate Number Dialing” on page 56. Answer Key-See “Priority” on page 245. Application Type-See “Distinctive Rings” on page 179. Asian Users-See “Allowed List and Denied List” on page 52. Australasian Users-See “Allowed List and Denied List” on page 52.

BBeeps-See “Conference-3 Party” on page 120., See “Interrupt Request” on page 203., See “Raid” on page 260. Blocked Phase-See “Access Codes” on page 42. Break Hours-See “Toll Control” on page 305.

CCall Appearance-See “Digital Key Phone-Operation” on page 144. Call Privacy-See “Privacy” on page 247. Change SA Password-See “System Administrator (SA) Mode” on page 296. Change SE Password-See “System Engineer (SE) Mode” on page 297. Change User Password-See “User Password” on page 326. CLIP-Hold Type-See “Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)” on page 106. Compressing Destination Number-See “Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection” on page 218. Continuous Ring Timer-See “Station Group” on page 279. CPS-String-See “Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection” on page 218. Customer Name-See “System Parameters” on page 298.

DDate Format-See “Real Time Clock” on page 261. Destination Index-See “Station Group” on page 279. Delay Dial Timer-See “Security Dialer” on page 268. Delay Time-See “Daylight Saving Time” on page 132. Department Group-See “Department Call” on page 136. Destination Trunk Access Group-See “External Call Forward (ECF)” on page 187. Dial Phase-See “Access Codes” on page 42. Dial Type-See “ISDN-BRI” on page 208. Dialing Report-See “Station Message Detail Recording-Incoming” on page 285.Digit Padding Count-See “Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)” on page 106. Digital Key Phone Name-See “Dial by Name Using Abbreviated Dialing” on page 141. Disconnect Tone’s ON Time-See “Call Disconnect Tone (CDT)” on page 78. Disconnection Flag-See “Call Duration Control” on page 83. Do Not Disturb List-See “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 181.

EEmergency Call-See “Security Dialer” on page 268. Emergency Number-See “Emergency Dialing” on page 186. Event Sense Timer-See “Digital Input Port (DIP)” on page 142.

FFax Ring Timer-See “Fax Homing” on page 189. Forced Maturity Timer-See “Answer Supervision on Trunk Port” on page 59. Function Number-See “Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming” on page 156. Function Type-See “Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming” on page 156.

GGlobal Abbreviated Dialing-See “Abbreviated Dialing” on page 39.

HHot Outward Dialing-See “Hotline” on page 201.


Matrix

IInactivity Timer-See “Call Transfer” on page 103. Instigation-See “Automated Control Applications” on page 68.

J

KKey Click Volume-See “Digital Key Phone-Operation” on page 144. Key Location-See “Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming” on page 156. Key Map-See “Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming” on page 156.

LLCS Timer-See “Live Call Screening” on page 229. Least Cost Routing Type-See “Least Cost Routing-Destination and Time Based” on page 220. Location Code-See “Abbreviated Dialing” on page 39., See “Allowed List and Denied List” on page 52. Locked Condition-See “Toll Control” on page 305.

MManual Lock-See “Dynamic Lock” on page 184. Master Timezone-See “System Parameters” on page 298.Mixed Least Cost Routing-See “Least Cost Routing-Destination and Time Based” on page 220. MSN/DDI Number-See “ISDN-BRI” on page 208. Music Source-See “Music on Hold” on page 234.

NNetwork Termination-See “ISDN-An Introduction” on page 204. Non-Working Hours-See “Toll Control” on page 305. Number of Trials-See “Auto Redial” on page 63., See “Security Dialer” on page 268. Numbering Plan Identification-See “ISDN-BRI” on page 208.

OOffline Printing-See “Station Message Detail Recording-Incoming” on page 285. Open Loop Disconnect-See “Disconnect Signaling on SLT Port” on page 175. Overlap Receiving Timer-See “ISDN-BRI” on page 208.

PPaging Zone-See “Paging” on page 240. Pause Timer-See “Trunk Parameters” on page 320. PBX Expansion Count-See “Behind the PBX Applications” on page 75. Personal Abbreviated Dialing-See “Abbreviated Dialing” on page 39. Play Back System Manages-See “Voice Message Applications” on page 328. Power Fail-See “Power Down Mode” on page 243. Pulse Dial Ratio-See “Trunk Parameters” on page 320.

Q

RRecord Voice Message-See “Direct Inward System Access (DISA)” on page 166. Recording of System Messages-See “Voice Message Applications” on page 328. Report Generation-See “Station Message Detail Recording-Incoming” on page 285. Ring Cadence OFF Timer-See “Distinctive Rings” on page 179. Ring Type-See “Distinctive Rings” on page 179. Ringer Tune-See “Digital Key Phone-Operation” on page 144. Rotation-See “Trunk Access Groups” on page 311.

SSA Mode-See “Programming the System” on page 250. Scheduled ON Timer-See “Automated Control Applications” on page 68. SE Mode-See “Programming the System” on page 250. Service Provider Code-See “Least Cost Routing-Number Based” on page 223. Speech Connecting Delay Timer-See “Trunk Parameters” on page 320. Station Code-See “Access Codes” on page 42.


Matrix

Station Group-See “Department Call” on page 136. Station Name-See “Dial by Name Using Abbreviated Dialing” on page 141. Storage Flag-See “Station Message Detail Recording-Incoming” on page 285.

TTime Zone-See “Least Cost Routing-Time Based” on page 226., See “Time Tables” on page 300. Trunk Maturity Timer-See “Trunk Parameters” on page 320. Trunk Reservation Timer-See “Trunk Reservation” on page 324. Trunk Type-See “Trunk Parameters” on page 320. Type of Number-See “ISDN-BRI” on page 208.

UUser VM Part Time Duration-See “Voice Message Applications” on page 328.

VVM Part Time Duration-See “Voice Message Applications” on page 328. VMS Group-See “Call Forward” on page 88., See “Voice Mail System (VMS) Gateway” on page 327.

WWeekly Reports-See “Station Message Detail Recording-Incoming” on page 285. Working Hours-See “Toll Control” on page 305. Wizard-See “Programming using Phone Wizard” on page 254.

X

Y

Z

=X=X=


Documents

Matrix Cosine System Manual En